Audi 2022 e-tron Car Owner's Manual

Owner's Manual for Audi models including: 2022, 2022 e-tron Car, e-tron Car, Car

2022 Audi e-tron User Manual - Auto User Guide

File Info : application/pdf, 318 Pages, 94.16MB

2022 Audi e-tron User Manual

Owner's Manual 2022 e-tron

Audi Vorsprung durch Technik

OwnersManuals2.com

Foreword
Thank you for choosing an Audi - we value your trust in us. Your new Audi will allow you to experience the best in groundbreaking technology and premium quality equipment that a vehicle has to offer. Audi recommends that you read your Owner's Manual thoroughly so that you quickly become acquainted with your Audi and make use of all of its features. In addition to explaining how the different features work, there are many useful tips and information concerning your safety, how to care for your vehicle, and how to maintain your vehicle's value. Audi also gives you useful tips and information on how to drive your vehicle more efficiently and in an environmentally-friendly manner. Audi hopes you enjoy driving your vehicle and wishes you safe and pleasant motoring.
ZA\ warNiNG
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or
off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals includ-
ing phthalates and lead, which are known to the State of Cali-
fornia to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

Table of contents

About this Owner's Manual......

SUMIMAPY: < = sexe : eens : Seen cs sens
QuickaCcesstinis: «i esi ss ois a eaves @ Cockpit. ...... 0... eee eee eee eee Indicator lights overview...........-5.

Display and operation........... Instrument cluster...............
Instrument cluster overview........... Operating... crc w + were oo wens oo aes © «
Adjusting the display.................
POWErIMGtEI xx « + wees = 5 gees ey ewe x ee
OdOMeCtEr cc oo sisiecs a werner » ome a wires « Outside temperature display........... Vehicle functions .............0.-00ee

Touch displays..................0.

General touch display operation........

Multi Media Interface.................

Head-up display..................

DeSGriPptlOlls ¢ sans a ¢ wee 2 ¢ sows « § cous

Voice recognition system........

General information..............4..

DESCRIPTION. 6 & wisevu a stenius oH aresiue 6 ¥ renin

External voice operation..............

Global Functions'. vie 6s case 6 6 cerns

Additional function buttons...........

Starting and driving.............

Personalization..................

Luggage compartment lid............. 40

Child safety lock.............0000000. 44

POWEF WINdOWS:m: « x ws ¥ 2 aueem 9 2 ea

Panoramic glassin00fiecis so svsvine wo snswes « « 46

Garage door opener..........-..00005 46

Lights and Vision.................

EXEOROMLUGHELAG, soosece « « enecet oo snsieis © 0 mere 50

Interior lighting..................0..

NOD O

ViSIOM ei & & soccone wo coasaie 3 w aeeeane © w amen ow

Windshield wipers...............0005

Digital COMPdSS's ss wae se wees sz ees se 59

Sitting correctly and safely......

Correct passenger seating position...... 61

Frontis@ats:. = cvs 2 o wes 2 9 wom vs eon © 61

Steering wheel............0---00000s 64

Head restraints..................04.

Safety belt's « ssa: s swans 5 ¢ wees 5 2 een

Memory function..............e.e0e 69

Airbag system.............222220005

Child safety seats ........e.e.e 00aee 74

Storage and convenience........

POWErSOUPCES sua s = some 9 s se ox HERE

Cup Rolders': « sis + emeae oe ence « eee

Storage and compartments............ 81

Luggage compartment...............

Roofirackss + ¢ sseis semi ov ena oo ween a 85

WaFRTANG' COUR: ; « ea5c eens s ssscows 86

Climate control system...............

Steering wheel heating.............-.

Auxiliary climate control.............-

Fluids in the A/C system..............

Driving ....0. . c. ece.. eee.e. ee

Starting the vehicle................-.

Whent:driving jac: 2 + srcwie so asin «0 caren vos

Drive system. ..........0..00 000.000. 97

Brakesis « « wewes a = seus 3 2 caus 7B ee 2 ee 100

Electromechanical parking brake....... 101

Special driving situations.............. 103

Driving dynamic.................. 106 Audi drive select. ..............000005 106 SUSPENSION ss « = ccas 3 < HemS Ge RERR x BEES 107
SCOPING © sicse 2 cose «2 oresess a ce © © Loe 108
All wheel drive (quattro) .............. 109 Electronic Stabilization Control......... 109

OwnersManuals2.com

High-voltage system............. 112
Generalinformation................. 112 Charging the high-voltage battery...... 113 Charging equipment................. 122

TPAIMLEr COWING esas sc ess se ews ce oe 131 Driving with atrailer................. 131 Trailer hitch... 2.2.0.2.0ee. e e.ee.eee 133

ASSISt SYSTEMS se & & cows 5 2 car 5 oe 135
Assist systems................... 135 Generalinformation................. 135 Surrounding area detection............ 136 Switching assist systems on and off..... 139

Driving information.............. 140 Speed warning system................ 140
Camera-based traffic sign recognition... 140 Traffic light information.............. 142
Lap timers « & esuass « 6 mesns «6 seucers & & meee 143 Night vision assist................04. 144
Integrated Toll Module............... 146

Driver assistance................. 148
Cruise control system................ 148 Efficiency assist .«<s + saws ss eeu de ees 149 Adaptive cruise assist............000. 151
Distance warning................005. 161 Lane departure warning.............. 162 AUI POSEN « scsiie sv ces av emnene oo one 164 Side assist... 2.0.0.ee0 e .ee.e .eee 168 Exit Warning snes ¢ = cwws 5 o awe xo awe ¢ 169 Intersection assistant................ 170 Emergency assist.................0-5 171

Parking and maneuvering....... 173 Introduction.....................00. 173 Parkitig:aid plUS = waza < 2 esos ¢ ¥ Sana 4 x 173 Rearview camera and peripheral cameras. 175 Rear cross-traffic assist............... 180

Infotainment system............ 182

TELEPHONE 2. «5 vsccie oo cesses © os wietern © ane 182

Introduction......................-. 182

SOtUD ssees + = eases + © ceeis @ © pews y © ee

182

Using the Audi phone box............. 184

Using the telephone.................. 186

SOttinGS:iws = «acy se em x e eee x Hee

190

Table of contents

Messages sssons sa savcwce wo axeusee vo someone vw oe 7194 Troubleshooting.............0e0eeeee 192

AUG CONNECE « 6:6ev5e. e 6 ees6ee ors 193

General information................. 193

Audi connect Infotainment............ 194

Using a Wi-Fi hotspot................ 194

Audi connect Infotainment services..... 194

Functions on demand................ 195

Audi connect vehicle control services.... 196

SOUS cccssin « ws aseuw & prresenwim m sores «on sexo

196

Troubleshooting..................05. 197

Emergency call... . cc. 6ses cee 198 Overview... 6.2. eee2e2 ee.eee 198 Emergeney:Call « cages ¢ = saes + 2 aes eee 198 Online roadside assistance............ 199

Navigation.....................005 201

Opening navigation.................. 201

myAudi navigation................... 201

Entering adestination................ 202

Stopping route guidance.............. 205

1) on

206

Predictive route guidance............. 207

Alternative routes................00. 208

Additional functions................. 208

Satellite map.....ce.ce.e.ee..eee 209

Electric: range sass 5 ¢ mean 5 ¢ aes 5 ¢ ews 210

Mapreipdates » cmos + x sere: « 2 ans aw omnes 210

Traffic incidents..............000000- 211

SOtuinNGS wows ¢ « ween s nae 2 Pee & s doe

212

Radio....... cece ee 214 General information................. 214 Radio functions ise < vinain e+ wean o 6 eecen 215
Online radio... .... eee eee eee eee 218 Options and settings................. 219 Troubleshooting « wsicc ss vieen enssov 220

Media...........0 .e.ee.e.e.e.e 221 General information................. 221 Bluetooth audio player............... 221
Online media................0..000- 222
Amazon Alexa...........ee-e :eeseeee 222 Multimedia connections.............. 222 Playing media...........0-.0.0.e0ee 224 Options and settings................- 227

4KE012721BH

OwnersManuals2.com

Table of contents

Supported media and file formats ...... 228 Troubleshooting........e.ee..ee.eeee 229

Audi smartphone interface...... 230 Setup ..... 0.0... cee eee eee eee 230 Troubleshooting ; vss ¢ sees se eens 2 5 os 231

Additional settings.............. 233 System settingS............ee.e.eee 233 Software update. « cics ss eea ye teen vo 234
Connected devices...........c.e.e 235 Legalinformation................... 236

Maintenance and Care........... 238
Checking and Filling............. 238
Fronticompartinient's sew: « 2 sees ¢ a ewes s 238 COOliMgssySteIM « ssmsivs aw swseee eo sxnvews ao ane 240 Brake fluid... 2.6.c0 ece.e. ee e. e eee 242 Electrical SVSteliccs « s acum 2 : same o 2 wae 242 Battenyis ¢ a sien 3 6 wen 2 6 were 2 ¥ women 2 ere 243 Windshield washer system...........- 245 Service interval display............... 246

WERE ia cass co crcsies oo sevens eo serie wo seers 247

Wheels and Tires. .

247

Tire pressure monitoring system....... 265

Tire pressure monitoring system....... 266

Care and cleaning................ 270 General information................. 270
Car washes ...0. 05.....e eee 270 Cleaning and care information......... 271 Taking your vehicle out of service....... 275

Do It Yourself « «css shies as sawn as ee 276

Emergency assistance........... 276

General information 0.0... cccu eee

276

Equipment....................00008 276

Tire mobility kit sais ss news ce pews oo oe 276

Replacing wheels ...............-.00. 278

Collapsible spare tire................. 282

JUMP Starting « sess = = ees = x cows 5 o eee 283

TOWING) cnasers © 0 consene % 5 axsease 1 5 swaens % & snexass 283

Pusesiand BULBS « wows si cers st cae s 286

FUSES kasi. x a cscs ve eres aw ena Wa ENE ¥ ar 286

Bulbs... 2.

eee eee ee 289

Customer information........... 290 Data privacy..............ee.e.ee 290
PrivVaGy NOtICe « nes 3 x eee 2 Ree o RES ¥ 290 Image:recording « sins + « sees xo evens vv oe 290 Data memories............0.e-e0e0ee 290 Transmitted information.............. 291

Accessories and technical

changes..........0...0..c.e.e.e 294

Warranty': « + ces meen & ¢ eee se sees

294

Audi Literature Shop...............0. 294

Driving in other countries............. 294

Maintenance, repairs, and technical

modifications...............02-.000- 294

Accessories and parts..............-. 296

Reporting Safety Defects.............. 296

Technical data.................... 298 Identification data................... 298 Velhicledataa wesc +s sve ae ems ev oars ee 298

Other information............... 300 Onilinie Gar Garetice =o asa © meee © wrens © s 300
Brands and licenses.........-..e0e0e 300 Declaration of compliance for telecommunications equipment and
electronic systems.............-.0005 300

OwnersManuals2.com

In this manual, Audi provides important information, tips, suggestions, and warnings for using
your vehicle. "Audi" refers to AUDI AG, the re-
spective importer in a country, as well as joint
ventures.
It has always been Audi's policy to continuously improve its products. Audi reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and to make additions or improvements in its products without incurring any obligation to install them on products previously manufactured. This owner's manual is based on the current data available when it was printed. Text, illustrations, and specifications in this owner's manual are based on the most current information available at the time of printing, and shall not constitute a basis for liability claims.
KEEP THIS GUIDE
Keep this manual and any other applicable documents in your vehicle at all times. This is especially important if you loan your vehicle to others or sell it.
This owner's manual describes the equipment range for all model versions of this vehicle at the time of printing. Individual equipment options described may only be available at a later date or may only be offered in certain countries.
Some sections in this manual do not apply to all vehicles. When this is the case, the beginning of the section indicates the validity, for example "Applies to: vehicles with speed warning system". Optional or vehicle-specific equipment is also identified with an asterisk ugn "*".
The illustrations in this manual are a guide. Some of the details in your vehicle may differ from the illustration.
All directions, such as "Left", "right", "front" and
"rear", are based on the vehicle's direction of travel.
* -- Optional equipment or vehicle-specific equip-
ment
b> The section continues on the next page.

About this Owner's Manual
=> A\ Cross reference to a "WARNING" within a section. Ifa page number is indicated, the WARNING is located outside of the section.
Z\ WARNING
Text with this symbol contains information about safety and how to reduce the risk of serious personal injury or death.
C) Note
Text with this symbol contains information about reducing the risk of damage to your vehicle.
(@) For the sake of the environment
Text with this symbol contains information on protecting the environment.
@ Tips Text with this symbol contains additional useful information.

4KE012721BH

OwnersManuals2.com

Quick access
Quick access
Cockpit

Fig. 1 Cockpit
@ Door handle @ Central locking switch @ Vent @ Lever for:
--Turn signals and high beams .... -- High beam assistant .......... -- Lane departure warning ........ --Lane guidance ............... Multifunction steering wheel with: -- Horn be -- Driver's airbag .............04 -- Operating buttons ............ -- Shift paddles ................ Instrumenticluster w.2.6 sci5a ee Head-up display ............... Windshield washer system lever .. Upper display: « = cer x sew x 2 sense Lower display ................. Lockable glove compartment

@ Front passenger's airbag ........

35 @® Knee airbag

@ Depending on equipment, buttons

for:

drive SelOCE wai ss wes 2 6 mean oo

106

-- Electronic Stabilization Control

162

(ESC) 2.20.ce0ce2e. ee..eee

110

155

--Emergency flashers ...........

-- D@FOStING ac ss ceea sc teencsee

-- Rear window defogger .........
@ MMI On/Off button .............

86 18, 29

@® Depending on equipment, buttons for:

-- Parking systems ..............

173

-- Driver assistance systems ......

139

@ Depending on equipment:

-- Starting the vehicle when there is

a malfUNctiony ws s 2 aawa 3 2 amas a

SICUP HOLME sesavs «= mscew 2 weeds oo -- Audi music interface ..........

80 223>

OwnersManuals2.com

oa OOO©COX®O

Audi phone box ws. 2 ecw ve eee

184

SOCKGE ou sy wows 2 = n@we 4 ¥ Heme ae

Electromechanical parking brake

DUEtON seme a 2 caves x 2 eqeem a x eee F

101

@0 Selector lever ...............2.

@) [START STOP] button ............

@ Steering wheel adjustment ......

@3) Lever for:

-- Cruise control system .........

148

-- Adaptive cruise assist ..........

151

@4 Connection port for the On Board

Diagnostic System (OBD) ........

290

@5) Release for the hood ............

239

@8 Memory function buttons ........

@) Buttons for:

= LIQHES 6s o exes ¢ « pwwn ee pews es

--All-weather lights ............

Luggage compartment lid button .

@9 Exterior mirror adjustment ......

69 Buttons for:

-- Power windows ............0.

--Child safety lock ..............

@ Tips
Some the equipment listed here is only installed in certain models or is available as an option.

Indicator lights overview

The indicator lights in the instrument cluster blink or turn on. They indicate functions or malfunctions. Some warning and indicator lights turn on when you switch the ignition on and must turn off when the drive system is switched on or while driving.
With some indicator lights, messages may appear and warning signals may sound. The indicator lights and messages may be covered by other displays. To show them again, select the second tab for messages with the multifunction steering wheel > page 72.
Some indicator lights in the display can display in several colors.

Quick access
Ue elie eh
If the /i\| or A\| indicator light turns on, check the message in the instrument cluster.
leTaT Ti
The following indicator lights may be available, depending on the vehicle equipment:
Red indicator lights Central indicator light => page 7, Instrument cluster => page 12 Safety belt => page 68
Engine start system
=> page 94
Transmission => page 97
Drive system
=> page 99, Electrical system = page 242 Brake system = page 107, => page 242, Electromechanical parking brake => page 103 Brake system = page 107, => page 242, Electromechanical parking brake = page 103 Electromechanical parking brake => page 102
Electromechanical parking brake => page 102
Air suspension => page 107
Steering => page 108
Steering => page 108

4KE012721BH

OwnersManuals2.com

Quick access
Charging system
> page 1217
Night vision assist >page 145
Night vision assist
= page 145
Adaptive cruise assist => page 153, Safe start monitor => page 159, Driver intervention request => page 160
Adaptive cruise assist
=> page 153,
=>page 155
Steering intervention request
(Adaptive cruise assist)
=>page 155
Distance warning => page 167
Lane departure warning => page 162
Pre sense => page 165, => page 165, Intersection assist =>page 171
Online system update > page 235
Hood => page 239
Cooling system => page 240, => page 240, > page 241, => page 283
Electrical system
=> page 242
Looasee wheel warning
=> page 262, => page 262

Yellow indicator lights
Central indicator light
=> page 7
Central locking = page 35
Battery in remote control key
=> page 39
Bulb failure indicator => page 53
Adaptive light => page 53
Headlight range control system => page 53
---- ane > page 53, => page 59
Windshield wipers => page 59
Safety systems => page 70
Engine start system => page 94
Convenience key => page 94
Transmission => page 97
Drive system => page 99 Cooling system = page 240
Drive system => page 99
Vehicle sound => page 99
Electromechanical parking brake
=> page 103
Suspension control
=> page 107
Air suspension => page 107
Steering => page 108

OwnersManuals2.com

Steering => page 108
All wheel drive
=> page 109
Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC) => page 110, =>page 117
Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC) >page 111
Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC) =>page 117
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
=>page 111
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
=>page 111
High-voltage battery range => page 121
Steering intervention request (Adaptive cruise assist) => page 155, Steering intervention request (Lane departure warning) => page 163
Adaptive cruise assist =>page 160
Distance warning => page 162
Lane departure warning => page 164
Pre sense => page 164, => page 167
Side assist, exit warning => page 169
Intersection assist =>page 171
Emergency assist => page 172
Parking systems >page 175

Quick access
Rear cross-traffic assist => page 180
Emergency call function =>page 199
Electrical system => page 242
Washer fluid level => page 246
Loose wheel warning => page 262
Tire pressure
=> page 265, => page 266, => page 268, => page 268,
=> page 269
Tire pressure
=> page 266, => page 269
Other indicator lights Low beam headlights => page 50
Parking lights => page 50, low beam headlights => page 50 Turn signals => page 51, => page 52 Turn signals => page 57, => page 52
Rear safety belt
=> page 68
Hold assist => page 102
Hill hold assist => page 105
Trailer turn signals => page 131
Cruise control system => page 148

4KE012721BH

OwnersManuals2.com

Quick access
Cruise control system => page 148
Efficiency assist => page 150 Efficiency assist => page 150
Efficiency assist =>page 150 Efficiency assist => page 150
Efficiency assist => page 150 Efficiency assist =>page 150
Efficiency assist => page 150, Adaptive cruise assist => page 153 Adaptive cruise assist => page 153
Adaptive cruise assist => page 153,
Ready to drive (Adaptive cruise assist) => page 159 Traffic jam assist => page 153, =>page 155 Adaptive cruise assist => page 153
Adaptive cruise assist => page 153, =>page 155 Lane departure warning => page 162
High beam headlights > page 51, =>page 57 High beam assistant =>page 57
Door lock => page 35
10

Child safety lock => page 44 Child safety lock > page 44 High beam assistant => page 51, => page 53 Rear safety belt => page 68 Convenience key => page 94 Brake system => page 107 Electromechanical parking brake => page 103 Electromechanical parking brake => page 103 Electromechanical parking brake => page 103 Hill hold assist =>page 105 Air suspension => page 107 High-voltage battery range => page 121 Speed warning system => page 140 Speed warning system
=> page 140
Camera-based traffic sign recognition => page 141 Night vision assist => page 146 Cruise control system => page 149 Cruise control system =>page 149 Efficiency assist => page 150
OwnersManuals2.com

Efficiency assist => page 150,
=> page 156, Adaptive cruise assist => page 160

Adaptive cruise assist => page 153, >page 155

Adaptive cruise assist =>page 157

Distance warning => page 162

Lane departure warning => page 162

Lane departure warning => page 164

Side assist, exit warning => page 169

Intersection assist =>page 171

Emergency assist => page 172

Parking systems =>page 175

Qa7]

Rear cross-traffic assist => page 180

Quick access

4KE012721BH

11
OwnersManuals2.com

Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster Instrument cluster overview

Ge © C@O6®

2/17/2019

Fig. 2 Instrument cluster overview (Audi virtual cockpit)

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following items may appear in the instrument cluster:

@ Left dial

-- Power meter ...........00000.

--High-voltage battery charge level

Tabarea .... 2. cece eee eee eee

Centrablarea «ies so ies ov anon oo

Status line (one or two lines)

Right dial

-- Convenience display

Right additional display with speed-

ometer

Left additional display with:

-- Selector lever position .........

-- Audi drive select mode .........

106

ZA\ WARNING

If there is a serious system malfunction, the display may turn off. The A indicator light may also turn on. Stop the vehicle safely. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Service Facility for assistance.

G) Tips
-- You can select the units used for tempera-
ture, speed, and other measurements in the
Infotainment system > page 233.

-- Speeds are displayed in mph (miles per hour) or km/h (kilometers per hour).
-- Certain instrument cluster content can also be displayed in the head-up display*
> page 25.
. Operating
Fig. 3 Instrument cluster: driver information system
Fig. 4 Left side of multifunction steering wheel

OwnersManuals2.com

Information is organized within various tabs (1) in the instrument cluster. The tab contents are displayed in the central area (2).
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.

Selecting a tab
> Press the </ > button @) repeatedly until the
desired tab is selected.

Returning to functions at higher levels
> Press the 5 button ©).

Opening and closing the menu
> Press the LE] button ©. Selecting and confirming a function
Requirement: a menu or list must be displayed.

> To select a function, turn the left thumbwheel
@ to the desired function.
> To confirm a selection, press the left thumb-
wheel (7).

Switching the view
> Press the VIEW button (4).

The following tabs may be available, depending on vehicle equipment:

First tab

Vehicle functions > page 14

Second tab | Driver messages (this is only dis-
played if at least one indicator light/message is being displayed)

Third tab

Night vision assist (this is only dis-
played if the night vision assist has been activated) > page 144

Fourth tab | Radio > page 214

Media > page 224

Fifth tab

Telephone > page 186

Sixth tab

Navigation > page 207

Instrument cluster
Adjusting the display
Si|3SNz|||y
Fig. 5 Upper display: adjusting the display
Switching the view
> Press the VIEW button to switch between the
default view @) and the enhanced view (). Adjusting the layout
Depending on the vehicle equipment, various layouts may be available. > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
SETTINGS > Display & brightness > Audi virtual cockpit. > To adjust the desired layout, press @). Adjusting the additional display Depending on the vehicle equipment, the additional displays that can be selected may vary. > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: SETTINGS > Display & brightness > Audi virtual cockpit > Configure. > Select the desired additional display. Reducing the display Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can hide the central area in the instrument cluster. > Select on the instrument cluster: vehicle functions tab > [=| button > Reduced display.

4KE012721BH

13
OwnersManuals2.com

Instrument cluster
Power meter
Fig. 6 Instrument cluster: power meter
The power meter (1) > page 72 gives feedback about the usage capacity of the drive system. The power meter needle displays the current usage capacity. A colored border indicates how much the drive system can currently be utilized. The colored border may vary depending on the selected driving program and the electric power currently available. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the power meter displays the following driving statuses:
Drive system switched off Vehicle recovering electrical energy Drive system switched on Vehicle is being driven, drive system usage information in percentage © Vehicle is being driven briefly with maximum power
Odometer
The trip odometer and odometer are displayed in
the status bar @) > page 12.
The trip odometer shows the distance driven since it was last reset. It can be used to measure short distances. The odometer shows the total distance that the vehicle has been driven.
Resetting the trip odometer
> Select on the instrument cluster: vehicle functions tab > [=] button > Reset mi.

@ RAZ-0574:

@) Tips Distances are displayed in mi (miles) or km (kilometers).
Outside temperature display
The outside temperature is displayed in the sta-
tus bar @) > page 72.
At temperatures below 41 °F (+5 °C), a snowflake symbol appears in front of the temperature dis-
play > A\.
ZA\ WARNING
Do not assume the roads are free of ice based on the outside temperature display. Be aware that there may be ice on roads even when the outside temperature is around 41 °F (+5 °C) and that ice can increase the risk of accidents.
Vehicle functions
Overview
The trip computer is displayed in the first tab of the driver information system. Additional vehicle functions can be accessed depending on the vehicle equipment.
> Press the =] button on the multifunction steering wheel.
-- Trip computer > page 14 -- Charging > page 716. -- Reduced display > page 713 -- Reset trip odometer > page 14 -- Lap times > page 143 -- Lap statistics > page 144
On-board computer
Changing the display
> Turn the left thumbwheel on the multifunction steering wheel (7) > page 12, fig. 4 until the desired display is shown.

®@O0O

OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

Resetting values to zero
Requirement: the Consumption, Short-term memory, or Long-term memory display must be selected.
> To reset the values in one of the memories to zero, press and hold the left thumbwheel on the multifunction steering wheel for one second, or
> Select on the instrument cluster: vehicle functions tab > FE] button > Reset mi.
Displays in the trip computer
The following displays may be shown, depending on the vehicle equipment: -- Time and date > page 233 -- Range display > page 98 -- Average consumption > page 15 -- Short-term memory overview -- Long-term memory overview -- Driver assistance > page 152 -- Traffic sign recognition and traffic light infor-
mation
Short-term memory and long-term memory
The short-term memory collects driving information from the time the ignition is switched on until it is switched off. If you continue driving within two hours after switching the ignition off, the new values will be included when calculating the current trip information.
Unlike the short-term memory, the long-term memory is not erased automatically. You can select the time period for evaluating trip information yourself.
Average consumption
The current consumption can be shown using a bar graph. The average consumption stored in the short-term memory is also displayed. If the bar is green, your vehicle is saving energy (for example, using recuperation).
@ Tips
The date, time of day, and time and date for-
mat can be set in the Infotainment system => page 233.

Instrument cluster
15
OwnersManuals2.com

Touch displays
General touch display operation
Applies to: touch displays
The touch display is controlled through the touchscreen. Operation is very similar to operating a smartphone. All touch displays in the vehicle can be operated with the gestures described in the following information. @ Tips
Certain gestures may not be available on all touch displays or in every menu.
Applies to: touch displays

Accessing options For some items, you can access additional options that are not directly visible. > Press and hold an item until the associated op-
tions are displayed.
Applies to: touch displays
Fig. 9 Touch display: pressing and pulling
Moving an item You can position some items at any location on the screen.
> Press and hold an item, and then use your fin-
ger to pull it to the desired location.

Fig. 7 Touch display: pressing
Selecting a function or button > Press the desired function or button.

tod

ine

oli

Applies to: touch displays

Fig. 8 Touch display: pressing and holding

Applies to: touch displays
Fig. 10 Touch display: pinching fingers together and pulling them apart
Zooming in and out on an item > To increase the size of an item, touch it with
two fingers and pull your fingers apart.
> To decrease the size of an item, touch it with
two fingers and pull your fingers together.

OwnersManuals2.com

Rotating
Applies to: touch displays

Touch displays
Dragging away from/toward the edge of the screen
Applies to: touch displays

Fig. 11 Touch display: rotating
Rotating the view or perspective > Rotate the item using two fingers.
gging
Applies to: touch displays
Fig. 12 Touch display: @ dragging with one finger, @ dragging with two fingers
Scrolling or browsing through menus/lists > To scroll through menus and lists, swipe up-
ward or downward with one finger. > To browse through menus and lists, swipe to
the right or left with one finger.
Tilting 3D displays
> Drag upward or downward with two fingers.

Fig. 13 Touch display: dragging away from the edge of the screen
Opening hidden menus
The E=] symbol indicates that there is a hidden
menu.
> Use your finger to drag inward from the upper or lower edge of the screen, or
> Press the =] button.
Closing hidden menus
> Press within the menu and drag it toward the upper or lower edge of the screen.
Tb celeue Lele l Lelia meaty
This guide shows you at a glance the paths for opening a desired menu and its settings and functions.
Example of a path
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: SETTINGS > General > Date & time.
Following the path
> First, determine in which display the path should be entered. In this example, it is the MMI display.
>» Applies to MMI: To open the home screen, press
a. > If the SETTINGS button is not displayed, use
your finger to swipe to the left or right until it appears. > Press the SETTINGS button.

17
OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

Touch displays
> If the General button is not displayed, swipe toward the left or right with one finger until it appears.
> Press the General button. > If the Date & time button is not displayed,
swipe upward or downward with one finger untilit appears. > Press the Date & time button.
@ Tips Ifa menu or symbol is in parentheses in the path, for example, (General) or (423), then it is an optional menu item that does not need to be used in every system.
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: SETTINGS > Display & brightness > MMI.
Possible settings: -- Brightness -- Touchscreen feedback
Multi Media Interface
Aire amrl all)
Audi recommends only using certain Infotainment system functions while the vehicle is stationary, such as entering a destination or pairing a mobile device. Always be prepared to stop operating the Infotainment system in the interest of your safety and the safety of other road users.
ZA\ WARNING
-- Only use the Infotainment system when road, traffic, weather, and visibility conditions permit and always in a way that allows
you to maintain complete control over your
vehicle. -- This also applies to operating your mobile
device via the MMI. Do not allow the visual or audio signals from a mobile device to distract you from traffic, because this increases the risk of an accident.
18

@) Tips Certain functions are not available while driving.
ice Ronee Lis
Switching the MMI on or off > To switch the MMI off, press and hold the
On/Off knob > page 29, fig. 20 until the upper display and all Infotainment system functions are switched off. > To switch the MMI on, press the On/Off knob.
Restarting the MMI
> Press and hold the On/Off knob for at least 10 seconds.
Switching displays on or off
> To switch the upper display off, press lo] on the lower display.
> To switch the upper display on, touch the upper display or press oJ on the lower display.
> To switch both displays on or off, press and hold [oJ on the lower display.
Introduction
You can display and operate Infotainment system and vehicle functions using both of the Multi Media Interface (MMI) touch displays.
Configuration wizard After starting for the first time, the configuration wizard helps you to set up the vehicle, for example to set the desired system language and connect a telephone.
> Follow the instructions in the display. > Applies to: MMI: To access the configuration
wizard at a later time, select on the home
screen: HELP > Configuration wizard.
Tool tips You can have tool tips displayed if necessary. They introduce various MMI functions to you.
>» Applies to: MMI: To open the tool tips, select on the home screen: HELP > Tool tips > Basic information or Expert information.
OwnersManuals2.com

[RAX-0175}

> Follow the instructions in the display. Menus and symbols
2 Ono Cena

Touch displays

Ce)
: i
anaes}

CoN

ens

PNA)

5 ;
CW eaers

aA}

Sete
ee auc

Cee ee)
@

eer)
4

Fig. 14 MMI: upper/lower display

®| ©O || O

©-@
©

Label

Description

Overview screen

Displays selected information tiles and provides quick access to certain functions > page 20

Quick access bar

Return to the home screen or the overview page, open menus quickly > page 20

Display area

Select a menu, apply settings, display content > page 20

Favorites

Use or manage favorites > page 20

statis bar

Displays existing notifications ©) > page 27, status display @)
=> page 21, time

Function bar
Shortcuts

Activate functions or access attached content > page 22
Use shortcuts > page 22

Climate control settings Adjust the climate control system settings > page 86

Description of common symbols
You can operate the default functions using the symbols that follow. The symbols may be found in any menu, depending on the context.

Symbol re

Description Go back one level Close the menu
Search for content Open explanations for a menu

19
OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

Touch displays

Symbol
ia
LO on) (ae) O/@

Description Open settings for the selected menu Open the submenu Adjust the settings Set as favorite Switch functions on or off Switch functions on or off
Switch functions on or off Open additional actions Open additional information for the selected menu

Overview screen
The overview screen is the first menu page in the MMI. Information about certain vehicle functions such as media, time, and phone is displayed in tiles. The available information tiles can be rearranged on the overview screen or replaced with others. Depending on the system context, you may be able to operate certain functions directly, such as muting the sound.
Switching between the overview screen and the home screen
> Press () repeatedly until the desired view appears.
Configuring the overview screen
> Press and hold an information tile on the over-
view screen.
> To change the position of an information tile, press and hold it and then slide it to the desired position.
> To replace an information tile, press Z and select the desired information tile.
> Press Done to complete the configuration.

With quick access, you can return to the home screen and quickly switch between four menus
that can be configured according to your preferences.

Returning to the home screen or opening a menu quickly
>» Press (J or one of the four buttons.
Configuring quick access
> Press and hold a button on the home screen display area or in the quick access bar.
> To move a button to the quick access bar, pull it from the display area to the quick access bar.
> To adjust the placement of the buttons in the quick access bar, pull them to the desired position in the bar.
>» Press Done to complete the configuration.
G) Tips The position of © cannot be adjusted.
Display area
You can freely change the location of the buttons on the home screen display area.
Configuring the display area > Press and hold a button on the home screen
display area. > To adjust the placement of the buttons, pull
them to the desired locations. > Press Done to complete the configuration.
Switching between menu pages Ifa menu contains multiple menu pages, == is displayed in the display area. The white bar shows the location of the current menu page.
> To switch between menu pages, swipe your finger to the right or left.
Welgh at)
By creating favorites, you can have quick access
to various items, such as radio stations, frequent-
ly-used contacts, or vehicle settings. In the FAVORITES menu, the stored favorites are sorted by topic into information tiles.
Adding a favorite A YY button indicates if you can add a favorite, such as a selected radio station. Depending on the context, you may also be able to add items >
OwnersManuals2.com

without the YY button to the favorites, such as entries ina list.
> Press YY, or
> Press and hold an item ina list. > Press Store as favorite. The selected item will
be added as a favorite.
Using favorites
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: FAVORITES. The stored favorites will be displayed.
> To access a stored favorite, press that favorite.
Stored favorites can only be deleted or configured in the corresponding menu (such as RADIO).
Arranging information tiles
» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: FAVORITES.
> Press and hold the desired information tile. > Pull the information tile into the desired posi-
tion. > Press Done to confirm the configuration.

Touch displays
Description
A mobile device is connected. The bar indicates the signal strength of the cell phone connection.
There is no data connection.
An error occurred with the mobile device connection to the MMI. A user is selected. If a question mark appears in the symbol ;h, the guest user is active.
A Bluetooth device is connected.
Bluetooth is switched on, but no Bluetooth device is connected. Audio playback was interrupted. The audio source is muted.
Privacy settings are enabled. The additional symbol indicates which privacy settings are currently activated > page 292. The Integrated Toll Module is switched on. The numbers 1 - 3+ indicate how many passengers are selected in the MMI.

Of O8 OB of

O88 o8

O88 o8 of ef

Fig. 15 Upper display: common symbols in the status bar

The symbols in the status bar show you information at a glance, such as ifa mobile device is connected or if there is a data connection. The most common symbols are listed in the table.
Description
There is a data connection. The bar indi@ | cates the signal strength of the data con-
nection. Data is being transmitted now.
There is a data connection. The bar indi@ | cates the signal strength of the data con-
nection. No data is being transmitted now.

[RAZ-1078

`Active phone call Crees
ecCtheerdestianateion) rec

onan

Fig. 16 Upper display: notification center
Notifications can be displayed in the upper display. After a specified time, they will be hidden and a corresponding symbol will appear in the status bar©) > page 19, fig. 14. In the notifica-
tion center, you can view these notifications @ = fig. 16 and apply quick settings ().
Using the notification center
> To open the notification center, pull the status bar downward, or
> Press the E=] button on the status bar. > To apply quick settings, press the respective
symbol (4).
21
OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

Touch displays

> To obtain additional information about a notification, press it.
> To delete a notification, pull it toward the right edge of the screen.
> If there are more than four notifications in the notification center, the older notifications will be hidden. To display the older notifications, drag your finger upward on the screen.
Setting which content is displayed
You can set whether some notifications should be displayed.
> To set the displayed content, press ©, or > Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen:
SETTINGS > Notifications. >» Select and confirm which notifications should
be displayed.
Applying quick settings
Depending on vehicle equipment, the following quick settings may be available in area (@):

Symbol 0;

Description Apply sound settings Open menu settings Manage connected devices Manage users

ayo : :

Set date and time

Set displayed content in the noti-

fication center

Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can operate various functions in the function bar.
Description Switch hill descent assist on or off Open the garage door opener function Open the charging target

Symbol ae

Description
Press: shows settings for the head-up display
Press and hold: switches the head-up display on or off
Press: switches the upper display on or off
Press and hold: switches both displays on or off

Shortcuts
By creating shortcuts, you have quick access to
various items, such as radio stations, frequently
used contacts, or vehicle settings.
Adding shortcuts
A+++ button in the upper display indicates, for example, ifa selected radio station can be added to the shortcuts. Depending on the context, you may also be able to add items from a list to the shortcuts.
> Press +++ or press and hold an item ina list. > Press Save as a shortcut. The selected item will
be added to the shortcuts on the lower display and displayed as a tile. A favorite is also stored => page 20.
Using shortcuts
> Press the 0000 (8) S page 19, fig. 14 button in
the function bar on the lower screen. The saved shortcuts will be displayed or hidden. > To access the stored function, press the respective tile.
Moving or deleting shortcuts
> Press and hold a shortcut on the lower display. > To adjust the order of the shortcuts, drag a
shortcut to the desired location. > To delete a shortcut, press ®. If the shortcut is
deleted, the favorite will also be deleted.

OwnersManuals2.com

ayaa tay ele)

Touch displays

[RAZ-0711

[ee Gye esl

3 5S

Downtown les, CA, 90012

Downtown les, Los Feliz, CA, 90027

(Peeaesr Com es

NE Teey 2)

Fig. 17 Upper/lower display: text input
In the input fields of various menus, you can en-
ter letters, numbers and characters, for example
to find an address in navigation.
On the lower section of the screen, you can enter the text with handwriting or using the on-screen keyboard. The current text input is displayed on the upper section of the screen (1). Depending on the context, word suggestions may be given based on the characters that have been entered
@ and a results list may be shown @).
Opening text input
> Tap inside the input field @.
Switching input languages
Requirement: multiple input languages must be defined in the MMI > page 24.
> To switch between the defined input languages,
press the button @).
Switching the input methods
> To switch between handwriting input or the onscreen keyboard, press the button (7).
Entering text
» Applies to: handwriting input: To enter text, simply write in the input area using one finger ©. You can write the separate characters next to each other or one on top of the other with-

out having to move your finger over after writing a character. When you end the entry, the writing is interpreted by the system. > Applies to: the on-screen keyboard: To enter text, press the buttons on the keyboard. Depending on the usage context, you may also be able to swipe over the letters "). > Applies to: the on-screen keyboard with an input language that uses accented characters: To enter accented characters (such as 4, ¢, fi, 6), press and hold a character that has accented versions available and select the desired accented character. > Applies to: handwriting input: To enter a space, drag a line from left to right in the input section ©. > To select a location in the text input, press on the desired location in the input field. You can control the location more accurately using the
slider in the display ©).
> To delete individual characters, press <I @), or > Applies to: handwriting input: Drag a line from
right to left in the input section ©. > To delete multiple characters, press and hold
> To delete all characters at a specific location, press and hold <X]@) and drag up to the desired
location . When released, the highlighted
characters are deleted.

) Incertain countries.

23
OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

Touch displays
Accepting suggested words or selecting entries from the results list
> To accept a suggested word (2) or select an entry from the results list @), press on it.
> To display more content in the results list, drag your finger upward or downward on the screen.
Setting the input language or keyboard layout
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: SETTINGS > Language & keyboard > Keyboard.
> To define additional input languages, press the © button.
> To change the keyboard layout for an input language, press >. For example, you can select between QWERTZ and QWERTY.

OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

Head-up display
Description
Applies to: vehicles with head-up display
The head-up display projects certain warnings or selected information from the assist systems on the windshield. The display appears within the driver's field of vision.
Switching on and off
The Y button is located in the function bar on the lower display > page 19.
> To switch the head-up display on or off, press
and hold the Y button.
Settings in the Infotainment system
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: SETTINGS > Display & brightness > Head-up display, or
> Press the Y button.
Possible settings:
-- Display rotation -- Brightness -- Display height: you can adjust the height of the
display. Sit in the correct seating position = page 67 and adjust the head-up display. -- Display contents: you can set which information should be displayed. Some information and warnings cannot be hidden.
@) Note
To reduce the risk of scratches on the glass covering the head-up display, do not place any objects in the projection opening.
G) Tips
-- Sunglasses with polarization filters and unfavorable lighting conditions can impair visibility of the display.
-- An optimal display depends on the seat position and the height adjustment of the head-up display.
-- A special windshield is needed for the headup display function.
-- For information on cleaning, see > table /Interior cleaning on page 272.

Head-up display
25
OwnersManuals2.com

Voice recognition system
Voice recognition system
General information
Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system
You can operate many functions in the vehicle easily using voice commands.
Using the voice recognition system optimally
> Speak clearly and distinctly at a normal volume. Speak louder when driving faster.
> Emphasize the words in the commands evenly and do not leave long pauses.
> To reduce background noise, close all openings, such as doors and windows. Make sure that passengers are not speaking when you are giving a voice command.
> Do not direct the vents toward the hands-free microphone, which is in the roof headliner near the front interior lights.
> Only the driver should speak to the system, because the handsfree microphone is aimed toward this seating position.
ZA WARNING
-- Direct your full attention to driving. As the driver, you have complete responsibility for safety in traffic. Only use the functions in such a way that you always maintain complete control over your vehicle in all traffic situations.
-- Do not use the voice recognition system in
emergencies because your voice may change in stressful situations. The system may take longer to dial the number or may not be able to dial it at all. Dial the emergency number manually.
@) Tips
There are no voice guidance* prompts when a dialog is active.

Description
Operating the voice recognition system
Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system

eDeaea)) CDoianlnaect ecyog Ccoy esc

Sen
a

Fig. 18 Upper display: voice recognition system

Requirement: the ignition and the MMI must be switched on. A system language supported by the voice recognition system must be set. There must be no phone calls in progress and the parking aid must not be active.
Operating by button «¢
> Briefly press the « button on the multifunction
steering wheel, or depending on the context,
press ut in the display.
> Say the desired command after the signal tone. > To switch the voice recognition system off,
press and hold the « button on the multifunction steering wheel, or say or press Cancel (1)
> fig. 18.
Operating with voice commands
>» Applies to: MMI: To operate the voice recognition system using voice commands, select on the home screen: SETTINGS > General > (Speech dialog system) > Activate the speech dialog system with "Hey Audi".
> Say the activation phrase Hey Audi together with the desired command.
> To switch the voice recognition system off, say Cancel or press and hold the w button on the
multifunction steering wheel, or press () > fig. 18.
Commands and assistance
In the voice recognition system menu, possible commands or help settings are displayed for the
current dialog @).
> To receive additional help for the current dialog, say or press Help (2).

OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

> To pause voice recognition, say or press Pause
@) To reactivate voice recognition, press @)
again or briefly press the « button on the multifunction steering wheel.
Additional functions
Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system
Command during voice output
If the function is switched on, you can simply say a new command during a prompt.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: SETTINGS > General > Speech dialog system > Allow commands during voice output.
Online recognizer
Applies to: vehicles with online recognizer
You can activate the online recognizer for additional functions and to improve the results of voice recognition. A supported menu language must be selected. When there is an active Inter-
net connection, the spoken command is evaluated in the vehicle and online.
> When you switch on the voice recognition system for the first time, a menu for the online recognizer will open, or
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: SETTINGS > General > Speech dialog system > Consent to online speech recognizer.
> Read the licensing agreements and accept them.
Amazon Alexa
Applies to: vehicles with Amazon Alexa Integration
You can activate Amazon Alexa to access certain
functions. A reduced number of commands for Amazon Alexa are available during this.
Requirement: you must be logged in to your myAudi account in the vehicle. The online recognizer must be activated. A system language that is supported by both the voice recognition system and Amazon Alexa must be selected.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: USERS > Connect to Amazon Alexa.
> Follow the instructions in the display. > Applies to: MMI: To operate Amazon Alexa us-
ing voice commands, select on the home

Voice recognition system
screen: SETTINGS > General > (Speech dialog system) > Activate the speech dialog system with "Hey Audi". >» Say the activation phrase "Alexa" together with the desired command.
() Note
Read the information about Audi connect, and be sure to note the connectivity costs section =>© in General information on page 193.
(i) Tips
Audi provides access to services from third party providers. Permanent availability cannot be guaranteed, because that depends on the third party provider.
External voice operation
Applies to: vehicles with external speech dialog system
You can access and control the voice operation on a connected mobile device through your vehicle.
Switching external voice operation on or off
Requirement: the ignition and the MMI must be switched on. A cell phone must be connected to the MMI with the Handsfree profile > page 782. The mobile device being connected must have voice control that can be controlled externally. There must be no phone calls in progress and the parking aid must not be active.
> To switch on the external voice operation, press and hold the « button longer on the multifunction steering wheel.
> To switch off the external voice operation, press and hold the « button longer on the multifunction steering wheel or press Cancel.
Using external voice operation
» Say the desired command after the signal tone. > To reactivate voice recognition when it is
paused, press the w£ button briefly on the multifunction steering wheel or press Resume.
@) Tips
Audi simply provides access to control your cell phone with voice operation and does not >
27
OwnersManuals2.com

Voice recognition system
take any responsibility for the contents and commands within the external voice control.

OwnersManuals2.com

Global functions Additional function buttons
Fig. 20 Center console: MMI On/Off knob with joystick function
Adjusting the volume You can adjust the volume of an audio source or a system message (for example, from the voice recognition system) when the sound is playing. > To increase or decrease the volume, turn the
right thumbwhee@l) > fig. 79 upward or downward, or turn the On/Off knob @) > fig. 20 to the right or left. > To mute, push the right thumbwheel or the On/Off knob. Selecting the previous/next track or station > Press the |< / DDI button @ or briefly press the On/Off knob to the left/right. Fast forward/rewind
> Press and hold the i<J/ DDl button @, or
press the On/Off knob to the left or right until the desired playback position is reached.

Global functions
Quick access steering wheel button
Depending on vehicle equipment, the button @)
may provide quick access to various functions.
You can program the >K button with various functions.
> To bring up the function that is currently set, press the >K button.
> To perform the function that is currently set, press and hold the >K button, or:
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Steering wheel button assignment.
> Select and confirm the desired function.
Switching the voice recognition system on or off
w button @), see > page 26.
Using the telephone functions
button (), see > page 186.
ZA WARNING
Adjust the volume of the audio system so that signals from outside the vehicle, such as po-
lice and fire sirens, can be heard easily at all times.

4KE012721BH

29
OwnersManuals2.com

Personalization
Personalization
Users
eT r eerie)
Applies to: vehicles with personalized user settings
Depending on vehicle equipment and your country, your vehicle may be able to manage various users in the MMI. Each user will be assigned the settings that they last used.
Before you begin driving, you can select a user in the MMI and load personalized Infotainment and vehicle settings.
Possible users in the MMI: -- myAudi user: as a myAudi user, you can use
Audi connect services that require a myAudi account. Certain settings are transferred online to your myAudi account. If you log into your myAudi account in another vehicle, you can load your settings in the other vehicle. -- Local user: as a local user, you can only store settings in the current vehicle. Your settings cannot be transferred to other vehicles. Audi connect services that can only be used with a myAudi account will not be available.
-- Guest user: as a guest user, you can store set-
tings in the vehicle without changing the settings for other users. Audi recommends only using the guest user temporarily, because settings can be overwritten by other users.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the following options may be used to detect the active user so that the user settings can be loaded automatically before you start driving. -- Vehicle key
Requirement: the driver's door has been opened.
The detected user must be shown in the MMI. Confirm the user shown, select another user = page 30, or add another user > page 30.
ZA WARNING
It may not be possible to load Infotainment and vehicle settings, or they may only load partially. The driver is always responsible for the Infotainment and vehicle settings in order to reduce the risk of an accident.
30

@) Tips
-- Certain Infotainment and vehicle settings (such as mirrors, last radio stations) may be stored, depending on vehicle equipment. You can find additional information in the MMI. Select on the home screen: SETTINGS > General > Legal notes > About Audi con-
nect.
-- Applies to: myAudi users: The stored settings can only be transferred to vehicles that are capable of receiving the transmitted information. There may be restrictions that prevent this, particularly in other countries.
-- Applies to: myAudi users: The settings can only be transferred and loaded when there is coverage from the applicable mobile phone service provider.
-- Applies to: myAudi users with PIN protection switched on: If the MMI displays a detected user but you simply start driving or wait without entering the 4-digit PIN, then the guest user will be selected. Some settings for the detected myAudi user will be transferred to the guest user.
UT elle (ea4
Applies to: vehicles with user management
Opening user management
Applies to: MMI
> Press USERS on the home screen.
Selecting a user
Applies to: MMI
> Press on the desired user. > Enter the 4-digit myAudi PIN, if necessary.
Adding myAudi users
Applies to: MMI and Audi connect
Requirement: you must have successfully registered at my.audi.com and have created a 4-digit myAudi PIN.
> Press Add user. > Press Log in now to log in with your myAudi
credentials. > Follow the system instructions.

OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

To transfer existing destinations from the MMI to your myAudi account one time, confirm the system prompts with Yes.
You can set a profile pictured for your myAudi user at my.audi.com.
Adding a local user
Applies to: MMI
> Press Add user. > Press Initiate setup. > Press Local user. > Follow the system instructions.
Editing users
Applies to: MMI
Requirement: the user must be selected and that user's settings must be loaded.
> Press on the user.
Depending on the user type, available options may include the following.
PIN protection: when this function is switched on, the 4-digit myAudi PIN must be entered before any settings for this user can be loaded.
Remove the user from the vehicle: the user will only be deleted in the vehicle from the list in the MMI.
Change name: you can change the name of the local user.
Removing users
Applies to: MMI
> Select on the home screen: Users > Z > one or more entries > Delete. The user will only be deleted from the list in the MMI. The authorizations for the user in the vehicle (such as key user) will not be removed.
@ Tips
-- The guest user cannot be renamed. -- When changing users, the new user settings
are loaded in the vehicle. -- If a user has the & symbol, PIN protection is
active. To switch off PIN protection, you can edit the user. -- Depending on the country, you may be able to use an Audi app or my.audi.com.

Personalization
Applies to: vehicles with key user management
The vehicle owner must be set as the key user to use some of the specific Audi connect vehicle control services that depend on vehicle equip-
ment.
The key user automatically has remote access authorization. This remote access authorization is necessary to control certain functions that depend on the equipment, such as Audi connect vehicle control services, through the myAudi app.
Setting the key user Requirement: a key user must not be set yet.
> To set a key user for the vehicle, you will need a myAudi account. Register in the myAudi app or at my.audi.com.
> Add your vehicle to the myAudi app. > Follow the instructions in the myAudi app.
Managing additional users Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can grant authorization for additional users to use Audi connect vehicle control services at my.audi. com.
Removing the key user
If you remove the key user, all other users that were stored by the key user at my.audi.com and their authorizations will be deleted. It will no longer be possible to use the Audi connect vehicle control services, depending on the vehicle equip-
ment.
Requirement: a key user must be set. The ignition has been switched on with a vehicle key.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
USERS > {3 > Remove key user.
iG) Tips
-- Depending on the country and model there may be an app other than the "myAudi app" available for your vehicle. For additional information, see my.audi.com.
-- You do not need to log into the vehicle with a myAudi user in order to use Audi connect
31
OwnersManuals2.com

Personalization
vehicle control services, which depend on
the vehicle equipment. -- If you sell your vehicle, reset all settings to
the factory default settings.

OwnersManuals2.com

Opening and closing
Central locking
(eT e e eerie)
Z\ WARNING
-- If you leave the vehicle, switch the ignition off and take the key with you. This applies particularly when children remain in the vehicle. Otherwise, children could start the vehicle or operate electrical equipment (such
as power windows), which increases the risk
of an accident. -- Applies to: vehicles with anti-theft alarm
system: When the vehicle is locked from the outside, no one, especially children, should
remain in the vehicle, because the windows
can no longer open from the inside = page 37, Anti-theft alarm system. Locked doors make it more difficult for emergency workers to enter the vehicle, which puts lives at risk. -- Applies to: child safety lock: No one, especially children, should stay in the vehicle when the child safety lock is activated, because the windows can no longer be opened from the inside. This increases the risk of fatal injury.
All doors and the luggage compartment lid can be centrally unlocked and locked at once. You can select in the MMI if the entire vehicle or only the driver's door should unlock when unlocking the vehicle > page 34. The turn signals flash twice when you unlock the vehicle and flash once when you lock the vehicle. If they do not flash when
locking, check if all doors and lids are closed.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you may have different options for centrally unlocking and locking your vehicle.
-- Vehicle key > page 38 -- Sensors in the door handles > page 38 -- Lock cylinder in the driver's door > page 36 -- Interior central locking switch > page 35

Opening and closing
Vehicle key
The term "vehicle key" refers to the remote control key or convenience key*. The convenience key* is a remote control key with special functions > page 38 and > page 93.
Power closing*
When closing a door or the luggage compartment lid, you only have to let it fall lightly into the latch. It then closes automatically > A\.
Automatic locking
If you unlock the vehicle but then do not open any of the doors, the luggage compartment, or
the hood within a short period time, the vehicle will lock again automatically. This feature pre-
vents the vehicle from being accidentally left unlocked for a long period of time.
Automatic locking (Auto Lock)
The Auto Lock function locks all doors and the luggage compartment lid once the speed has exceeded approximately 9 mph (15 km/h). The vehicle will unlock again if the unlock function in the central locking switch is pressed, the "P" selector lever position is selected, or the ignition is switched off.
You can open the doors individually from the inside by pulling the door handle one time. To open the rear doors individually, you must pull the door handle twice.
In the event ofa crash with airbag deployment, the doors will also automatically unlock to allow access to the vehicle.
Unintentionally locking yourself out
Only lock your vehicle when all of the doors and the luggage compartment lid are closed and there is no key in the vehicle. This reduces the risk of locking yourself out accidentally.
The following features help to reduce the risk of locking your vehicle key in the vehicle:
-- If the driver's door is open, the vehicle cannot be locked by pressing the & button on the re-
mote control key or by touching the locking
sensor* on a door.

4KE012721BH

33
OwnersManuals2.com

Opening and closing
-- If the vehicle key that was used most recently is inside the luggage compartment, the luggage compartment lid will automatically open again after it closes > ©.
-- If the vehicle key that was last used is detected inside the vehicle, then the vehicle cannot be
locked from the outside > ©.
ZA\ WARNING
Observe the safety precautions > page 33.
ZA\ WARNING
Applies to: vehicles with power closing
--To reduce the risk of injury, make sure that the area where the door is closing is clear during the closing process.
-- The closing process can be stopped at any time by pulling on the outer or inner door handle.
@) Note
The following applies when locking the vehicle: -- If the vehicle key that was last used is de-
tected inside the passenger compartment, then the vehicle cannot be locked from the outside using the sensor. Take the vehicle key with you and lock the vehicle again. Oth-
erwise, the vehicle will not be protected
against unauthorized access. -- Applies to: vehicles with convenience key: If
you try to lock the vehicle using the button on the vehicle key while the front passenger's or rear door is open, and you accidentally place the vehicle key inside the passenger
compartment and close the door, the vehi-
cle will lock at first. But if the keyless system detects a vehicle key inside the vehicle after it locks, then the vehicle will unlock again. The turn signals will flash several
times and a warning tone" will sound to in-
dicate this. If you do not open the vehicle to remove the vehicle key within a brief period, then the vehicle will lock automatically. This prevents the vehicle from being left un-

locked for long periods of time. The vehicle key will then be locked inside the vehicle. -- Applies to: vehicles with convenience key: If the luggage compartment lid closes and the system detects that the last vehicle key that was used is inside the luggage compartment, then the luggage compartment lid will open again. The turn signals will flash
several times and a warning tone" will
sound to indicate this. The doors will lock. Always take the vehicle key with you, or unauthorized persons may be able to enter the vehicle.
Gi) Tips
-- Do not leave valuables unattended in the vehicle. A locked vehicle is not a safe!
--The LED in the driver's door rail blinks when you lock the vehicle. If the LED turns on for approximately 30 seconds after locking, there is a malfunction in the central locking system. Have the problem corrected by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
Tada Mn Meeela lei 11)
You can adjust the central locking system to your preferences. The settings depend on the vehicle equipment.
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Central locking.
Door unlocking
--If you select All, all doors and the luggage compartment lid will be unlocked when unlocking the vehicle.
-- If you select Driver's door, only the driver's door will be unlocked. To unlock all doors and the luggage compartment lid, press the & button on the vehicle key twice. In vehicles with a convenience key", only the driver's door will unlock when you pull the driver's door handle. If you pull another door handle, the entire vehicle will be unlocked.

)) Applies to: vehicles with anti-theft alarm system
34

OwnersManuals2.com

The entire vehicle will always be locked f you press the & button.
Long press to open windows
You can select if all windows and the panoramic glass roof* should open using the vehicle key => page 45, Convenience opening and closing. If you press and hold the & button on the vehicle key, all of the windows and the panoramic glass roof* will close.
Disable rear lid handle
You can select if the luggage compartment lid can open with the handle > page 41, fig. 27, => page 41, fig. 28. |f you activate this function, the luggage compartment lid can only be opened with the 4s button on the vehicle key or in the driver's door. In vehicles with a convenience key*, you can still open the luggage compartment lid using the handle if an authorized convenience key is detected > page 40.
Fold mirrors
You can select if the exterior mirrors automatically fold in when locking.
Tone when locking!)
You can select if an audio signal sounds when locking the vehicle.
Open with convenience key
Applies to: vehicles with convenience key
You can deactivate the feature for unlocking using the sensor. The function for locking via the sensor will still be enabled > page 38.

Opening and closing
Central locking switch
Fig. 21 Driver's door: central locking switch
> To lock or unlock the vehicle, press the for @
button > A\.
When locking the vehicle with the central locking switch, the following applies: -- The doors and the luggage compartment lid
cannot be opened from the outside for security reasons, for example, to reduce the risk of unauthorized entry while stopped at a light. -- The LED in the central locking switch turns on when all doors are closed and locked. -- You can open the doors individually from the inside by pulling the door handle one time. To open the rear doors individually, you must pull the door handle twice. -- In the event of a crash with airbag deployment, the doors unlock automatically to allow access to the vehicle.
-- Observe the safety precautions > page 33. -- The central locking button works when the
ignition is switched off. --The central locking switch is inoperative
when the vehicle is locked from the outside.

Messages

The following messages may appear depending on the vehicle equipment:

E2 Driver's door: malfunction! Shift to P before

leaving vehicle. See owner's manual

4KE012721BH

)) This function is not available in all countries.

35
OwnersManuals2.com

Opening and closing
There is a malfunction in the driver's door. Secure the vehicle before exiting by selecting the "P" selector lever position. Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired. 2 Central locking: malfunction! See owner's manual There is a central locking malfunction. If the doors cannot lock, you can emergency lock the doors > page 36. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
Door lock: opening while driving is only possible with the emergency release. See owner's manual It is not possible to power unlock the doors at speeds above approximately 9 mph (15 km/h). If you must open doors at higher speeds in cases of emergency, you can manually unlock the door by forcefully pulling the door handle beyond its noticeable resistance two times. Then press the door handle back into its original position, if necessary.
Mechanically unlocking and locking the doors All doors must be unlocked or locked separately if the central locking system fails.
Fig. 22 Driver's door: door lock cylinder

RAZ-0026

Fig. 23 Door: mechanically locking

Unlocking or locking the driver's door with the mechanical key
> Remove the mechanical key > page 38. > Insert the mechanical key into the slot under
the door handle and pry the cap off > fig. 22. > To unlock the driver's door, turn the mechanical
key to the unlock position in the direction of ar-
row () > fig. 22.
> Pull firmly on the door handle to open the driver's door. The door handle swings out slightly farther than normal.
> To lock the driver's door, select the "P" selector
lever position, close the door, and turn the key once to the close position @)> A.

Locking the front passenger's door and rear doors using the mechanical key
The mechanical lock is located on the edge of the doors. It is only visible when the door is open.
>» Remove the mechanical key > page 38. > If necessary, remove the cap from the opening
° fig. 23.
> Insert the mechanical key into the slot on the inside and turn it all the way to the left (when locking the right door), or to the right (when locking the left door).
> If necessary, install the cap in the opening and close the door.

Once the doors are closed, it is no longer possible

to open them from the outside. The front doors

can be opened from the inside by pulling the

door handle one time. The rear doors can be un-

locked from the inside by pulling the door handle

one time and then opened by pulling the door

handle again. If the vehicle is without power, the

doors can be unlocked from the inside by first

OwnersManuals2.com

pulling the door handle beyond its noticeable resistance. The doors can then can be opened by pulling the handle again. If the child safety lock
in one of the rear doors is activated, you must
first pull the door handle from the inside. Then you can open the door from the outside.
ZX, WARNING
Observe the safety precautions > page 33.
eae ey
Applies to: vehicles with anti-theft alarm system
If the anti-theft alarm system detects a vehicle break-in, audio and visual warning signals are triggered. The anti-theft alarm system is switched on or off when locking or unlocking your vehicle. If the alarm is triggered, it will shut off automatically after a certain amount of time.
Switching the alarm off manually
> To switch the alarm off, press the @ button on the vehicle key or switch the ignition on.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the antitheft alarm system may have the following fea-
tures:
Break-in security feature
The alarm will sound if there is a break-in at the doors, hood, and/or luggage compartment lid.
Interior/towing protection monitor
The alarm will be triggered if there are movements detected in the vehicle interior (for example, by animals) or if there is a change in the vehicle angle (for example, when the vehicle is being towed).
You can prevent the alarm from being triggered by deactivating the interior/towing protection monitor.
Deactivating the interior/towing protection monitor
There are the following options for deactivating the interior/towing protection monitor:
> Press the fj button on the vehicle key a second time within two seconds. Or

Opening and closing
> Applies to: vehicles with convenience key: Touch the sensor on the door handle a second time within two seconds. Or
> Turn the mechanical key in the door lock to the close position a second time within two seconds. Or
> Applies to: vehicles with MMI: Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Settings & Service >
Interior monitoring.
If you lock the vehicle, then the interior/towing protection monitor will stay off until the next time the vehicle is unlocked.
ZA\WARNING
No one, especially children, should stay in the
vehicle when it is locked from the outside, be-
cause the windows can no longer be opened from the inside. Locked doors make it more difficult for emergency workers to enter the vehicle, which puts lives at risk.
@) Tips
The interior/towing protection monitor only functions correctly when the windows and the Panorama glass roof* are closed.
Keys
a4

Fig. 24 Your vehicle key set

@ Vehicle key

You can unlock and lock your vehicle with the ve-

hicle key.

4KE012721BH
[RAZ-1373

37
OwnersManuals2.com

Opening and closing
@ Mechanical key and release button for mechanical key
A mechanical key is integrated in the vehicle key. To remove it, press the release button and remove the mechanical key.
Using the mechanical key, you can:
-- Lock or unlock the glove compartment. -- Manually unlock and lock the doors = page 36. -- Unlock the luggage compartment lid using the
emergency release > page 43.
@ PANIC button
In an emergency, you can press the PANIC button to trigger a visible and audible vehicle alarm. You can do this ass long as you are near your vehicle (within the range for the remote control key).
--To trigger the alarm, press the [PANIC] button > fig. 24.
--To turn the alarm off, press the [PANIC] button again.
Lost key/replacing a key
If a vehicle key is Lost, contact an authorized Audi
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. Have this vehicle key deactivated. It is important to bring all keys with you.
If a key is lost, you should report it to your insurance company.
Electronic immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized use of the vehicle.
In some cases, it may not be possible to establish vehicle drive ready mode if there is also a vehicle key from a different vehicle manufacturer on the key chain.
Data in the vehicle key
When driving, service and maintenance-relevant data is continuously stored in your vehicle key. An authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility can read out this data and tell you about the work your vehicle needs.
ZA\ WARNING
Observe the safety precautions > page 33.
38

@) Note
Protect the key against high temperatures and direct sunlight.
@) For the sake of the environment
`8 Batteries and electrical/electronic devices must be disposed of in an environmentally safe manner.
(i) Tips
-- The vehicle key function can be temporarily disrupted by interference from transmitters near the vehicle working in the same frequency range (such as a mobile device or radio equipment). Always check if your vehicle is locked.
-- Applies to MMI: You can view the number of keys programmed to the vehicle by selecting on the home screen: VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Vehicle information.
-- The key set is equipped with a key tag at the factory. The key tag does not directly control any vehicle functions. You can use the key tag if you would like to order a new vehicle key.
-- The system complies with United States FCC regulations and ISED regulations = page 300.
Unlocking and locking the vehicle
wy
Fig. 25 Door handle: sensor for locking
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you may have various options for unlocking and locking your vehicle. The settings in the MMI specify which doors will unlock > page 34.

[RAZ-0025]

OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH RAZ-0622

Unlocking or locking using the vehicle key buttons
> To unlock the vehicle, press the @ button
=> page 37, fig. 24.
> To lock the vehicle, press the fj button once.
Unlocking or locking using the sensors
Applies to: vehicles with convenience key
> To unlock a door or the luggage compartment lid, grasp the door handle or luggage compartment lid handle.
> To lock the vehicle, close the door and touch the sensor on the door handle once &fig. 25. Do not grasp the door handle while locking the vehicle, or else the vehicle will not lock. The door cannot be opened for a brief period directly after locking it. This way you have the opportunity to check if the doors locked correctly.
Unlocking and locking with the Audi connect
vehicle control service!)
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect vehicle control
Requirement: Audi connect vehicle control services must be set up > page 196. The vehicle must be parking and the ignition must be switched off.
ZA WARNING
Observe the safety precautions > page 33.
G) Tips
-- Only use the vehicle key when you can see the vehicle.
-- The vehicle can only be locked when the "P" selector lever position is engaged.
-- Do not use the vehicle key to lock and unlock when you are inside the vehicle. Otherwise, you could trigger the anti-theft alarm. If this happens, press the ( unlock button.
G) Tips
Applies to: vehicles with convenience key
-- When unlocking or locking the vehicle, the convenience key cannot be more than ap-

Opening and closing
proximately 4 feet (1.5 m) away from the door handle or luggage compartment. -- Unlocking with the convenience key (keyless access) can be deactivated in the MMI system > page 34. --To prevent the vehicle battery from discharging, the energy management gradually switches off convenience functions that are not needed. You then may no longer be able to unlock your vehicle with the sensors.
LED and battery in the vehicle key
Fig. 26 Vehicle key: removing the battery holder
LED in the vehicle key
The LED (@) indicates the vehicle key function.
> If you press a button briefly, the LED blinks once.
> If you press and hold a button (convenience opening/closing), the LED blinks several times.
> If the LED does not blink, the vehicle key battery is drained. Replace the battery in the vehicle key.
Replacing the vehicle key battery
> Remove the mechanical key > page 38 and insert it at an angle into the opening > fig. 26.
> Push the mechanical key in the opening in the direction of the arrow to operate the release button on the inside @). To reduce the risk of damage, do not try to pry off the cover.
> Remove the cover from the battery tray. > Insert the new battery with the "+" symbol fac-
ing up. > Close the battery tray with the cover. > Insert the mechanical key.

) Incertain countries.

39
OwnersManuals2.com

Opening and closing
If the BS indicator light appears with a corresponding message, the vehicle key battery is drained and must be replaced.
Z\ WARNING
If batteries or coin cell batteries are swallowed or enter the body in any other way, they can cause serious or fatal injuries within a short period of time. There is a risk of chemical burns. -- Keep vehicle keys and key fobs with batter-
ies out of the reach of children. -- Keep new or used batteries away from chil-
dren. -- If the battery compartment on a vehicle key
does not close securely, stop using the key and keep it away from children. -- Seek medical attention immediately if you suspect that a battery was swallowed or has entered the body in any other way.
@ For the sake of the environment
"Batteries and electrical/electronic devices must be disposed of in an environmentally safe manner.
G) Tips
Replacement batteries for the vehicle key must meet the same specifications as the original battery.
Luggage compartment lid
General information
ZA\ WARNING
-- Applies to: vehicles with anti-theft alarm system: When the vehicle is locked from the outside, no one, especially children, should
remain in the vehicle, because the windows
can no longer open from the inside = page 37. Locked doors make it more difficult for emergency workers to enter the ve-
hicle, which puts lives at risk.
-- Always close and lock the luggage compartment lid and the doors when the vehicle is
40

not in use. Otherwise someone such as a child could enter the vehicle through the luggage compartment and become locked inside it. To reduce the risk of injury, do not allow children to play in or around the vehicle. --To reduce the risk of injuries by pinching, make sure that no one is in the operating area of the luggage compartment lid when closing, especially near the hinges, at the upper and lower edges of the lid, or all around the edge of the lid in general. -- After closing the luggage compartment lid, make sure that it is latched. The luggage compartment lid could open suddenly while
driving, which would increase the risk of an
accident. -- Never drive with the luggage compartment
lid ajar or open, because poisonous gases from the surrounding area can enter the vehicle interior and increase the risk of asphyxiation. -- If there is a luggage rack (such as a bicycle rack) on the luggage compartment lid, the luggage compartment lid may not open completely under certain circumstances or it could close by itself if open due to the extra weight. Therefore, the open luggage compartment lid must be given additional support or the cargo must first be removed from the luggage rack. -- Applies to: vehicles with power-operated or sensor-controlled luggage compartment lid: Pay careful attention when closing the luggage compartment lid. Otherwise, you could cause serious injury to yourself or others despite the pinch protection.
C) Note
The luggage compartment lid can bump into objects such as the garage ceiling when opening and become damaged.
G) Tips
-- When the vehicle is locked, the luggage compartment lid can be unlocked separately
OwnersManuals2.com

by pressing the As button twice on the vehicle key. The luggage compartment lid locks automatically when it is closed again. -- The ability to open the luggage compartment lid using the handle > page 47, fig. 27, > page 41, fig. 28 can be deactivated or activated in the MMI > page 34.
Opening and closing the luggage compartment lid

Opening and closing
Closing the luggage compartment lid
> Applies to: vehicles without automatic luggage compartment lid: Use the inside handle* to pull the luggage compartment lid down and allow it to drop gently into the latch to close it. Or
> Applies to: vehicles with automatic luggage compartment lid: Note > page 47.
ZX WARNING
Observe the safety precautions > page 40.
Automatic luggage compartment lid
Applies to: vehicles with automatic luggage compartment lid

Fig. 27 Rear lid: handle

Fig. 28 Driver's door: opening the luggage compartment lid
Opening the luggage compartment lid
> Unlock the vehicle or the luggage compartment
lid using the B / ZS button on the vehicle key
and press the handle in the luggage compartment lid > fig. 27. Or » Applies to: vehicles with convenience key:Press the handle in the luggage compartment lid => fig. 27. When the luggage compartment is locked, the vehicle key cannot be more than approximately 4 feet (1.5 m) away from the lug-
gage compartment. Or
> When the ignition is switched off, press and hold the 4s button on the vehicle key twice. Or
> Select the "P" selector lever position and pull the <3 & fig. 28 button in the driver's door.

Fig. 29 Luggage compartment lid: @ closing button*, 2) lock button* (vehicles with convenience key*)
The luggage compartment lid can be opened and closed automatically > A\ in General information on page 40.
Opening the luggage compartment lid
> When the ignition is switched off, press the 4s
button on the vehicle key twice > page 37, fig. 24. Or > Engage the "P" selector lever position and pull the < button* in the driver's door. Or > Applies to: vehicles with convenience key: Press the handle in the luggage compartment lid @ => page 41, fig. 27. When the luggage compart-
ment is locked, the vehicle key cannot be more
than approximately 4 feet (1.5 m) away from the luggage compartment.
Closing the luggage compartment lid
> Press the <3 button in the luggage compartment lid. Or
> Press the handle in the luggage compartment lid > page 41, fig. 27. Or

41
OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

Opening and closing
> Press the luggage compartment lid downward slightly. Or
> When the ignition is switched on, pull the < switch in the driver's door > page 41, fig. 28 until the luggage compartment lid is closed. Or
» Applies to: vehicles with convenience key: Press and hold the s button on the vehicle key while the ignition is switched off until the luggage compartment lid closes. Make sure there is enough distance (maximum of approximately 9 feet (3 m)) between you and the luggage compartment lid. Or
> Press the < button in the luggage compartment lid. Or
» Applies to: vehicles with convenience key: When the ignition is switched off, press the <3 / & button in the luggage compartment lid. The vehicle key must not be more than approximately 4 feet (1.5 m) away from the luggage compartment and it must not be inside the vehicle. If you press the (@* button, then the vehicle will lock.
Stopping automatic opening or closing
The automatic opening or closing of the luggage compartment lid will stop if:
> You press the < button or press the handle in the luggage compartment lid again > page 47, fig. 27. Or
> If something blocks the luggage compartment lid or makes it difficult for the lid to move.
If you press the button <3 or the handle in the luggage compartment lid > page 41, fig. 27 again, the luggage compartment lid will open or close again.
Storing the luggage compartment lid opening position
The position must be at a certain height or higher
to store.
> Bring the luggage compartment lid into the desired open position. If you want to move the luggage compartment lid to a lower position, move it slowly in small increments; otherwise,

the luggage compartment lid will close automatically. > Press and hold the <3 button in the luggage compartment lid for at least four seconds to store the new opening position. A visual and audio signal will follow. > To set a higher open position, wait at least five seconds and then carefully press the luggage compartment lid upward. > Press and hold the <3 button again for at least four seconds to store the desired opening position.
Manually opening and closing the luggage compartment lid
If the electric motor malfunctions or the vehicle battery charge level is low, the luggage compartment lid can be opened or closed by hand. Extra force will be needed to do this. Move the lid slowly to reduce the amount of force needed. > Pull the luggage compartment lid down slightly
by the inside handle* and then press on the lid until it latches.
ZX WARNING
Observe the safety precautions > page 40.
Opening and closing the luggage compartment lid with foot motion (kicking movement)
Applies to: vehicles with sensor-controlled luggage compartment lid
S<garq°o=oe
Fig. 30 Vehicle rear: foot motion (example)

OwnersManuals2.com

The luggage compartment lid can be opened and
closed automatically 1) > A\ in General informa-
tion on page 40.
Requirements: you must be carrying your convenience key* with you. The ignition must be switched off. You must be standing at the center behind the luggage compartment lid. Depending on vehicle equipment, it may also be possible to stand slightly off-center at the back of your vehicle.
> Move your foot back and forth under the bumper one time > fig. 30. Do not touch the bumper. Make sure you have firm footing. The luggage compartment lid will open or close !) once the system detects the movement. The automatic opening or closing will be canceled if you repeat one of the movements described.
Z\ WARNING
Observe the safety precautions > page 40.
A WARNING
Please note that when you have the convenience key with you, the sensor-controlled luggage compartment lid could open or close unexpectedly during activity near the rear of the vehicle. This increases the risk of an accident.
C) Note
Please note that when you have the convenience key with you, the sensor-controlled luggage compartment lid could open or close unexpectedly during activity near the rear of the vehicle (for example, the lid could hit the ceiling in a garage).
G) Tips
The luggage compartment lid will only open
or close |) if you perform the movement as
described. This prevents the luggage compartment lid from opening or closing due to similar movements |), such as when you walk between the rear of the vehicle and your ga-

Opening and closing
rage door. In some situations, the function
may be limited or temporarily unavailable. This may happen if: -- You are standing too close to the bumper or
too far away from it -- The luggage compartment lid was closed or
opened immediately beforehand -- You park close to a hedge and the branches
move back and forth under the vehicle for a long period of time -- You clean your vehicle, for example with a pressure washer or in a car wash -- There is heavy rain -- The bumper is very dirty, for example after driving on salt-covered roads -- There is interference to the vehicle key's ra-
dio signal, such as from mobile devices or remote controls
Mechanically unlocking the luggage (Tua ela daat lai a tLe]
The luggage compartment lid can be released from the inside in an emergency.

Fig. 31 Inner luggage compartment lid: access to the emergency release

>» Fold the backrest on the rear bench seat for-

ward > page 84.

> Remove the mechanical key > page 38 or the

screwdriver > page 276.

> Using the mechanical key/screwdriver 2), pry

the cover *> off the luggage compartment lid

trim panel.

4KE012721BH RAZ-0682

The closing function applies to vehicles that also have automatic luggage compartment lid operation.
2) Use the flat side of the reversible screwdriver blade.

43
OwnersManuals2.com

Opening and closing
> To unlock the luggage compartment lid, press the lever in the direction of the arrow using a suitable object (such as a screwdriver) or using the mechanical key if necessary.
A WARNING
Observe the safety precautions > page 40.
ZX WARNING
If you have folded the backrests into the upright position, always check if the lock is correctly engaged by pulling forward on the backrest.
Child safety lock
The child safety lock prevents the rear doors from being opened from the inside and the rear power windows from being operated.

-- The rear inner door handles -- The rear power windows -- The control panel* for the climate control sys-
tem in the rear
Message in the instrument cluster display
The following messages may appear depending on the vehicle equipment:
@/ Child safety lock: malfunction! Please contact Service
There is a malfunction in the child safety lock. Press the button again.
If the message stays on, drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
Z\ WARNING
-- Observe the safety precautions > page 33. --A malfunction in the child safety lock could
allow the rear doors to be opened from the inside, which increases the risk of an accident.

Power windows

Ce) eT

m Liem Cem eC MUS CoN es

[RAZ-1026| RAZ-0723

Fig. 32 Driver's door: controls
> To activate or deactivate the child safety lock for the rear doors (which controls the power windows and interior door handle), press the left and/or right 8 button in the driver's door => fig. 32. The indicator light in the button turns on/blinks.
> Make sure the child safety lock is working by checking the function on the rear power window switch and door handle.
> Applies to: vehicles with controls for the climate control system in the rear and MMI: To also restrict the operation of the climate control system in the rear, select on the home screen: SETTINGS > Display & brightness > Operation in rear
When the child safety lock is switched on, the following functions are disabled:

Fig. 33 Driver's door: power window switch
Power window switches:
@ Left front door @ Right front door @® Left rear door @® Right rear door

OwnersManuals2.com

Opening and closing the windows
The driver can control all power windows. All power window switches are equipped with a twostage function:
> To open or close the window completely, press the switch down or pull the switch up briefly to the second level. The operation will stop if the switch is pressed or pulled again.
> To select a position in between opened and closed, press or pull the switch to the first level until the desired window position is reached.
Correcting a malfunction in the one-touch up/down function
If necessary, you can reactivate the one-touch up/ down function if it malfunctions.
> Pull the power window switch up until the window is completely raised.
>» Release the switch and pull it up again for at least one second.
Z\ WARNING
-- Observe the safety precautions > page 33. -- Never close the windows carelessly or in an
uncontrolled manner, because this increases
the risk of injury.
G) Tips
-- You can still open and close the windows for several minutes after turning the ignition off. The power window switch is not disabled until the driver's door or front passenger's door is opened.
-- The power windows are equipped with pinch protection. The automatic window may stop closing and will open all the way again even if no obstacle is detected. Pull the power window switch up until the window is completely raised.

Opening and closing
Convenience opening and closing
Applies to: vehicles with convenience key
Convenience opening or closing the windows or panoramic glass roof*
You can set in the MMI if all windows or the roof* should open or close all at once > page 34, Setting the central locking system.
> Press and hold the @ or ff button on the vehicle key until all windows and the roof* have reached the desired position > A\. Or:
> Touch the sensor* on the door handle => page 38, fig. 25 until all of the windows and the roof* are closed. Do not place your hand in the door handle when doing this.
When all of the windows and the roof* are closed, the turn signals will flash once.
ZA\ WARNING
-- Observe the safety precautions > page 33. -- Never close the windows or panoramic glass
roof* carelessly or in an uncontrolled manner, because this increases the risk of injury.
-- For security reasons, the windows and the
panoramic glass roof* can only be opened and closed with the vehicle key at a maximum distance of approximately 6.5 feet (2 m) from the vehicle. Always pay attention when using the ff button to close the windows and the panoramic glass roof* so that no one is pinched. The closing process will stop immediately when the f button is released.

4KE012721BH

4s
OwnersManuals2.com

Opening and closing

Panoramic glass roof

Operating the p roof sunshade

mic glass roof a

Applies to: vehicles with panoramic glass roof and roof sunshade

Fig. 34 Headliner: panoramic glass roof and sunshade* buttons
The control buttons are equipped with a twostage function.
When tilting or opening the roof, the roof sunshade will open partially or completely if the sunshade is closed.
Operating the roof sunshade
> Opening and closing the sunshade: push the switch in the headl@i) fnorewarrd or toward the rear to the second level.
> Partially opening the sunshade: press the switch to the first level until the sunshade reaches the desired position.
Operating the roof
> Tilting the roof: press the &> switch in the headliner briefly up to the second level (a).
> Closing the tilted roof: pull the A> switch down briefly to the second level.
> Opening the roof: slide the 2S switch back briefly twice in a row to the second level @).
> Closing the opened roof: push the 23 switch forward briefly to the second level.
> Opening or closing partially: slide the A> switch to the first level and hold it there until the roof reaches the desired position.
Quick opening
You can also open the roof and roof sunshade in
one movement.

> Push the 2S switch back briefly to the second
lev@ etwlice in a row.
Roof emergency closing
If an object is detected when closing, the roof will open again automatically. In this case, you can then close it with the power emergency closing function.
> Within five seconds after the sunroof opens automatically, pull the applicable button until the roof is closed.
ZA WARNING
-- Observe the safety precautions > page 33. --To reduce the risk of injury, always pay at-
tention when closing the roof. Always switch the ignition off and take the key with you when leaving the vehicle.
@) Note
Always close the roof when you leave the vehicle and when there is precipitation to reduce the risk of damage to the interior equipment, particularly the electronic equipment.
G) Tips
-- After switching off the ignition, the roof and sunshades can still be operated for several minutes as long as neither of the front doors have been opened.
-- It is not possible to open the roof when tem-
peratures are too low.
Garage door opener

Applies to: vehicles with garage door opener

With the garage door opener, you can activate

systems such as the garage doors, security sys-

tems or house lights from inside your vehicle.

OwnersManuals2.com

These functions are operated in the MMI. Multiple receivers can be programmed, which can control the functions of up to eight) hand-held transmitters.
Z\ WARNING
-- When operating or programming the garage door opener, make sure that no people or objects are in the area immediately surrounding the equipment. People can be injured or property can be damaged if struck when closing.
-- Do not allow yourself to be distracted from traffic by the viewing and operating the displays.
@) Tips
-- If you sell your vehicle, reset all settings to the factory default settings > page 234.
--The system complies with United States FCC regulations and ISED regulations => page 300.
@ Tips
Before you program your system to the ga-
rage door opener, first check the compatibili-
ty: -- Ask an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
Audi Service Facility or check at www. homelink.com. You can also find more information about HomeLink there. -- You can display information about HomeLink (compatibility level/status/country code/HomeLink generation) in the MMI: -- Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Garage door opener > @.
Applies to: vehicles with garage door opener
Requirements: the remote control transmitter must be programmed > page 47, Program-
ming, the vehicle must be within range of the system, and the ignition must be switched on.

Opening and closing
There are multiple options to open or close the system (such as the garage door).
> If you have only programmed one remote control transmitter, press the - button on the lower display. Or
> If you have programmed multiple remote con-
trol transmitters, press the 2 button on the
lower display and then press the respective system button. Or » Applies to: vehicles with programmable steering wheel button: If you have configured the programmable steering wheel button, press
the >K button > page 29. Or
> Applies to: vehicles with location pairing: If you have programmed Location pairing, press the button for this in the upper display (notification center > page 27). As you approach the system, the button is displayed on the MMI.
If transmission was successful, the message: Send to: XXX will appear.

Applies to: vehicles with garage door opener

You can program both fixed code and rolling code systems in the MMI using the procedure that is described.

Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.

Programming the system
Applies to: MMI
Requirement: the hand transmitter must be present and the vehicle must be within range of the system (such as the garage door) that you would like to program.

> If you are programming the garage door opener

for the first time, press the -@ button on the

lower display. Follow the instructions in the up-

per display. Or

> If you would like to program other systems, se-

lect on the home screen: VEHICLE > Settings &

Service > Garage door opener. Select the de-

sired button: G). Follow the instructions in the

MMI.

4KE012721BH

1) The possible number of hand-held transmitters depends on the equipment.

47
OwnersManuals2.com

Opening and closing
> If you would like to reprogram systems that are already programmed, select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Garage door opener. Press the Z button and select 7 for the system to be reprogrammed. Select: Program. Follow the instructions in the MMI.
With some systems, the garage door opener will be immediately available after programming. With other systems, the garage door opener must also be synchronized.
Synchronizing!)
Requirement: the hand transmitter must already be programmed and the vehicle must be within range of the system (such as the garage door).
If the system synchronization is performed directly after the programming procedure, follow the instructions on the MMI.
If you would like to sync at a later time:
» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Garage door opener.
> Press the button for the system that you would like to synchronize.
> Follow the instructions in the MMI.
Location pairing
Applies to: vehicles with location pairing
For easier operation, you can program your system's location.
Requirements: the respective hand transmitter must be programmed > page 47 and the vehicle must be located in front of the system.
> If you have programmed your system, follow the instructions in the MMI. Or
If you would like to set up location pairing at another time: > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Garage door opener. > Press the Z button. > Press the Z button for the system your vehicle is facing.

> Select: Location pairing. > Follow the instructions in the MMI.

Only a maximum of three systems can be displayed in the notification center > page 27. If you would like to have all systems displayed, press
oooo.

Renaming programmed systems
You can rename the programmed systems according to your preferences (names may have a maximum of 10 characters).

> If you have programmed your system, follow the instructions in the MMI. Or

If you would like to change the name at another
time:
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Garage door opener.
> Press the Z button.
> Press the 7 button for the system that you would like to rename.
> Select: Rename. If necessary, delete the preset name, such as Garage door opener 1.
> Follow the instructions in the MMI.

Deleting programmed systems
The programmed systems can be deleted individually or all at once.

> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Garage door opener.
> Press the Z button. > To delete an individual system, press the L]
button for the desired system. If the checkmark
Vv is set, select: Delete.
> To delete all systems, select: All > Delete.

G) Tips

-- Make sure the batteries in the hand trans-

mitter are charged before starting the pro-

gramming process.

-- The programming process may take up to

30 seconds. It may be necessary for the

1) Only applies to rolling code systems
48

OwnersManuals2.com

hand transmitter to be pressed again in the meantime. -- The garage door opener may need to be synchronized with the system after programming. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for doing this.
@) Tips
In some cases, the system may need to be programmed in a different mode ("D mode"). -- Switch the ignition on. -- Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Garage door opener. -- Press and hold the desired button G@). -- Select Yes, in D mode and follow the instructions on the MMI.

Opening and closing

4KE012721BH

49
OwnersManuals2.com

Lights and Vision
Lights and Vision Exterior lighting
Switching the lights on and off
Fig. 35 Instrument panel: light button module
@ Light switch
Press and hold (@) until the desired light function is selected. The selected function is displayed briefly in the instrument cluster. When switching on the ignition, the AUTO light function is automatically selected. -- AUTO - The automatic headlights adapt to the
surrounding brightness automatically. The daytime running lights* will automatically turn on.
In vehicles for certain markets, you can switch
the automatic daytime running lights* on and off in the MMI.
-- 20 - You can switch the low beam headlights on
manually once the ignition is switched on. -- 20 - You can switch the parking lights on at
speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h). -- USA models: OFF - You can switch off all light
functions at speeds under 6 mph (10 km/h). -- Canada models: OFF - You can switch off all
light functions when the ignition is switched off while the vehicle is stationary. When the low beam headlights or parking lights are switched on, the respective BB or indicator light appears in the instrument cluster.
@ All-weather lights 2
The headlights automatically adjust so that there will be less glare, for example when the road surface is wet.
sO

Automatic headlight range control

Your vehicle is equipped with automatic headlight range control. It reduces glare for oncoming traffic if the vehicle load changes. The headlight range adjusts automatically.

Audi adaptive light
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive light
Audi adaptive light provides better visibility when driving in the dark. The lights are adapted to the road conditions based on speed, such as when driving on expressways, rural roads, at intersections, and around curves. The adaptive light only functions when the automatic headlights are activated.
ZA WARNING
-- Observe the safety precautions and note the
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 135. -- Automatic headlights are only intended to
assist the driver. The driver is still responsible for controlling the headlights and may need to switch them on and off manually depending on light and visibility conditions. For example, fog cannot be detected by the light sensors. So always switch on the low
beams ZO under these weather conditions
and when driving in the dark.

@) Tips

-- If the vehicle battery has been discharging

for a while, the parking light may switch off

automatically. Avoid using the parking

lights for several hours.

-- When using lighting equipment, the driver

is responsible for adhering to any local ap-

plicable regulations while driving and when

parking the vehicle.

-- Only the front headlights turn on when the

daytime running lights are switched on*. In

vehicles in certain markets, the tail lights

will also turn on.

-- In cool or damp weather, the inside of the

headlights, turn signals, and tail lights can

fog over due to the temperature difference

between the inside and outside. They will

clear shortly after switching them on. This

OwnersManuals2.com

does not affect the service life of the lighting. -- When the parking lights are switched on and the ignition is switched off, the 2002} symbol appears in the light switch module.
Turn signal and high beam lever
Fig. 36 Operating lever: switching the light functions on and off
The lever operates the turn signals, the high beams and the headlight flasher.
Turn signals (>>
The turn signal will activate when you move the lever into a turn signal position while the ignition is switched on. The respective a or B indicator light flashes. The turn signal blinks three times if you tap the lever (convenience turn signal).
@ Right turn signal
@ Left turn signal
If an indicator light blinks twice as fast as usual,
a turn signal bulb has failed. Carefully drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
High beams 20 and headlight flasher
> Move the lever to the corresponding position: @ High beams on (vehicles with High beam assistant* > page 57) @ High beams off or headlight flasher The =o} indicator light in the instrument cluster will turn on.

[RAZ-1462|

Lights and Vision
ZX WARNING
High beams can cause glare for other drivers, which increases the risk of an accident. For this reason, only use the high beams or the headlight flasher when they will not create glare for other drivers.

ald

Applies to: vehicles with high beam assistant

The high beam assistant automatically turns the
high beams on or off depending on the surrounding conditions.

A camera on the rearview mirror mount can detect light sources from other road users. The high
beams switch on or off automatically depending
on the position of vehicles driving ahead and oncoming vehicles, the vehicle speed as well as other environmental factors and traffic conditions.

Activating high beam assistant a
Requirement: the AUTO light function must be selected and the high beam assistant must be switched on in the MMI > page 52.

> To activate the high beam assistant, tap the lever forward 3) > page 51, fig. 36. The fag in-
dicator light will appear in the instrument cluster display and the high beams will be switched on or off automatically. The Ed indicator light will turn on if the high beams are switched on.

Activating and deactivating the high beam head lights manually
If the high beams did not switch on or off as expected, you may switch them on or off manually instead:

> To activate the high beams manually, tap the lever forward (3) > page 51, fig. 36. The EJ indicator light will turn on.
> To deactivate the high beams manually, pull the lever back@) > page 51, fig. 36. The high
beam assistant is deactivated.

Operating the headlight flasher
> To operate the headlight flashers, pull the lever
back @) > page 51, fig. 36. If the high beam

4KE012721BH

51
OwnersManuals2.com

Lights and Vision
headlights are not switched on, the high beam assistant will remain activated.
ZA\ WARNING
-- Observe the safety precautions and note the
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 135. -- High beam assistant is only intended to as-
sist the driver. The driver is responsible for controlling the high beam headlights and adjusting them to match the lighting and visibility conditions. -- High beams can cause glare for other drivers, which increases the risk of an accident. For this reason, only use the high beams or the headlight flasher when they will not create glare for other drivers.
| G@) Tips
Adhere to any local applicable regulations when using the lighting equipment, for example in regard to reducing glare for other drivers. The driver is always responsible for adhering to the regulations applicable in the country where the vehicle is being operated.
Adjusting the exterior lighting
You can adjust the exterior lighting separately. The settings depend on the vehicle equipment.
» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Light & Visibility > Exterior light-
ing.
Automatic headlights
You can adjust the following settings in the Automatic headlights menu:
Activation time - You can adjust if the headlights
switch on Early, Medium, or Late based on the
sensitivity of the light sensor.
High beam assistant - You can switch the high beam assistant on and off.
Digital Matrix LED functions - You can switch the digital Matrix LED functions on or off"),

Entry/exit lighting The Entry/exit lighting illuminates the area around the vehicle when the vehicle is unlocked or when the driver's door is opened while the ig-
nition is off. The entry/exit lighting works when it is dark and when the AUTO light function is switched on. The front and rear daytime running lights* switch on automatically each time the vehicle is unlocked regardless of how bright it is outside the vehicle. Applies to: vehicles with digital Matrix LED functions: The entry lighting also projects a light animation when the vehicle is unlocked and the driver's door is opened. The exit lighting also starts the light animation when the ignition is switched off. The light animation will appear on surfaces in front of the vehicle when it is dark. You can choose from various color profiles, such as Origami.
Daytime running lights USA models: The daytime running lights can be switched on and off. Canada models: The daytime running lights cannot be switched off. The lights activate automatically each time the ignition is switched on.
Emergency flashers
5
bs
cN|ccye|
Fig. 37 Center console: emergency flashers
The emergency flashers help to make other drivers aware of your vehicle in dangerous situations.
> Press the A (@) button to switch the emergency
flashers on or off.

1) No function assigned in certain countries.
52

OwnersManuals2.com

When the emergency flashers are turned on, the a and B indicator lights will flash at the same time.
You can indicate a lane change or a turn when the emergency flashers are switched on by using the turn signal lever. The emergency flashers stop temporarily.
The emergency flashers also work when the ignition is turned off.
@) Tips
You should switch the emergency flashers on if: -- you are the last car in a traffic jam so that
all other vehicles approaching from behind can see your vehicle -- your vehicle has broken down or you are having an emergency -- your vehicle is being towed or if you are towing another vehicle
Werle
The following messages may appear depending on the vehicle equipment:
If the Ea indicator light turns on, a bulb has failed. The displayed message indicates the cause and possible solutions. If one of the messages remains on, drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
BB) Audi adaptive light: malfunction! See owner's manual
Adaptive light is not working. The headlights still function. Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
Ba Headlight range control: malfunction! See owner's manual
There is a malfunction in the headlight range control system, which may cause glare for other drivers. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.

Lights and Vision
High beam assistant: malfunction! See owner's manual You can still switch the high beams on or off manually. Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
High beam assistant: currently unavailable. Camera view limited due to surroundings. See owner's manual This message appears if the camera's visual field is blocked. The system will switch itself off. Try switching the systems on later. a Automatic headlights: malfunction! See owner's manual The light/rain sensor is malfunctioning. When the AUTO light function is on, the low beams will remain switched on at all times for safety reasons. Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
Interior lighting
Fig. 38 Headliner: interior lighting
Interior lighting buttons ax* -- Interior lighting on/off
4 - Door contact switch on/off. The interior light-
ing is controlled automatically. Touch-sensitive reading lights > To turn a reading light on or off, touch the sur-
face@ briefly.
> To activate the manual dimming function, touch the surface (2) when the light is switched >

4KE012721BH

53
OwnersManuals2.com

Lights and Vision
off and keep touching it until the desired brightness is reached.
Tae a)

@) Tips
Depending on vehicle equipment, when the drive select* function is selected, the color of the contour and surface lighting may briefly change to red or blue when the interior temperature is manually increased or decreased.

Fig. 39 Headliner: reading lights
Reading lights
> To switch the reading lamp on or off, press the
~X button @.
> To activate the manual dimming function*,
touch the surface while the light is switched off "¥@ and keep touching it until the desired brightness is reached.
Interior lighting
Applies to: vehicles with interior lighting
The ambient lighting turns on when the ignition is switched on. The ambient lighting is deactivated when the lights are set to OFF.
You can adjust the ambient lighting separately. The settings depend on the vehicle equipment.
» Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Light & Visibility > Interior lighting.
You can choose from various color profiles, such as Maritime.
Additional settings and profiles:
-- Brightness: you can adjust the brightness for all of the interior lighting.
-- Individual: you can adjust the brightness and color of the interior lighting separately, divided into contour and surface lighting.
-- Audi drive select: the contour and surface lighting color changes depending on the selected drive select* mode.

Display brightness
You can set the instrument and display illumination separately. The settings depend on the vehicle equipment.
> Applies to MMI: select on the home screen: SETTINGS > Display & brightness.
Possible settings in the MMI:
-- Cockpit dimming -- Head-up display --MMI -- Audi virtual cockpit
Vision
NITE Tire ease Ly

RAZ-0150.

Fig. 40 Driver's door: knob for the exterior mirrors

> Turn the knob in the driver's door to the desired Position:

0 - Deactivates all adjustment functions.

Q/ £-Selects the left or right exterior mirror. To adjust the mirror glass in a mirror, press the knob in the desired direction.

GA - Heats* the mirror glass depending on the
outside temperature.

S) - Folds the exterior mirrors*. To fold the mir-

rors out, turn the knob to one of the other

OwnersManuals2.com

positions. In the MMI, you can select if the mirrors fold in automatically when you lock the vehicle > page 34.
Front passenger's exterior mirror tilt function*
Requirement: the knob must be in the position for the front passenger's exterior mirror.
The mirror surfaces tilt slightly when reverse gear is selected to provide a better view, for example of the edge of the curb.
You can adjust the mirror surface by turning the knob in the desired direction.
The mirror moves from the reversing position back to the original position:
-- When you switch the ignition off -- When you drive forward at speeds faster than 9
mph (15 km/h). -- When the knob is no longer in the position for
the front passenger exterior mirror
ZA\ WARNING
Curved mirror surfaces (for example convex) enlarge the field of vision. However, they make objects in the mirror appear smaller and farther away. When using these mirrors to estimate your distance to vehicles behind you when changing lanes, you could estimate incorrectly, which increases the risk of an accident.
@) Note
-- Applies to: vehicles with power folding exterior mirrors: If the mirror housing was moved by outside forces (such as an impact when maneuvering), you must use the power folding function to fold the mirror all the way out. The mirrors will make a loud noise when they latch into place. The mirror housing must not be moved back into place by hand because this could impair the function of the mirror mechanism.
-- Applies to: vehicles without power folding
exterior mirrors: If the mirror housing was
moved by outside forces (such as an impact

Lights and Vision
when maneuvering), you must move it back in place by hand. -- If you wash the vehicle in an automatic car
wash, you must fold the exterior mirrors in
to reduce the risk of damage to the mirrors. Never fold power folding exterior mirrors* by hand. Only fold them in and out using the power controls.
(i) Tips
If the power adjusting function malfunctions, the glass in both mirrors can be adjusted by pressing on the edge of it by hand.
Dimming the mirrors
Automatic dimming rearview mirror
> The interior and exterior mirrors dim automatically when light shines on them, for example from headlights on a vehicle behind you.
ZA WARNING
-- If the glass on an automatic dimming mirror breaks, electrolyte can leak out. This liquid can irritate the skin, eyes and respiratory
system. If there is contact with the fluid,
flush immediately with plenty of water. Consult a physician if necessary. -- Repeated or long-term exposure to electrolyte fluid can lead to irritation of the airways, especially in people with asthma or other respiratory conditions. Take deep breaths immediately after leaving the vehicle or, if this is not possible, open all of the doors and windows as wide as possible. -- If electrolyte fluid comes into contact with the eyes, flush them thoroughly with plenty of clean water for at least 15 minutes and then seek medical attention. -- If electrolyte fluid comes into contact with
the skin, flush the affected area with clean
water for at least 15 minutes, and then clean with soap and water and seek medical attention. Clean affected clothing and shoes thoroughly before wearing again. -- If the fluid was swallowed and the person is conscious, flush the mouth with water for at

4KE012721BH

55
OwnersManuals2.com

Lights and Vision
least 15 minutes. Do not induce vomiting unless this is recommended by medical professionals. Seek medical attention immediately.

Applies to: vehicles with manual sunshade

If the glass on an automatic dimming mirror breaks, electrolyte can leak out. This liquid damages plastic surfaces and paint. Clean this liquid as quickly as possible, for example with a wet sponge.
-- If the light reaching the rearview mirror is obstructed, the automatic dimming mirror
will not function correctly,
--The automatic dimming mirrors do not dim when the interior lighting is turned on or the reverse gear is selected.
Sun visors

Fig. 42 Rear door: sunshade
Rear door sunshade > Pull the sunshade out and attach it to the re-
tainer on the upper door frame.
Windshield wipers
Switching the windshield wipers on

Fig. 41 Roof headliner: sun visor
Sun visor The sun visors can be moved out of their brackets
and turned toward the doors ().
They can also be moved back and forth lengthwise in this position. Vanity mirror The mirror light switches on when the cover over the vanity mirror @) opens.
56

Fig. 44 Lever: rear window wiper
> Move the lever 7 to the corresponding position:
© Windshield wipers off @ Rain sensor/intermittent mode. The windshield wipers switch on once the vehicle speed = >
OwnersManuals2.com

RAZ-0253

exceeds approximately 2 mph (4 km/h) and it is raining. The higher the sensitivity of the rain sensor that is set (switch © to the right), the earlier the windshield wipers react to moisture on the windshield. You can deactivate the rain sensor
mode, which switches the interval mode on. In in-
termittent mode, you can adjust the interval time
using the switch ©).
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Light & Visibility > Rain sensor.
@ Slow wiping
@ Fast wiping
@ Single wipe. If you hold the lever in this position longer, the wipers switch from slow wiping to fast wiping.
© Clean the windshield &. The number of wipes
and afterwipes depends on how long the lever is
held in position @).
The wipers wipe one time after several seconds of driving to remove water droplets. You can switch this function off by moving the lever to position
© within ten seconds of the afterwipe. The after-
wipe function is reactivated the next time you switch the ignition on.
If you hold the lever in position G) for longer than half a second, the edge wiping feature will be activated. This moves the windshield wipers closer to the edge of the windshield and performs an afterwipe to clean the residue that results from the wiping process from the edge of the windshield. The function is available when driving at speeds up to 75 mph (120 km/h).
The headlight washer system* operates only when the low beam headlights are on. If you move the lever to position ©), the headlights and the night vision assist camera* are cleaned at intervals.
@ Wipe the rear window "2. The number of wipes depends on the windshield wiper move-
ment.
The rear wiper automatically switches on when the reverse gear is selected and the front windshield wipers are on and running.

Lights and Vision
Clean the rear window &. The number of wipes depends on how long the lever is held in position (8). This may also clean the rearview camera, depending on the vehicle equipment.
ZA\ WARNING
--The rain sensor is only intended to assist the driver. The driver may still be responsible for manually switching the wipers on based on visibility conditions.
--The windshield must not be treated with water-repelling windshield coating agents.
Under unfavorable conditions, such as wet-
ness, darkness, and when the sun is low, these coatings can cause increased glare, which increases the risk of an accident. They can also cause wiper blade chatter. -- Properly functioning windshield wiper blades are required for a clear view and safe driving > page 58, Cleaning/changing wiper blades.
@) Note
-- If there is frost, make sure the windshield
wiper blades are not frozen to the windshield. Switching on the windshield wipers when the blades are frozen to the windshield can damage the wiper blades.
-- Prior to using a car wash, the windshield
wiper system must be switched off (lever in position @). This prevents the wipers from switching on unintentionally and causing damage to the windshield wiper system.
(i) Tips
-- The windshield wipers switch off when the ignition is switched off. You can activate the windshield wipers after the ignition is switched on again by moving the lever to any position. The single wipe function (lever in position @)) also functions when the igni-
tion is switched off. -- Worn or dirty windshield wiper blades result
in streaking. This can affect the rain sensor function. Check your windshield wiper blades regularly.

4KE012721BH

57
OwnersManuals2.com

Lights and Vision

-- The washer fluid nozzles for the windshield washer system are heated when the ignition is on if the outside temperature is low.
-- When stopping temporarily, such as ata traffic light, the speed of the windshield wipers automatically reduces by one level.

[eGR

Aecucu lu twinper bclatdes

Fig. 45 Windshield wipers: changing the wiper blades
Wiper blade replacement position
> Switch off the ignition and hold the windshield wiper lever in position (4) > page 56, fig. 43 until the windshield wiper moves into the wiper blade replacement position.
> To bring the windshield wipers into the normal position, switch the ignition on and hold the
windshield wiper lever in position @) until the
windshield wipers go back to the original position, or drive faster than 8 mph (12 km/h).
You can also turn the wiper blade replacement position on or off in the MMI: > Switch the windshield wipers off (position ©
=> page 56, fig. 43). » Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
HICLE > Settings & Service > Wiper change position.
Cleaning the wiper blades
Requirement: the windshield wipers must be in the wiper blade replacement position.
> Fold the windshield wiper arm away from the windshield.
> For information on cleaning, see > table on page 271.

B8V-0696|

Replacing the wiper blades
Requirement: the windshield wipers must be in the wiper blade replacement position.
> Fold the windshield wiper arm away from the windshield.
> Hold the wiper blade firmly. > Press the locking knob (a) on the wiper blade. > Remove the wiper blade from the windshield
wiper arm mount @).
> Insert the new wiper blade into the mount on the wiper arm until it clicks into place.
> Place the wiper arm back on the windshield. > Exit the wiper blade replacement position.
Z\ WARNING
-- For safety reasons, the windshield wiper blades should be replaced once or twice each year.
-- Dirty windshield wiper blades can impair vision, which increases the risk of an accident.
CG) Note
-- The windshield wipers must only be lifted up when in the wiper blade replacement position. Otherwise, you risk damaging the paint on the hood or the windshield wiper
motor.
-- You should not move your vehicle or press the windshield wiper lever when the wiper arms are folded up from the windshield. The windshield wipers would move back into their original position and could damage the hood and windshield.
@ Tips
-- You can also use the wiper blade replace-
ment position for other reasons, for exam-
ple if you want to protect the windshield from icing by using a cover. -- You cannot activate the wiper blade replacement position when the hood is open.

OwnersManuals2.com

RAZ-0637,
BFV-0288

Cleaning/changing the rear wiper blade

Lights and Vision
by the rain sensor using the windshield wiper lever. Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
Digital compass
Switching the compass on and off
Applies to: vehicles with digital compass

Fig. 46 Rear window wiper: installing the wiper blade
Cleaning the wiper blades
> Fold the wiper arm away from the rear window. >» For information on cleaning, see > table on
page 271.
Removing the wiper blade
> Fold the wiper arm away from the rear window. > Remove the wiper blade from its holder.
Installing the wiper blade
> Press the wiper blade mount into the retainer. > Fold the window wiper arm back onto the rear
window.
ZA WARNING
For safety reasons, the windshield wiper blades should be replaced once or twice each year.
Messages
The following messages may appear depending on the vehicle equipment:
If the S&S indicator light turns on, then there is a windshield wiper malfunction. The message that is also displayed indicates the cause and possible solutions. If one of the messages does not turn
off, drive immediately to an authorized Audi
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
a Automatic wipers: malfunction! See owner's manual
The light/rain sensor is malfunctioning. You can still control all functions that are not controlled

a
Fig. 47 Rearview mirror: digital compass is switched on
> To turn the compass on or off, press the button @ until the compass display in the mirror turns on or off.
The digital compass only works when the ignition is turned on. The directions are indicated with abbreviations: N (north), NE (northeast), E (east), SE (southeast), S (south), SW (southwest), W (west), NW (northwest).
@ Tips
To prevent inaccurate compass readings, do not bring any remote controls, electrical devices or metallic objects near the mirror.
s9
OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

Lights and Vision
Adjusting the magnetic zone
Applies to: vehicles with digital compass

BFV-0293

Fig. 48 Magnetic zone map
The magnetic zone must be adjusted correctly for the compass to read accurately.
> Press and hold the button @) > page 59, fig. 47 until the number of the magnetic zone appears in the interior rearview mirror.
> Press the button (@) repeatedly to select the correct magnetic zone. The selection mode turns off after a few seconds.
Calibrating the compass
Applies to: vehicles with digital compass
You must recalibrate the compass if it does not display the correct direction. > Press and hold the button @ until aC
=> page 59, fig. 47 appears in the rearview mirror. > Drive in a circle at about 6 mph (10 km/h) until a direction is displayed in the rearview mirror.
To reduce the risk to yourself and other drivers, calibrate the compass in an area where there is no traffic.
60

OwnersManuals2.com

Sitting correctly and safely
Correct passenger seating position
General information
As the driver, you are responsible for making sure every passenger is sitting correctly in their seat and maintaining this seating position while driving. Make sure that:
-- Every passenger in the vehicle has adjusted his or her seat correctly > page 67
-- The steering wheel is adjusted correctly => page 64
--The mirrors are adjusted so that there is a sufficient view of the area around the vehicle => page 54
-- Every passenger in the vehicle has his or her head restraint adjusted correctly > page 65
-- Every passenger in the vehicle has his or her safety belt fastened correctly > page 66
--The activation status of the front passenger's airbag is suitable for the passenger in the front passenger's seat > page 72
-- Children are secured in suitable child safety seats that are secured to appropriate vehicle seats > page 74. Read and observe the important safety information pertaining to the use of child safety seats on the front passenger's seat => A\ in General information on page 74.
Examples of incorrect seating positions
Safety belts can only provide its optimal protection when they are routed correctly. Incorrect seating positions significantly reduce the protective functions of the safety belts and increase the risk of injury due to incorrect belt routing.
The following list includes examples of seating positions that could be dangerous for all vehicle occupants. This is not a complete list. Audi would simply like to increase your awareness of the topic. The following points apply when the vehicle is in motion:
-- Never stand inside the vehicle. -- Never stand on the seats.

Sitting correctly and safely
-- Never kneel on the seats. -- Never tilt your backrest too far back. -- Never lean against the instrument panel. -- Never lie down on the rear bench seat. -- Never sit only on the front section of the seat. -- Never sit sideways on the seat. -- Never lean against the window. -- Never place your feet out of the window. -- Never place your feet on the instrument panel. -- Never place your feet on the seat cushion. -- Never ride in the footwell. -- Never sit on the armrests. -- Never drive or ride in a seat without fastening
your safety belt. -- Never ride in the luggage compartment.
ZA\ WARNING
Incorrect seating positions, failure to wear a safety belt, or being too close to an airbag increase the risk of serious or fatal injury to vehicle occupants, especially if the airbags deploy and come into contact with occupants who are not seated correctly. Note the important information and warnings in the chapters for the topics given above.
G) Tips
-- Save your seat profile* > page 69. This allows you to access your personal seat profile quickly and easily at any time.
-- If you or other vehicle passengers have physical limitations that prevent sitting in a correct position, modifications to the vehicle may be necessary. For more information, contact an authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility, or call Audi customer support at 1-800-822-2834.
Front seats
General information
Make sure that:
-- You can press the pedals down completely while your legs are slightly bent

4KE012721BH

61
OwnersManuals2.com

Sitting correctly and safely
-- The distance between your upper body and the steering wheel or instrument panel is at least 10 inches (25 cm)
-- The distance between your knees and the instrument panel is at least 4 inches (10 cm)
-- Your thighs are lightly supported by the front surface of the seat
-- The backrest is in an upright position and your back is resting against it
-- You have a sufficient view of the area around the vehicle
-- You have a clear view of the instrument cluster, indicator lights, and the head-up display*
Seat settings menu: quick access
Applies to: vehicles with seat settings in the MMI
If you press on the image of the driver's or front passenger's seat in the climate control system menu > page 86, fig. 79 @), you will go directly to the seat settings for that seat.
Z\ WARNING
-- If you are too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel, the airbag system cannot provide the optimal protection, which increases the risk of injury and death.
--To reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking maneuvers or accidents, never drive with the backrest reclined very far. The airbag system and safety belts can only provide optimal protection when the backrest is in an upright position and the driver is wearing the safety belt correctly. If the backrest is angled back too far, the safety belt can shift to soft areas of the body, such as the stomach, which increases the risk of injury.
--To reduce the risk of an accident, only adjust the seats when the vehicle is stationary.
-- Be careful when adjusting the seat. Lack of control or attention when adjusting can result in injuries due to pinching to vehicle occupants both in the front seats and rear
seats.
-- Never place objects in the driver's footwell. Objects could shift and enter the area around the pedals, which could prevent you from using them. You would then be unable
62

to use the pedals if sudden driving or brak-
ing maneuvers were needed, which increases the risk of an accident.
-- Make sure that the floor mats are always securely attached.
--To reduce the risk of an accident, never place additional floor mats or other floor covers
over the installed floor mats, because this
reduces the pedal's range of motion and can impair pedal operation. --To reduce the risk of injury, never place your feet on the instrument panel, out of the
window, or on the seat surfaces. This also applies to passengers in the rear seats.
@) Note
To reduce the risk of damage, be very careful when adjusting the seat to make sure the head restraints do not come into contact with the headliner or the sunroof*.
G) Tips
At the same time, only move the respective seat using the controls.

Neto mat mie

ON lart ra)

Fig. 49 Front seat: seat adjustment buttons
You can adjust the basic settings using the but-
tons.
The settings depend on the vehicle equipment.
Adjusting the seat position
> To move the seat forward or backward, push
the button (@--) forward or backward.

OwnersManuals2.com

> To adjust the seat upward or downward, push the rear section of the button @ upward or downward.
> To adjust the seat surface, press the front part of the button @) upward or downward.
Adjusting the backrests
> To move the backrest forward or backward,
press the button (2) forward or backward.
Adjusting the lumbar support > To adjust the lumbar support, press the button
@ in the desired direction.
Massage function Switching the massage function on or off (@). Setting the massage type and intensity > page 63.
ZX WARNING
The power front seats can also be adjusted when the ignition is switched off. To reduce the risk of injury, children should never be left unattended in the vehicle.
sting the
Applies to: vehicles with seat settings in the MMI a83inScely|cd|
Fig. 50 Seat setting
You can adjust additional settings in the MMI. The settings and the number of menus and buttons depend on the vehicle equipment. Operating
Applies to: MMI
> Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Seats. > To access the various menus ®, swipe to the
left or right.
> To display the various seats, press ) or (@).
The red coloring in the symbolG) indicates which seat is selected.

Sitting correctly and safely
Seat setting
Applies to: MMI
> To select a seat setting, press (@) if necessary. > Press the respective arrow (2) until the desired
position is reached.
Massage See > page 63
Additional seat settings See > page 63

Front seat massage function
Applies to: vehicles with massage function
Selecting the massage function
Applies to: MMI
> To open the Massage menu, press the J button @ > page 62, fig. 49.
Switching the massage function on or off
Applies to: MMI
> To switch the massage function on or off, press
the J button @ © page 62, fig. 49. Or:
> Press Start/Stop on the MMI.
Setting the massage type and intensity
Applies to: MMI
> To adjust the massage type, press the desired
button on the MMI, for example Wave.
> To adjust the intensity of the massage, press Intensity on the MMI repeatedly until the desired level is reached.
(i) Tips
The massage function switches off automatically after approximately 10 minutes.

Additional settings in the MMI

You can adjust additional settings and switch functions on or off in the MMI.
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Seats > Additional seat settings.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow-

ing options may be available.

4KE012721BH

63
OwnersManuals2.com

Sitting correctly and safely
Reset seat position You can adjust the position of the front passenger's seat to match the driver's seat.
Driver seat entry assistance/Front passenger seat entry assistance Entry assistance makes it easier to enter or exit the vehicle.

PNT Miele Sale aes S| ag

Anas

a eT

Applies to: vehicles with front passenger seat adjustment

You can adjust the front passenger's side with the driver's seat buttons.

Applies to: MMI:

> Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Seats.
> To display the various seats, press ) or ¢.
> To switch on the function, press the 2/ button. The lower edge of the button will turn red.

After you have switched on the function, you can adjust the front passenger's seat using the driver's seat buttons > page 62, fig. 49.

@ Tips
The function switches off automatically when you exit the menu.

eae Cerne
Applies to: vehicles with a front center armrest
The front center armrest is located between the front seats.
Adjusting the center armrest
> To adjust the armrest forward or backward, move the armrest in the desired direction.
> To adjust the angle, raise the armrest from the starting position in stages.
> To bring the armrest back into the starting position, raise it out of the top level and fold it back down.
ZA\ WARNING
In certain positions, the front center armrest can interfere with the driver's arm movement,
which increases the risk of injury.

Steering wheel
General information
Make sure that: -- The distance between your upper body and the
steering wheel is at least 10 inches (25 cm) -- Your arms are bent slightly at the elbows -- You have a sufficient view of the area around
the vehicle and you have a clear view of the instrument cluster and head-up display". -- You are always holding the steering wheel with both hands on the outer edge at the sides (9:00 and 3:00 position) when driving
Z\, WARNING
--To reduce the risk of an accident, make sure the steering wheel is adjusted correctly and cannot be moved out of position before you start to drive.
-- If you are too close to the steering wheel, the driver's airbag cannot provide optimal protection, which increases the risk of injury or fatality.
-- Never hold the steering wheel in the 12:00 position or in any other way, such as holding the center of the steering wheel. Otherwise, your arms, hands, and head could be injured in the event that the driver's airbag deploys.
Power steering wheel position adjustment
Fig. 51 Steering column: switch for adjusting the steering wheel position
The steering wheel position can be adjusted electrically up/down and forward/back.

BFY-0110

OwnersManuals2.com

B4G-0454
[RAZ-0683]

> To adjust the steering wheel, press the button in the direction in which you would like the steering wheel to move.
The steering wheel can also be adjusted when the ignition is switched off.
Head restraints
General information
Applies to: vehicles with adjustable head restraints

Sitting correctly and safely
Front head restraints
Applies to: vehicles with adjustable head restraints

Fig. 52 Correctly-adjusted head restraint
Make sure that:
-- The upper edge of the head restraint is as even as possible with the top of your head
-- The head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head
-- The head restraints on the occupied rear seats are positioned as high as possible.
ZX WARNING
-- There is one head restraint for each seat. All vehicle occupants must adjust the head restraint correctly before every trip. Having head restraints that are not adjusted correctly or not installed in the vehicle increases the risk of a neck injury during sudden or unexpected driving or braking maneuvers or in a collision.
-- Only remove the rear seat head restraints if it is necessary to install a child safety seat = page 74. Stow the removed head restraints securely, for example in the luggage compartment. Reinstall the head restraints immediately once the child safety seat has been removed. Driving without head restraints increases the risk of serious neck injuries.

Fig. 53 Front seat: adjusting the head restraint
Adjusting the head restraints
> To adjust the head restraint upward or forward, slide it until it locks into place.
> To adjust the head restraint downward or backward, press the button on the side and slide the head restraint. Release the button and slide the head restraint farther until it locks into place.
Rear head restraints
Applies to: vehicles with adjustable head restraints

Fig. 54 Rear seat: adjusting or removing the head restraint

Adjusting the head restraints
> To adjust the head restraint upward, slide it until it locks into place.
> To adjust the head restraint downward, press the button @) and slide the head restraint. Release the button and slide the head restraint farther until it locks into place.

Removing the head restraints
Applies to: vehicles with removable head restraints

> Applies to: vehicles with folding backrests: Fold

the backrest forward slightly > page 84.

> Move the head restraint upward all the way.

65
OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

Sitting correctly and safely
> Insert a suitable object, such as the extended
vehicle key or mechanical key, into the release point (@) on the inside or outside of the base. > Press the button @) and pull the head restraint out of the backrest > A\ in General information on page 65.
Installing the head restraints
Applies to: vehicles with removable head restraints
> Fold the backrest forward slightly > page 84. >» Slide the posts on the head restraint down into
the guides until the posts click into place. > Press the button @) and slide the head restraint
all the way down. It should not be possible to remove the head restraint from the backrest without pressing the button.
Safety belts
Each seat is equipped with a three-point safety belt. Safety belts that are worn correctly are the most effective way to reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries in a collision. Therefore, wear your safety belt correctly and make sure that all vehicle passengers are also wearing their safety belts correctly when the vehicle is moving.
Even though your vehicle is equipped with an airbag system, every vehicle passenger must still always wear the appropriate safety belt. In addition to their normal protective function, safety belts also hold vehicle occupants in the correct seating position in the event of a collision so that the airbags can deploy correctly and provide additional protection. Safety belts provide protection during collisions when the airbags do not deploy or if they have already deployed.
ZA WARNING
The risk of serious or fatal injury increases if
the safety belt is not fastened, if it is worn in-
correctly, or if it is damaged. --All vehicle occupants, including the driver,
must fasten their safety belts correctly before every trip and must always keep their safety belts fastened during the trip, regardless of whether the seat is equipped
66

with an airbag or not. This also applies to children that are seated in a child safety seat that is appropriate for their weight and age and that is secured with a safety belt. In the event of a collision, vehicle occupants that are not wearing safety belts could be propelled through the vehicle interior and collide with vehicle components, such as the steering wheel, instrument panel, windshield, or doors. In some situations, vehicle occupants could also be ejected from the vehicle. Vehicle occupants in the rear seats who do not wear safety belts not only endanger themselves, but also other people in the vehicle. Only one person may be fastened with a safety belt at a time. Never secure more than one person, including children, with a single safety belt. Never allow children or infants to ride on another person's lap and be belted into the safety belt with them. Insert the belt buckle only in the belt latch belonging to the corresponding seat, so that the protective function is not impaired. To ensure the maximum protective function of the safety belts, all vehicle passengers must sit in the correct seating position => page 67. Check the condition of your vehicle's safety belts regularly > page 277. If you find damage to the belt webbing, the belt connections, the retractor, or the buckle, have the damaged safety belt replaced by an author-
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. The safety belts must not be removed or
modified in any way. Do not attempt to repair the safety belts yourself. Safety belts that are strained during an accident must be replaced by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

Correct safety belt positioning
Fig. 56 Safety belt positioning for pregnant women
Fastened safety belts only offer optimal protection during an accident and reduce the risk of serious injury or death when they are positioned correctly. Furthermore, the correct safety belt position holds the vehicle occupant in place so that a deployed airbag can provide maximum protection. Therefore, always fasten the safety belt and make sure it is positioned correctly > fig. 55. To ensure the safety belt is positioned correctly, make sure of the following points: --The lap portion of the safety belt must be locat-
ed across the lap. --The shoulder portion of the safety belt must
rest over the center of the shoulder. -- The safety belt must always rest flat and se-
curely on the body. For pregnant women, the safety belt must rest evenly across the chest and as low and flat as possible on the lap, so that no pressure is applied to the lower abdomen. This should be done throughout the entire pregnancy > fig. 56.

RAZ-0696

B4H-0751

Sitting correctly and safely
ZA WARNING
Incorrect safety belt positioning can cause serious injury in the event of an accident or during sudden braking or driving maneuvers. -- Never drive with the backrest reclined ex-
tremely far. The more the backrest is tilted back, the greater the risk of injury due to the safety belt being routed incorrectly. -- The safety belt itself or a loose safety belt can cause serious injuries if it shifts onto soft areas of the body, such as the stomach. -- The shoulder portion of the safety belt must lie over the center of the shoulder and chest, and never under the arm, behind the
back, or across the neck or face.
-- The lap portion of the safety belt must lie across the lap and never over the stomach.
--The safety belt must lie flat and securely on the upper part of the body and the lap.
-- The belt webbing must not be pinched or twisted, or rub against sharp edges.
-- If the safety belt height is set incorrectly and/or the safety belt is routed incorrectly, then the safety belt's protective function will be impaired in the event of an accident. Make sure the safety belt is at the right height and is routed correctly for the passenger using it.
-- A safety belt that is too loose may lead to injuries during an accident, because your body will move farther forward due to kinetic energy and will be stopped abruptly by the belt.
-- Heavily bulky, loose clothing (for example, a coat over a sports jacket) may prevent the seat and safety belts from functioning correctly.
-- Do not position the safety belt over hard or breakable objects (such as glasses, pens, etc.).
--The lap belt portion of the safety belt must sit as low as possible on the lap of pregnant women and lie flat under the belly.
() Note
Make sure that there are no hook-and-loop fasteners or sharp objects such as zippers or >
67
OwnersManuals2.com

Sitting correctly and safely rivets on clothing in the area where the safety belt is worn. Otherwise, the safety belt could be damaged. Cm cele mt La mre
Fig. 57 Belt buckle and belt latch

en ah

| B4H-0462

fastened while driving. There may be additional audible warning signals.
Depending on the equipment, the safety belts in the rear may also be monitored using the following indicator lights:
a - If this indicator light turns on, the safety belt for the corresponding rear seat is not fastened.
Ba - If this indicator light turns on, the safety belt for the rear seat has been fastened.
Adjusting the height of the safety belt

B4G-0004

B4H-0270

Fig. 58 Releasing the belt buckle from the belt latch
Observe the safety precautions > page 66.
Fastening the safety belt > Pull the safety belt by the belt buckle evenly
across your chest and lap. > Insert the belt buckle in the belt latch belong-
ing to the seat until it audibly engages
fig. 57.
> Pull on the belt to make sure that the belt is securely locked in the latch.
Unfastening the safety belt » Press the red button on the belt latch > fig. 58.
The belt buckle will pop out. > Guide the belt back by hand so that the safety
belt can roll up more easily.
Safety belt monitoring system
Bg - If the indicator light turns on or flashes, a front safety belt is not fastened or it has been un-

Fig. 59 Belt height adjustment for the front seats - safety belt relay
> To move the belt higher, slide the safety belt re-
lay @ upward.
> To move the belt lower, press the release but-
ton @) and slide the safety belt relay @) down-
ward. > To check if the safety belt relay is securely
locked in place, pull firmly on the belt.
G) Tips
You can also adjust the height of the front seats to change the position of the safety belts.

Xe sali

a delay

Belt retractor lock
The safety belts on the rear seats and on the front passenger seat are equipped with a belt retractor lock.

> If you secure a child safety seat with a safety belt, the belt retractor lock on the safety belt >

OwnersManuals2.com

may need to be activated. Follow the instructions from the child safety seat manufacturer. > When a vehicle passenger has fastened a safety
belt, the belt retractor lock should not be activated. If the belt retractor lock has been acti-
vated unexpectedly, deactivate it.
Deactivating or activating the belt retractor lock => page 77.
Safety belt retractor
The safety belts are equipped with an automatic belt retractor. This automatic retractor allows the safety belt to be pulled all the way out when the belt is pulled slowly. However, the automatic retractor locks during sudden braking maneuvers. It also locks the belts when accelerating, driving uphill, and driving around curves.
Belt force limiter
Safety belts with belt force limiters reduce the force placed on the body by the safety belts during a collision.
Belt retractor
After unfastening the safety belt, the electric motor in the reversible belt tensioner will roll the belt up.
Safety belt pretensioners
Safety belts may be tightened with reversible belt tensioners when you start driving and in certain driving situations. If the safety belt is too loose, it will be tightened so that the belt will rest closer to the body.
In some collisions, pyrotechnic belt tensioners may secure the safety belts so that they cannot loosen. This reduces forward movement by the vehicle passengers.
ZA\ WARNING
The pyrotechnic system can only provide protection during one collision. If the pyrotechnic belt tensioners deploy, the pretensioning system must be replaced by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.

Sitting correctly and safely
@) Tips Smoke may be released when pyrotechnic belt tensioners deploy. This is not a sign of a vehicle fire.
Memory function
General information
Applies to: vehicles with memory function
With the memory function, you can save and call up seat profiles using the memory buttons in the door trim panel.
Depending on vehicle equipment, some settings such as the driver's seat and exterior mirror position can be stored.
Storing and recalling a seat profile
Applies to: vehicles with memory function
The memory function buttons are located in the door trim panel.
Storing a seat profile
>» Press the [SET] button. If the LED in the button turns on, a seat profile can be stored.
> Push one of the numbered memory buttons. A tone confirms that the settings were stored.
Accessing a seat profile
> While the driver's or front passenger's door is open and the ignition is switched off, press the memory button once briefly. The seat will be fully adjusted to the settings in the seat profile.
> If the driver's/front passenger's door is closed or the ignition is switched on, press and hold the memory button until the seat profile is completely set.
ZA WARNING
-- To reduce the risk of an accident, the seat
setting can only be recalled when the vehicle is stationary. -- In an emergency, the recall process can be canceled by pressing the seat adjustment button on that seat.

4KE012721BH

69
OwnersManuals2.com

Sitting correctly and safely
Airbag system
(erreur lela)
ZA\ WARNING
-- If you have not fastened your safety belt, you are in an incorrect seating position, or you are too close to the airbag system, the airbag system will not be able to protect you. This increases the risk of serious or fatal injuries. Make sure that every vehicle passenger has their safety belt correctly fastened and is sitting in a correct seating position = page 67. This is necessary regardless of whether the seat is equipped with an airbag or not.
-- Never place your feet on the instrument panel, out of the window, or on the seat surfaces. To help ensure that the airbag system can deploy correctly, never bend forward or lean on the door or the side window. Otherwise, serious and possibly fatal injuries can occur if the airbags deploy.
-- People, animals, or objects between the
passengers and the airbag system can interfere with the correct deployment of the airbag or can be thrown through the vehicle interior, increasing the risk of serious or fatal injuries. Make sure that nothing is located between the vehicle occupants and the air-
bag system. Do not secure or transport any objects within the deployment zone of the
airbag systems, especially on the steering wheel, on the instrument panel, on the doors, on the windows, or in the footwell. -- Never put stickers on the airbag system covers or cover them with any objects. -- Only lightweight clothing should be hung from the garment hooks in the vehicle. Do not use clothes hangers to hang clothing. The pockets of the clothing must not contain any heavy, breakable, or sharp-edged objects. This could impair the effectiveness of the side curtain airbags.
-- You must not use seat or protective covers
that are not specifically approved for use on Audi seats with side airbags. Since the side airbags deploy from the seat backrest, such
70

covers could impair the protective function of the side airbags. -- Damage to the original seat covers in the airbag deployment area must always be repaired by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. -- Airbag system components are installed at various locations in your vehicle. Incorrect work or repairs on the vehicle could damage the airbag system components or impair their functionality. This may prevent the airbags from deploying or cause them to deploy incorrectly in the event of an accident, which increases the risk of serious or fatal injuries. Only have an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility make repairs or modifications to a vehicle.
-- The airbag system can only provide protection during one collision. If there is another collision, the airbag system will not deploy again. If the airbag system has deployed, have it replaced immediately by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
-- Fine dust may appear if the airbags deploy. This is completely normal and does not indicate a fire in the vehicle. The fine dust can irritate the skin and mucous membranes in the eyes and can cause difficulty breathing, particularly for individuals who have or have had asthma or other health issues that affect breathing. Exit the vehicle or open the windows or doors to get access to fresh air.
Gi) Tips
If you are transporting children in the vehicle, read the information and follow the safety precautions > page 74.

Safety systems monitoring

The Ea indicator light in the instrument cluster

monitors the safety systems such as the airbags

(including the control modules, sensor, and wir-

ing) and the belt tensioners. It turns on when you

switch the ignition on and turns off after several

seconds.

OwnersManuals2.com

If the indicator light does not turn on when the ignition is switched on, does not turn off after
several seconds, or turns on or flashes while driv-
ing, there may be a malfunction in one of the safety systems. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
Description

Sitting correctly and safely
Z\ WARNING
Have the malfunction in the safety systems inspected immediately. Otherwise, there is a risk that the systems may not activate during
an accident, which increases the risk of seri-
ous or fatal injury.

RAZ-0239

OOOO

Fig. 60 Airbag overview image (enlarged section: deployed airbags)

The locations of the airbags are labeled with "AIRBAG". The following airbags are installed in your vehicle:
Driver's airbag Front passenger's airbag Front and rear side airbags, if applicable Head curtain airbag with ejection mitigation Knee airbags
Airbags offer the best possible protection in your vehicle during an accident when they are used together with safety belts that are fastened correctly, and when passengers are sitting in the correct seating position. Airbags are a supple-

mentary restraint system and do not replace safety belts.
Airbags may deploy during front-impact, side-im-
pact, or rollover accidents.
The deployment area for the airbag system can-
not be defined for every situation, since the cir-
cumstances surrounding accidents can vary widely. Factors that play an important role include the condition of the object that the vehicle hits (hard or soft), the angle of impact, vehicle speed, etc. The deciding factor for the deployment of the airbag system is the deceleration that occurs during an accident. Sensors in the vehicle are designed to detect the severity of an accident in

71
OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

Sitting correctly and safely
conjunction with the control module, and to provide a targeted and timely deployment of the restraint system. If the vehicle deceleration that is measured during an accident is below the specified reference values in the control module, then the airbags will not deploy, even though the vehicle may be severely damaged from the accident. In these cases, the vehicle occupants will be protected by the safety belts if they are fastened and worn correctly.
The deployment of the front passenger's airbag will depend on the occupancy of the seat => page 72.
Each deployed airbag is filled with gas. When this occurs, the airbag covers open and the airbags unfold with great force into the deployment zone within milliseconds. Inflated airbags reduce the movement of passengers wearing safety belts in the direction of the impact and thus help to reduce the risk of injury. They can help to protect the head, upper body, and lap, for example. However, there is the possibility that airbag deploy-
ment can cause injuries.
The airbag system only works when the ignition is turned on.
If you or other vehicle passengers have physical limitations that prevent sitting in a correct posi-
tion, modifications to the vehicle may be necessary. For more information, contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
ty, or call Audi customer support at 1-800-822-2834.
@) Tips
The side curtain airbags in your vehicle have ejection mitigation functions. This reduces the risk of being ejected from the vehicle interior during an accident, especially in the event of a vehicle rollover.

Advanced airbag system
Fig. 61 Headliner: indicator light to display the status of the front passenger's airbag
The Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle has been certified to comply with the requirements of the United States Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208, as well as Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (CMVSS) 208 as applicable at the time your vehicle was manufactured. According to these requirements, the front Advanced Airbag System on the passenger's side has been certified for "suppression" for infants approximately 12 months old and younger, and for "low risk deployment" for children aged 3 to 6 years old (as defined in the standard). The advanced airbag system will activate or deactivate the front passenger's airbag based on the occupancy of the seat. If a front airbag deploys during an accident, the deployment force will adapt to the passenger.
Components The advanced airbag system consists of the following components: -- Front airbags in the steering wheel and in the
instrument panel on the front passenger's side: these can protect the front passengers during an accident -- Passenger occupant detection sensor in the front passenger's seat: this detects if the front passenger's seat is occupied (for example, bya person or a small child in a child safety seat) -- Seat position sensors on the front seats: these determine the distance between the seat and the steering wheel or instrument panel -- Sensors in the front safety belt latch: these detect if the safety belts are fastened

OwnersManuals2.com

-- PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #; ON ® indica-
tor light in the headliner:this indicates if the front passenger's airbag is activated or deactivated - Indicator light in the instrument cluster: this monitors the function of the Advanced Air-
bag System components to ensure they are
functioning correctly
How the components function together
The passenger occupant detection sensor in the front passenger's seat detects if the front passenger's seat is occupied. The passenger occupant detection sensor measures the electrical capacity on the front passenger's seat. The passenger's airbag is activated or deactivated depending on the electrical capacity that is measured.
The passenger's airbag is activated if:
-- The electrical capacity is higher than the threshold stored in the control module
-- The electrical capacity is the same as or greater than the electrical capacity of a typical adult
The passenger's airbag is deactivated if:
-- The electrical capacity is lower than the threshold stored in the control module
-- The electrical capacity is the same as or less than the electrical capacity of a typical oneyear-old child in a child safety seat that has been used for certification in accordance with FMVSS 208
If the front passenger's airbag is activated, the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON @ indicator light will turn on. If the front passenger's airbag is de-
activated, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #;
indicator light will turn on.
The deployment force of the front airbags adapts based on whether or not the safety belt is used and the distance between the seat and the steering wheel/instrument panel. For example, if a person is too close to the front airbag, the front airbag will deploy with less force to help reduce the risk of injury.

Sitting correctly and safely
Meaning of PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 3%, ON
® indicator light
When the ignition is switched on, the system detects whether the front passenger's seat is occupied. PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #;, ON @ will turn on for several seconds during this process. Then it will indicate whether the front passenger's airbag is activated or deactivated.
-- PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 8%: the front passenger's airbag is deactivated and will not deploy in the event of an accident.
-- PASSENGER AIR BAG ON ®: the front pas-
senger's airbag is activated and could deploy in the event of an accident.
If a change to the occupancy status of the front passenger's seat is detected PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #; ON @ will flash for several seconds and will then display the status of the front passenger's airbag.
Always make sure the indicator light corresponds to the occupancy of the front passenger's seat.
-- An adult or individual of similar size in the front passenger's seat: the front passenger's airbag must be activated, therefore
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON @ must remain
turned on. -- An individual of smaller size (for example, an
adolescent or small adult) in the front passenger's seat: the front passenger's airbag must be activated, so PASSENGER AIR BAG ON ® must stay on. -- Child in a child safety seat on the front passenger's seat: the front passenger's airbag must be deactivated, so PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #; must stay on. -- Front passenger's seat not occupied: the front passenger's airbag must be deactivated, so
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF &#; must stay on.
Z\ WARNING
-- An adult or a person with a small stature (such as a young person or small adult) seated on the front passenger's seat will not be protected by the passenger's airbag in the event of a collision if the passenger's airbag

4KE012721BH

73
OwnersManuals2.com

Sitting correctly and safely
is deactivated. This increases the risk of injury and death. Always make sure that
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON @ remains on while driving. If
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON @ does not
turn on, make sure the front passenger is sitting correctly in the seat > page 67 and that there is nothing covering the front passenger's seat (such as blankets or pillows). If PASSENGER AIR BAG ON @ still does not turn on, the front passenger's seat must not be used. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility and have the airbag system inspected. ---Achild in a child safety seat on the front passenger's seat - especially in a rear-facing child safety seat - can receive a severe impact if the front passenger's airbag deploys, which increases the risk of serious or fatal injury. Always secure child safety seats on the rear seats. If special circumstances require the use of a child safety seat on the front passenger's seat, always make sure that PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF %; stays on while driving. If PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #¥; does not
turn on, remove the child safety seat and in-
stall it again according to the child safety seat manufacturer instructions. If PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF &%; still does
not turn on, the front passenger's seat must
not be used. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility and have the airbag system inspected. -- Fluids, electronic devices, or mechanical damage on the front passenger's seat may cause the front passenger seat occupant detection to malfunction. The system may then incorrectly detect if the front passenger's seat is occupied. As a result, it could deploy the front passenger's airbag incorrectly or fail to deploy it, which increases the risk of serious or fatal injury. Make sure that no wet objects (such as a wet hand towel) and no fluids come into contact with the front passenger's seat cushion. If the front passenger's seat becomes wet, dry it immediately. Make sure no electronic devices (such
74

as a laptop or a retrofitted seat heater) are
on the front passenger's seat. Do not trans-
port any objects on or under the front passenger's seat.
-- Seat covers or protective covers may prevent
the advanced airbag system from correctly detecting child safety seats or passengers in the front passenger's seat. You must not use
seat covers or protective covers on the front
passenger's seat that are not specifically approved for use on Audi seats with an advanced airbag system.

Child safety seats

General information

When installing and using child safety seats, fol-
low the information in this Owner's Manual, the
applicable state and federal regulations, and the manufacturer instructions for the child safety seat.

You can also obtain useful and current information from the following sources:

U.S. National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
http://www.nhtsa.gov http://www.safercar.gov

National SAFE KIDS Campaign http://www.safekids.org

SafetyBeltSafe U.S.A. http://www.carseat.org

Transport Canada Information Centre http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety

Audi Customer Experience Center https://www.audiusa.com/help/contact-us https://www.audi.ca/ca/web/en/models/layer/
contact.html

Z\ WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries,

children must always be secured in the vehicle

with a child safety seat that is appropriate for

their body size, weight, and age.

-- Children ages 12 and under must be trans-

ported using the appropriate child safety

OwnersManuals2.com

seat. Note differences in regulations be-
tween states and countries.
-- Child safety seats secured incorrectly in the vehicle may cause serious or fatal injuries in the event of an accident. Always secure the child safety seat according to the manufacturer instructions.
-- Children or babies must not under any cir-
cumstances be held on the lap of the driver or other passengers while driving.
-- Do not secure more than one child in a child safety seat.
-- Never allow a child to sit in a child safety seat unsupervised.
-- Never allow children to ride unsecured in the vehicle or to stand or kneel on the seats while driving. In the event of an accident, a child could be propelled through the vehicle. This can cause serious or fatal injuries for the child and passengers.
-- If children use an incorrect seating position while driving, they have a higher risk of injury during a sudden braking maneuver or accident. This especially applies to children in the front passenger's seat or children who have their head near the side airbag deployment area, if the airbag system is deployed during an accident. This incorrect seating
position can cause severe or even fatal inju-
ries.
-- Make sure there is enough space in front of the child in the child safety seat. If necessary, adjust the angle and position of the seat in front of the child safety seat.
-- The rear side of a forward-facing child safety seat should be positioned as close as possible to the backrest on the vehicle seat. If the head restraints make it difficult to install a child safety seat, adjust or remove them if necessary > page 65. Reinstall the head re-
straints immediately once the child safety seat has been removed.
-- Always make sure that the backrest on the seat where the child safety seat is installed is securely locked in place and cannot move forward. Otherwise, the backrest where the child safety seat is secured could move for-

Sitting correctly and safely
ward in the event of an accident or other emergency situation. -- NEVER use a rear-facing child safety seat on a seat with an ACTIVATED FRONT AIRBAG;
this could cause DEATH or SERIOUS INJURIES
to a CHILD.
-- Always secure child safety seats on the
rear seats. If exceptional circumstances re-
quire the child safety seat to be placed on the front passenger's seat, then the front passenger's airbag must be deactivated. Always make sure that PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 2%; stays on while driving. If PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 2%; does not turn on, remove the child safety seat and install it again according to the child safety seat manufacturer instructions. If PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF %; still does not turn on, the front passenger's seat must not be used. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility and have the airbag system inspected. -- If you must use a forward-facing child safety seat on the front passenger's seat, move the seat as far back as possible so that it is as far as possible from the front passenger's airbag. While doing this, make sure the seat can be adjusted all the way. A child in a child safety seat on the front passenger's seat can receive a severe impact if the front passenger's airbag deploys, which increases the risk of serious or fatal injury.
-- Replace the child safety seat after an accident because there could be damage that is not visible.
-- Even if a child is not sitting in the child safety seat, the child safety seat must be secured. An unsecured child safety seat may be thrown through the vehicle interior during sudden braking maneuvers or an accident.

4KE012721BH

75
OwnersManuals2.com

Sitting correctly and safely
Correct positioning for children
Always secure children in a child safety seat designed for the body size, weight, and age of the child.
You can secure child safety seats in your vehicle using the lower LATCH anchors or the safety belts. You can also secure child safety seats to the top tether anchor. Depending on the child safety seat, it may also be necessary to secure it to the top tether anchor. In Canada, securing forward-facing child safety seats to the top tether anchors is required by law.
Always transport children in the rear seats
Accident statistics show that children that are secured correctly in the rear seats are safer than in front seats. Always transport children in suitable child safety seats secured on the rear seats.
In exceptional circumstances: transporting children in the front passenger's seat
If exceptional circumstances require the child safety seat to be placed on the front passenger's seat, then the front passenger's airbag must be deactivated. Please note the important information for this > page 72, Advanced airbag system. If you must secure a forward-facing child safety seat, move the front passenger's seat as far back as possible so that it is as far as possible from the front passenger's airbag. While doing this, make sure the seat can be adjusted all the way.
Only switch to a larger child safety seat when absolutely necessary
Switch to a larger child safety seat only when absolutely necessary. Secure your child using a safety belt without a child safety seat only if all of the following statements are true:
-- The child is large enough to sit upright in the
seat -- The child is able to sit with his or her back rest-
ing completely on the seat backrest --The child is able to sit with his or her knees
bent over the edge of the seat surface --The child is able to sit with both of his or her
feet completely touching the floor in the footwell
76

-- The lap portion of the safety belt lies flat and securely over the hip area and never over the stomach
-- The shoulder portion of the safety belt lies flat and securely over the center of the shoulder
and the chest, and never under the arm, behind
the back, or over the neck or face. -- The child is able to maintain this seating posi-
tion throughout the entire trip
Read and follow the important information and warnings regarding the correct use of safety belts > page 66.
@) Tips
-- Child safety seats can also be secured to seats with side airbags. In the event of an accident, children can also be protected by the side airbags if the child is correctly secured ina suitable child safety seat that is attached correctly.
-- The lower LATCH anchors as well as the safety belt may be required to correctly install some child safety seats. Using both at the same time is permitted, provided that the fastening systems or safety belts do not impair those in an adjacent seating position.
--All child safety seats are constructed so that they can be secured using the lap safety belt in the vehicle.
-- Child safety seats with a load leg can only be secured to the outer rear seats and to the front passenger's seat.

Yate ema m eae RRM LATCH anchors

CoN le

Fig. 62 Rear bench seat: lower LATCH anchors

Observe the safety precautions > page 74.

OwnersManuals2.com

In the United States and Canada, child safety
seats can be secured without safety belts using the LATCH system. LATCH stands for Lower An-
chors and Tethers for Children. In Canada, similar
systems are called UCRA, LUAS, or UAS.
The lower LATCH anchors in your vehicle are located on the outer seats of the rear bench seat between the seat surface and the backrest. These seating locations each have two lower LATCH anchors that can be used to secure a LATCH child safety seat. Marking points with a > fig. 62 symbol are located on the covers for the lower LATCH anchors. You can locate the LATCH anchors using the marking points.
> Activate the child safety lock > page 44. » Remove the cover from both lower LATCH an-
chors. > If you secure a child safety seat to the rear seat,
secure any unused safety belts that are within reach of the child A\ in Securing child safety seats with a safety belt on page 78. > Secure the child safety seat according to the child safety seat manufacturer instructions. > Pull on the child safety seat to check if both sides are engaged correctly in the LATCH anchors. > If possible, also secure the child safety seat to the respective top tether anchor on the seat => page 78.
Z\ WARNING
The LATCH anchors in the vehicle are only designed for child safety seats with the LATCH system. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injury, never secure other child restraint systems, belts, or objects to the anchors.
© Tips
The LATCH anchors are designed for a total weight (child and child safety seat combined)
up to 65 lbs (29 kg). If the total weight is
greater than this, the child safety seat must be secured with the vehicle safety belt.

Sitting correctly and safely
Securing child safety seats with a safety belt
Observe the safety precautions > page 74. The front passenger's seat is a dangerous location for a child, even with an advanced airbag system. If exceptional circumstances require the child safety seat to be placed on the front passenger's seat, then the front passenger's airbag must be deactivated. Please note the important information for this > page 76, Correct positioning for children and > page 72, Advanced airbag sys-
tem.
Securing child safety seats
» Activate the child safety lock > page 44. > If you secure a child safety seat to the rear seat,
secure any unused safety belts that are within
reach of the child > A\, > page 79.
> If you secure a child safety seat to the front passenger's seat, adjust the front passenger's seat to the highest position.
> Secure the child safety seat according to the child safety seat manufacturer instructions.
> If necessary, activate the belt retractor lock => page 77, Activating the belt retractor lock.
> If the child safety seat is secured on the front passenger's seat, adjust the front passenger's seat backrest until it rests flat against the child safety seat. Also make sure that the upper safety belt fixture is behind the child safety seat.
> If you secure a child safety seat on the rear seat, also secure it to the correct top tether anchor if possible > page 78.
Activating the belt retractor lock
If you secure a child safety seat using the vehicle safety belt, you must activate the belt retractor lock. Follow the child safety seat manufacturer instructions.
The belt retractor lock prevents the safety belt from becoming loose while driving, which could result in the child safety seat no longer being adequately secured.
>» Secure the child safety seat according to the child safety seat manufacturer instructions. While doing so, pull out the safety belt. Insert >

4KE012721BH

77
OwnersManuals2.com

RAZ-0186|

Sitting correctly and safely
the safety belt into the belt latch that belongs to that seat until it audibly locks. > Pull the upper belt out completely and then allow it to retract. You will hear a clicking sound while the belt is retracting. It will not be possible to pull the safety belt out any farther. > Push the child safety seat into the seat and allow the belt to retract more. > Make sure that the child safety seat cannot move more than 1 inch (2.5 cm).
Deactivating the belt retractor lock
> Unbuckle the safety belt from the belt latch. > Remove the child safety seat according to the
manufacturer instructions. > Allow the safety belt to retract completely. The
belt retractor lock is deactivated.
Z\ WARNING
-- A safety belt that is not locked by the belt retractor lock or a locking device cannot secure a child safety seat while driving or in the event of an accident, which increases the risk of fatal injury. Always make sure the belt retractor lock on the safety belt is activated if the child safety seat manufacturer instructions require it.
-- Due to the risk of fatal injury, never place a rear-facing child safety seat on the front passenger's seat when the front passenger's airbag is switched on.
-- For the child safety seat to offer the maximum protection, it is especially important to route the vehicle safety belt correctly. Always follow the instructions from the child safety seat manufacturer for routing the safety belt correctly. Incorrectly fastened safety belts can cause injuries, even during minor accidents.

Additionally securi g a child safety seat to the top tether an
Fig. 63 Rear backrest: top tether anchors to secure a child safety seat with an upper belt
Fig. 64 Rear backrest: securing the upper belt to the top tether anchor
Observe the safety precautions > page 74. There is a top tether anchor behind every seat in the rear bench seat to additionally secure a child safety seat with an upper belt. > Move the head restraint behind the child safety
seat upward.
> Secure the child safety seat according to the child safety seat manufacturer instructions.
> Guide the upper belt on the child safety seat under the head restraint or along both sides of it and toward the rear (depending on the child safety seat model).
» Fasten the belt to the top tether anchor => fig. 64. While doing this, make sure the belt is not twisted and is not running over any sharp edges.
> Pull the belt tightly so that the child safety seat rests at the top of the seat backrest.
> If necessary, move the head restraint behind the child safety seat downward.

OwnersManuals2.com

The top tether anchors in the vehicle are only designed for child safety seats equipped with an upper strap. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injury, never secure other child restraint systems, belts, or objects to the anchors.
Securing unused safety belts on the rear Pratt
NN tC Si Ai NBS -- 5" a7 _ of
Fig. 65 Rear bench seat: securing unused safety belts
If a child safety seat is used on the rear bench
seat, the child must not be able to reach any
safety belts that are not being used. Secure safety belts that are within reach of the child.
> If you secure a child safety seat to the LATCH
anchors, fasten the safety belt on the seat
where the child safety seat is installed using the seat's safety belt latch. > If you secure a child safety seat to one of the
outer seats, fasten the safety belt for the cen-
ter seat in its latch. > Activate the belt retractor lock on the fastened
safety belts. To do this, pull the upper belt out completely and then allow it to retract. You will hear a clicking sound while the belt is retracting. It will not be possible to pull the safety belt out any farther. > Make sure the fastened safety belt does not
block access to the LATCH anchors. Otherwise,
it may not be possible to secure the child safety seat to the LATCH anchors correctly.

Sitting correctly and safely
fatal injury. Always secure unused safety belts so that they are not within reach of children in child safety seats.

4KE012721BH

A child in a child safety seat could play with the unused safety belts and then become entangled in them, which increases the risk of

79
OwnersManuals2.com

Storage and convenience

Storage and convenience Power sources

When the ignition is switched on, you may be
able to use multiple power sources for external devices, depending on the vehicle equipment.

12 volt sockets
You can connect electrical accessories to the 12 volt sockets. The power usage from the sockets must not exceed a total of 120 watts. Do not connect multiple devices to the sockets in the vehicle at the same time.
The 12 volt sockets are labeled with the 12V symbol. They are located in the front center con-
sole, in the rear, and on the side trim panel in the luggage compartment.

USB ports
Applies to: vehicles with USB ports

You can charge mobile devices using the USB ports. Depending on the vehicle, the USB ports may be labeled with one of the following sym-
bols: +, 42, or CHARGE ONLY.

Z\ WARNING

--To reduce the risk of fatal injury, store all connected devices securely when driving so that they do not move around inside the vehicle when braking or in the event of an accident.
-- Incorrect usage can lead to serious injuries
or burns. To reduce the risk of injuries, never
leave children unattended in the vehicle with the vehicle key.

oO Note
-- Read the operating manuals for the connected devices.
--To reduce the risk of damage to the vehicle electrical system, never attempt to charge the vehicle battery by connecting accessories that provide power to the power sources.
-- Do not connect any device whose network class (voltage) does not match the network class designed for the socket.

-- Disconnect the connectors from the power sources carefully to reduce the risk of damaging them.
@ Tips Do not connect any other devices to the sockets when using the compressor* provided by the factory > page 276. The power consumption in the sockets may be temporarily exceeded when using the compressor*.
Cup holders
Applies to: vehicles with cup holders
Fig. 67 Rear center armrest*: cup holders
Cup holders in the front center console > Slide the cover (d) back, if necessary. > Fold the cup holder @) outward. Cup holders in the rear center armrest*
> Fold the center armrest* downward. > To open the cup holders @), tap on the strip on
the cover. > To close the cup holders, slide them back and
push the top of the cover down.

RAZ-1177,

OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

ZN WARNING
-- Do not put any hot beverages in the cup holder while the vehicle is moving. Hot beverages could spill, which increases the risk of injury.
-- Do not use any breakable beverage containers (for example, made out of glass or porcelain). You could be injured by them in the event of an accident.
@) Note Beverage containers in the cup holders should always have a lid. Otherwise, the liquid inside could spill and cause damage to vehicle equipment.
Storage and compartments
Front compartment storage compartment
Fig. 68 Front compartment: storage compartment
There is a compartment in the front compartment for storing objects, such as the charging system. Observe the safety precautions > page 238. > Open the hood > page 239. > To open the storage compartment cover, pull
the lever @) upward.
> Store the objects. > Close the storage compartment cover. It must
lock into place. > Close the hood.

Storage and convenience

Additional storage compartments
Depending on vehicle equipment, there are a variety of storage areas, compartments, and retainers, such as the glove compartment, for safely storing and securing objects.
ZA WARNING
--To reduce the risk of injury, make sure all storage compartments are always closed while driving.
-- Loose objects can be thrown around the vehicle interior during sudden driving or braking maneuvers, which increases the risk of an accident. Store objects securely while driving.
-- Only use the storage compartments in the door trim panels to store small objects that will not stick out of the compartment and impair the function of the side airbags.
-- Only lightweight clothing should be hung from the garment hooks in the vehicle. Do not use clothes hangers to hang clothing. The pockets of the clothing must not contain any heavy, breakable, or sharp-edged objects. This could impair the effectiveness of the side curtain airbags.
-- Make sure your view toward the rear is not blocked, for example by hanging clothing or objects in the vehicle.

Luggage compartment

General information

All pieces of luggage or objects must be securely fastened in the luggage compartment. Note the following to maintain good vehicle handling:
> Distribute the load evenly in the luggage com-
partment.
> Stow heavy luggage as far forward in the luggage compartment as possible.
> Use non-elastic cords attached to the tie-downs to secure objects.

Z\ WARNING

-- Applies to: vehicles with luggage compart-

ment cover: The luggage compartment

81
OwnersManuals2.com

Storage and convenience
cover is not a surface for storing objects. Objects placed on the cover increase the risk of injury to all vehicle occupants during sudden driving or braking maneuvers or in the event of an accident. -- Applies to: vehicles with luggage compartment cover: The luggage compartment cover must always be securely fastened when in use to reduce the risk of an accident. -- Loose objects can be thrown around the vehicle interior during sudden driving or brak-
ing maneuvers, which increases the risk of an accident. Always stow objects securely in
the luggage compartment and secure them at the tie-downs. Use straps suitable for heavy objects. -- If pieces of luggage or objects are secured to the tie-downs with unsuitable or damaged straps, this can increase the risk of injury during braking maneuvers or accidents. -- When transporting heavy objects, the vehicle characteristics will change due to the shift in the center of gravity, which increases the risk of an accident. You may need to adapt your driving style and speed to the current conditions. -- The cargo net* is only strong enough to secure light objects. Heavy objects are not adequately secured. Attempting to secure heavy objects increases the risk of injury. -- Never exceed the permitted axle and load and vehicle weight > page 299. -- Never secure a child safety seat to the tiedowns. -- Never leave your vehicle unattended, especially if the luggage compartment lid is open. Children could enter the luggage compartment and close the luggage compartment lid from the inside. This creates the risk of fatal injury, since the children would be locked inside and may not be able to escape by themselves. -- Do not allow children to play in or on the vehicle. Close and lock the luggage compartment lid as well as all other doors when you leave the vehicle.
-- Never transport passengers in the luggage compartment. Every passenger must be cor-
82

rectly secured with the safety belts in the vehicle > page 66. -- Be careful when releasing the backrest and folding it forward. To reduce the risk of being pinched, pay attention and check when folding backrests forward. -- The backrest must be securely latched so objects cannot slide forward out of the luggage compartment during sudden braking. -- The backrest must be latched securely to ensure that the safety belt is protecting the center seating position. -- Always pull forward on the backrest to make sure it is check if it is correctly locked in place. -- For stability reasons, the bag hooks* can hold a maximum weight of 6.6 Lbs (3 kg). Heavier objects are not adequately secured. There is risk of personal injury.
C) Note
--To reduce the risk of damage, move the rear head restraints down > page 65 before folding the rear backrests forward.
-- When folding the backrest forward, make sure the outer safety belts are in the belt guide recess so that they do not get pinched in the backrest lock and damaged. Other objects should be removed from the rear bench seat to protect the backrest from damage.
-- If you move the front seat back when the
rear seat backrest is folded forward, you
could damage the head restraints on the
rear seat.
-- Make sure that the heating grid strips for the rear window defogger are not damaged by abrasive objects.
-- Applies to: vehicles with manual luggage
compartment cover: Let the luggage com-
partment cover roll up slowly to reduce the risk of damage.
(i) Tips
--The tire pressure must be adapted to the load > page 257.
-- You can purchase straps at specialty stores.

OwnersManuals2.com

Luggage compartment cover
Applies to: vehicles with luggage compartment cover

Storage and convenience
Two-part luggage compartment cover
Applies to: vehicles with two-part luggage compartment cover

Fig. 71 Luggage compartment: luggage compartment lid cover

Fig. 70 Luggage compartment: removing the luggage
compartment cover
Observe the safety precautions > page 87.
> To attach the luggage compartment cover, pull the cover out by the handle (@) and secure it in the mounting eyelets (2) on the side trim panels.
> To remove the luggage compartment cover,
pull both levers () firmly in the direction of the arrow and remove the cover upward. > To install the luggage compartment cover, place the cover in the mounts on the side trim panels on the left and right side. > Push the cover downward until it clicks into place.

Fig. 72 Luggage compartment: cover behind the rear bench seat
Observe the safety precautions > page 87.
Removing and installing the luggage compartment lid cover
> To remove the luggage compartment lid cover @, turn the knob to a horizontal position.
> Pull the cover out of the retainers in the direction of the arrow.
> To install the cover, slide it forward on the re-
tainers until they engage. > Turn the knob to a vertical position.
Removing and installing the cover behind the rear bench seat
> To remove the cover behind the rear bench seat
@, pull the cover in the direction of the arrow.
> Pull the cover upward to release. > To install the cover, insert the left and right
sides of the cover into the mounts on the side trim panel. >» Slide the cover forward until it locks into place.

83
OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

Storage and convenience
Folding the outer backrests
Applies to: vehicles with folding backrests

Folding the center armrest
Applies to: vehicles with folding center armrest

Fig. 73 Outer backrest: release lever and latching indicator with red marking

Observe the safety precautions > page 87.
> To fold the center backrest forward, pull the leve(r@) in the backrest opening.
> After the transport, fold the center backrest up until it locks into place.

Tie-downs

cargo net

Applies to: vehicles with release lever in the luggage com-
partment
Fig. 74 Luggage compartment: release lever
The rear seat backrests can be folded forward either separately or together.
Observe the safety precautions > page 87.
> Pull the release lever (1) or @) in the direction
of the arrow to fold the backrest forward. > After the transport, fold the backrest up again
until it latches and the red marking @) is no longer visible.

stretched out

Observe the safety precautions > page 87.

OwnersManuals2.com

Tie-downs There are tie-downs (J) in the luggage compartment to secure pieces of luggage and objects.
>» Use the tie-downs to secure the cargo.
Cargo net
Applies to: vehicles with cargo net
Light objects can be secured in the luggage com-
partment using the cargo net (2).
> Fold the clip for the tie-downs upward. > Insert the hooks on the cargo net into the tie-
downs.
Cargo floor
Depending on vehicle equipment, there may be a removable box under the cargo floor.
> To remove the cargo floor, pull the entire cargo floor toward the back of the vehicle.
> To insert the cargo floor, lay the cargo floor into the guide and then slide it toward the backrest all the way until it stops.
Roof rack
General information
Applies to: vehicles with roof rack mount

Storage and convenience
-- Make sure the roof rack is mounted on the vehicle only at the specified locations (a).
-- Note the permitted axle load, permitted total weight, and permitted roof load of your vehicle => page 299. The roof load is the total of the weight of the roof rack, the attachments and the cargo you are carrying. However, you must also note the permitted load of the carrier system being used.
Z\ WARNING
-- Follow the installation instructions provided with the roof rack system. If you do not secure the roof rack system and objects on the roof correctly, they could come loose from the vehicle and cause an accident.
--The risk of an accident increases when using a roof rack system, because it changes the driving characteristics by shifting the center of gravity and/or the increasing the surface area exposed to wind. You may need to adapt your driving style and speed to the current conditions.
@) Note
Make sure that the luggage compartment lid and the panoramic glass roof* do not come into contact with objects on the roof when they are open.
@) For the sake of the environment
Energy usage will increase because of the increased wind resistance. Remove the roof rack when you are no longer using it.

Fig. 78 Roof rail: mounting points
If luggage or cargo is to be carried on the roof, you must observe the following:
-- These roof racks are the basis for a complete roof rack system. Only roof racks that are suitable for your vehicle may be used. Audi recommends roof racks and attachments from the Audi Genuine Accessories program.

8s
OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

Warm and cold
Warm and cold
Climate control system
Your vehicle has a deluxe automatic climate control system with four zones where the temperature, air distribution, and amount of air can be adjusted separately at every seat.
The climate control system warms, cools, dehumidifies, and filters the air in the vehicle interior. It is the most effective when the windows and
panoramic glass roof* are closed. If there is a
build-up of heat inside the vehicle, ventilation
can help to speed up the cooling process.
The deluxe climate control system automatically maintains a temperature once it has been set. In all heating mode functions except defrost, the blower only switches to a higher speed once the heater has reached a certain temperature.
Active combination filter
When the fan is running, the filter will reduce particulate matter and the concentration of pollen, as well as odors in the interior.
@ For the sake of the environment
Energy can be saved by switching off the A/C mode.
@ Tips
-- To prevent interference with the heating or cooling output and to prevent the windows from fogging over, the air intake in front of
the windshield must be free of ice, snow,
and leaves. -- Condensation from the cooling system can
drip and form a puddle of water under the vehicle. This is normal and does not mean there is a leak.
-- The energy management system may tem-
porarily switch off certain functions, such as the seat heating" or rear window defogger. These systems are available again as soon as the energy supply has been restored.

uw &
AUTO a] a

aN
a MI
U es aa

Fig. 79 Center console: lower display and switch panel
Settings are adjusted using both displays, the switch panel in the center console, and the control panel in the rear. For information on how to operate the touch displays, see > page 16, Touch displays.
You can adjust all climate control system settings
in the front; only certain functions are available in the rear.
Lower display
The lower display has two sections with controls:
You can regulate the blower and the air distribution automatically using AUTO in area (a). You can also apply individual settings here.
In area Q), you can switch individual climate con-
trol system functions on and off.
Switch panel in the center console
Both the #& and & buttons to defog windows as quickly as possible are located in area @).
Upper display
In the upper display, you can switch additional functions on and off, display them, and adjust settings.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
VEHICLE > Air conditioning, or
> Press «++ on the lower display.
Control panel in rear
You can operate certain climate control functions in the rear using the control panel.

OwnersManuals2.com

Customizing
A climate control function from the upper display can be assigned to each button to the left and
right of +++ in area Q).
> Press and hold the symbol for the desired function on the upper display for at least three seconds. A menu that consists of two sections appears.
> If you pull the symbol toward the left section, the button to the left of «++ will be assigned.
> If you pull the symbol toward the right section, the button to the right of «++ will be assigned.
Press the buttons to turn the functions on or off. One bar in the button or the LED in the button will light up when the function is switched on. Some buttons can have several functions assigned to them. The various functions can be activated by pressing the button multiple times.
AUTO Automatic mode
The automatic mode regulates the amount of air
and air distribution automatically, so that the set temperature is reached is quickly as possible.
REAR Rear climate control system
To enable operation of the climate control system from the rear of the vehicle, press REAR.
To exit this mode again, press REAR or REAR MODE EXIT.
SYNC Synchronization
When synchronization is switched on, the tem-
perature, air distribution, and blower strength on the driver's side is applied to all seat positions.
You can also control the synchronization directly using a gesture. Pull two fingers together on the lower display > page 76.
OFF Switching off
The climate control system is switched off. Air supply from the outside is blocked. If you press OFF in the front, the front and rear climate control system will switch off. If you press OFF in the rear, the rear climate control system will switch

Warm and cold

off. To switch the climate control system back on,
press on any button in the respective display.
A/C/ AL 1 ME Cooling mode
The cooling mode only functions with the blower turned on. The air is not cooled and humidity is not reduced when cooling mode is switched off. This can cause fog on the windows. The cooling mode switches off automatically at low outside
temperatures.
If you activate the A/C, the cooling mode will be automatically regulated.
If you activate 4/, the cooling mode will run with
maximum cooling output and maximum blower speed. To reduce unnecessary energy usage, only use this function briefly.
If you activate 4S, the climate control system will
operate in energy-saving mode.

+ /-Temperature
Temperatures between 60 °F (+16 °C) and 84 °F (+28 °C) can be set. If outside of this range, LOW / LO or HIGH / HI will appear in the display. In both settings, the climate control runs constantly at the maximum cooling or heating level. The temperature is not regulated.

S$ Blower

With \" / A, you can manually adjust the volume of air generated by the blower to your pref-
erences. The blower should always run at a low setting to prevent the windows from fogging and to ensure a continuous exchange of air inside the
vehicle. To have the blower regulated automatically, press AUTO.

2 Air distribution

To prevent the side windows from fogging over,
open the side air vents and angle them toward the side.

With °@ /<>/%, you can select the vents from

which the air will flow. To have the air distribu-

tion controlled automatically, press the AUTO

button or deactivate all three arrows. With "2,

the air will be directed toward the windshield.

4KE012721BH

87
OwnersManuals2.com

Warm and cold
Using the control panel in the rear, you can adjust the air distribution based on the direction of the arrow by pressing the J button multiple times.
® Defrosting
The windshield and side windows are defrosted or cleared of condensation as quickly as possible. Align the outer air vents with the side windows. The maximum amount of air flows mainly from the vents below the windshield. Recirculation mode switches off. The temperature should be set at 72 °F (+22 °C) or higher. Depending on the outside temperature, the A/C cooling mode may automatically switch on.
{ Rear window defogger
The rear window defogger only operates when the drive system is running. It switches off automatically after 10 to 20 minutes, depending on the outside temperature.
To prevent the rear window defogger from switching off automatically, press and hold the & button for more than three seconds. It will remain on until the ignition is switched off.
</&AUTO Recirculation mode
In recirculation mode, the air inside the vehicle is circulated and filtered. This prevents the unfiltered air outside the vehicle from entering the vehicle interior > A\.
Pressing <> switches recirculation mode on or off manually.
When switched on, automatic recirculation A<UsTO controls the recirculation mode automatically. You must press the & button if fog forms on the windows.
«? Seat heating
Applies to: vehicles with heated seats
The seat heating temperature can be set at multiple levels. Press «/ once to switch on the highest level. Press 4? again to decrease the temperature one level at a time. The seat heating is switched off if the button is not illuminated.

®) Seat ventilation
Applies to: vehicles with seat ventilation
The seat ventilation intensity can be set to multiple levels. Press &/ once to switch on the highest level. Press &) again to decrease the heat level one level at a time. The seat ventilation is switched off if the button is not illuminated.
& Child safety lock*
If8 turns on in the control panel in the rear, the
child safety lock is active and operation is blocked => page 44.
9 lonizer
Applies to: vehicles with ionizer
Hazardous particles and germs in the air may be reduced through ionization. This helps to improve the air quality for individuals in the passen-
ger compartment.
&" Fragrance
Applies to: vehicles with fragrance function
The fragrance function will dispense a scent in the vehicle interior. It is dispensed through the front outer vents. This will produce a pleasant scent. The fragrance is time-delayed, especially at low or high temperatures. You can adjust the fragrance function > page 89.
ZA\ WARNING
-- You should not use the recirculation mode for an extended period of time, because no fresh air is drawn in. This can cause the windows to fog, which increases the risk of an accident. The CO2 concentration in the vehicle interior can also increase when recirculation mode is used for long periods of time, which can impair concentration and affect well-being. Switch recirculation mode off and ventilate the vehicle at the first sign of unwellness.
-- Even though fresh air is supplied automatically, using recirculation mode for long periods of time can result in an increased concentration of CO2 in the vehicle interior. This

OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

could impair concentration and affect wellbeing, which can increase the risk of an accident. Switch recirculation mode off at the first sign of unwellness. -- Applies to: vehicles with seat heating: Individuals with reduced sensitivity to pain or temperature could develop burns when using the seat heating function. To reduce the risk of injury, these individuals should not use seat heating.
@) Note
Applies to: vehicles with heated seats
To reduce the risk of damage to the seat heating elements, do not kneel on the seats or place heavy pressure on one area of the seat.
G) Tips
-- Applies to: vehicles with heated seats: If the front passenger's seat heating has been turned on, it will not turn on again automatically if more than 10 minutes have passed between switching the ignition off and on again.
-- Applies to: vehicles with fragrance function: Only use the fragrance function in moderation and take any other passengers and animals into consideration when using the function. An overlap of different scents or odors could cause discomfort. If there is dis-
comfort, reduce the intensity or switch the
fragrance function off. Only use fragrances that are approved by Audi.
Adjusting the vents
You can open and close the vents using the thumbwheels. The levers adjust the direction of the airflow from the vents.
Additional settings
You can adjust additional settings.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
VEHICLE > Air conditioning > ©.

Warm and cold
Fragrance
Applies to: vehicles with fragrance function
Using Fragrance selection, you can select the fragrance and see the fill level of the fragrance. You can select the strength of the scent with Fragrance level.
Footwell temperature
Applies to: vehicles with footwell heating
You can adjust the footwell temperature for the driver and front passenger.
r quality indicator
Applies to: vehicles with air quality display

a Ce Ce

EC ES}

Fig. 80 Upper display: air quality indicator

You can display information about the air quality.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Air conditioning > Air quality.

Active combination filter
Applies to: vehicles without particulate matter sensor
A schematic display represents the effectiveness of the filter. The display visualizes the amount of pollutant particles in the vehicle interior in comparison to the surroundings.

Particulate matter sensor
Applies to: vehicles with particulate matter sensor
A sensor detects the particulate matter concentration (PM2.5) outside and inside the vehicle. The detected values are displayed as the air quality index (AQI) on a colored scale (4). A value in the green range indicates very good air quality.

The system displays the approximate values,

which may differ from actual conditions. In cer-

tain situations, no values or values that appear to

be implausible may be displayed temporarily, or

the system may only be available to a limited ex-

tent:

89
OwnersManuals2.com

Warm and cold
-- in extreme weather conditions -- when the vehicle is stationary --inacar wash -- if an individual smokes or if dust is stirred up in
the vehicle interior -- if fresh air is introduced in order to prevent the
windows from fogging
G) Tips
-- For optimal air quality in the vehicle interior, close all windows and doors and activate A/C cooling mode, the AUTO function, and recirculation mode.
-- Applies to: vehicles with particulate matter sensor: The air quality display only shows the concentration of particulate matter (PM2.5). Other types of air pollution are not displayed.
-- Applies to: vehicles with particulate matter sensor: For technical reasons, the values measured in the vehicle may differ from the values measured by other measuring sys-
tems.
Steering wheel heating
Switching on and off
Applies to: vehicles with steering wheel heating
> Press @ to switch steering wheel heating on or off.
You can also operate the steering wheel heating using the multifunction steering wheel => page 29.
Auxiliary climate control
The auxiliary climate control system warms or cools the vehicle interior. The vehicle will turn on the auxiliary climate control system if needed, depending on the last temperature that was set with the climate control system controls. This function can be used when the drive system is switched off.
You can control the auxiliary air conditioning in the MMI and using the myAudi app.

Requirement: the charge level of the high-voltage battery must be sufficient.
(i) Tips
-- Using the auxiliary climate control while charging can also reduce the charge level of the high-voltage battery.
-- Starting or parking the vehicle will not switch off the auxiliary climate control automatically.

Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
HICLE > Air conditioning > F.

Immediate start
You can immediately switch the auxiliary climate control on and off using the F button. When this function is switched on, a colored bar lights up over the button and the remaining time is displayed.

The auxiliary climate control will run for a maximum of 30 minutes after the immediate start. When charging with sufficient charging power,
the auxiliary climate control can run for up to 60
minutes.

Timer programming
You can set up and activate up to two timers for the departure time.

> Select one timer. > Set the date and press Next. > Set the time (departure time) and press OK. > Set the second timer, if necessary.

By setting the departure time, you determine

when your vehicle should reach the desired tem-

perature. The departure time can be a maximum

of six days in the future. The auxiliary climate

control will continue to run approximately ten

minutes after the departure time is reached.

OwnersManuals2.com

After switching off the ignition
Information about the active timer(s) will appear on the upper display after switching off the ignition. You can start the set climate control settings immediately with the F button, or go to the auxiliary climate control menu with the > button.
@) Tips
-- Make sure the time and date match in the system settings so that the timer can function correctly > page 233.
-- The auxiliary climate control can also be switched on and off immediately when a timer is set.
-- You can operate the climate control in the vehicle interior when the high-voltage battery is charging using the charging timer = page 119. The climate control output depends on the power supply capacity.
Additional settings
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
HICLE > Air conditioning > F > ©.
Start A/C after unlocking
If this function is activated, the climate control will continue to run for five minutes after the vehicle has been unlocked.
Comfort aux. A/C
Applies to: vehicles with comfort auxiliary climate control
You can adjust if comfort heating functions, such
as seat heating", should also be activated when
auxiliary climate control is used. You can select
the respective zones.
Window and mirror heating*
Applies to: vehicles with comfort auxiliary climate control
You can set if the rear window and mirrors should also be heated during auxiliary climate control.
Messages
The following messages may appear depending on the vehicle equipment:
The auxiliary air conditioning is currently unavailable due to a malfunction.

Warm and cold

If this message appears, there is a system malfunction. Drive immediately to an authorized
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.

Fluids in the A/C system
Refrigerant in the A/C system
The sticker in the front compartment provides information about the type and amount of refrigerant used in the vehicle's climate control system. The sticker is located in the front section of the front compartment or at the front or back of the hood.

Symbol
A He
tt
&)

Meaning Warning: the A/C system must only be serviced by qualified technicians.
Refrigerant type
Lubricant type
Refer to the service information (only available for authorized Audi dealers or authorized Audi Service Facilities) The A/C system must only be serviced by qualified technicians.

Flammable refrigerant

Make sure all components are dis-

posed of correctly and never install
components in the vehicle that have been removed from old vehicles or

taken from recycling.

Lubricant in the A/C system

The sticker in the front compartment provides information about the type of lubricant used in the vehicle climate control system. For the refriger-
ant oil quantity, refer to the Technical Data => page 299.

ZA\ WARNING

To ensure secure and safe operation, the A/C

system must only be serviced by qualified

4KE012721BH
Se Be 1

91
OwnersManuals2.com

Warm and cold
technicians and certified technicians (SAE standard J2845).
-- Never repair the A/C system evaporator with components from old vehicles or from recycling.
-- New replacement evaporators for portable A/C systems must be certified and labeled as such, so that they comply with the SAE standard J2842 HFO-1234yf and R744.

OwnersManuals2.com

Driving Starting the vehicle
Description
Fig. 81 Center console: switching on the drive system
Your vehicle is powered by electricity. Similar to a vehicle with a combustion engine, the ignition and drive system can be switched on separately. When only the ignition is switched on, electronic
systems such as the MMI are available. However,
the vehicle is not ready to drive. Electric power is able to move the vehicle once the drive system is switched on and becomes active. Requirement: the key must be in the vehicle. Switching the drive system on > Press and hold the brake pedal. > Press the [START STOP] button. The drive sys-
tem switches on. The power meter indicates if the drive system is switched on > page 14.
Switching the drive system off > Bring the vehicle to a full stop. > Press the [START STOP] button. The drive sys-
tem will switch off. The steering is locked when you switch off the drive system in "P" and open the driver's door. The steering lock helps prevent vehicle theft. Switching the drive system off in an
emergency If necessary in an emergency, the drive system can also be switched off while driving using the emergency off function*.

RAZ-0571

Driving

> Press the [START STOP] button twice in a row or press and hold it one time.

Switching on and off
If you would like to switch the ignition on or off without switching on the drive system, follow these steps:

> Press the [START STOP] button without pressing the brake pedal.

Switching the ignition off automatically
To prevent the vehicle battery from draining, the ignition and possibly the exterior lighting may switch off automatically.

Requirements:
-- You must have driven the vehicle.
-- You must have left the vehicle for longer than 30 seconds.
-- The ignition must be switched on.

Among other indicators, the system detects that you have left the vehicle based on the following
factors:

-- The driver's door has been opened. -- The driver's safety belt has been unbuckled. -- The brake pedal is not being pressed. -- The driver's seat is not occupied.
The ignition will also be switched off after 30 minutes or if you lock the vehicle from the outside.

ZX WARNING

-- Never switch off the drive system before the

vehicle has come to a complete stop.

Switching it off before the vehicle has stop-

ped may impair the function of the brake

booster and power steering. You would then

need to use more force to steer and brake

the vehicle. The fact that you cannot steer

and brake as usual may increase the risk of

accidents and serious injuries.

-- Secure the vehicle against rolling before ex-

iting the vehicle > page 94.

4KE012721BH

93
OwnersManuals2.com

Driving
@ Tips
-- Brief noises are normal when starting and parking the vehicle and are no cause for concern.
-- It may not be possible to start the vehicle in extremely low temperatures.
-- The drive power depends on the temperature and the charge level of the high-voltage battery.
Messages
The following messages may appear depending on the vehicle equipment:
|| Engine start system: malfunction! Please contact Service
Do not switch the ignition off because you may not be able to switch it on again. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
5 Engine start system: malfunction! Please contact Service
There is a malfunction in the engine start system. Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
B Remote control key: key not detected. Is the key still in the vehicle?
The vehicle key was removed from the vehicle while the drive system was active. If the vehicle key is no longer in the vehicle, you can no longer switch on the ignition or the drive system after switching off the drive system. You also cannot lock the vehicle from the outside.
Remote control key: hold back of key against the designated area. See owner's manual
The battery in the vehicle key may be drained or there may be a malfunction. To start the vehicle, you must also hold the vehicle key against the location shown ?) > page 93, fig. 81.
If the malfunction remains, drive immediately to
an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
94

Service Facility to have the malfunction corrected.

When driving

Starting to drive, stopping, and parking

Starting from a stop
> Press and hold the brake pedal. > Switch on the drive system. > Select "D" or "R". > Release the parking brake. > Release the brake pedal. » Press the accelerator pedal to accelerate.
Always make sure that the vehicle does not "creep" when starting to drive and maneuvering. If you take your foot off the brake pedal, the vehicle will not be set into motion by the drive sys-
tem.

Securing the vehicle against rolling
Secure your vehicle to prevent it from rolling before exiting the vehicle.
> Set the parking brake. > Select the "P" selector lever position. > If parking on a steep road, turn the steering
wheel so that your vehicle will roll against the curb in case it should start to move.
If one of these measures is not possible, for example because there is no vehicle power, you must secure your vehicle against rolling using additional measures. > Only park the vehicle on a level surface. > Use suitable objects to block the front and rear
wheels.

Set the parking brake before selecting the "P" selector lever position. This prevents too much
stress from being put on the locking mechanism when parking ona steep surface.

Z\ WARNING

-- Always set the parking brake when leaving

your vehicle, even if for a short period of

time. If the parking brake is not set, the ve-

hicle could roll away, increasing the risk of

an accident.

OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH RAZ-0570

-- Do not leave your vehicle unattended while
the drive system is active, because this increases the risk of an accident.
-- If the parking brake is set, it can release automatically when the accelerator pedal is pressed. To reduce the risk of an accident, do not inadvertently press the accelerator pedal and always make sure the "P" selector lever position is selected when the vehicle is parked.
-- If you leave the vehicle, switch the ignition off and take the key with you. This is especially important when leaving persons or an-
imals in the vehicle. Otherwise, the vehicle
could start unintentionally, the parking brake could release, or electronic equipment could activate, which increases the risk of an accident. -- No persons or animals should be left in a locked vehicle. Locked doors make it more difficult for emergency workers to enter the
vehicle, which puts lives at risk.
-- If you do not begin driving immediately after releasing the brake pedal, your vehicle may begin to roll backward. Press the brake pedal or set the parking brake immediately.
@) Note
If you have to stop on an incline, always press the brake pedal to hold the vehicle in place to reduce the risk of the vehicle rolling backward. Do not try to hold the vehicle in place by pressing and holding the accelerator pedal. The drive system can overheat, which increases the risk of damage.
agai
If you take your foot off of the brake pedal when driving on hills, the braking force will be held for
several seconds. At that time, you can start driv-
ing without the vehicle rolling backward.
Requirement: the driver's door must be closed, the drive system must be on, and the vehicle must be facing uphill.

Driving
> To activate hill hold assist, press and hold the
brake pedal for several seconds while the vehicle is stationary. Use the hold assist > page 102 when the braking force should be applied for more than several seconds.
ZX WARNING
-- If you do not begin driving immediately after releasing the brake pedal, your vehicle may begin to roll backward. Press the brake pedal or set the parking brake immediately.
--The hill hold assist cannot hold the vehicle on inclines in every scenario (for example, on slippery or icy ground).
Gears and driving programs
tP-| D/S
Fig. 82 Center console: hand rest with selector lever
The selector Lever is located on the side of the hand rest. You can operate the selector lever using your thumb and index finder. Operation is similar to a vehicle with an automatic transmission. The gears are displayed next to the hand rest. --P (Park): parking lock
--R (Reverse): driving in reverse
--N (Neutral): idle --D (Drive): driving forward Selecting a gear Requirement: the ignition must be switched on. -- Bring the vehicle to a full stop and press the
brake pedal.

95
OwnersManuals2.com

Driving
--To select the nearest position, move the selec-
tor lever forward or back until you feel the first pressure point. --To skip a position (for example, to move from "D" directly to "R"), move the selector lever past the pressure point in the desired direction. -- The label next to the selector lever for the selected gear will light up.
"N" (Neutral) position
In the "N" selector lever position, power is not transmitted to the driving wheels. Use the "N"
selector lever in a car wash (with conveyor belts),
for example.
If you unintentionally select "N" while driving (faster than 1 mph (2 km/h)), you can also select "D" again without pressing the brake pedal.
For safety reasons, the vehicle cannot be locked
when the "N" position is engaged.
"P" (Park) selector lever position
The parking lock secures the vehicle from rolling when the "P" selector lever position is selected. The parking lock is a mechanical locking mechanism in the transmission.
-- Bring the vehicle to a full stop and press the brake pedal.
-- Press the "P" button @) on the selector lever. -- The "P" next to the selector lever will light up.
"P" will be engaged automatically if you switch the drive system off while the "D" or "R" position is selected. If you switch the drive system off in "N", "P" will engage automatically after approximately 30 minutes.
If you would like to switch from "P" to "D" or "R",
the drive system must be on.
Selecting the driving program
Various driving programs can be selected when in the "D" gear. The programs influence how the accelerator pedal and drive system respond.
If you select the dynamic or offroad Audi drive select* mode, the "S" driving program will be activated. If you select efficiency, "E" will be activated. When the ignition is switched off, the driving program may be reset to "D".
96

To switch between the current driving program and "S", push the selector lever toward the rear.
ZA\ WARNING
-- Before you start driving, check if the label for the desired selector lever position next to the selector lever is lit up.
-- Secure the vehicle against rolling before exiting the vehicle > page 94.
-- To reduce the risk of an accident, do not press the accelerator pedal when changing selector lever positions while the vehicle is stationary and the drive system is switched on.
-- Never select the "R" position while driving. Doing so could cause an accident.
-- The vehicle can roll even if the ignition is switched off.
G) Tips
If you shift back and forth between "D" and "R" within one second, you do not need to press the brake pedal. This makes it possible to "rock" if it is stuck, for example.
Accelerator pedal
You can accelerate the vehicle using the accelerator pedal.
Maximum acceleration
If you press the accelerator pedal all the way down, the motor's full power will be used and
you will reach maximum acceleration, also called "kick-down".
Applies to: vehicles with boost function: In the "S" driving program, even more power is utilized for a brief period of time via the boost function. The availability of this function depends on the charge level of the high-voltage battery and the temperature of the drive system components, among other things.
Z\ WARNING
The driving wheels could spin and the vehicle could swerve on slick or slippery road surfaces

OwnersManuals2.com

Driving

when using kick-down, which increases the risk of an accident.
ETT Meola ace)
Applies to: vehicles with Launch Control
Launch Control provides the best possible acceleration when starting from a stop.
Requirements
-- Driving program "S" > page 96 or the dynamic Audi drive select* mode must be selected => page 106.
-- The boost function is available > page 96.
Using Launch Control
-- Press the brake pedal with your left foot and hold it all the way down for at least one second.
-- With the brake pedal pressed, press the accelerator pedal all the way down with your right foot at the same time.
-- Once the display in the power meter actively flashes, remove your foot from the brake pedal.
Z\ WARNING
Only use Launch Control when road and traffic conditions allow it and other road users will not be endangered or impacted by your driving and the vehicle's acceleration. The driving wheels could spin and the vehicle could swerve, especially on slick or slippery road surfaces, which increases the risk of an accident.
@ Note
When accelerating using Launch Control, all vehicle components are subject to heavy loads. This can result in increased wear.
@) Tips
After accelerating using the Launch Control, the temperature of some vehicle components may increase greatly. If that happens, the function will not be available for a few minutes to reduce the risk of damage. After a cool-down period, Launch Control will be available again.

Messages
The following messages may appear depending on the vehicle equipment:
oy Transmission: malfunction! Safely stop vehicle
Do not continue driving. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible in a safe location and secure it so it does not roll > page 94. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
[&] selector lever: malfunction! Gear change only possible if using both shift paddles.
There is a system malfunction in the selector lever. You can continue driving with restricted function. The selector lever is not working. Gears can only be selected by tapping both shift paddles at the same time when the vehicle is stationary. The "P" gear is automatically engaged when you switch off the drive system. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
fs P button: malfunction! Auto P when engine off. Please contact Service
There is a malfunction in the "P" button on the selector lever. The "P" gear is automatically engaged when you switch off the drive system. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
fs] Danger of rolling away! P not possible. Please apply parking brake
The parking lock can no longer be engaged. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected. Secure the vehicle against rolling before exiting the vehicle > page 94.
Drive system
A new vehicle must be broken in within the first 2,000 miles (3,000 km) so that all moving parts work smoothly together, which helps to increase >

97
OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

Driving
the service life of the drive system components. The energy use may be higher during this time.
Drive for longer stretches whenever possible during the break-in period, and use a moderate driving style.
Tadatee fae)
Vehicles with an electric drive system are powered by an electric motor. The drive power depends on the temperature and the charge level of the high-voltage battery.
The vehicle is able to recover energy by using "recuperation". The electric drive system operates like a generator and converts a large portion of kinetic energy into electrical energy that is stored in the high-voltage battery. The vehicle is braked during recuperation, which is similar to the engine braking effect on a vehicle with a combustion engine. This will happen automatically if you press the brake pedal while driving in the "D" selector lever position, or if you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
When you press the brake pedal, recuperation is used to brake the vehicle. The brakes will only be activated if necessary. When driving normally, this makes it possible to brake using only recuperation just before coming to stop and to lose little energy and range from braking.
Setting options
You can set how strongly the vehicle should be braked by recuperation while coasting.
» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Charging & Efficiency > Efficiency assist > Recuperation.
Automatic: the recuperation braking effect is adjusted proactively*, for example to the route or vehicles driving ahead. You can temporarily adjust the braking effect by selecting a recuperation level with the shift paddles.

Manual: the recuperation braking effect is controlled manually. You can select a recuperation level using the shift paddles.
Settings using the shift paddles: > Select © for a stronger braking effect. > Select @) for a weaker braking effect.
ZA WARNING
In certain situations, the recuperation may brake proactively. However, the recuperation braking effect is limited. Always be ready to brake to reduce the risk of an accident.
(i) Tips
If the ESC is limited or switched off, automatic recuperation is not available and will not brake.

=i) oa
DBenee eit ee tal
3 =

ae
CECT

Fig. 83 Range monitor

You can display the projected range of the vehicle,
>» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Vehicle data.
» You may need to scroll down to the Range monitor display.
@ Range potential (value) @ Range potential (graphic) @®) Total range (graphic) @ Total range (value) © Range mode
Range potential: the value indicates an additional amount of distance that can be gained by turning off certain convenience functions. The convenience functions with high energy usage are listed on the display.

OwnersManuals2.com

Range mode: to maximize the current range, you can use the button to switch the vehicle to a mode with less energy consumption. This will reduce the drive system power and the maximum speed. This can also turn off certain energy consumers. You can exit this mode by either pressing the button again, pressing the Audi drive select* button, or switching off the ignition.
@ Tips
-- The range can also be displayed in the trip computer in the instrument cluster.
-- The range that is indicated is based on the previous and predicted consumption values. For example, this may influence the navigation route guidance or activated convenience functions.
Vehicle sound
The electric drive system generates considerably less noise than a combustion engine. An artificial engine sound is generated when driving electrically so that the vehicle can be heard from the outside when driving. The vehicle sound automatically fades out at higher speeds when the sounds from the tires and wind start increasing.
ZA WARNING
Other road users may not be able to clearly hear electric vehicles when they are driving. This increases the risk of an accident particularly when driving in areas with little traffic, when maneuvering, or when driving in re-
verse.
Efficient and environmentally-friendly driving
Your driving style greatly influences the amount of fuel and energy consumed, the environmental impact, and the wear on the motor, brakes, and tires. Note the following information for efficient and environmentally-conscious driving:
-- Select the Audi drive select* efficiency mode. -- Turn off electrical equipment that is not need-
ed, for example seat heating*.

Driving
-- Anticipate upcoming traffic situations while driving to avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
-- Avoid driving at high speeds. -- Avoid adding extra weight to the vehicle if pos-
sible, for example by not leaving roof racks or bike racks installed when they are not needed. -- Make sure the tire pressure is correct. -- Have maintenance performed regularly on the vehicle. -- Do not drive with winter tires during the summer. -- Brake early and evenly to use recuperation.
ICTe [1
The following messages may appear depending on the vehicle equipment:
B Drive system: malfunction! Safely stop vehicle
There is a malfunction in the drive system. The vehicle can no longer be driven. Park the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible. Secure the vehicle against rolling before exiting the vehicle => page 94. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
B Drive system: malfunction! Please contact Service
There is a malfunction in the drive system. Drive slowly to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction corrected.
a Drive system: warning! Limited performance
The driving power is limited. The high-voltage battery may not be sufficiently charged or is at the operating temperature threshold, for example, when the outside temperatures are extremely cold.
BS Vehicle sound: malfunction! Pedestrians cannot hear vehicle. Please contact Service
There is a malfunction in the vehicle sound function. Drive extremely carefully, since other road >

4KE012721BH

99
OwnersManuals2.com

Driving
users may not be able to hear your electric vehicle. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
Brakes
General information
You can apply the vehicle's brakes using the brake pedal.
Operating noise
Noises may occur when braking depending on the speed, braking force, and outside conditions such as temperature and humidity.
When the vehicle is stationary, the brake system performs system tests at regular intervals. This can cause brief noise and haptic feedback effects on the brake pedal.
Braking effect
The response time from the brakes depends on the weather and environmental conditions. To ensure the optimal braking effect, the brake system is cleaned at regular intervals. This is done by applying the brake pads to the brake rotors for a short period of time when driving at high speeds when the windshield wipers are switched on.
If the brake system becomes damp, for example after driving in heavy rain, the braking effect may be delayed. Other factors that could temporarily increase the response time of the brakes include:
-- Wet conditions
-- Low temperatures, ice, and snow
-- Roads covered in salt -- Dirty brake pads
Corrosion
Corrosion may form on the brake rotors if there is no heavy braking, if the vehicle is not driven for long periods of time, or if the vehicle is not driven frequently or for long distances. In this case, braking heavily several times while driving at high speeds can clean the brake rotors > A\.

Select the "N" position when doing this, so that recuperation is not used for braking.
Brake pads
New brake pads do not achieve their full braking effect during the first 500 mi (800 km). They
must be "broken in" first. However, you can com-
pensate for the slightly reduced braking force by pressing firmly on the brake pedal. Avoid heavy braking during the break-in period.
Because recuperation is also used for braking, the break-in period for new brake pads is 500 miles (800 km).
Brake pad wear depends largely on the way the vehicle is driven and on operating conditions. Brake pad wear increases when driving frequently in the city or short distances or when using a very sporty driving style.
Automatic post-collision braking system
The automatic post-collision braking system can help to reduce the risk of sliding and of additional collisions after an accident. If the airbag control module detects a collision, the vehicle is braked by the ESC.
The vehicle does not brake automatically if one of the following occurs:
-- The driver presses the accelerator pedal, or -- The braking force generated by the pressed
brake pedal is greater than the braking force that would be initiated by the system
-- The ESC, the brake system, or the vehicle electrical system is not functioning
Z\ WARNING
-- Only apply the brakes for the purpose of cleaning the brake system when road and traffic conditions permit. You must not endanger other road users and increase the risk of an accident.
-- Due to the risk of injury, only have an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility work on the brake system. Incorrect repairs could impair the function. | >

100

OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

-- Never let the vehicle roll while the drive system is switched off because this increases the risk of an accident.
-- During automatic braking maneuvers, the brake pedal may move downward automatically. To reduce the risk of injury, do not place your foot under the brake pedal.
@) Note
-- Never let the brakes "rub" by pressing the pedal lightly when braking is not actually necessary. This can cause the brakes to overheat and increases braking distance and causes wear.
-- Observe the important information for driving downhill > page 703. This especially applies when towing a trailer.
@ Tips
-- If you retrofit your vehicle with a front spoiler, wheel covers or similar items, make sure that the air flow to the brakes is not obstructed. Otherwise the brake system can overheat.
-- Also refer to the information about brake fluid > page 242.
Messages
The following messages may appear depending on the vehicle equipment:
HG / @ Brakes: malfunction! Safely stop vehicle
There is a malfunction in the brake system. If ES / Gana Bialso turn on, there is a malfunc-
tion in the ABS, ESC, and braking distribution. If the brake booster is not working, you have to use much more force when braking the vehicle.
Do not continue driving. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance. Read and follow the other safety precautions > A\.
EG / @ Brake pads: wear limit reached. You can continue driving. Please contact Service
The brake pads are worn. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility as

Driving

soon as possible to have the malfunction corrected.
Brake booster: limited functionality. You can continue driving. Please contact Service
There is a brake booster malfunction. The brake booster is available, but its effectiveness is reduced. The braking performance may be different compared to the usual performance. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
Other indicator lights
When you switch the ignition on, the EG / @ indicator light turns on briefly to check the func-
tion. If the indicator light does not turn on, there
is asystem malfunction.
\f Be / @ stays on, there is a malfunction in the brake system.
j- A high load was placed on the brakes from driving downhill for a long period of time. Follow the instructions in the message to utilize recuperation and to relieve the brakes.
ZA\ WARNING
If a malfunction occurs in the ABS, ESC, and
braking distribution, interventions that stabilize the vehicle will no longer be available. This could cause the vehicle to swerve, which increases the risk that the vehicle will slide. Do not continue driving. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.

Electromechanical parking brake

Operating the parking brake

The electromechanical parking brake is used to secure the vehicle from rolling away unintention-
ally.

The @) switch is located under the selector lever

in the center console. It turns on when the park-

ing brake is set. You can release the parking

101
OwnersManuals2.com

Driving
brake manually or automatically when you start to drive.
Setting and releasing the parking brake
>» Setting: pull the ©) switch. > `i / appears, the parking brake is hold-
ing the vehicle. You can remove your foot from the brake pedal. > Releasing: when the ignition is switched on, press and hold the brake pedal and press the button.
If the red indicator light flashes, the braking force has not built up enough or it has decreased. You can also secure the vehicle by selecting the "P" gear or pressing the brake pedal. Make sure the indicator light is off before you start driving.
Automatically releasing the parking brake when starting to drive
Requirement: the driver's door must be closed and the driver's safety belt must be fastened.
> Press the accelerator pedal to start to drive.
ZA WARNING
--To reduce the risk of an accident, always
make sure the vehicle is situated safely while stationary. -- If the parking brake is set, it can release automatically when the accelerator pedal is
pressed. To reduce the risk of an accident,
do not inadvertently press the accelerator pedal and always shift into "P" when the vehicle is stopped. -- If the power supply fails, you cannot set the parking brake once it is released, or release it if it is set. Secure the vehicle against rolling before exiting the vehicle > page 94. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
@) Tips
-- On steep inclines, especially when in trailer mode, the vehicle may roll backwards unintentionally when starting to drive. To reduce the risk of this happening, pull and hold the ©) switch while pressing the accelerator pedal. If enough drive power has built up at
102

the wheels and the vehicle does not roll backwards, then release the switch to start to drive. -- If you leave the vehicle when "D" or "R" are engaged, the parking brake will be set automatically. -- Noises when the parking brake is set and released are normal and are not a cause for concern. -- The parking brake goes through a self-test cycle at regular intervals when the vehicle is stopped. Any noises associated with this are normal.
Applies to: vehicles with hold assist
If the vehicle is stopping frequently, the system can assist the driver in a comfortable transition when starting to drive from a stop, for example, at ared light, ona hill, or in stop-and-go traffic.
Switching the hold assist on and off
You can switch the hold assist on and off in the MMI.
>» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Hold assist.
Starting to drive with hold assist
Requirement: the driver's door must be closed and the drive system must be on.
> Press and hold the brake pedal for several seconds while the vehicle is stationary.
> r@ appears, the hold assist is holding the vehicle. You can remove your foot from the brake pedal.
> Press the accelerator pedal to start to drive.
In certain situations, the hold assist may transfer the function of holding the vehicle to the parking brake.
Depending on the equipment, hold assist may be switched off when in "R" gear to help improve maneuverability. If this is the case, press the brake pedal to secure the vehicle.
OwnersManuals2.com

ZA\ WARNING
-- The hold assist cannot hold the vehicle on inclines in every scenario (for example, on slippery or icy ground). Be ready to apply the brakes at all times when using the hold assist.
--To reduce the risk of an accident, always make sure the vehicle is situated safely while stationary.
@) Note
Switch hold assist off before driving your vehicle into a car wash with a conveyor belt. Otherwise, the parking brake could engage automatically.
Emergency braking function
Emergency braking should only be used in an emergency, if the standard brake pedal is malfunctioning or obstructed. When the emergency braking function is activated, the braking effect is similar to a heavy braking maneuver.
> Pull and hold the ©) switch while driving. > An audio warning signal will sound and emer-
gency braking will begin. > If you press the accelerator pedal, emergency
braking will be canceled.
Z\ WARNING
Heavy braking while driving through curves or in poor road or weather conditions can cause the vehicle to slide or the rear of the vehicle
to swerve, which increases the risk of an acci-
dent.
Messages
The following messages may appear depending on the vehicle equipment:
Gg / © Parking brake: malfunction! Safely stop vehicle. See owner's manual
GRNG / GB) Parking brake: malfunction! Please release parking brake

Driving

If one of the two messages appears, there is a malfunction in the parking brake. If the message appears while stationary, check if the parking brake is released and can be reset. If this is the case, switch the ignition off and back on.
If the message stays on, if the parking brake cannot be released, or if the message appears while driving, do not continue driving. Secure the vehicle against rolling before exiting the vehicle => page 94. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
ww Parking brake: malfunction! Please contact Service
There is a malfunction in the parking brake. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected. Do not park the vehicle on inclines and shift to "P".
| / Parking brake: warning! Vehicle position too steep
The braking force may not be enough to secure the vehicle from rolling away. Park the vehicle in a place with less of an incline.
& / {Q) Parking brake: applied
The parking brake is set. Press and hold the brake pedal to release the parking brake.
Take over!
The vehicle cannot be held in place automatically. Press the brake pedal to secure the vehicle from rolling away unintentionally.

Special driving situations

Driving uphill and downhill

When driving uphill, downhill, or at high alti-
tudes, note the following information:

-- Drive slowly and carefully.

-- Do not try to turn around if you cannot safely

drive on an incline or hill. Instead, drive in re-

verse.

-- When driving down hills, use the recuperation

braking effect > page 98. This reduces the load

on the brakes.

4KE012721BH

103
OwnersManuals2.com

Driving
-- Use the hold assist if necessary > page 7102 -- Use the hill descent assist if necessary
=> page 104
ZA\ WARNING
-- Only drive on inclines that your vehicle is designed to handle. Do not exceed the hill climbing ability of your vehicle. Your vehicle could tip or slide.
-- Do not drive at an angle on steep inclines and hills. If your vehicle is about to tip, you must immediately start steering in the direction of the downward slope to reduce the risk of an accident.
-- Always be ready to brake when using the hill descent control function.
Ola ter-teR lal)
Your vehicle is not an offroad vehicle. Note the following points when driving offroad:
-- Drive slowly and carefully. --To reduce the risk of underbody damage, pay
attention to the vehicle's ground clearance and drive across raised areas of the ground with the wheels on one side of the vehicle, instead of allowing the center of the vehicle to pass over the raised areas. --To reduce the risk of becoming stuck, drive through sandy or swampy areas at a steady speed and without stopping, if possible.
If necessary, use the following functions:
-- Audi drive select* offroad mode > page 106 -- Hill hold assist* > page 104 -- Raising the vehicle > page 107 -- Limit ESC > page 110
ZA WARNING
Only drive in terrain that is suitable for the vehicle and your driving ability.
@) For the sake of the environment
Avoid actions that are damaging to the environment. Show respect for the natural environment and remain on marked routes.

@) Tips
Clean your vehicle after driving offroad. Dirt and stones falling off your vehicle can affect other road users.
PUN Mele mules
If you must drive through water, follow these instructions:
-- Check the stability of the ground, the current, and the water depth. If the ground is unstable,
there is a strong current, or there are waves,
the water must only reach up to the lower edge of the body at the most. -- Drive carefully and no faster than at walking speeds to prevent the front of the vehicle from creating waves, because they could splash above the lower edge of the body. Oncoming vehicles could also create waves. -- Do not stop the vehicle while in the water. -- Drive in reverse. -- Do not switch off the drive system.
ZA WARNING
After driving through water, press the brake pedal carefully to dry the brakes so that the full braking effect will be restored.
@) Note
Vehicle components such as the motor, drive system, suspension, or electrical system can be severely damaged by driving through water.
G) Tips
If possible, avoid driving through salt water because it increases the risk of corrosion. Use fresh water to clean any vehicle components that come into contact with salt water.
Hill descent assist
Applies to: vehicles with hill hold assist
The " button is located in the function bar on the lower display. It lights up when the system is turned on.

104

OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

Hill descent assist can assist you when driving down hills by maintaining a constant vehicle speed by automatically braking all four wheels. You can adjust the speed using the accelerator and brake pedals. The regulation depends on the hill and the vehicle speed.
> Switching on: press "2. > Switching off: press "2 again.
Active regulation
Regulation begins shortly after you start driving and is possible at speeds up to approximately 19 mph (30 km/h) and on hills that have an approximately 6-60% grade. If these conditions are met, regulation will be activated and the Ba indicator light will turn on.
Ready mode
If one of the requirements for active regulation is not met, the system will be in ready mode. The
indicator light will turn on. Once the requirements are met again, the system will be able to provide active regulation again.
ZA WARNING
-- Be ready to apply the brakes at all times when using the hill hold assist.
-- Always adjust the speed to the visibility, weather, road, and traffic conditions. The system cannot replace the driver's attention.
-- The system cannot maintain a constant vehicle speed in all situations, for example when on smooth or slippery ground. This can increase the risk of an accident.
@) Tips
If you select the Audi drive select* offroad mode, hill descent assist will switch on.

Driving
105
OwnersManuals2.com

Driving dynamic
Driving dynamic
Audi drive select
Introduction
Applies to: vehicles with Audi drive select
Drive select makes it possible to experience different types of vehicle characteristics in one vehi-
cle. With different driving modes, the driver can
switch the setting, for example from sporty to comfortable. This allows you to adjust individual systems collectively as a group to your personal preferences.
Selecting an Audi drive select mode
Applies to: vehicles with Audi drive select
The sie button is located above the selector lever in the center console.
> Press the left or right arrow key until the desired mode appears in the MMI. Or:
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Audi drive select.
You can change the driving mode when the vehicle is stationary or while driving. If traffic permits, briefly remove your foot from the accelerator pedal after changing modes so that the mode you have selected will be activated for the drive
system.
The following modes may be available depending on the equipment:
offroad - Provides assistance when driving offroad. The vehicle will be raised to the secondhighest level using the air suspension*. The ESC will be restricted and the hill descent assist* will be activated. The vehicle will exit this mode after the ignition is switched off.
allroad - Provides balanced vehicle handling. The vehicle will be raised to the second-highest level using the air suspension*.
efficiency - The vehicle switches to a fuel-efficient vehicle setup and supports the driver with fuel economy messages. The "E" driving program is selected.

comfort - Provides a comfort-oriented vehicle setup and is suited for long drives on highways.
auto - Provides an overall comfortable yet dynamic driving feel and is suited for everyday use.
dynamic - Gives the driver a sporty driving feel and is suited to a sporty driving style. The "S" driving program is selected.
individual - Provides the option for personalized vehicle settings. Press ¥ to configure the mode = page 106, Individual settings.
(i) Tips
When the ignition is being switched on, indi-
vidual systems, such as the drive system, will
be reset to a balanced setting. Select the current mode again to attain its full configuration.
Individual settings
Applies to: vehicles with Audi drive select
The equipment in your vehicle will determine which settings you can adjust.
Drive
The drive system will react to accelerator pedal moves more quickly or in a more balanced manner.
Steering
The power steering will adapt. Light steering is suitable for long trips on highways or smooth driving around curves, for example.
Suspension
The suspension adjusts to be tighter or more comfort-oriented when it comes to compensating for uneven spots on the road.
The vehicle ground clearance is adjusted by the air suspension* based on the setting.

106

OwnersManuals2.com

Suspension
CET) tks un Led
Applies to: vehicles with suspension control
The adaptive dampers are an electronically-controlled damping system. The firmness of the suspension will adapt to the driving conditions and the driving situation. The settings depend on the selected Audi drive select* mode.
Air suspension
Applies to: vehicles with air suspension
The air suspension is an electronically-controlled suspension and leveling system. The firmness of the suspension will adapt to the driving conditions and the driving situation. The system balances out changes in load. The vehicle level will also adapt gradually to the vehicle speed in order to reduce the wind resistance at high speeds and increase the ground clearance at low speeds. The settings depend on the selected Audi drive select* mode.
Displaying the vehicle level
» Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Audi drive select.
The filled-in boxes represent the current vehicle
level. The more boxes that are filled in, the high-
er the ground clearance. The box that corresponds with the current vehicle level will flash while the vehicle is lifting or lowering. The target level is highlighted in color.
Raising the vehicle
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
HICLE > Audi drive select. > Press Raise to reach the highest vehicle level
and thus the maximum ground clearance. > Press Lower to lower the vehicle down again.
The Audi drive select* mode will be changed if necessary when the vehicle is raised.
The vehicle will lower at speeds of approximately 22 mph (35 km/h) and below. This function may only be used temporarily when increased ground clearance is necessary. It is not intended for long drives.

Driving dynamic

C) Note
-- Also refer to the information about ground clearance > page 107.
-- When transporting the vehicle on a road carrier, rail carrier, ship carrier, or other carrier, it may only be secured at the running surfaces of the tires (circumference). Securing the vehicle at the axle components, suspension struts, or towing eyes is not permitted because the pressure in the air suspension struts can change during transport. The vehicle might not be secured sufficiently if this happens.
Ground clearance
The vehicle height and clearance can be influenced by the following factors:
-- Change in temperature -- Change in load -- Change to the Audi drive select* mode -- Lifting and lowering via the air suspension*
Z\ WARNING
To reduce the risk of injury, make sure no one gets pinched when the vehicle level is changing, for example when cleaning the underbody or the wheel housings.
CG) Note
Always make sure there is enough clearance above and below the vehicle. This is especially important for entrances with height restrictions, for example, before driving into underground garages. You could also scrape the ground when driving over the edges of curbs or on steep ramps, which could damage your vehicle.

WEETe (4

The following messages may appear depending on the vehicle equipment:

B Air suspension: malfunction! You may con-

tinue driving slowly at max. XX mph (km/h)

4KE012721BH

107
OwnersManuals2.com

Driving dynamic
There is a malfunction. Driving stability may be limited. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately. Do not drive faster than the speed given in the message.
B Air suspension: malfunction! You can continue driving. Speed limited to max. XXX
There is a malfunction. Driving stability may be limited. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately. The maximum speed has been limited.
B Air suspension: malfunction! Safely stop vehicle. Steering and ground clearance limited
There is a malfunction. Do not continue driving. Secure the vehicle against rolling before exiting the vehicle > page 94. Avoid turning the steering wheel, because the vehicle ground clearance may be so low that turning the steering wheel could result in damage to the wheels and wheel housings.
i Suspension: malfunction! You can continue driving
There is a malfunction. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
B Air suspension: vehicle too low. Limited ground clearance
The vehicle ground clearance is very low. Wait until the air suspension system has restored normal ground clearance. Have an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility repair the malfunction immediately if the indicator light does not turn off after a significant period of time.
B Air suspension: malfunction! Please contact Service
There is a malfunction. The driving stability may
be limited and the ground clearance may be low. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
Audi drive select: automatic suspension lowering. See owner's manual
The vehicle level is adjusted to the setting stored for the active personal profile > page 30.
108

Audi drive select: automatic suspension Lift. See owner's manual
The vehicle level is adjusted to the setting stored for the active personal profile > page 30.
Steering
Electromechanical steering supports the driver's steering movements by electronically adapting the power steering depending on the vehicle speed. The settings depend on the selected Audi drive select* mode.
Messages
The following messages may appear depending on the vehicle equipment:
a Steering: malfunction! Please stop vehicle
The power steering may have failed. Adapt your driving style immediately to compensate for the fact that it may be more difficult to turn the steering wheel, and stop your vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible. Do not continue driving. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
2] Steering: malfunction! Please stop vehicle
There is a malfunction in the electronic steering lock. You cannot turn the ignition on. Secure the vehicle against rolling before exiting the vehicle = page 94. Do not tow your vehicle because it cannot be steered. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
a Steering: malfunction! You can continue driving
There is a malfunction in the steering system. Steering may be more difficult or more sensitive. Adapt your driving style. Have the steering system checked immediately by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. Please note that the red indicator light may turn on after restarting the drive system. Do not continue driving if it does.
e--e| Steering lock: malfunction! Please contact Service

OwnersManuals2.com

There is a malfunction in the electronic steering lock. Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
ZA WARNING
Do not tow your vehicle if there is a malfunction in the electronic steering lock because this increases the risk of an accident.
G) Tips
If the a or El indicator light only stays on for a short time, you may continue driving.
All wheel drive (quattro)
Applies to: vehicles with all wheel drive
The all-wheel drive system distributes the driving power variably to the front and rear axle to improve the driving characteristics. It works together with selective wheel torque control, which can activate when driving through curves =>page 110.
The all-wheel drive system is designed for high motor power. Your vehicle is exceptionally powerful and has excellent driving characteristics both under normal driving conditions and on snow and
oicAe.. Always read and follow safety precautions
Electronic torque vectoring
Applies to: vehicles with electronic torque vectoring
The electronic torque vectoring distributes the drive power at the rear axle based on the situation. The goal is a high level of agility and ability to accelerate on curves. The vehicle is very responsive to steering while in a curve. The settings depend on the selected Audi drive select* mode.
Z\ WARNING
-- Even in vehicles with all wheel drive, you
should adapt your driving style to the current road and traffic conditions to reduce the risk of an accident. -- The braking ability of your vehicle is limited
to the traction of the wheels. In this way, it

Driving dynamic
is not different from a two wheel drive vehicle. Do not drive too fast because this increases the risk of an accident. -- Note that on wet streets, the front wheels can "hydroplane'" if driving at speeds that are too high. Unlike front wheel drive
vehicles, the motor RPM does not increase suddenly when the vehicle begins hydro-
planing. Adapt your speed to the road conditions to reduce the risk of an accident.
Messages
The following messages may appear depending on the vehicle equipment:
EI Alt-wheel drive: malfunction! Limited stabil-
ity. Please contact Service
Driving stability is reduced. Continue driving with caution. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately.
Electronic Stabilization Control
Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC) supports driver safety. It reduces the risk of slipping and improves driving stability. ESC detects critical situations, such oversteering and understeering of the vehicle, the drive wheels spinning, or the risk of the vehicle tipping.
The brakes are applied or the motor torque is reduced in order to stabilize the vehicle.
The following stabilization functions are integrated into the ESC, among others:
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
ABS prevents the wheels from locking when braking. The vehicle can still be steered even during hard braking. Apply steady pressure to the brake pedal. Do not pump the pedal.
Noises will indicate when the system is working. >

4KE012721BH

109
OwnersManuals2.com

Driving dynamic
Anti-Slip Regulation (ASR)
ASR reduces drive power when the wheels begin spinning and adapts the power to the road conditions. This will increase the driving stability.
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL)
The EDL applies the brakes to wheels that are slipping and transfers the drive power to the other wheels. This function is not available at higher speeds.
In extreme cases, EDL automatically switches off
to keep the brake on the braked wheel from overheating. The vehicle is still functioning correctly. EDL will switch on again automatically when conditions have returned to normal.
Selective wheel torque control
Selective wheel torque control is used when driving on curves. Braking is targeted toward the wheels on the inside of the curve as needed. This allows more precise driving in curves.
Power steering
The ESC can also support vehicle stability through steering.
ZA\ WARNING
-- The ESC and its integrated systems cannot overcome the limits imposed by natural physical laws. This is especially important on slippery or wet roads. If the systems begin acting to stabilize your vehicle, you should immediately alter your speed to match the road and traffic conditions. Do not let the increased safety provided tempt you into taking risks. This could increase your risk of a collision.
-- Please note the risk ofa collision increases when driving fast, especially through curves and on slippery or wet roads, and when driving too close to objects ahead. There is still a risk of accidents because the ESC and its integrated systems cannot always prevent collisions.
-- Accelerate carefully when driving on smooth, slippery surfaces such as ice and snow. The drive wheels can spin even when

these control systems are installed and this can affect driving stability and increase the risk of a collision. -- As the vehicle load increases, especially the roof load, the vehicle's center of gravity also increases along with the risk of the vehicle tipping. To reduce the risk of an accident, always adapt your driving style to the current conditions and avoid sudden driving maneu-
vers.
G) Tips
-- The ABS and ASR only function correctly when all four wheels have a similar wear condition. Different tire sizes can lead toa reduction in motor power.
-- You may hear noises when the systems described are working.
The So button (or #, depending on the model) for controlling the ESC is located in the center
console, in front of the selector lever. The ESC is
automatically switched on when the ignition is switched on.
Limiting ESC
In some situations, it may make sense to limit
the stabilizing function of the ESC so that the wheels can spin, for example to rock a vehicle to free it when it is stuck or to drive with snow chains. The ESC can also be limited to provide more sporty driving characteristics with fewer stabilizing corrective actions.
--To limit the ESC, press the £07 button briefly. The B indicator light will turn on.
--To completely reactivate the ESC stabilization function, press the button again. The indicator light turns off.
Depending on the Audi drive select mode that is selected, one of the following ESC modes will be selected automatically:
-- sport - this mode is designed for driving ona level surface. It is used in all Audi drive select modes except offroad.

110

OwnersManuals2.com

-- offroad - this mode is suited for driving offroad and is designed for uneven terrain or loose ground. If you select the offroad Audi drive se-
lect mode, the offroad ESC mode will be auto-
matically used.
Switching off ESC
For a more active control of the vehicle where the stabilizing functions of the ESC cannot intervene, the ESC can be switched off.
-- To switch off the ESC, press and hold the oF
button for more than three seconds. The B and Ea indicator lights turn on. -- To completely reactivate the ESC stabilization function, press the button again. The indicator lights turn off.
ZA WARNING
-- When the ESC is switched off or limited, there will be no vehicle stabilization or it will be limited. The driving wheels could spin and the vehicle could swerve, especially on slick or slippery road surfaces. When there is a heavy vehicle load and sudden driving maneuvers, it may not be possible to prevent the vehicle from tipping under certain circumstances, which increases the risk of an accident.
-- Because of the increased risk of an accident, only drive with the ESC switched off or Limit-
ed when it is necessary. Reactivate the ESC as soon as possible.
G) Tips
-- If you select the Audi drive select* offroad
mode, hill descent assist will switch on.
-- If the ESC is limited, switched off, or malfunctioning, systems with an automatic
braking intervention function may not be fully available. -- If malfunctions occur in other systems or
certain driver assist systems are active, the
ESC must be switched on by the system. The ESC may switch on automatically and cannot be operated with the button.

Driving dynamic
Messages
The following messages may appear depending on the vehicle equipment:
BB fs / B © Stabilization control (ESC/ ABS): malfunction! See owner's manual
There is a malfunction in the ABS or EDL. This also causes the ESC to malfunction. The brakes still function with their normal power, but ABS is not active.
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
Other indicator lights
ft blinks while driving, the ESC is actively regulating. Operating noises may occur. If the indicator light stays on, the ESC has been switched off due to system needs. The indicator light turns off when the system is fully functional.

4KE012721BH

1171
OwnersManuals2.com

High-voltage system
High-voltage system
General information
Introduction
All work done on the high-voltage system must only be performed by certified high-voltage technicians at authorized Audi dealers or authorized Audi Service Facilities in accordance with Audi guidelines.
The high-voltage system is composed of the following high-voltage components, among other things: the high-voltage battery, the power elec-
tronics, the electric motors, the high-voltage A/C
compressor, the high-voltage heater, the charging system and charging port as well as the orange high-voltage wiring.
The high-voltage battery is located on the vehicle underbody and does not require any maintenance from the driver.
ZA WARNING
The voltage in the high-voltage system is high enough to cause fatal injuries. Touching a damaged high-voltage component can result in a fatal electric shock. The components in the high-voltage system are marked with a warning label which warns against the highvoltage. -- The voltage level in the high-voltage system
is still dangerous and potentially life-threatening when the ignition is switched off. -- Never perform work on the orange highvoltage cables or on other high-voltage components. Only authorized repair facilities that are certified may perform work on the high-voltage system. -- Never damage, alter or remove the orange high-voltage cable or disconnect it from the high-voltage system.

-- Never perform any work using cutting, shaping or sharp-edged tools or heat sources near the high-voltage system and high-voltage cables.
-- Gases that escape from the high-voltage battery can be poisonous or flammable.
-- Damage to the high-voltage battery can cause poisonous gases to escape, either immediately or at a later time. The escaping gases can also cause a fire. If you notice the smell of fire or gases, follow these steps:
-- Do not inhale the gases. -- Park the vehicle in a safe place outdoors
that is not near buildings or vehicles, roof
overhangs, carports, or similar structures. -- Switch the ignition off and evacuate the
vehicle. -- Leave the danger area. -- Contact emergency services. -- Do not expose yourself to any leaking fluids and do not come into contact with them. -- The high-voltage battery electrolyte fluid is caustic. If electrolyte fluid comes into con-
tact with the skin, flush the affected area for
at least 15 minutes with clean water. Then wash the affected area with soap. Have the affected area examined by a medical professional. -- In the event of a technical emergency, inform the responders that the vehicle is equipped with a high-voltage battery.
@) Note
The high-voltage system can be damaged if the vehicle underbody comes into contact with the ground. Immediately drive your vehicle to an authorized repair facility and have it inspected.

112

OwnersManuals2.com

Charging the high-voltage battery
Introduction

High-voltage system

RAZ-0665}

Fig. 84 Charging options overview

The following options are available to charge the high-voltage battery:

Charging method

Charging cable

@ Charge with household and indus- | @) Audi e-tron compact charging system
trial alternating current (AC) sockets |TM>page 123
@ Charge at public alternating current | Charging station cable
(AC) charging stations
@®) Quick charge at public direct current| Charging station cable (DC) charging stations

Charging port on the vehicle
|) or ©*
© or ©*
©

Audi recommends using alternating current (AC) to charge the high-voltage battery at industrial
sockets, charging stations, or a wallbox. This will
allow you to achieve higher efficiency and a considerably shorter charging time when compared to charging with a household socket.
Only use household sockets to charge with the Audi e-tron charging system in special circumstances, when it is not possible to charge with an

industrial alternating current (AC) socket or with a public alternating current (AC) or direct current (DC) charging station.
High-voltage batteries age over time, which reduces the available range. High-voltage batteries can also age based on how they are used: frequently charging the high-voltage battery completely can accelerate the aging of the battery and reduce the available range.

113
OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

High-voltage system
Charging at household and industrial sockets or at public charging stations with alternating current (AC)
The vehicle's high-voltage battery can be charged with alternating current (AC) via the charging port () on the driver's side. Depending on the vehicle equipment, there may be a second charging port © on the front passenger's side. Both charging ports have the same charging power. You can use whichever charging port is more convenient for your charging setup. When using one charging port, the opposite charging port is locked.
Quick charging at public direct current (DC) charging stations
The vehicle's high-voltage battery can be charged at a direct current (DC) charging station via the charging port on the driver's side (). The charging time shortens significantly compared to charging with alternating current (AC). The charging cable used may be a maximum of 98 feet (30 m).
Charging time
The duration of the charging process may vary based on the following factors:
-- Sockets being used (household or industrial sockets)
-- Country-specific system voltage, current
strength and number of available phases -- Household connection -- The value set for the charging power level on
the Audi charging system control unit -- Fluctuations in the system voltage -- The temperature outside the vehicle -- The temperature of the high-voltage battery
and the Audi charging system control unit. -- Settings for the climate control inside the vehi-
cle -- Current capacity of the charging connector -- Whether the ignition is on or off

Tun kelae aetna Levee Cola)
ZA WARNING
Short circuiting, electric shock, explosions,
fire, and severe burns can result from charging the battery incorrectly (for example by
disregarding general safety precautions, using unsuitable or damaged sockets and charging cables, or charging with unsuitable electrical equipment) and can lead to serious and fatal injuries. -- Do not charge using sockets/electrical
equipment that is clearly damaged or installed incorrectly. -- Never use charging equipment that is clearly damaged and/or dirty. Check the charging equipment for damage before every use. -- Never modify or repair any electrical components, especially the high-voltage system. -- Never charge in areas at risk for explosions. The components in the charging equipment can trigger sparks, which can cause flammable or explosive fumes to ignite. To reduce the risk of explosions, especially in garages, make sure the Audi e-tron charging system control unit is at least 19 inches (50 cm) above the floor when charging. -- Never use the charging equipment with an extension cord, a cable reel, a power strip, or an adapter, for example, a travel adapter or timer.
-- Do not touch the contacts on the vehicle charging port or charging equipment.
-- Do not insert any objects in the vehicle charging port or in the charging equipment.
-- Always protect the sockets and connections
from water, moisture and other fluids.
-- Never charge with both vehicle charging ports at the same time.
-- Only use the charging equipment provided by the factory or the charging station cable.
ZA WARNING
Applies to: Audi charging systems
Sockets that are installed incorrectly can cause electric shock or fire when charging the

114

OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

high-voltage battery using the vehicle charging connection.
-- Read all information and safety precautions for Audi charging systems before using them.
-- Monitor the Audi charging systemif it is being used near children.
-- Installation and setup of the household connection for Audi charging systems may only be performed by a qualified electrician. The qualified electrician is thereby responsible for adhering to applicable standards and regulations.
-- Make sure that the household socket is grounded and shielded from water.
-- If Audi charging systems do not function ac-
cording to the specifications in the operating manual, they must not be used. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
-- Audi charging systems are intended for use in private and semi-private areas (for example, private property and company parking lots). Depending on the country where the vehicle is operated, charging with a mode 2 charging cable (meaning charging with the Audi charging system) may be prohibited in public areas. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for more information.
-- Operate the Audi charging systems in power networks that are properly grounded. It cannot be used with non-grounded power networks (such as IT networks).
-- When charging the high-voltage battery us-
ing household/industrial sockets, the elec-
trical installation can be used at full capacity. Audi recommends having a qualified electrician regularly inspect the electrical installations that are used for charging.
-- If possible, disconnect Audi charging systems from the power network during a thunderstorm.
-- Never submerge the Audi charging systems
or the connectors in water.
-- Audi charging systems must only be cleaned when the control unit is completely discon-

High-voltage system

nected from the power supply and from the vehicle. Use a dry towel to clean.
-- Audi charging systems are only intended for use with Audi vehicles. Using the devices on vehicles made by another manufacturer is not authorized.

@) Note
-- If the vehicle is not being used for long periods of time, the high-voltage battery must be charged after four months at the latest or the vehicle must be continuously connected to a power source (for 50% charging target > page 179). Otherwise, the highvoltage battery could become damaged.
-- Make sure that you always use the correct charging equipment for the country in which it is being used. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for more information.
-- On vehicles with only one charging port, there is a cover on the opposite side of the vehicle with no charging components installed underneath it. Do not try to open this cover.

(i) Tips

-- Your vehicle can only be charged at charging stations that meet the requirements in the respective country and meet the following standards, at a minimum:
-- GB/T 18487.1 and GB/T 20234 (China) --1EC 61851 and IEC 62196 (Europe)
-- SAEJ1772 (North America, Japan)
-- You can use your Audi charging system if there is a household or industrial connection available at the charging station.

G) Tips

Applies to: Audi charging systems

-- For an uninterrupted charging process, Audi
recommends only charging using sockets that are connected to a separately protected circuit.

-- Audi recommends using Audi charging sys-

tems in the wall mount clip* during opera-

tion. If this is not possible, always position

115
OwnersManuals2.com

High-voltage system Audi charging systems on a secure surface during the charging process > A\.
-- To reduce the risk of overheating during operation, do not place Audi charging systems in direct sunlight for long periods of time. If the control unit is overheated, the charging process is automatically paused until the temperature has lowered back within the normal range.
Fig. 85 Left front side of the vehicle: opening the highvoltage charging port door
Fig. 86 Charging unit: charging port and charging display
Connecting the charging cable If you charge your vehicle at a charging station, the following sequence of steps may vary. Follow the manufacturer guidelines and operating instructions for the charging station. Requirement: the "P" selector lever position must be selected, the parking brake must be set, and drive ready mode must have ended. -- If necessary, remove the charging cable from
the vehicle > page 123, Transport. -- Remove the cap from the charging cable if nec-
essary.

-- First connect the charging cable to the power supply, or remove it from the charging station.
-- Unwind the charging cable completely. -- Unlock the charging port door by unlocking the
vehicle. In vehicles with a convenience key*, the
charging port door will be automatically unlocked when the convenience key is near the charger. -- Press the center of the button (@) to open the charging port door on the driver's side or front passenger's side*. -- If you would like to use quick charging at public direct current (DC) charging stations, open the charging port cover @). -- Plug the charging connector into the vehicle charging port. -- Check if the charging option shown @) (immediate charging/timer charging) is the one you would like to use for charging > page 178.
Starting to charge automatically (immediate charging)
If charging is not delayed with a timer, the charging process will begin immediately. If necessary, the charging station may need to be activated. Follow the manufacturer guidelines and operating instructions for the charging station.
You can also adjust the charging process to your preferences > page 179, Setting the charging target, > page 119, Setting the timer, = page 120, Advanced charging settings.
Timer charging
With timer charging, the charging process starts and ends based on a timer that is set beforehand. --To charge by timer, switch on the timer and
timer charging before exiting the vehicle => page 7119.
If the charging connector is disconnected and reconnected while timer charging is switched on, immediate charging will activate automatically. To continue charging by timer, timer charging must be switched on again.
While charging
The charging display on the charging un@i) twill pulse green while charging. It will pulse | in the >

116

OwnersManuals2.com

instrument cluster. A label on the charging unit @) informs you about the various displays =>page 178.
The charging connector is locked while charging and cannot be removed.
Depending on the selected view > page 72, the following information about the charging process is displayed in the instrument cluster:
-- Hy: range -- IK: remaining charging time until the charging
process is complete -- 1: current battery charge level -- ©): date and time of when the charging process
was completed --&: charging speed (additional range per hour) --4: charging power (depends on the selected
power source)
To access the charging process information at a later time, select in the instrument cluster: Vehicle functions tab > [=] button > Charging.
Ending the charging process
You can interrupt and end the charging process at any time.
-- Unlock the vehicle. In vehicles with a convenience key*, the convenience key only needs to be near the charging port door.
-- Press the center of the button @. -- Remove the charging connector. If the charging
connector is not removed within 30 seconds, it will automatically lock again and the charging process may resume. -- After removing the charging connector, the charging port door will close automatically; otherwise, press on the center of the button @) to close the charging port door. -- Disconnect the charging cable from the power supply if necessary or return it securely to the charging station. -- Install the protective caps on the charging cable again. -- If you are transporting the charging cable in the vehicle, store it securely > page 123.
If the charging connector cannot be disconnected from the vehicle, perform the following steps in

High-voltage system

the order listed and try again to disconnect the charging connector:

-- Switch the ignition on/off.
-- Lock/unlock the vehicle. -- Make sure the auxiliary air conditioning
activated > page 90.

is not

If the charging connector still cannot be disconnected, you must unlock it manually > page 127.

If you cannot disconnect the charging connector from the charging station, authenticate yourself again at the charging station and then try again to disconnect the charging connector. If you still cannot disconnect the charging connector from the charging station, contact the charging station operator.
ZA\ WARNING
-- When closing the charging port door, make sure the area where the door is closing is clear to reduce the risk of injury.
-- Do not disconnect the charging cable from the socket or the vehicle charging port while the vehicle is charging. End the charging process before removing the charging cable from the socket in order to reduce the risk of damaging the connector contacts from
sparks.
-- Never drive with the charging port door open. An open charging port door could hit other road users, which increases the risk of injury.
- If a charging unit is damaged, the vehicle must not be charged at the damaged charging port or at the charging port on the other side* to reduce the risk of injury.
-- If the charging unit is damaged or the charging port door cannot close or is missing, drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility and have the malfunction corrected to reduce the risk of injury.

C) Note
-- If you drive with the charging unit open, both the charging port door and the electronics installed behind it could be

4KE012721BH

117
OwnersManuals2.com

High-voltage system

damaged. Check each time after charging if the port door is locked before you start driving the vehicle. -- Applies to: vehicles with charging ports on the driver and front passenger's side: Never attempt to charge the vehicle using both charging ports at the same time, because this could damage the charging equipment.
G) Tips
-- If the parking brake is set, it could create noises when the charging connector is connected.

-- Remove ice and snow in the charging unit using a hand brush and solvent-free deicing spray.
-- The vehicle reception systems, such as radio reception, may be limited during charging.

Charging display

The charging display is an LED light on the charg-
ing unit @ that indicates the charging status. A label on the charging unit @) > page 116, fig. 86

informs you about the various displays. The following table explains the displays.

LED on the charging unit Off

White Green

Pulsating
Pulsating Flashing Illuminated

Yellow

Illuminated

Flashing

Meaning
Vehicle charging system is in sleep mode. A timer may be active, but charging has not started yet.
Charging process is interrupted.
Requirement: the automatic unlocking of the charging connector is activated > page 120 The charging process has been completed successfully. The charging connector is now unlocked and can be removed.
Connection between the power source and the vehicle is being established.
The high-voltage battery is charging.
A timer is active, but charging has not started yet.
High-voltage battery charging process is completed.
When using the Audi charging system, make sure the power plug is inserted in the power socket > page 123. No power supply was recognized even though the charging cable is plugged in. Have the power supply or power supply system inspected. When using the Audi charging system, check the status displays on the unit > table on page 124. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance if necessary.
The vehicle is not secured from rolling away. Check if "P" is selected and the parking brake is set. If the LED continues to flash, see an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.

118

OwnersManuals2.com

High-voltage system

LED on the charging unit

Red

Illuminated

Meaning
The charging connector may not be able to lock correctly in the vehicle charging port. Check if the charging connector is inserted correctly. Disconnect the charging connector, reconnect it to the charging socket, and press it upward lightly for five seconds, or use a different charging station. If the LED stays turned on, there is a malfunction either in the vehicle charging system or at the power source. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance if necessary.
Both charging port doors are open. Try to close one of the charging port doors by hand. If the LED stays turned on, the high-voltage battery may not be charging. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
The outside temperature is too low or too high.

G) Tips
The charging display modes are also displayed in the instrument cluster Bag.

charging settings > page 120, Advanced charging settings.
G) Tips

Setting the charging target
You can set the charging target, meaning you can set the maximum charge level to which the highvoltage battery should be charged. The charging target can be set between 50% and 100%. For daily usage, Audi recommends setting the charging target at 80%. This can help to ensure the optimal the service life of the high-voltage battery. For long trips, Audi recommends setting the charging target to 100% to achieve the highest possible range.

If you set the charging target lower than the current battery charge level while charging, then the charging process will be canceled. If you set the charging target above the current battery charge level again, then the charging process will resume. This does not apply if you are charging at a charging station, where you have authenticated yourself manually. If this is the case, authenticate yourself again at the charging station.
Setting the timer

> Press sG in the lower display, or > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
VEHICLE > Charging & Efficiency > Charging. > When the timer is displayed, swipe your finger
on the display toward the right. > Press on the right section of the battery charge
level display. > Set the desired charging target.
The charging target that is set will be stored and used in all locations where you have not defined specific charging settings. When setting the charging target, if the vehicle is located at an address for which you have already defined advanced charging settings, then the charging target will be changed to match the advanced

Introduction

By setting a timer, you determine when your vehi-
cle should reach the desired charging target. When the timer is activated, it will be run regu-
larly at the set time. In addition to the charging target, you can also specify if your vehicle should
be heated or cooled to the temperature set in the climate control system. You can turn on multiple
timers at the same time. The active timer is indicated by the respective number in © in the upper section of the display.

> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:

VEHICLE > Charging & Efficiency > Charging.

> When the charging target is displayed, swipe

your finger on the display toward the left.

4KE012721BH

119
OwnersManuals2.com

High-voltage system
Configuring the timer
> To set a timer, select > in the line for the desired timer.
> Select one ore more days of the week and select
Next.
> Set the desired departure time and select OK. > To also activate the climate control with a tim-
er, select F.
Switching on the timer and timer charging
The charging process will only follow the timer settings if you have switched on the timer and timer charging.
> To turn ona timer, select CD. > To switch on timer charging, select ©. A col-
ored bar will turn on in the button.
If the set departure time for the timer is too soon, the desired charging target may not be reached.
@ Tips
It is not possible to charge using the timer at some charging stations.
Setting the charging connector to unlock automatically
Applies to: vehicles with automatic charging connector unlocking
You can set if the charging connector should automatically unlock when the charging process has ended. This will allow you or others to disconnect the charging connector even when the vehicle is locked. This function is helpful to prevent charging stations from being blocked for long periods of time, or to allow the charging connector to be disconnected without a vehicle key in private locations.
For AC and DC charging, automatic unlocking of the charging connector is already enabled at the factory.
> Before charging, always check if the selected settings are suitable for the current charging session.
» Applies to: MMI: To activate automatic unlocking for DC charging, select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Charging & Efficiency > Charging >
120

{2} > DC connector: unlock after charging has ended. > Applies to: MMI: To activate automatic unlocking for AC charging, select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Charging & Efficiency > Charging > <2} > AC connector: unlock after charging has ended.
() Note
The function should only be activated if the charging cable is part of the charging station. If you use your own charging cable, there is no anti-theft protection and your charging cable could be stolen.
Advanced charging settings
With the advanced charging settings, you can define addresses (locations) at which certain charging settings should apply (for example, charging target, minimum charge). If your vehicle is in the vicinity of a defined address, the advanced charging settings will be automatically applied. The charging target that is set will be used both for immediate charging and timer charging.
Managing the advanced charging settings » Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
VEHICLE > Charging & Efficiency > Charging > {2} > Advanced charging settings.
> To define new settings for a certain address, se-
lect +. Follow the instructions in the display. > To edit existing settings for a certain address,
press the respective button. > To delete existing settings for a certain ad-
dress, select Z.
Charging with a preferred charging time A preferred charging time is only used when timer charging is switched on > page 720, Switching on the timer and timer charging.
OwnersManuals2.com

nual operati
Fig. 87 Front compartment: emergency release
Manually releasing the charging port door In case of malfunction, you can manually release the charging port door. > Open the hood > page 239.
> Open the cover in the front compartment on the side with the affected charging port.
> Loosen the red loop (2) > fig. 87 from the retainer and then pull on the loop carefully >@®.
> If necessary, open the charging port door by hand.
>» After releasing manually, secure the loop on the retainer and close the cover.
> Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
Manually releasing the charging connector If you are not able to pull the charging connector out of the vehicle charging port, there may be a malfunction. You must use the emergency release to release the vehicle charging connector. Requirement: the "P" selector lever position must be selected and the vehicle must be unlocked. > End the charging process > page 717. > Open the hood > page 239. > Open the cover in the front compartment on
the side with the affected charging port. > Loosen the yellow loop (2) > fig. 87 from the
retainer and then pull on the loop carefully
>©.
> Remove the charging connector. > After releasing manually, secure the loop on
the retainer and close the cover.

High-voltage system
> Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
If the charging connector still cannot be removed after using the emergency release, see an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
@) Note
Only pull on the loop until you feel resistance. You will not hear it release. If you continue to pull, you could damage the emergency release mechanism.
Messages
The following messages may appear depending on the vehicle equipment:
If the or =] indicator light turns on, then the range is low or very low. Charge the high-voltage battery.
Vehicle charging connection: malfunction! See owner's manual
This message appears if the charging port door is open while driving. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and try to close the charging port door => page 116, fig. 85. lf the charging port door cannot close and/or the message continues to appear, drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately and have the malfunction corrected > A\ in Charging on page 117; >@ in Charging on page 117.
Connector lock: malfunction! See owner's manual
This message appears if the charging connector could not be locked correctly in the charging port. Disconnect the charging connector, insert it in the charging port again, and press upward on it lightly for approximately 5 seconds. You can also use another charging station if available. If the message still appears, see an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
fa Charging system: malfunction

4KE012721BH

121
OwnersManuals2.com

High-voltage system

This message appears if there is a malfunction in the vehicle charging infrastructure or the charg-
ing station. Use a different charging station if possible. If this message does not turn off, con-
tact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.

Charging equipment

Introduction

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the Audi etron compact charging system may be available.

Using the charging equipment
Pay attention to the following information for safe handling of the charging equipment:
-- Secure the charging equipment against any
strain, such as being run over, falling, pulling,
bending, and crushing. -- Do not submerge the charging equipment in
water and do not cover it with snow or ice. -- When you remove the charging cable from the
vehicle and from the power supply, only pull at the connectors and not at the cable. -- Put the cap on after using the charging cable. -- Only operate the Audi charging system ina power supply system with a frequency of 50 Hz/60 Hz. -- Only operate or store the Audi charging system at a humidity level between 5% and 95% (no condensation). -- The Audi charging system is protected against dust and splashing water (IP55 (USA: Enclosure
3)).
Depending on the country, different warnings may be on the charging equipment.

Symbol
=4000m

Meaning
Operate or store the Audi charging
system at a temperature range of
-22 °F (-30 °C) to +122 °F (+50 °C).
Operate or store the Audi charging system at a maximum elevation of 13,000 feet (4,000 m) above sea level.

122

Symbol
=5000m

Meaning
Operate or store the Audi charging system at a maximum elevation of 16400 feet (5000 m) above sea level.
The Audi charging system is not equipped with a connected ground conductor.
The Audi charging system is equipped with a connected ground conductor.
Do not operate the Audi charging system in power networks that are not grounded (such as IT networks). Only operate the Audi charging system in grounded power networks.
Surfaces can become very hot when in direct sunlight.

Incorrect use increases the risk of electric shock.

Pay attention to the applicable owner's manual, particularly the safety
precautions.
Pay attention to all applicable disposal regulations when disposing. Do not use any extensions cords or cable reels. Do not use any travel adapters.
Do not use any power strips.
Do not use any charging cables with damage to the electronics or the connecting wires. Operate the Audi charging system in single-phase power supplies.
OwnersManuals2.com

Grounding instructions
Audi charging systems must be grounded. If it should malfunction or break down, grounding provides a path of least resistance for electric current to reduce the risk of electric shock. Audi charging systems are equipped with a cord having an equipment grounding conductor and a grounding plug. The plug must be plugged into an appropriate outlet that is properly installed and grounded in accordance with all local codes and ordinances.
ZA\ WARNING
Improper connection of the equipmentgrounding conductor is able to result in a risk of electric shock. Check with a qualified electrician or serviceman if you are in doubt as to whether the product is properly grounded. Do not modify the plug provided with the product - if it will not fit the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician.
@ For the sake of the environment
® Batteries and electrical/electronic devices must be disposed of in an environmentally safe manner.

High-voltage system
> Open the hood > page 239. > Open the front storage compartment
=> page 81. > Stow the charging equipment in the front stor-
age compartment.
> Close the front storage compartment and the hood.
ZA WARNING
If the charging equipment is not secured or positioned correctly, it can slide out of place and endanger vehicle occupants when braking, when changing directions, or in a collision. -- Stow the charging equipment in the front
storage compartment only.
-- Transporting the charging equipment in the passenger compartment or luggage com-
partment is not permitted.
@) Note
Always lift or carry the Audi charging system as one unit and never by the cables.

Always store the charging equipment securely in the front storage compartment before transporting.

Audi e-tron compact charging system
Applies to: vehicles with Audi e-tron compact charging system

4KE012721BH [RAZ-0604 [RAZ-0726|

--{4)
Fig. 88 Audi e-tron compact charging system: components (example)

7D
Fig. 89 Audi e-tron compact charging system: control unit >

123
OwnersManuals2.com

High-voltage system

Observe the safety precautions > page 174, Im-
portant safety precautions.
The Audi e-tron compact charging system can be used for charging with a household or industrial socket. Depending on the country and the vehicle equipment, the following accessories may be available:
@ Control unit

@ Vehicle cable with vehicle charging connector

@ Power cable with power plug for household sockets

@ Power cable with power plug for industrial sockets
The vehicle cable is securely connected to the control unit. The power cable is plugged into the upper end of the control unit and can be switched => page 128.

Control unit overview

el and LED

@® _ |Status LED:

CQ __|Power supply/household

connection

& | Vehicle

0 Control panel

Reset

-- Plug the vehicle charging connector into the vehicle charging port.
-- The charging process e will start automatically. -- Once the charging process has completed, un-
lock the vehicle and remove the vehicle charging connector from the vehicle charging port.
Adjusting the charging power level
The control unit automatically recognizes the voltage and the available current strength. You can set whether you would like to charge with full or reduced charging power. The last setting that was selected will be saved and used again the next time the vehicle is charged. If multiple
items are connected to the power circuit, the
charging current may be reduced when charging at a power outlet. This can help to prevent the electrical equipment from overheating.
The vehicle has a minimum battery charging capacity of 880 W. Therefore, if the network voltage is less than 200 V, charging using a household socket will only be possible if the charging power level is set to 100%. Otherwise, the charging process will not start.
Before charging, always check if the charging power setting that was selected last is still suitable.
-- To set the charging power level, press and hold
the ® button © ®&fig. 89 for at least two sec-
onds.

Charging
Note the instructions for charging > page 776.
Requirement: the correct power plug must be installed > page 128. -- Insert the plug into the socket.

After the charging power level is set, the status
LEDs ©, and {] will flash green one time. The selected value (50% or 100%) is displayed on the
left or right side of the ® button.

Control unit: status and malfunction indicators

Indicator lights

Green

O O Off

O @& Off

O 0 off

Off

Meaning

Solution

The charger is ready to charge, | Starting the charging process

but is not charging.

=>page 116.

124

OwnersManuals2.com

High-voltage system

Indicator lights

Flashing green

O A Off
O @B oft

O 0 Off

Off

Flashing green

O B oft

O 6 of

Off

Flashing green

O A Off O @ oft

@ 8 Yellow

Off

Yellow

O QA Off

O B oft

O 0 off

Off

Rede

O B oft

O 0 oft

Off

Red

O Q Off

O @

B 6

Off
Yeu

Off

Meaning |The vehicle is being charged
with the ground conductor
monitor activated.

Solution

| The power cable has overheat- | After the cable cools down, the malfunc-

ed. Possible cause of the mal- | tion will be automatically cleared. Until it

function: a multi-phase socket | cools down, charging performance will be

is being used in single-phase | reduced. If the malfunction continues,

mode. The charging perform- | have the power supply/household con-

ance will be reduced.

nection checked by a qualified electrician.

|The control unit has overheat- | After the control unit cools down, the

ed. The charging performance | malfunction will be automatically

will be reduced.

cleared. Never leave the control panel in

direct sunlight for long periods or time.

Until it cools down, charging perform-

ance will be reduced. If the malfunction

continues, have the control unit checked

by an authorized Audi dealer or author-

ized Audi Service Facility.

The charger is connected to the vehicle. The high-voltage battery is charged and the charging process has ended successfully, or the vehicle is not requesting a charging pro-
cedure.
Th e power cabbllee h has overhheat-
ed. The charging process has__| been interrupted.

After erththee cable cable ccoooollss d down, thhee malfmaluf nc-
tion will be automatically cleared and the charging process will resume. If the mal-
function continues, have the control unit
checked by an authorized Audi dealer or
authorized Audi Service Facility, or have
the power supply/household connection checked by a qualified electrician.

The control unit has overheat- | After the control unit cools down, the

ed. The charging process has_ | malfunction will be automatically cleared

been interrupted.

and the charging process will resume.

Never leave the control panel in direct

sunlight for long periods or time. If the

malfunction continues, have the control

unit checked by an authorized Audi dealer

or authorized Audi Service Facility.

4KE012721BH

125
OwnersManuals2.com

High-voltage system

Indicator lights

Red

O @B oft

O 6 of

Off

Red

O A Off

O 6 of

Off

Red

O QO Off

O ©

& off
6 Flashi

asning YeNow

Off

Red

O QO Off

@ EG Red

O 6 of

Off

Red

O B oft

O 6 off

Red

O O Off

O B oft

@ 8 Red

Off

Meaning

Solution

The charging infrastructure of | After the power supply/household con-

| the power supply/household _| nection stabilizes, the malfunction will be

connection is restricted. Possi- | automatically cleared and the charging

ble cause of the malfunction: | process will resume. If the malfunction

low voltage or poor power fre- | continues, have the power supply/house-

quency. The charging process | hold connection checked by a qualified

has been interrupted.

electrician.

There is a malfunction inthe | After the vehicle charging system stabiliz-

vehicle charging system. The | es, the malfunction will be automatically

charging process has been in- | cleared and the charging process will re-

terrupted.

sume. If the malfunction continues, have

the vehicle checked by an authorized Audi

dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.

The power cable or vehicle ca- | Have the power or vehicle cable replaced ble is faulty. Possible cause of | by an authorized Audi dealer or authorthe malfunction: the coding _ | ized Audi Service Facility.
resistance of the power or ve-
|hicle cable is not compatible. The charging process has been interrupted.

There is a malfunction inthe | End the charging process at the vehicle

vehicle charging system. The | and remove the vehicle cable from the ve-

charging process has been in- |hicle charging port. Disconnect the charg-

terrupted.

er from the power supply and reconnect it

after 60 seconds. Restart the charging

process > page 776. If the malfunction

continues, have the vehicle checked by an

authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi

Service Facility.

There is an overvoltage inthe | Disconnect the charger from the power

charging infrastructure of the | supply and reconnect it after 60 seconds.

power supply/household con- |If the malfunction continues, have the

nection. The charging process | power supply/household connection

has been interrupted.

checked by a qualified electrician.

The control unit has atechni- | Disconnect the charger from the power cal malfunction. The charging | supply and reconnect it after 60 seconds.
process has been interrupted. | If the malfunction continues, have the control unit checked by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.

126

OwnersManuals2.com

Indicator lights

Red

O 0 Off

O B oft

asning re

Off

Red

@ XQ Red

@O B6 oRefd

Off

Red

@ X Red

@ S& Red

@ 6 ReGd

Off

Red

@ Q Red @ E& Red

@ 3 Red

. .

Flashing red

Red

Off

Red

@ CX Red

@ GE Red @ 6 Red
©

Red

()

Flashing red

O O off

O B oft

@ 6 Red

Off

High-voltage system

Meaning

Solution

The control unit has atechnical malfunction (self-test failed). The charging process
has been interrupted.

| Disconnect the charger from the power supply and reconnect it after 60 seconds. _/|If the malfunction continues, have the
control unit checked by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.

The charging infrastructure of | Have the control unit checked by an authe power supply/household | thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi connection is insufficient: the | Service Facility, and have the power sup-
ground conductor is interrupt- | ply/household connection checked by a ed or not present. The ground | qualified electrician. Do not use the powconductor monitor has inter- | er supply/household connector until the rupted the charging process. | malfunction is corrected.

The indicator light in the reset | Have the control unit replaced by an au-

button on the control unit is | thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi

faulty. The charging process

Service Facility.

has been interrupted.

The control unit has detected | Press and hold the © button for at least
residual current. The charging |two seconds. If the malfunction continprocess has been interrupted. | ues, have the control unit checked by an
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility, and have the power supply/household connection checked by a qualified electrician.

The charging infrastructure is | Disconnect the charger from the power

wired incorrectly. The charg- | supply. Have the power supply/household

ing process has been inter-

connection checked by a qualified electri-

ee :

cian.

The control unit has atechni- | Disconnect the charger from the power

cal malfunction. Possible

supply and reconnect it after 60 seconds.

cause of the malfunction: soft- | If the malfunction continues, have the

ware error or the load relay

control unit checked by an authorized

has been switched incorrectly. | Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Fa-

The charging process has been | cility, and have the power supply/house-

interrupted.

hold connection checked by a qualified

electrician.

The control unit has a serious | Have the control unit replaced by an au-

malfunction. The charging

thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi

process has been interrupted. | Service Facility.

4KE012721BH

127
OwnersManuals2.com

High-voltage system

Indicator lights

Off

@ QO Red

@ E Red

@ § Red

Meaning

Solution

The indicator light in the On/Off button on the control unit is faulty. The charging
process has been interrupted.

Have the control unit replaced by an au| thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Service Facility.

Red

Technical Data
The output of the charging system may be different from the charging rate of your vehicle.

Output Current rating System voltage Power frequency Overvoltage category (IEC 60664) Short-time current rating (EN 61439-1) Power plug versions
Integrated residual-current device Vehicle charging connector Protection class IP Code Control unit mass Control unit dimensions (height x width x depth)

9.6 kw 40 A single phase 120V-240V 50 Hz/60 Hz ll <10 kA eff.
NEMA 6-30; NEMA 6-50; NEMA 14-30; NEMA 14-50; NEMA 5-15
AC: 20 mA; DC: 56 mA Type 1
55 (USA: Enclosure 3) 5.3 lbs- 7.7 lbs (2.4- 3.5 kg)
12.2 inx 4.1 in x 2.8 in (310 mm x 105 mm x 72 mm)

G) Tips
-- The device runs a self test after power has
been restored to the control unit. If a self
test is successful, all indicator lights will il-
luminate green for two seconds. -- The Audi e-tron compact charging system is
designed for charging at sockets with a voltage of 120 V/240 V. If your socket has a dif-
ferent voltage, contact and authorized Audi
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. -- If your Audi e-tron compact charging system
has a fixed connection, meaning can be connected directly to the power supply without a power cable, contact a qualified electrician or an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.

-- The system complies with United States FCC regulations and ISED regulations page 301.
nging or attaching the cable
Applies to: vehicles with Audi charging system
ag

RAZ-1229.

Fig. 90 Control unit: removing and attaching the cable

128

OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH [RAZ-0638

Requirements:
> The charging process for the high-voltage battery must be ended > page 177.
> The vehicle charging connector must be removed from the vehicle charging port.
> The power cable must be removed from the socket.
Loosening the cable
> Lift the lever @ all the way up. > Pull the connector (2) out just until you feel re-
sistance. > Close the lever (1) until it is resting on the con-
nector (2).
>» Remove the connector (2) completely.
Attaching the cable
> Lift the lever @ up slightly. > Insert the connector @) into the control unit
just until you feel resistance.
> Lift the lever @ all the way up. > Insert the connector (2) all the way into the
control unit.
> Close the lever (1).
ZA WARNING
-- Note the warnings for charging > A\ in Charging on page 117.
-- Before switching a cable, always unplug the power cable from the socket.
-- Only change cables in a dry environment. -- The Audi charging system may only be used
as a complete unit consisting of the power
cables, the control unit, and the vehicle ca-
ble. Depending on the country, the total length of the power cable, control panel,
and vehicle cable may be restricted, for ex-
ample to 24.6 feet (7.5 m) in the USA. Audi recommends using only cables approved by
Audi.
G@) Tips
-- The power cable with the power connector for industrial sockets and the Audi charging system control unit are designed to work together. Changing the power cable to another connector type may reduce the available

High-voltage system
charging power of the entire system. Limitations on the ability to transfer power (current capacity) depending on the phase and the number of available phases may affect the available charging power. --To reduce the risk of theft of the charging equipment and cable, the lever on the control unit can be secured with a bolt to deter
theft. For more information on this, contact
an authorized Audi dealership.
Wall mount clip
Applies to: vehicles with wall mount clip
Fig. 91 Wall mount clip: securing the Audi charging sys-
tem
Securing the Audi charging system
> First insert the control unit in the bottom tabs on the wall mount clip and then into the upper tabs.
» Push the control unit in the direction of the arrow toward the rear > fig. 97 and let it lock into place.
> Wrap the excess length of cable around the
charging connector mount (@) when you are not
charging the high-voltage battery. > Plug the power cable into the socket (2). > After charging, you can hook the vehicle charg-
ing connector to the charging connector mount
@.
Locking and unlocking the Audi charging system > Lock or unlock the Audi charging system if nec-
essary using the key provided by turning it to
the lock position @) or the unlock position@). >

129
OwnersManuals2.com

High-voltage system
Removing the Audi charging system » Remove the power cable connector from the
socket (2).
> Unwind the cable from the charging connector
mount (1).
> To loosen the control unit from the bracket,
push the locking mechanism @) upward.
Observe the safety precautions in the assembly instructions for the wall mount clip.

130

OwnersManuals2.com

Trailer towing
Driving with a trailer
General information
Your vehicle is primarily intended for transporting people and luggage. However, if you drive
with a trailer, follow the technical requirements,
the operation and driving tips, and the legal regulations.
Driving with a trailer affects the vehicle's energy usage, performance, and wear. It also requires greater concentration from the driver.
A retrofitted trailer hitch must be installed according to the instructions provided by the manufacturer > page 134.
Z\ WARNING
Do not transport any people in a trailer due to the risk of fatal injury.
Operating instructions
Towing capacity
The permitted towing capacity must not be exceeded under any circumstances > page 299.
You can drive up larger inclines if you are not using the maximum towing capacity.
Tongue weight
The maximum permitted tongue weight of the trailer drawbar on the trailer hitch ball head must not be exceeded.
For driving safety, Audi recommends always using the maximum permitted tongue weight, but do not exceed this weight. Having the tongue weight too low affects the handling of the vehicle and trailer.
You can determine the tongue weight using a tongue weight scale, a bathroom scale, or a public weigh station, for example. If the tongue weight differs, it can be adjusted by distributing the load in the trailer correctly. If the tongue weight meets the specifications, then the load in the trailer should not be changed.

Trailer towing

Load distribution
Poor cargo load and distribution can negatively impact vehicle handling. Load the vehicle and trailer based on the following criteria as much as possible:
-- Store objects in the vehicle luggage compartment, if possible. The vehicle should always carry the heaviest possible load and the trailer should have the lightest possible load.
-- Distribute the load in the trailer so that the heavy objects are as close to the axle as possible.
-- Secure objects so that they do not slide. -- Utilize the maximum permitted tongue weight
if possible.

Speed
Adhere to the legal speed limits. Follow the legal regulations that are applicable in the country where you are operating the vehicle.
As the speed increases, the driving stability of the vehicle and trailer decreases. Therefore you should not exceed the maximum legal speed lim-
it when there are unfavorable road, weather, and/or wind conditions. This especially applies
when driving downhill.

Hill
When you start driving uphill or downhill, the vehicle and trailer may tilt or sway sooner than when driving on a level surface. If small swaying movements have already occurred, you can stabilize the trailer by firmly braking immediately. Never attempt to "straighten out" the vehicle and trailer by accelerating.
reduce the speed and use the recuperation braking effect > page 98 to relieve the brakes > A\.

Exterior lighting

Follow the legal regulations for lighting on your

trailer that are applicable in the country where

you are operating the vehicle. If necessary, con-

tact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi

Service Facility for more information.

4KE012721BH

131
OwnersManuals2.com

Trailer towing

Before you start driving, check all lighting equipment on the trailer while it is hitched to the vehicle.
The headlight range control automatically adjusts the light range of the headlights.
The turn signals are activated in trailer mode if the BS indicator light blinks. Ifa turn signal on the trailer or on the vehicle fails while in trailer mode, the indicator light will not blink twice as fast to indicate this.
Outside mirrors
Make sure that you can also observe the traffic area behind the vehicle using the exterior mir-
rors, and use additional exterior mirrors if neces-
sary. Adjust the additional exterior mirrors so that you have a sufficient visibility behind the vehicle. Follow the local legal regulations for installing additional exterior mirrors.
Tires
Set the tire pressure on your vehicle for a "full load"; see the tire pressure sticker > page 257. If necessary, also adjust the tire pressure on the trailer according to the manufacturer's specifications.
The trailer and the vehicle should be equipped with winter tires when driving in winter temperatures.
Driver assistance systems
Connecting or disconnecting a trailer/rear carrier system can change the alignment of the sensors/ cameras.
To ensure the driver assistance systems can function correctly, switch the ignition off and then back on again each time an object is connected to the trailer hitch or disconnected from it.
Overrun brakes
If your trailer is equipped with an overrun brake, it must be correctly adjusted and function correctly. When using a trailer with overrun brakes, first brake gently then quickly. This reduces the risk of jerking while braking if the trailer wheels lock up.

AN WARNING
Constant braking causes the brakes to overheat and can substantially reduce braking performance, increase braking distance, or cause complete failure of the brake system.
() Note
Attachments retrofitted on the vehicle may cause damage, especially on the trailer hitch ball head. In cases of damage, have the function checked by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
G) Tips
-- Block the wheels with chocks when parking on inclines if the trailer is loaded.
-- Audi recommends having the vehicle inspected between the inspection intervals if you tow a trailer frequently.
Air suspension
Applies to: vehicles with air suspension
Requirement: all vehicle doors must be closed. The Audi drive select comfort mode > page 106 is selected before you connect the trailer >(@).
Setting trailer mode
> Applies to MMI: select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Air suspension: trailer.
>» Switch trailer mode off again when you are no longer towing a trailer.
For vehicles with a factory-installed trailer hitch, the air suspension trailer mode will automatically switch on if you connect the trailer connector to the socket.
When using rear carrier systems that are mounted directly on the trailer hitch ball head, you can also switch trailer mode off manually.
If you have to drive through difficult road conditions, you can raise the vehicle again after hitching the trailer or after ensuring the tongue weight is correct. To do this, select the Audi drive select offroad or allroad mode > page 106, or >

132

OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH RAZ-1441

select Raise to create the maximum ground clearance > page 107.
C) Note
-- Never turn off trailer mode while driving when a trailer is hitched, because then the restrictions for controlling the vehicle level will be turned off.
-- Driving with a trailer on unpaved roads when the vehicle is raised may change the vehicle handling. Adapt your speed.
-- Note that the vehicle will lower automatically at certain speeds if you have lifted the vehicle manually.
-- Be sure to adhere to the applicable tongue weight for your vehicle > page 737. Select the Audi drive select comfort mode before connecting the trailer. The tongue weight and vehicle height must be coordinated with one another.
@ Tips
Even when lowering manually, the vehicle level will not lower more than the amount specified in the Audi drive select comfort mode.
Trailer hitch
Introduction
Only use a trailer hitch with a removable ball hitch mount and ball hitch. The trailer hitch must be permitted for the vehicle, the trailer and the permitted total weight of the trailer being pulled. Above all, it must be securely and safely attached to the vehicle trailer.
Never mount a trailer hitch on the bumper. The trailer hitch must be mounted in a way that does not impair the function of the bumper. Do not make any modifications to the brake system.
Check regularly if the trailer hitch is securely mounted. Always follow the instructions given by the trailer hitch manufacturer.

Trailer towing
ZA WARNING
Never mount a "weight-distributing" or "Loadbalancing" trailer coupler as the trailer hitch. The vehicle was not designed for these types of trailer hitches. The trailer hitch can malfunction and the trailer can separate from the
vehicle, which increases the risk of an accident.
Using the trailer hitch
Applies to: vehicles with trailer hitch

Fig. 92 Rear bumper: trailer hitch

The trailer hitch of your vehicle consists of the receiver @), the connector!) @ or connector retain-
er, two eyelets @ for the safety chains, and the
receiver cover (4).
The receiver () is suitable for securing a remova-
ble ball hitch mount with a ball head, for exam-
ple when towing a trailer > A\.

> In order to use the trailer hitch, pull the cover
@ out of the receiver () in direction of the ar-

row. > Check the receiver (3) for dirt and clean it if nec-

essary.

> When towing a trailer, use the trailer connec-

tor!) @ and secure the safety chains using the
eyelets (2).

> To prevent dirt from entering the receiver ®,

close it with the cover @) after using it.

) Incertain countries.

133
OwnersManuals2.com

Trailer towing
Z\ WARNING
-- For your own safety, read the installation instructions provided by the ball hitch mount manufacturer.
-- There is a risk of an accident if the ball hitch mount is installed incorrectly. The ball hitch mount must be secured in the receiver @) correctly. The same applies to accessories that are secured in the receiver.
-- Only use a ball hitch mount with ball head suitable for your vehicle and your trailer.
--To reduce the risk of injury, always remove the ball hitch mount if no trailer is mounted.
--To reduce the risk of an accident, contaminants on the trailer hitch must be removed because otherwise the ball hitch mount might not be secured correctly in the receiver.
@ Tips
-- No ball hitch mount or ball head is provided
with the trailer hitch. You can purchase these at specialty stores. -- The eyelets on the trailer hitch are only intended for securing the trailer safety chains.
Driving with a trailer
Trailer brakes
If the trailer has its own brake system, then fol-
low the manufacturer specifications. However, the brake system on the trailer must never be connected to the vehicle brake system.
Safety chains
Make sure the safety chains are correctly applied when pulling a trailer. The chains should hang enough so that the trailer can drive around curves. However, they must not touch the ground.
ZX WARNING
If the trailer is equipped with electronic brakes, these brakes cannot be activated by a factory-installed control system, which increases the risk of an accident.
134

Retrofit installation You can find out if your vehicle is equipped with a retrofitted trailer hitch at an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. An authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility knows the specifications for retrofitting a trailer hitch and any necessary technical
requirements.
ZA\ WARNING
-- Only have the additional trailer hitch installed by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
-- There is a risk of an accident if the trailer hitch is installed incorrectly.
-- For your own safety, read the assembly instructions provided by the trailer hitch manufacturer.
@) Note Connecting the socket incorrectly could cause damage to the vehicle electrical system.
OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

Assist systems
General information
Safety precautions
ZA\ WARNING
-- As the driver, you are always completely responsible for all driving tasks. The assist systems cannot replace the driver's attention. Give your full attention to driving the vehicle, and be ready to intervene in the traffic situation at all times.
-- Activate the assist systems only if the surrounding conditions permit it. Always adapt your driving style to the current visual, weather, road, and traffic conditions.
-- Loose objects can be thrown around the vehicle interior during sudden driving or braking maneuvers, which increases the risk of an accident. Store objects securely while driving.
-- For the assist systems to be able to react correctly, the function of the sensors and cameras must not be restricted. Note the information on sensors and cameras => page 136.
@ Tips
-- Pay attention to applicable local regulations relating to driving tasks, leaving space for
emergency vehicles, vehicle distance, speed, parking location, wheel placement, etc. The
driver is always responsible for following the laws that are applicable in the location where the vehicle is being operated. -- You can cancel a steering or braking intervention by the system by braking or accelerating noticeably, steering, or deactivating the respective assist system. -- Always check the assist systems settings before driving. The settings could have been changed, for example by other drivers or by using another user.

Assist systems

System limitations
ZA WARNING
--The use of an assist system cannot overcome the natural laws of physics. A collision cannot be prevented in certain circumstan-
ces. -- Warnings, messages, or indicator lights may
not be displayed or initiated on time or correctly, for example, if vehicles are approaching very fast. -- Corrective interventions by the assist systems, such as steering or braking interventions, may not be sufficient or they may not occur. Always be ready to intervene.

@ Tips

-- Due to the system limitations when detect-

ing the surrounding area, the systems may

warn or intervene unexpectedly or too late

in certain situations. The assist systems may

also interpret a driving maneuver incorrectly

and then warn the driver unexpectedly.

-- The systems may not function as expected

in unusual driving situations, such as driving

offroad, on unpaved roads, on loose ground,

on inclines, or on grooves in the road.

-- The systems may not function correctly in

unclear traffic situations, such as turning

lanes, exit ramps, construction zones, rises

or dips that obstruct visibility, intersections,

toll stations, or city traffic.

-- The detection of the surrounding area can

be limited, for example by vehicles driving

ahead or by rain, snow, heavy spray, or light

shining into the camera.

--In trailer mode, some assist systems may be

limited, may not react as usual, or may be

unavailable. Please refer to the instructions

for towing a trailer located in > page 731.

-- The steering wheel touch recognition may

be limited when you wear gloves. Steering

intervention requests from the steering as-

sist systems may occur more frequently.

-- If accessories have been mounted on the

steering wheel, the steering assist systems

may be limited. The frequency of steering

135
OwnersManuals2.com

Assist systems

intervention requests from the steering assist systems may vary as well.

General messages
Driver assistance systems: currently limited. Affected systems will be continuously updated in message memory
If this message appears, one or more driver assist systems is limited or unavailable. To display more information, select the second tab for messages with the multifunction steering wheel > page 72. Take note of the information and adapt your driving style accordingly.

Surrounding area detection

Senso

camera coverage areas

Fig. 93 Sensor coverage area

RAZ-0611

383is
Fig. 94 Rearview camera coverage area
The assist systems analyze the data from various sensors and cameras installed in the vehicle. Do not use any assist systems if there is damage in there area of the sensors and cameras or on the vehicle underbody. Damage can impair the function of the sensors and cameras or cause malfunctions. Have an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility check their function.
Radar sensors Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area surrounding the entire vehicle may be detected
> fig. 93 @).
The wheel sensors on the rear corners of the vehicle are positioned so that the adjacent lanes to the left and right are detected on roads witha normal lane width.
Ultrasonic sensors Depending on vehicle equipment, various areas may be displayed in the MMI using the ultrasonic sensors > fig. 93.
The range of the displays depends on the location of the ultrasonic sensors:
@ Approximately 4 feet (1.20 m) @® Approximately 3 feet (0.90 m) @ Approximately 5.2 feet (1.60 m) ©® Approximately 3 feet (0.90 m) © Approximately 3 feet (0.90 m) The side area © is detected and evaluated when
passing. There may have been changes to the surrounding area after switching the ignition off and on again, after opening the doors, or if the vehicle is left stationary for a period of time. In this >

136

OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

case, the area will appear black until the area has been detected and evaluated.
Cameras
Use the camera image on the display to assist you only if it shows a good, clear picture. Keep in mind that the image in the display is enlarged and distorted. Under certain circumstances, objects may appear different and unclear on the display.
The rearview camera can only detect the area marked in red > fig. 94. Only this area is displayed on the upper display > A\.
ZA WARNING
Sensors and cameras have spots in which the surrounding area cannot be detected. Objects, animals, and people may only be detected with limitations may not be detected at all. Always monitor the traffic and the vehicle's surroundings directly and do not become distracted.
©) Note
-- Obstacles may disappear from the measurement range when approaching them, even if they were already detected.
-- In some situations, the ability of the sensors and cameras to detect and display certain objects may be limited.
-- Objects located above the coverage area, such as bumpers on parked cars, garage doors that are partially open, or objects that are hanging
-- Low obstacles -- Narrow objects, such as barrier chains, fo-
liage, poles, or fences -- Projecting objects, such as trailer draw
bars -- Objects with certain surfaces and struc-
tures, such as fabric
G) Tips
--The sensors and cameras and the areas around them must not be obstructed because this can impair the function of the systems that depend on them. Make sure

Assist systems
that the sensors and cameras are free of snow, ice, and other deposits. Do not use any accessories, stickers, or other objects that extend into the range of the sensors and cameras. On vehicles that have factory-installed license plate brackets on the front of the vehicle, the brackets may only be replaced with ones that are the same size and made of the same material. Do not install any license plate brackets on the front of vehicles that do not have factory-installed brackets. Otherwise, the function of the system could be impaired. The function of the sensors and cameras may be limited when light and visibility conditions are poor, for example when driving into a tunnel, when there is glare, or when there are reflective objects. External ultrasonic sensors, such as those in other vehicles, can interfere with the sensors. The coverage areas of the sensors > fig. 93 and cameras > fig. 94 are diagrams and do not represent a true-to-scale image of the sensor ranges. The system complies with United States FCC regulations and ISED regulations => page 300.
137
OwnersManuals2.com

Assist systems ocations of the sensors and c
Fig. 96 Rear area: sensors and cameras
Front area Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following sensors and cameras may be installed: -- Laser scanner in the front of the bumper > A. -- Camera behind the windshield -- Peripheral cameras on the exterior mirrors -- Front peripheral camera in the radiator grille -- Night vision camera in the radiator grille -- Front and side ultrasonic sensors -- Radar sensors at the front corners of the vehi-
cle -- Radar sensor in the front in the radiator grille Rear area Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following sensors and cameras may be installed: -- Rearview camera in the luggage compartment
lid -- Radar sensors at the rear corners of the vehicle -- Rear and side ultrasonic sensors

ZA WARNING
Applies to: vehicles with laser scanner
-- The surface of the laser scanner can become hot during operation, which increases the risk of burns.
-- The laser scanner contains a class 1 laser in accordance with IEC 60825-1:2014. When used according to regulations, the laser is not dangerous. Opening the laser module and removing covers is not permitted. Doing so could cause permanent injuries to the eyes.
-- Any repair work on the laser module must be performed by an authorized Audi dealer
or authorized Audi Service Facility; other-
wise the vehicle's operating license may be voided. Incorrect repairs may cause limited functionality and eye damage.
@) Tips
Applies to: vehicles with laser scanner
-- The possible emissions are below the threshold for class 1 lasers.
-- Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to
Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007.
G) Tips
-- The locations of the sensors may differ slightly depending on vehicle equipment.
-- Some sensors are installed under vehicle components and cannot be seen from the outside.
-- The system complies with United States FCC regulations and ISED regulations => page 300.

138

OwnersManuals2.com

Switching assist systems on and off

Assist systems
ZX WARNING
Observe the safety precautions and note the
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 735.

[RAZ-1041

Fig. 97 Center console: driver assistance systems button
Description
You can switch some assist systems on and off in the MMI. Depending on the equipment, it may be in the profile selection or the standard display.
> Press the & button @, or
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Driver assistance.
Profile selection
Applies to: vehicles with profile selection
> To select a profile, press the profile name on the upper display or press the & button @repeatedly until the profile is active.
> To list systems included in a profile, select on the upper display.
The following profiles can be selected:
-- Maximum - All available systems are switched on in this profile.
-- Basic or All off- Only the basic systems are switched on in this profile. If no basic system is
available, the profile is named All off.
-- Individual - You can switch the systems on and off individually in this profile. To switch individual systems on and off in the Individual profile, select ¥ and CD for the desired systems.
Standard display
Applies to: vehicles with standard display
-- To switch a system on or off, press CD for the desired system.

139
OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

Driving information
Driving information Speed warning system

Camera-based traffic sign recognition

Applies to: vehicles with speed warning system
The speed warning system helps the driver to stay below a specified maximum speed. A warning threshold can be set in the MMI for this purpose.
Once the speed slightly exceeds the stored threshold, the speed warning system will alert the driver with an indicator in the instrument cluster and a warning tone. Once the speed drops
below the stored maximum speed, the indicator will turn off.
Setting a threshold is recommended if you would like to be reminded when you reach a certain maximum speed. Situations where you may want to do so include driving in a country with a general speed limit or if there is a specified maximum speed for winter tires.
@ Tips Regardless of the speed warning system, you should always monitor your speed using the speedometer and make sure you are following the legal speed limit.
Setting the warning threshold
Applies to: vehicles with speed warning system
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Driver assistance > (<3) > Speed warning.
Messages
Applies to: vehicles with speed warning system
The following messages may appear depending on the vehicle equipment:
cy fe) Manually set XX mph (km/h) speed limit warning threshold exceeded
The stored speed was exceeded.

Applies to: vehicles with camera-based traffic sign recognition
Fig. 98 Instrument cluster: traffic sign recognition
The traffic sign recognition shows the traffic signs detected by the front camera in the instrument cluster display and in the head-up display*. Data from the navigation system is also included in the display. Up to three traffic signs can be displayed in the instrument cluster at once. The speed limit that is currently applicable is displayed in the status line. If necessary, it will be hidden if the system detects that turning right is prohibited at a red light. The display in the headup display* can be switched off > page 25. Within the limits of the system and depending on the market, speed limit restrictions @) in
school zones, highways, construction zones, or at
night may be displayed.
Limitations The traffic sign recognition is subject to certain system limitations and may be unavailable or only partially available in the following situations: -- When visibility is poor, such as in snow, rain,
fog, or heavy spray -- When there is glare, for example from oncom-
ing traffic or the sun -- At high speeds -- If the camera's visual field > page 7136 is cov-
ered, for example by dirt or stickers. For information on cleaning, see > page 270.

140

OwnersManuals2.com

-- If the traffic signs are completely or partially covered, for example by trees, snow, dirt, or other vehicles
-- If traffic signs do not conform to the standard format
-- If traffic signs are damaged or bent -- If traffic signs are displayed on sign holders
with electronic signs -- If the traffic signs or the roadways have
changed, and the navigation data is no longer up-to-date
Z\ WARNING
-- Observe the safety precautions and note the limits of the assist systems, sensors, and cameras > page 135.
-- Under some circumstances, traffic sign rec-
ognition may not detect traffic signs correctly or detect them at all. As a result, the system may not display the correct speed limit or any speed limit.
G) Tips
-- Traffic sign recognition does not adapt your vehicle's speed to match the speed limit.
-- The display in the instrument cluster is based on the units of measurement used for speed in the country where the vehicle is being operated. As a result, a display of 50 in the instrument cluster can mean either mph or km/h, depending on the country.
Applies to: vehicles with camera-based traffic sign recognition
Accessing traffic sign recognition
> Select in the instrument cluster: vehicle functions tab > Traffic signs.
Setting a traffic sign based speed warning
» Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
HICLE > Driver assistance > (<3) > Speed warn-
ing.
You can select a warning threshold. If you exceed
this, then the current detected speed limit will be shown in the display with an exclamation point

Driving information
for the duration that it is exceeded and it will blink for a short time.
Applies to: vehicles with camera-based traffic sign recognition
The following messages may appear depending on the vehicle equipment:
Traffic sign recognition: currently unavailable. Camera view limited due to surroundings
The camera's visual field is covered. Clean the windshield.
Traffic sign recognition: currently limited. See owner's manual
This message appears if navigation system data is not available, for example on newly-constructed roads. The speed limit display will be temporarily limited, which increases the risk of an incorrect display. If this message continues to appear, drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
No traffic sign information available
Depending on the area, there is no valid navigation data and no speed limits were detected. This may also appear if there is a recommended speed, but no speed limit (for example when driving on and off the expressway).
Malfunction! See owner's manual
The system may not function correctly so it has been switched off. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
Function currently unavailable. See owner's manual
If this message appears on vehicles without camera-based traffic sign recognition, then the traffic light information function is currently unavailable. See > page 143.

4KE012721BH

141
OwnersManuals2.com

Driving information
Traffic light information
Applies to: vehicles with traffic light information

Fig. 99 Instrument cluster: traffic light information display

The traffic light information gives you a speed
recommendation in order to reach the next traffic light when it is green (@, or it informs you of
the wait time at the next red light 2). Once traffic light data is received, the traffic light informa-
tion will be displayed in the instrument cluster and in the head-up display*. If the vehicle is in an
area with traffic light information but cannot receive a traffic light signal, then a gray traffic light symbol will be displayed @).

General information

The traffic light information is subject to system

limitations and may be unavailable or only parti-

Y $ ally availablien the following situations:
-- If the permitted speed limit is exceeded

-- If driving below a certain speed limit

-- --

IIffly y

t1h0e 0
the

enfesetxetettimtarSeta(e3f0fdicfowaliiagtwhtetyiims elesast

than a red

approximatel.ight |is less

than four seconds
--If there is no traffic light data available

-- If emergency response vehicles or public transit

systems are active

-- If traffic lights are in construction zones or be-

ing serviced

-- If there are warnings from the camera-based

traffic sign recognition*

-- If the camera-based traffic sign recognition* is

malfunctioning or not available

-- If the data connection has been interrupted

-- If data transmission is deactivated in the priva-
~ Ifcythseettsiunbgsscription has expired
If this is the case, the menu item will be grayedout or it will not be possible to select it.
ZA\ WARNING
-- When traffic light information is shown, al-
so always pay attention to the traffic situa-
tion, the distance to other vehicles, and the
area around the vehicle. The driver is always responsible for assessing the traffic situation. -- Always adapt your speed to the current
weather, road and traffic conditions. The displayed information must never cause you to
ignore legal traffic regulations and pose a safety risk. -- Regardless of the traffic light information, you should always monitor your speed using the speedometer and make sure you are adhering to the legal speed limit. -- The traffic light information does not adjust your vehicle's speed to the speed recommendation shown in the display. -- Observe the safety precautions and note the limits of the assist systems, sensors, and cameras > page 7135.
(i) Tips
-- Traffic light information was only available
in select cities at the time this manual was
-- Trtpairfiofnntiwecidd:elight information is not available na-
-- The functions depend on the navigation da-
ta* being up-to-date and correct identification by the traffic sign recognition*. -- Incorrect values from the camera-based traffic sign recognition* or outdated navigation system* map data can result in missing or incorrect display images. -- Certain traffic lights can automatically adjust to the current traffic situation. If this occurs, the display of traffic light information can change suddenly.

142

OwnersManuals2.com

-- The traffic signs on the road always take priority over the display. The driver is always responsible for adhering to the regulations applicable in the country where the vehicle is being operated.
-- Units of measurement and language settings are displayed based on how they were set in the MMI system settings > page 233.
Applies to: vehicles with traffic light information
Switching traffic light information on and off
The system can be switched on and off in the MMI & page 139.
Accessing traffic light information
> Select in the instrument cluster: vehicle func-
tions tab > Traffic signs.
@) Tips If another tab or another function is selected in the instrument cluster, the traffic light information will appear in the status bar on the instrument cluster.
Messages
Applies to: vehicles with traffic light information
The following messages may appear depending on the vehicle equipment:
Malfunction! See owner's manual
The system could not be configured, for example due to a network malfunction. Switch the ignition off and shut down the vehicle to restart the system. Wait several minutes until the vehicle has shut down completely and then switch the ignition back on.
Function currently unavailable. See owner's manual
There is a temporary system malfunction. Check if one or more of the following situations applies and correct the issue if necessary:
-- Traffic light information is switched off -- Data transmission is deactivated

Driving information

-- The vehicle is not equipped with traffic sign rec-
ognition.
-- There is no valid license -- Traffic light information is not available in that
area
Lap timer
Introduction
Applies to: vehicles with lap timer
You can record and evaluate lap times with the lap timer. You can operate the lap timer using the multifunction steering wheel > page 72.
Opening the lap timer
> Select in the instrument cluster: Vehicle functions tab > [=] button > Lap times.
An additional indicator will appear in the head-up display*.
ZX WARNING
Your focus should always be on driving your vehicle safely. As the driver, you have complete responsibility for safety in traffic. To reduce the risk of an accident, only use the lap timer functions in such a way that you always maintain complete control over your vehicle in all traffic situations.
G) Tips
You can retrieve information from the trip computer while the lap timer stopwatch is running.

ey sae

Applies to: vehicles with lap timer

Requirement: the lap timer must be open => page 143.

Timing laps

> To start timing manually, select Start lap 1 in

the menu.

> To start timing automatically as soon as you be-

gin to drive, select Start lap 1 by driving off or

Start by driving off in the menu.

4KE012721BH

143
OwnersManuals2.com

Driving information

> To start timing a new lap after driving a lap, select New lap in the menu. This starts timing
the next lap at the same time.

After completing a lap, the difference between the last lap and the previous best lap time will be indicated with a "~" or ay"n+".

Pausing timing and displaying a split time

> To insert a pause @ select Pause in the menu.

> To resume timing, select Resume in the menu.

> To display a split time, select Split time in the

menu. The split time

appears for approxi-

mately ten seconds in the instrument cluster.

The current lap timing will continue running.

Canceling lap timing
The timing of the current lap will stop. The lap time will be erased and will not be included in the
statistics.

> Select Cancel lap in the menu.

Resetting the time > Select Reset lap times in the menu.

G) Tips
--A maximum of 99 lap times can be measured.
-- If timing is paused, you can continue it later even if you switch the ignition off.
-- Saved lap times cannot be individually deleted from the total results.
-- The saved lap timer values will remain after switching the ignition off.

Yoel aia (ay
Applies to: vehicles with lap timer
Displaying lap statistics
You can display the number of laps driven ES.
the fastest lap ao"n+", the slowest lap "-", and the
average time "®" in the instrument cluster.
> Select in the instrument cluster: Vehicle functions tab > ] button > Lap statistics.
> Turn the thumbwheel down or up to display the individual lap times.
> To return to the lap timing that was started, select the EI button > Lap times.
144

Resetting lap statistics Requirement: the lap statistics menu must be displayed.
> To reset the lap statistics, press and hold the left thumbwheel until the message No lap times have been recorded yet. appears.
G) Tips The lap statistics list the lap times for the last 30 laps. The fastest and slowest lap times out of up to 99 measured laps are also displayed.
Night vision assist

Applies to: vehicles with night vision assist

Night vision assist helps you when it is dark by using an infrared camera to monitor the area in
front of your vehicle, within the limits of the system. It can display objects up to a distance of ap-
proximately 1,000 feet (300 m).

Pedestrian and wild animals are detected by measuring the temperature difference between the object and the background. Pedestrians and
wild animals will not be detected if the temperature difference is too small. The pedestrian and wild animal marking feature is deactivated at
temperatures above approximately 77 °F (25 °C) and when it is light outside.

The thermal image detected by the camera is dis-
played in the instrument cluster. Warm areas generally appear lighter and cold areas appear darker.

The camera for the night vision assist is located in the vehicle's radiator grille > page 138. Make sure the night vision camera is not covered by
stickers, deposits, or any other obstructions because this can impair the night vision assist function. Follow the information about cleaning
=> page 270.

ZA WARNING

-- Observe the safety precautions and note the

limits of the assist systems, sensors, and

cameras > page 135.

OwnersManuals2.com

-- Night vision assist can only detect pedestrians and wild animals located within the range of the infrared camera.
-- Night vision assist cannot detect pedestrians or wild animals and mark them if: -- They are not in an upright position, for example if they are sitting or lying down and/or -- The silhouette in the display appears incomplete or interrupted, for example because the pedestrian is partially behind a vehicle or an animal is partially covered by tall grass.
-- Never attempt to swerve around animals if doing so would endanger you or other road users.
G) Tips
-- Even though the system evaluates the shape and heat given off by all detected objects, there are limits to the system. There may be false warnings.
-- For technical reasons, the image pauses in split second intervals.
Switching on and off
Applies to: vehicles with night vision assist
The system can be switched on and off in the MMI & page 139.
> The AUTO light function must be selected for the night vision assist to automatically activate when it is dark.
> Switch on the low beams manually to activate night vision assist immediately. To do so, press (1) on the light switch module and select
When activated, the 1 tab appears in the instrument cluster. > Select in the instrument cluster: % tab
@) Tips
When the night vision assist tab is selected in the instrument cluster and the low beams are switched off, the thermal image display disappears only after you have exited the tab.

Driving information
Marking and warning
Applies to: vehicles with night vision assist
Fig. 100 Instrument cluster: pedestrian marking and warning
Highlighting detected pedestrians and wild animals Within the limits of the system, the night vision
assist can detect pedestrians and wild animals that are between approximately 32 feet (10 m) and 295 feet (90 m) in front of the vehicle and within the detection zone. Animal recognition is not active within highly developed areas. The system only detects large wild animals such as deer. When it is dark outside and the low beams are switched on, detected objects are marked in yellow @), within the limits of the system.
Pedestrian and wild animal warning This system limits are based on the vehicle speed and steering angle. Pedestrian and wild animal
warning encourages you to pay more attention.
If there are pedestrians or wild animals in front of your vehicle that could pose a danger, the system will direct your attention to this. -- Pedestrians or wild animals are highlighted in
red in the instrument cluster 2) and the A or
BAN symbol turns on @.
-- When the head-up display* is switched on, the additional indicator JM or EM appears.
--Achime will sound if something is detected. -- If the night vision assist thermal image is re-
placed by another display (such as the on-board computer), the red wa or BA indicator light will appear if there is a pedestrian or wild animal warning.

4KE012721BH WwW

145
OwnersManuals2.com

Driving information
The Sli symbol will appear when pedestrian and wild animal detection is not available.
Marking light*
To direct the driver's attention to a pedestrian,
the headlights can flash on the pedestrian when there is a pedestrian warning.
This occurs at speeds above approximately 35 mph (60 km/h) if you are outside of illuminated areas and no detected vehicles are shown. The marking light is not used for wild animals. The high beam assistant* controls the marking light*> page 57.
Adjusting the contrast
Applies to: vehicles with night vision assist
Requirement: the night vision assist must be switched on and the %1 tab must be displayed.
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Driver assistance > (<3) > Night vision assist.
> To set the desired contrast, move the slider.
Messages
Applies to: vehicles with night vision assist
The following messages may appear depending on the vehicle equipment:
Night vision assist: currently unavailable. See owner's manual
The system is not functioning correctly at the time, so it has been switched off. If the malfunction persists, drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
Integrated Toll Module
Applies to: vehicles with Integrated Toll Module
Depending on the region, you can pay toll fees in certain countries using the Integrated Toll Module (ITM). It replaces a separate transponder for detecting toll fees. The system electronics are integrated in the rearview mirror housing.

To use the ITM in toll zones, you must register and activate it.
Registration
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Integrated Toll Module.
> Note the Integrated Toll Module ID. > To register the ITM, go to the displayed web ad-
dress and follow the instructions.
Activation
> To activate the ITM, press CD in the MMI.
Entering the number of passengers
Depending on the number of passengers and the region, a lower toll fee may be charged. You must either enter the number of passengers or deactivate the ITM based on the laws applicable in the area where you are driving.
> To enter the number of passengers, select the appropriate button in the MMI.
> To deactivate the ITM, press CO in the MMI.
G) Tips
-- The driver is responsible for specifying the correct number of passengers and activating or deactivating the ITM.
-- Malfunctions can occur when detecting tolls if both the ITM and transponder are activated. Deactivate the system not being used or remove it as necessary.
-- Ifa rearview mirror is replaced, you must register the new ITM and remove the old ITM from the account.
-- The system complies with United States FCC regulations and ISED regulations => page 300.
Display
Applies to: vehicles with Integrated Toll Module
The selected number of passengers is displayed in the MMI status bar > page 27.
The i symbol in the status bar and a notification in the MMI will indicate if there is a faulty connection between the ITM and the MMI or if >

146

OwnersManuals2.com

the ITM is faulty. If the connection interference continues or the ITM is faulty, drive immediately
to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.

Driving information

4KE012721BH

147
OwnersManuals2.com

[RAZ-1449,

Driver assistance
Driver assistance
Cruise control system
Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
The cruise control system assists the driver in maintaining a constant speed above approximately 15 mph (20 km/h). The system maintains the desired speed by braking and accelerating.
ZA\ WARNING
-- Observe the safety precautions and note the limits of the assist systems, sensors, and cameras > page 135.
-- The cruise control system is only an assist system, and the driver is still responsible for controlling the vehicle. The driver is especially responsible for braking, controlling the speed, and maintaining the distance to other vehicles.
-- Switch the cruise control off temporarily when driving in turning lanes, highway exits, or in construction zones. This prevents the vehicle from accelerating to the stored speed when in these situations.
©) Note
Before driving downhill a long distance ona steep hill, decrease your speed and use the braking effect of recuperation > page 98. This reduces the load on the brakes.
Display overview
Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
Indicator lights and messages in the speedometer inform you about the driving situation and the settings. The displays depend on the country and equipment.
Indicator lights
ICRUISE| / | - the cruise control system is switched on and actively controls the set speed.
An additional indicator will appear in the head-up display".

ZA\ WARNING
Observe the safety precautions and note the
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 735.
Switching the system on
Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system

Fig. 101 Operating lever: switching the system on
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
> To switch the system on, pull the lever toward
you to position @).
ZA\ WARNING
-- Observe the safety precautions and note the limits of the assist systems, sensors, and cameras > page 135.
-- If the brakes are malfunctioning (for example, overheating) while the cruise control system is switched on, the regulating functions may shut off automatically.

ea speed

Roe lad lie Re

Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system

moll ge) |

When the vehicle is stationary, you can preselect
the speed to be maintained, or you can select the speed while driving.

Requirement: the system must be switched on.

> To preselect a cruise control speed when the ve-
hicle is stationary, tap the lever toward @)/G)
=> page 148, fig. 107. > To activate the cruise control speed, pull the
lever toward position (2) while driving.

148

OwnersManuals2.com

> To set the current driving speed as the cruise control speed, press the button (@) on the lever.
Changing the cruise control speed
Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
Requirement: the system must be switched on.
> To increase or decrease the cruise control speed in small increments, tap the lever up to the
first level toward @)/C) > page 148, fig. 107.
> To increase or decrease the cruise control speed in larger increments, tap the lever up to the
second level toward @/C).
> To increase or decrease the cruise control speed continuously, tap and hold the lever at the first
or second level toward @)/G).
Overriding or deactivating the cruise control speed
Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
You can override or deactivate the cruise control system. When you deactivate the system, your cruise control speed will be stored and you can resume that speed.
Requirement: the system must be switched on and the regulated speed must be activated.
Overriding
> To temporarily override the cruise control speed, press the accelerator pedal.
> To resume the stored regulated speed, remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
If you override the cruise control system for a long period of time, the cruise control system will be deactivated.
Deactivating
> To deactivate the cruise control speed, press the lever to position @) (not locked into place) => page 148, fig. 101, or
> Press the brake pedal.
ZX WARNING
Resting your foot on the accelerator pedal could override the cruise control. Braking in-

Driver assistance
terventions and corrective actions by the sys-
tem may not occur.
italy Mn) <n
Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
If you do not want to use the cruise control system for a longer period of time, you can switch it off.
> To switch the system off, press the lever toward @ (locked into place) > page 148, fig. 107.
The indicator light will turn off and the set speed will be cleared.
Messages
Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
ra CRUISE| or 3) is displayed when there is a malfunction, the cruise control system functions may be unavailable or limited.
A message that indicates the cause and possible solution may appear with some displays. The weather conditions may be too poor or a sensor may be covered. Clean the area in front of the sensors > page 138 and try to turn the system on again later.
If the malfunction remains, drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
ty immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
Efficiency assist
Applies to: vehicles with efficiency assist
Efficiency assist can assist the driver with predictive information in order to reduce fuel consumption. Depending on vehicle equipment, the system may access data from the navigation system,
the camera behind the windshield, and the radar
sensors.
If you have switched on automatic recuperation in the MMI and you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal, Efficiency assist will regulate the recuperation and coasting phases based on the situation.

4KE012721BH

149
OwnersManuals2.com

Driver assistance

Adjusting the efficiency assist
You can adjust efficiency assist functions individually. The settings depend on the vehicle equip-
ment.

-- Recuperation > page 98. -- Predictive messages > page 757. -- Predictive control > page 160, Adjusting the
adaptive cruise assist.

Situation symbols
Depending on vehicle equipment, the following symbols may be shown. The symbols indicate the situation to which the efficiency assist is responding.

Some symbols only appear if Predictive messages are switched on, and some symbols only appear if Predictive control is switched on and
adaptive cruise assist* is active.

Symbol

Description
Slow down (predictive messages only)
Speed limit (example)

Speed limit removed

Curve or Exit ahead

Intersection ahead

Traffic circle ahead
Steep grade (predictive messages only)
Vehicle driving ahead (predictive messages only)
(predictive control only) If the indicator light turns on in green and red, it is indicating that there is a difference between the speed limit and the set speed.

ZA\ WARNING
-- Observe the safety precautions and note the
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 135. -- In certain situations, the recuperation may
brake proactively. However, the recuperation braking effect is limited. Always be ready to brake to reduce the risk of an accident.
(i) Tips
--The functions depend on the navigation data* being up-to-date and correct identification by the traffic sign recognition*.
-- The system only detects traffic signs that specify a speed Limit.
-- The display in the instrument cluster is based on the units of measurement used for speed in the country where the vehicle is being operated. As a result, a display of 50 in the instrument cluster can mean either mph or km/h, depending on the country.
-- Except for the road network, which is recorded in the navigation system's map information, certain functions may not be available.
Predictive messages
Applies to: vehicles with efficiency assist
The symbol BS appears in the instrument cluster display if efficiency assist recommends removing your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Additional symbols that indicate the situation to which the efficiency assist is reacting are shown in the Driver assistance display > page 750.
Requirements
-- The cruise control system* or the adaptive cruise assist* controls must not be active.
-- The vehicle speed must be at least 20 mph
(30 km/h). -- The remaining distance until the situation is
reached must be large enough to allow the system to react to the situation.

150

OwnersManuals2.com

Switching Predictive messages on or off
You can switch predictive messages on or off. The possible settings depend on the vehicle equip-
ment.
Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: Vehicle > Charging & Efficiency > Efficiency assist > Predictive messages.
Z\ WARNING
-- Observe the safety precautions and note the limits of the assist systems, sensors, and cameras > page 135.
-- Pay attention to traffic and the area around your vehicle when efficiency assist is switched on. The driver is always responsible for assessing the traffic situation.
@ Tips
-- The traffic signs on the road always take priority over the display. The driver is always responsible for adhering to the regulations applicable in the country where the vehicle is being operated.
-- When a route is planned using the navigation system*, then system displays messages based on an assumed route. Without route guidance, the system displays messages based on an assumed route.
-- The wording of the message may vary depending on the Audi drive select* mode and the selector lever position that are selected. No messages are displayed when in the "S" driving program.
-- Additional messages are displayed when in the efficiency* Audi drive select mode or in Range mode.
Adaptive cruise assist
General information
Applies to: vehicles with adaptive cruise assist
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the adaptive cruise assist may consist of the following functions:
Within the limits of the system, the adaptive speed assist assists the driver in controlling the

Driver assistance
speed and the set distance to the vehicle driving ahead. If the system detects a vehicle driving ahead, the adaptive speed assist can brake and accelerate your vehicle within the limits of the system. On open roads with no traffic, it functions like a cruise control system. The stored speed is maintained. When approaching a vehicle driving ahead, the adaptive speed assist automatically brakes to match that vehicle's speed and then maintains the set distance as much as possible. Once the system does not detect a vehicle driving ahead, adaptive speed assist will accelerate up to the set speed.
The additional lane guidance assists the driver with corrective steering in order to stay in the lane. You can adjust if the adaptive cruise assist will provide support with lane guidance = page 155, Switching lane guidance on and off.
In stop-and-go traffic and in traffic jams, the vehicle may brake to a full stop and then may also start driving again automatically under certain conditions.
Applies to: vehicles with traffic jam assist: In traffic jams or in stop-and-go traffic, the traffic jam assist can assist the driver to stay within the lane detected by the system > page 155, Overview of displays and lane guidance limitations.
Applies to: vehicles with efficiency assist: Predictive control can adjust the speed based on traffic and road conditions > page 156, Predictive control.
ZA WARNING
Observe the safety precautions and note the limits of the assist systems, sensors, and cameras > page 135.
@) Tips
The system complies with United States FCC regulations and ISED regulations > page 300.

4KE012721BH

151
OwnersManuals2.com

Driver assistance
Applies to: vehicles with adaptive cruise assist

-- The system does not respond to people, animals, or objects that are crossing or approaching from the opposite direction.
Z\ WARNING
Observe the safety precautions and note the
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and cameras > page 135.

Fig. 102 Example: driving into a curve
In some situations, the adaptive cruise assist function is limited and you must assume control of the vehicle when necessary, for example by applying the brakes.
-- When driving into a curve > fig. 102 and out of a curve, the system may react to a vehicle in the neighboring lane and apply the brakes. You can override the system by pressing the accelerator pedal briefly.
-- The system works with the various sensors and cameras in the vehicle. Vehicles can only be detected once they are within the area and range covered by the sensors > page 136, fig. 93.
-- When driving around tight curves, a vehicle driving ahead that was previously detected may no longer be detected, and the adaptive cruise assist may accelerate unexpectedly.
-- The system does not react to a stationary vehicle in the same lane if it expects that you can easily drive around the stationary vehicle by turning the steering wheel.
-- The system cannot react to stationary objects, such as vehicles at the end of a traffic jam, especially when traveling at high speeds.
-- The system has a limited ability to detect vehicles that are a short distance ahead, off to the side of your vehicle, or moving into your lane.
-- Objects that are difficult to detect, such as mo-
torcycles, vehicles with high ground clearance, or vehicles with an overhanging load, may be detected late or not detected at all.

Display overview
Applies to: vehicles with adaptive cruise assist
Fig. 104 Instrument cluster: driver assistance display
Indicator lights and messages in the speedome-
ter @ - @ inform you about the driving situation
and the settings. In the Driver assistance display
@- @, you can find more detailed information
about the system. The displays depend on the
country and equipment.
Display in the speedometer
The display in the speedometer is not available in all layouts*. @ Marking for the set speed
@ Current vehicle speed
@® Available speed range for adaptive cruise assist (example)

152

OwnersManuals2.com

OO OO©LOO®

[RAZ-0096

Image in the Driver assistance display
The display only appears when the Driver assistance display is open in the trip computer => page 14.
Messages and settings Your vehicle Detected vehicle driving ahead Messages and settings Set target distance If you fall below the set distance, the distance bars turn red from the bottom upward. Lane departure warning availability Availability of lane guidance for adaptive cruise assist
Indicator lights
A - The speed/distance control is active. No vehicles were detected ahead. The stored speed is maintained.
B - The speed/distance control is active. A vehicle was detected ahead. The system controls the speed and distance from the vehicle driving ahead, and accelerates and brakes automatically.
Applies to: vehicles with traffic jam assist
A - Traffic jam assist with improved lane guidance is active. A vehicle was detected ahead. The system controls the speed and distance from the vehicle driving ahead, and accelerates and brakes automatically. Traffic jam assist is available at speeds below 40 mph (60 km/h).
Ee] - The speed/distance control is active but the vehicle is not ready to drive. A vehicle was detected ahead. Your vehicle is stationary and will not start driving automatically.
B - The speed/distance control is active but the vehicle is not ready to drive. No vehicles were detected ahead. Your vehicle is stationary and will not start driving automatically.
a - The automatic braking is not enough to maintain a sufficient distance from a vehicle driving ahead. You must intervene > page 160, Driver intervention request.
> - Lane guidance is active.

Driver assistance
- Lane guidance is switched on but not active. 4 - The limits of the system have been reached. Take over steering. & / re) - The indicator light turns on if the steering intervention request is providing a warning. Always keep your hands on the steering wheel so you can be ready to steer at any time =>page 155.
Z\ WARNING
Observe the safety precautions and note the limits of the assist systems, sensors, and cameras > page 135. Using adaptive cruise assist
Applies to: vehicles with adaptive cruise assist
Fig. 106 Operating lever: changing the speed
Switching on > To switch on the adaptive cruise assist, pull the
lever up to position @ until it engages.
Storing the speed and activating regulation
If you have switched the system on, you can set the current speed as the "regulated speed" and activate regulation:

B4M-0232

4KE012721BH

153
OwnersManuals2.com

Driver assistance
> Press the [SET] button @). The set speed is indicated with a marking in the speedomete(r@) = page 152, fig. 103 and shown in the instru-
ment cluster > /\.
> To save the speed while the vehicle is stationary, also hold the brake pedal down.
You can set any speed between 15 mph (20 km/h) and the maximum possible speed
range3) > page 152, fig. 103.
Pausing cruise control
The control can be stopped at any time:
>» While driving or when the vehicle is stationary: Press the lever away from you in the direction of the arrow. Or
> While driving: Press the brake pedal.
The A indicator light turns off.
Resuming regulation
The previously set speed can be resumed at any time after a pause.
> To resume cruise control while driving, pull the lever toward you in the direction of the arrow.
> To resume cruise control when stationary, pull the lever toward you in the direction of the arrow while pressing the brake pedal.
Changing the speed
> To increase or decrease the set speed in smaller increments, briefly tap the lever toward () or
© to the first level.
> To increase or decrease the set speed in larger increments, briefly tap the lever toward @) or
© to the second level.
> To increase or decrease the set speed continu-
ously, hold the lever toward () or G) until the
marking in the speedomete(r1) > page 7152, fig. 103 has reached the desired speed.
Applies to: vehicles with predictive control: Predictive control can automatically adjust the set speed based on traffic and road conditions > page 156.
Preselecting a speed
You can also preselect the speed when adaptive cruise assist is not active by moving the lever in

the desired direction @)/(). Activate the previ-
ously selected speed by pulling the lever toward you in the direction of the arrow.
Switching off
If you do not want to use the adaptive cruise assist for a longer period of time, you can switch it off.
> Push the lever away from you into position @ until it clicks into place.
The indicator light and the set speed will turn off.
Z\, WARNING
-- Observe the safety precautions and note the
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 135. -- The adaptive cruise assist is only an assist
system, and the driver is still responsible for controlling the vehicle. The driver is especially responsible for braking, steering, starting to drive, and controlling the speed and the distance from other vehicles. -- Turn on the adaptive cruise assist only if the surrounding conditions permit it. Always adapt your driving style to the current visual, weather, road, and traffic conditions. -- Switch the adaptive cruise assist off temporarily when driving in turning lanes or highway exits. This prevents the vehicle from accelerating to the stored speed when in these situations. -- If you press the [SET] button @) when driving at speeds below 15 mph (20 km/h), the minimum possible speed that the system can maintain will be set. If no vehicle is detected ahead of you, the vehicle will accelerate up to that speed.
@) Tips
-- Always keep your hands on the steering wheel so you can be ready to steer at any time. The driver is always responsible for adhering to the regulations applicable in the country where the vehicle is being operated.

154

OwnersManuals2.com

-- If you switch the ignition or the adaptive cruise assist off, the stored speed is erased for safety reasons.
-- When the adaptive cruise assist is switched on, the ESC and the ASR are switched on automatically.
-- The system cannot be switched off or it may be interrupted if the road exceeds the maximum possible grade for safe operation.
Switching lane guidance on and off
Applies to: vehicles with adaptive cruise assist and lane guid-
ance
oO
Fig. 107 Turn signal lever: button for lane guidance and lane departure warning
Within the limits of the system, lane guidance provides corrective steering to assist the driver with keeping the vehicle in the center of the lane as much as possible. This feature can be deactivated. In a traffic jam, lane guidance also helps with
leaving a space for emergency vehicles |) by
steering your vehicle as close to the edge of your lane as possible.
Switching lane guidance on and off Requirement: lane guidance must be preselected in the MMI > page 760. > To activate or deactivate the availability of the
lane guidance, press the button (4) on the turn signal lever. The system will assist the driver by providing corrective steering only when adaptive cruise assist is actively regulating and availability is switched on.

[RA(AZ-0432

Driver assistance
Overview of displays and lane guidance limitations
The availability of lane guidance is shown with indicator lights and with arrows @)) > page 752, fig. 104 in the Driver assistance display.
w- Lane guidance is active.
Bl - this indicator light turns on if the limits of the system have been reached (for example, the system's steering force is not sufficient to handle tight curves). Take over steering.
Ta ¢| turns white, lane guidance is switched on but is not active. This may occur due to the following system limits or situations: -- The necessary lane marker lines have not been
detected (for example, in a construction zone or because the lines are obstructed by snow, dirt, water, or lighting) -- The lane is too narrow or too wide -- The curve is too narrow -- Visibility is obstructed by a rise or dip. -- The driver's hands are not on the steering wheel -- The turn signal was activated.
Applies to: vehicles with traffic jam assist
A - Traffic jam assist with improved lane guidance is active. A vehicle was detected ahead. The system controls the speed and distance from the vehicle driving ahead, and accelerates and brakes automatically. Traffic jam assist is available at speeds below 40 mph (60 km/h).
Steering intervention request
If no steering activity is detected or the limits of the system are reached, the driver steering intervention request will alert the driver using audio and visual signals, such as B or EE). Take over the steering and keep your hands on the steering wheel so that you will be ready to steer at any time. The system will become inactive after a short time and will only be active again later.
If the driver does not take over steering, adaptive cruise assist will be canceled. If the vehicle is equipped with emergency assist and it is ready to >

4KE012721BH

) Incertain countries.

155
OwnersManuals2.com

Driver assistance

function, it will be activated if possible =>page 1717.
ZA WARNING
Observe the safety precautions and note the limits of the assist systems, sensors, and cameras > page 135.
@ Tips
-- Always keep your hands on the steering wheel so you can be ready to steer at any time. The driver is always responsible for adhering to the regulations applicable in the country where the vehicle is being operated.
-- Audi recommends only switching on lane guidance on well-constructed roads.
--The > fig. 107 button switches lane guidance availability and the lane departure warning on or off simultaneously, if lane guidance is preset in the adaptive cruise assist settings.

Predi

Meil ldco

Applies to: vehicles with adaptive cruise assist and efficiency assist

Fig. 108 Instrument cluster: speedometer: predictive control display
With predictive control, efficiency assist adapts the set speed in adaptive cruise control () based on detected speed limits and the upcoming route. Once the system no longer detects any in-
cidents, adaptive cruise control will accelerate
back up to the last speed that the driver set. After switching on the ignition, the availability of predictive control is indicated by a message when the adaptive cruise assist is first activated.

RAZ-0587,

Incident symbols indicate the situation to which predictive control is reacting > page 150, Situation symbols.
Requirements
-- Predictive control is switched on in the MMI => page 7160.
-- The adaptive cruise assist must be actively regulating > page 153.
-- The system can only react to speed limits that are 15 mph (20 km/h) or higher.
Display in the speedometer
The display depends on vehicle equipment and is not available in all layouts*.
@ The marking shows the set speed (regulated speed that was set by the driver or by predic-
tive control). @ The red band shows the difference between
the speed limit and the set speed that is set. @ The marked band shows if the vehicle speed
is planned to drop below the set speed due to the road layout.
Overriding control
The driver can override the predictive control at any time by pressing the accelerator pedal. If the system changes the vehicle speed to adapt to speed limits, you can change the speed using the lever > page 753, fig. 106.
Messages
ae and a message with Adaptive cruise assist: Predictive control is displayed when there is a
malfunction, the efficiency assist functions are unavailable or limited.
A message that indicates the cause and possible solution may appear with some displays. The weather conditions may be too poor or a sensor may be covered. Clean the area in front of the sensors > page 738 and try to turn on the systems again later.
If the malfunction remains, drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
ty immediately to have the malfunction corrected.

156

OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH
B4M-0234

ZA\ WARNING
-- Observe the safety precautions and note the
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 135. -- Pay attention to traffic and the area around
your vehicle when predictive control is switched on. The driver is always responsible for assessing the traffic situation. -- The system does not consider "right of way" rules and does not respond to traffic lights, so lack of driver attention in these situations can increase the risk of an accident.
-- The speed when driving through curves may be different from what you as a driver would do or may not be suitable for the weather and road conditions. If necessary, apply the brakes and reduce the selected speed to be maintained in the Adjustment to curves along route setting to reduce the risk of an accident.
@) Tips
-- Predictive control can exceed or drop below the maximum permitted speed. The driver is responsible for adhering to the permitted speed limit.
-- The traffic signs on the road always take priority over the display. The driver is always responsible for adhering to the regulations applicable in the country where the vehicle is being operated.
-- If a speed limit is detected, the marking @ of the set speed limit will be adjusted even if the adaptive cruise assist is not actively regulating.
-- You may temporarily fall below or exceed the set speed due to recuperation.
-- Control by the system depends on which adaptive cruise assist driving program is set or on the selected Audi drive select* mode.
-- After switching on the ignition and first driving onto a freeway or similar road without a speed limit, the system will regulate
the speed to 80 mph (130 km/h)". Then

Driver assistance
the system adjusts to the last speed set by the driver. -- There is no adaptation to speed limits when driving through highway interchanges and when driving on or off the expressway. --The system can fail to provide control or the control may be faulty if the values from the camera-based traffic sign recognition* are incorrect or the navigation system map data is outdated. -- When route guidance is switched on, the system adapts to the route provided by the navigation system. Driving without route guidance or leaving a route can result in faulty control.
Applies to: vehicles with adaptive cruise assist
Fig. 109 Operating lever: setting the distance
When approaching a vehicle driving ahead, the adaptive cruise assist brakes to the set speed and then maintains the set distance. If the vehicle driving ahead accelerates, then the adaptive cruise assist will also accelerate up to the speed that you have set. > Tap the rocker switch to display the distance
that is currently set. > To increase or decrease the distance in incre-
ments, tap the switch again toward @) or ©).
The newly-set distance will be shown briefly, for example with the A indicator light. If you adjust the speed, you must also change the time gap to the vehicle driving ahead. The higher >

) Incertain countries.

157
OwnersManuals2.com

[RAZ-0096|

Driver assistance

the speed, the greater the distance that is needed. The following distances can be set:

Sym- | Time distance bol

Distance at 62 mph (100 km/h)

= Approximately 1 =I second

92 feet (28 m)

eI Approximately 1.3 118 feet (36 m) --- Seconds

Approximately 1.8 seconds (the set=I ting corresponds to
`=m a distance that is Us teeta)
"half of the vehicle
speed")

=e Approximately 2.4 219 feet (67 m) `we seconds

=e Approximately 3.6 328 feet (100 m) wa seconds

ZA\ WARNING
Observe the safety precautions and note the limits of the assist systems, sensors, and cameras > page 135.

@ Tips
-- When setting the distance, the driver is re-
sponsible for adhering to any applicable legal regulations. -- In the Driver assistance display, a graphic display is shown instead of the indicator
lights (8) > page 152, fig. 104. The display matches the functions of the indicator lights. -- Depending on the selected driving program and distance, driving behavior when accelerating may vary from moderate to sporty = page 160, Adjusting the adaptive cruise
assist. -- The distances provided are specified values.
Depending on the driving situation and how
the vehicle ahead is driving, the actual dis-
tance may be more or less than these target distances.

Overriding control
Applies to: vehicles with adaptive cruise assist
Fig. 110 Lever: overriding the control
Requirement: the adaptive cruise assist must be switched on. Overriding control You can completely override the control, for example when passing or if you would like to accelerate more quickly. > To accelerate manually, pull the lever toward
you in the direction of the arrow and hold it there, or press the accelerator pedal.
> To resume the usual cruise control, release the
lever or remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. When you are in the Driver assistance display, the message Overridden will appear. Decreasing the distance The function decreases the set distance and provides assistance, for example when merging when a lane is ending. > To further reduce the distance to the vehicle ahead temporarily, pull the lever toward yourself in the direction of the arrow and hold it in that position.
> To resume the system control, release the lev-
er. The adaptive cruise assist reduces the distance
and, if necessary, accelerates the vehicle above
the set speed. When you are in the Driver assistance display, the message Overridden will appear.

158

OwnersManuals2.com

ZA\ WARNING
-- Observe the safety precautions and note the
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 135. -- Resting your foot on the accelerator pedal
could override the cruise control. Braking interventions and corrective actions by the system may not occur.
Driving in stop-and-go traffic
Applies to: vehicles with adaptive cruise assist a33nSclN|c|
Fig. 111 Instrument cluster: safe start monitor
Stopping with adaptive cruise assist The adaptive cruise assist also assists you in stopand-go traffic. Within the limits of the system, your vehicle may brake and remain at a stop if a vehicle driving ahead stops.
Starting to drive with adaptive cruise assist!) As long as the message ready to drive and a is displayed, your vehicle will begin driving when
the vehicle ahead starts to move > /\.
The touching of the steering wheel will be evaluated in stop-and-go traffic. If the driver has at
least one hand on the steering wheel, the driver will be considered ready for driving, and the
"ready to drive" status can be extended. If your vehicle is stopped for too long, it will no longer drive autonomously for safety reasons, and the message will turn off. > To extend ready to drive for a brief time or re-
activate it, pull the lever briefly toward you in the direction of the arrow > page 158, fig. 110.

Driver assistance
> To resume manual control of the vehicle, tap
the accelerator pedal.
Safe start monitor
The vehicle can still start to drive even if certain obstacles are detected when starting to drive > /J\. If the surrounding area detection detects an obstacle, you will be alerted to the danger by the a indicator light.
If you are in the Driver assistance display, the displa@y) © fig. 177 and the message Warning! will also appear. An audio signal will also sound. Your vehicle will drive more slowly when starting. This may also occur in some situations when there is no apparent obstacle.
> Press the brake pedal to slow your vehicle if necessary.
Z\ WARNING
-- Observe the safety precautions and note the limits of the assist systems, sensors, and cameras > page 135.
-- If the message ready to drive!) appears, your vehicle will start driving even if there is an obstacle between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. To reduce the risk of an accident, always make sure there are no obstacles between your vehicle and the vehicle driving ahead.
(i) Tips
For safety reasons, adaptive cruise assist only starts driving actively if: -- The driver's safety belt is fastened -- All doors and the hood are closed --The vehicle has not been stationary for a
long period of time

4KE012721BH

)) This is not available in some countries.

159
OwnersManuals2.com

Driver assistance

Palast

-e [Us

Applies to: vehicles with adaptive cruise assist

Fig. 112 Instrument cluster: request for driver intervention
The request for driver intervention instructs you to resume manual control of the vehicle if the adaptive cruise assist braking function is not able to maintain a sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The system will warn you of the hazard with the A indicator light and the message Distance! An audio signal will also sound.
The display @) only appears when the Driver assistance display is open in the trip computer => page 14.
Z\ WARNING
Observe the safety precautions and note the limits of the assist systems, sensors, and cameras > page 135.

RAZ-0399)

and the lane guidance haptic feedback will be adjusted.
Store last distance - The last distance that was set will be stored after the ignition is switched off. If the distance is not stored, distance (time distance of approximately 1.8 seconds) is automatically preset every time the ignition is switched on.
Predictive control > Set speed limit - adaptation to speed limits can be switched On or Off. Regu-
lation With tolerance can also be selected, if de-
sired. In this scenario, you may fall below or exceed the set speed in favor of increased efficien-
cy.
Predictive control > Adjustment to curves along route - regulation based on the road ahead can be switched Off or set from Slow to Fast based on your preference. The setting influences vehicle handling with predictive control, for example the speed for driving through curves.
G) Tips
In the efficiency* Audi drive select mode, ve-
hicle handling and the adaptive cruise assist haptic feedback are also affected. It may not be possible to adjust the Driving program.

Adjusting the adaptive cruise assist
Applies to: vehicles with adaptive cruise assist
You can adjust the adaptive cruise assist to your own preferences. The settings depend on the vehicle equipment.
» Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Driver assistance > (¢}) > Adaptive cruise assist.
Possible settings:
Lane guidance - If lane guidance is also active when adaptive cruise assist control is active, you can switch it on or off.
Driving program - Depending on the driving pro-
gram and the distance that are set, the vehicle
handling will be adjusted from Sport to Comfort

Applies to: vehicles with adaptive cruise assist
if or is displayed when there is a malfunction, the adaptive cruise assist functions or traffic jam assist* functions may be unavailable or limited.
A message that indicates the cause and possible solution may appear with some displays. The weather conditions may be too poor or a sensor may be covered. Clean the area in front of the sensors > page 138 and try to turn on the systems again later.
If the malfunction remains, drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
ty immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
The following messages may appear depending on the vehicle equipment:

160

OwnersManuals2.com

Narrow area Depending on vehicle equipment, this message
appears in the Driver assistance display if the adaptive cruise assist is adjusting the speed ina narrow area, for example a construction zone.
Adaptive cruise assist: Please take over!
Adaptive cruise assist was ended, for example be-
cause the vehicle rolled backwards when starting ona slight incline even though the system was active. You must take over further control of the vehicle.
Adaptive cruise assist: limited availability. See owner's manual This message appears when the sensor view is
limited, for example, when weather conditions
are too poor or a sensor is covered. You can
switch on the adaptive cruise assist, but certain functions such as assistance in narrow areas will not be available. Under certain circumstances,
some objects may be detected late or may not be detected at all. Be especially careful. Cleaning the area in front of the sensors > page 138 may correct the malfunction.
Distance warning
Applies to: vehicles with distance warning
I3ScNSzS|y||
Applies to: vehicles with adaptive cruise assist Fig. 113 Instrument cluster: display of the current distance

Driver assistance
iSiIIxfaS?SN|:])
Applies to: vehicles with adaptive cruise assist: Fig. 114 Instrument cluster: distance warning
General information At speeds above approximately 40 mph (65
km/h), this function measures the distance to the vehicle ahead as time. If the distance falls below the warning threshold and remains there,
the system will warn you of the hazard with the B indicator light.
Image in the Driver assistance display
Applies to: vehicles with adaptive cruise assist
The display only appears if the Driver assistance display is selected on the on-board computer = page 14 and the adaptive cruise assist is not actively controlling the vehicle. @ Detected vehicle driving ahead @ Use the markings to help you estimate the
distance to an obstacle. Each marking represents approximately one second. @® Set warning threshold. Depending on the settings, the display will be colored in from the bottom to the top. @® The actual distance is smaller than the set distance and you will be informed about the danger.
Adjusting the distance warning You can switch the system on and off in the MMI
=> page 139.
You can adjust the distance warning to your preferences. The settings depend on the vehicle equipment. -- Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
HICLE > Driver assistance > ({¢3) > Distance warning
Possible settings:
-- Warning threshold

4KE012721BH

161
OwnersManuals2.com

[RAZ-0432

RAZ-0107

Driver assistance
Messages
it or is displayed when there is a malfunction, the distance warning functions may be unavailable or may be limited.
A message that indicates the cause and possible solution may appear with some displays. The weather conditions may be too poor or a sensor may be covered. Clean the area in front of the sensors > page 138 and try to turn the system on again later.
If the malfunction remains, drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
ZA WARNING
Observe the safety precautions and note the
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 735.
G) Tips
-- The driver is always responsible for adhering to the regulations applicable in the country where the vehicle is being operated.
-- You may fall below the warning threshold briefly when passing or when quickly approaching a vehicle driving ahead. There is no warning in this scenario. A warning is given only if you fall below the warning threshold for an extended period of time.
Lane departure warning
General information
Applies to: vehicles with lane departure warning
The lane departure warning can detect lane marker lines within the limits of the system. If you are approaching a detected lane marker and it appears likely that you will leave the lane, the system can warn you with corrective steering and a steering wheel vibration, if necessary.
The system functions in the speed range of approximately 40 mph - 155 mph (65 km/h 250 km/h).

ZA\ WARNING
Observe the safety precautions and note the
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 735.
Applies to: vehicles with lane departure warning

Fig. 115 Turn signal lever: lane departure warning button

Fig. 116 Instrument cluster: driver assistance display

Switching the lane departure warning on and off

> To switch the system on or off, press the button @) > fig. 175 on the turn signal lever. The respective indicator light in the instrument
cluster will turn off or on.

Display and warning

The availability and readiness to provide warn-

ings will be indicated with the nai

indica-

tor lights. You can also open the Driver assis-

tance display in the on-board computer

=> page 14. The displays > fig. 7176 match the

functions of the indicator lights.

@ White lines: the lane departure warning is
switched on but not ready to provide warnings.

162

OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

@ Green line: the lane departure warning is ready to provide warnings on the respective side.
@®) Corrective steering will be indicated with iy If the lane departure warning must intervene for a long period of time, a message will request the driver to drive in the center of the lane. The steering wheel can also vibrate to warn you if lane boundaries are detected during a passing maneuver.
The lane departure warning is ready to provide warnings if an object is detected on at least one side of the individual lane.
If the Hi indicator light turns on, the lane departure warning is not ready to provide warnings. This may occur due to the following system limits or situations:
-- The necessary lane marker lines have not been detected (for example, in a construction zone
or because the lines are obstructed by snow,
dirt, water, or lighting) -- The speed is below the activation speed -- The lane is too narrow or too wide -- The curve is too narrow -- The driver's hands are not on the steering
wheel -- Visibility is obstructed by a rise or dip.
Steering intervention request
If the lane departure warning intervenes multiple times when no steering activity is detected, the steering intervention request will provide a warning using audio and visual signals, such as &. Take over the steering and keep your hands on the steering wheel so that you will be ready to steer at any time. The system may no longer be ready to provide warnings after a short time, and it will only become active again later.
If the driver does not take over steering, the lane
departure warning will no longer be ready to provide warnings. If the vehicle is equipped with emergency assist and it is ready to function, it will be activated > page 7717.
Behavior when a turn signal is active
Applies to: vehicles with side assist: The system will not warn you if you activate a turn signal be-

Driver assistance
fore crossing the lane marker line. In this case, it assumes that you are changing lanes intentionally.
Applies to: vehicles with side assist: If the turn signal is activated, the lane departure warning is ready, and a lane change has been classified as critical by the lane departure warning due to vehicles traveling beside you or due to approaching vehicles, then a noticeable corrective steering movement will occur shortly before exiting the lane. This will attempt to keep your vehicle in the lane.
ZA\ WARNING
-- Observe the safety precautions and note the
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 135. -- The system warns the driver that the vehicle
is leaving the lane using corrective steering. The driver is always responsible for keeping the vehicle within the lane. -- Corrective steering may not occur at allin certain situations, such as during heavy braking. Always be ready to intervene.
G) Tips
-- Always keep your hands on the steering wheel so you can be ready to steer at any time. The driver is always responsible for adhering to the regulations applicable in the country where the vehicle is being operated.
-- The system does not provide any corrective steering or steering wheel vibrations if it detects that you are passing another vehicle.
Adjusting the lane departure warning
Applies to: vehicles with lane departure warning
You can adjust the lane departure warning to your preferences. The settings depend on the vehicle equipment.
-- Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Driver assistance > (<°3) > Lane departure warning
Possible settings:
163
OwnersManuals2.com

Driver assistance
-- Vibration warning
Messages
Applies to: vehicles with lane departure warning
ray or AY is displayed when there is a malfunction, the lane departure warning and lane guidance functions of the adaptive cruise functions may be unavailable or limited.
A message that indicates the cause and possible solution may appear with some displays. The weather conditions may be too poor or the camera may be covered. Clean the area in front of the camera > page 138 and try to turn on the systems again later.
If the malfunction remains, drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
Audi pre sense
Function overview
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense
Within the limits of the system, the Audi pre sense functions can initiate measures in certain driving situations to protect the vehicle occupants and other road users. Depending on the vehicle equipment, various Audi pre sense systems may be installed:
-- Audi pre sense basic can react during emergency and dangerous braking maneuvers and unstable driving situations (such as oversteering or understeering).
-- Audi pre sense front can detect an impending frontal impact and react with warnings, braking interventions, and preemptive safety measures for the vehicle occupants.
-- Audi pre sense rear monitors the rear traffic
behind your vehicle and can react to an impending rear impact. -- Audi pre sense side can detect an impending side impact from cross-traffic and vehicles coming from the side, and can initiate preemptive safety measures.

-- The swerve assist can help you to steer the vehicle around an obstacle during an evasive maneuver that is detected as critical.
-- The turn assist can detect vehicles in the opposite lane as critical during a turning maneuver and react with braking maneuvers.
Audi pre sense preemptive safety measures
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense
Depending on the vehicle speed and the vehicle equipment, the following functions may be initiated in certain situations:
-- Visual and audio warnings -- Reversible tensioning of safety belts -- Closing the windows and panoramic glass roof -- Adjusting the seats -- Other preemptive safety measures by individual
systems
ZA\ WARNING
Observe the safety precautions and note the
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 735.
@ Tips
-- Depending on the risk situation that is detected and the selected Audi drive select* mode, not all preemptive safety measures may be initiated under certain circumstances. Certain functions can be adjusted or skipped if necessary.
-- Audi pre sense may be restricted or unavailable under certain circumstances, for example if: -- There are passengers with unfastened safety belts -- After turning on the ignition, as long as the & indicator light is on. -- When driving in reverse. -- There is an airbag control module malfunction -- System functions may not be available if the ESC is limited or switched off, or if there is a malfunction.

164

OwnersManuals2.com

Driver assistance

Audi pre sense basic
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense basic
Audi pre sense basic is automatically active at speeds of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) and higher. Audi pre sense basic can trigger preemptive safety measures during emergency braking and dangerous braking maneuvers as well as in unstable driving situations, such as oversteering or understeering > page 164, Audi pre sense pre-
emptive safety measures.
The message Audi pre sense Dwi warn you about the danger.
ZA\ WARNING
Observe the safety precautions and note the
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 135.
Audi pre sense front
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense front
Within the limits of the system, Audi pre sense front can warn about an impending front end collision and brake the vehicle strongly, if necessary. The system uses the camera behind the windshield and is available at speeds above approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
Driving situations
The situations to which the system reacts depends on the vehicle speed.
Up to speeds of approximately 52 mph
(85 km/h), the system may react to the following situations: -- Pedestrians and cyclists in your lane
Up to speeds of approximately 155 mph (250 km/h), the system may react to the following situations: --Avehicle driving ahead clearly applies the
brakes -- When approaching a vehicle ahead that is clear-
ly traveling more slowly -- When approaching a stationary vehicle

Prewarning
To warn about detected dangers, Audi pre sense J] will appear in the instrument cluster and an audio signal will sound.
A brief application of the brakes
Ifa collision is imminent, there may be an acute
warning using a brief application of the brakes. You will also be warned about the danger by an indicator in the instrument cluster display. You may only be able to avoid a collision by swerving or braking strongly.
Automatic braking force increase
If there is an impending collision and you are not applying the brakes enough, the braking force may be increased, depending on the situation.
Automatic braking
If you do not react to the acute warning, the system may apply the brakes with strong braking force within the limits of the system in order to reduce the speed of impact in the event of a collision.
If the brakes were applied until the vehicle stopped, Oo Please take over! will appear in the instrument cluster and you must take over control of the vehicle.
ZA\ WARNING
-- Observe the safety precautions and note the limits of the assist systems, sensors, and cameras > page 135.
-- Audi pre sense front cannot overcome natural physical laws. It is a system designed to assist and it cannot prevent a collision in every circumstance. The driver must always intervene. The driver is always responsible for braking at the correct time. Do not let the increased safety provided tempt you into taking risks. This could increase your risk of a collision.
-- Audi pre sense front does not react to certain objects, such as animals, crossing or on-
coming vehicles, bars, railings, or railcars.
-- Audi pre sense front may be limited or unavailable when driving in curves.

4KE012721BH

165
OwnersManuals2.com

Driver assistance
-- Loose objects can be thrown around the vehicle interior during sudden driving or braking maneuvers, which increases the risk of an accident. Store objects securely while driving.
-- In trailer mode, the braking behavior of the vehicle and trailer may be different than usual during automatic braking. If there is a high trailer tongue weight, the reaction from Audi pre sense front may be limited or the system may be unavailable.
@) Tips
Certain pre sense front functions are switched off when the hill descent assist is actively controlling the vehicle.
NUT eM tLe
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense rear
Within the limits of the system, Audi pre sense rear uses data from radar sensors at the rear corners of the vehicle and calculates the probability of a rear-end collision with the vehicle behind you.
Audi pre sense preemptive safety measures can be initiated if the risk ofa collision with the vehicle behind you is detected.
Z\ WARNING
-- Observe the safety precautions and note the
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 135. -- Audi pre sense rear does not react to pedes-
trians, animals, crossing objects, and objects not detected as vehicles.
G) Tips
-- Audi pre sense rear functions switch off when trailer mode is detected. There is no guarantee the functions will switch off when using a retrofitted trailer hitch.
-- Audi pre sense rear functions may also switch off if there is a malfunction in the side assist system.

Audi pre sense side
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense side
Within the limits of the system, Audi pre sense can warn about impending collisions with crosstraffic and vehicles approaching from the side, and trigger Audi pre sense preemptive safety measures.
The system uses additional sensors in the front and rear areas and is active at speeds up to approximately 35 mph (60 km/h).
Z\ WARNING
-- Observe the safety precautions and note the
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 135. -- Audi pre sense side does not react to pedes-
trians, animals, and objects not detected as vehicles.
@ Tips
-- The Audi pre sense side functions are limited when trailer mode is detected.
--The Audi pre sense side functions may also switch off if there is a malfunction in the intersection assistant".

yaoi
Applies to: vehicles with swerve assist

The swerve assist can help you to steer the vehi-
cle around an obstacle detected in a critical area. If you avoid an obstacle after the acute warning,
then the swerve assist assists you by applying slight steering adjustment to correct your steering wheel angle as long as you are actively steer-
ing. The swerve assist is available at speeds between approximately 30 mph and 90 mph (50 km/h - 150 km/h).

ZA\ WARNING

-- Observe the safety precautions and note the

limits of the assist systems, sensors, and

cameras > page 135.

-- Swerve assist does not react to pedestrians,

animals, crossing objects, and objects not

detected as vehicles.

166

OwnersManuals2.com

@ Tips
-- System functions may not be available if the ESC is limited or switched off, or if there is a malfunction.
-- An indicator in the instrument cluster will inform you when there is an intervention.
ae
Applies to: vehicles with turn assist
When turning left, turn assist can help to reduce the risk ofa collision with an oncoming vehicle by using braking action to keep your vehicle in its lane. The function is only available when the turn signal is turned on and at speeds up to maximum of6 mph (10 km/h).
ZA WARNING
-- Observe the safety precautions and note the limits of the assist systems, sensors, and cameras > page 135.
-- The turn assist does not react to pedestrians, animals, crossing objects, and objects not detected as vehicles.
@) Tips
-- System functions may not be available if the
ESC is limited or switched off, or if there is a malfunction. -- An indicator in the instrument cluster will
inform you when there is an intervention.
Adjusting Audi pre sense
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense
You can switch the system on and off in the MMI => page 139.
You can adjust Audi pre sense and the associated systems according to your preferences. The settings depend on the vehicle equipment.
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Driver assistance > ({¢3) > Audi pre sense.
Possible settings:

Driver assistance
Setting the prewarning
You can adjust the warning time for the prewarning!) to your preference (Early/Medium/Late) or switch the prewarning off.
Set the warning time for the early warning to Early at first. If you feel that the prewarnings appear too early, then set the warning time to Medium. The Late warning time should only be set in special circumstances.
(i) Tips
-- If the system is switched off, it will switch on again automatically once the ignition is switched on again.
-- Switch Audi pre sense off when you are not using public streets, when loading the vehicle onto a vehicle carrier, train, ship, or other type of transportation, or when towing the vehicle. This can help to prevent an undesired intervention from the Audi pre sense system.
CEETe
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense
a | is displayed when there is a malfunction, the Audi pre sense functions may be unavailable or may be limited.
A message that indicates the cause and possible solution may appear with some displays. The weather conditions may be too poor or a sensor may be covered. Bring the vehicle to a full stop,
switch the ignition off, and clean the area in front
of the sensors > page 138.
If the message still appears after switching the ignition on again, have an authorized repair facility correct the malfunction as soon as possible.

4KE012721BH

) Incertain countries.

167
OwnersManuals2.com

Driver assistance
Side assist
Applies to: vehicles with side assist
5 5 Nxay
Fig. 117 Driving situations and displays in the exterior mirror
General information Side assist monitors the blind spot and traffic behind your vehicle in the adjacent lanes and provides assistance when you are changing lanes and when turning"). If the system detects an object approaching and classifies it as critical, the display in the exterior mirror (@) on that side of the
vehicle will turn on,
Driving situations The side assist warning is active at speeds that are approximately equal to walking speed, and can help in situations such as the following: -- Your vehicle is being passed. The faster another
vehicle approaches from behind, the sooner the display in the exterior mirror will turn on. -- There are vehicles traveling in the same direction as you in a lane adjacent to yours. The display in the exterior mirror will turn on when the detected object is in the "blind spot", at the lat-
est.
-- You are slowly passing another vehicle. If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is less than 9 mph (15 km/h), the display in the exterior mirror will turn on.
-- You are turning at low speeds!). Information stage
If you still have not activated a turn signal, the system will inform you about objects classified as

critical at speeds above approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
This is even possible when your vehicle is stationary and the turn signal is turned on", so that the
system can also assist you when turning.
The system informs you about objects classified as critical by turning on the display in the exterior
mirror on that side of the vehicle (4).
The display remains dim in the information stage so that you are not distracted while looking forward.
Warning stage
Once you activate a turn signal, the system will inform you about objects classified as critical by turning on the display in the respective exterior mirror.
If other driver assistance systems (depending on vehicle equipment) detect that your vehicle is about to leave the lane, the display will blink even if the turn signal lever is not activated to warn you about objects that are classified as critical. You can also be warned with corrective steering > page 162, Lane departure warning.
System limitations
The system uses the data from the radar sensors at the rear corners of the vehicle > page 138, fig. 96. They are designed to detect the left and right adjacent lanes when the road lanes are the normal width. In some situations, the system may react to vehicles in your own lane or lanes that are not directly adjacent to yours, or to objects on the side of the road. In this case, the display will turn on even though there is no vehicle in the critical area. These situations may include:
-- Driving on the edge of your own lane -- Narrow lanes -- Curves -- High barriers on the side of the road

1) This function is not available in every vehicle.
168

OwnersManuals2.com

ZA WARNING
-- Observe the safety precautions and note the
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 135. -- The display may not appear at all or it may
not appear on time when vehicles are approaching or being passed very quickly.
@ Tips
-- If the window glass in the driver's door or front passenger's door has been tinted, the display in the exterior mirror may be incor-
ects
-- These systems are not available in trailer towing mode. There is no guarantee the systems will switch off when using a retrofitted trailer hitch. Do not use these functions when towing a trailer.
-- The coverage areas of the sensors > fig. 117 are diagrams and do not represent a trueto-scale image of the sensor ranges.
-- The system complies with United States FCC regulations and ISED regulations = page 300.
OX TR ees
Applies to: vehicles with side assist
You can switch the system on and off in the MMI => page 139.
You can adjust the side assist to your preferences. The settings depend on the vehicle equip-
ment.
» Applies to MMI: select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Driver assistance > ({3) > Side assist
Possible settings:
Brightness - Change the brightness only when
side assist is switched on, so that the selected
setting can be checked in the exterior mirror displays. Adjust the brightness to a level where the display in the information stage will not disrupt your view ahead. Because the display brightness automatically adapts to the ambient light, it may have already been adjusted to the highest or lowest setting during the automatic adaptation.

Driver assistance
( 1 i Tips If the system is activated, the displays will turn on briefly when the ignition is switched on. Messages
Applies to: vehicles with side assist
fg or Eg is displayed when there is a malfunction, the side assist and exit warning system functions may be unavailable or may be limited. A message that indicates the cause and possible solution may appear with some displays. The weather conditions may be too poor or a sensor may be covered. Clean the sensor area at the rear corners of the vehicle > page 138, fig. 96 and try to turn the systems on again later.
If the malfunction remains, drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
ty immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
Exit warning
Descr'
Applies to: vehicles with exit warning system
Fig. 119 Front door: warning strip

4KE012721BH

169
OwnersManuals2.com

Driver assistance
General information
Within system limits, the exit warning system can detect traffic approaching from behind such
as vehicles, and provide assistance based on this
information when you are exiting the vehicle => fig. 118. The system uses the data from the radar sensors at the rear corners of the vehicle.
Displays and warnings
If you pull a door handle while the vehicle is stationary and an object classified as critical is approaching, the warning strip @) and the display on the exterior mirror 2) will light up on the corresponding side of the vehicle. The opening of the door will also be slowed briefly.
If the door is opened, the displays on that side will flash. If another road user that is classified as critical is approaching while a door is already open, the displays on that door will turn on.
The same messages apply for the exit warning system and side assist > page 169.
Switching the exit warning on and off
-- You can switch the system on and off in the MMI > page 139.
ZA WARNING
-- Observe the safety precautions and note the
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 135. -- Always pay attention to traffic and to the
area around your vehicle. The exit warning system does not replace the attention of the vehicle occupants. The vehicle occupants are always responsible for opening the doors and exiting the vehicle. -- The exit warning system does not respond to people and cannot warn you about every type of approaching objects, such as cyclists. Always monitor the traffic as well as the vehicle's surroundings with direct eye contact. -- The display may not appear in time when vehicles are approaching very quickly. -- The exit warning system does not react to stationary objects or pedestrians. -- The exit warning system will not provide alerts if your vehicle is pulled too far into

the parking space so that it is hidden by adjacent vehicles.
(i) Tips
-- The exit warning system can be available for up to approximately three minutes after unlocking the vehicle and opening the door as well as after switching off the ignition. Then the displays flash briefly and the system switches off.
-- The system is not available when towing a trailer. There is no guarantee the system will switch off when using a retrofitted trailer hitch. Do not use these functions when towing a trailer.
-- The coverage areas of the sensors > fig. 118 are diagrams and do not represent a trueto-scale image of the sensor ranges.
-- The system complies with United States FCC regulations and ISED regulations = page 300.
Intersection assistant
Applies to: vehicles with intersection assistant goao3&oSSO
Fig. 121 Instrument cluster: directional display from the intersection assistant

RAH-9247

170

OwnersManuals2.com

General information
The intersection assistant can warn the driver of approaching cross traffic in complex intersections > fig. 120.

The system monitors intersections and exit ramps using the sensors installed in the vehicle that detect the front and side areas around the vehicle. Moving objects that are approaching from behind, such as cars, are detected within the limits of the system > A\. The system can al-
so warn the driver of a potential collision with detected approaching cross traffic in intersections and exit ramps with poor visibility.

Requirements for using the intersection assistant:
-- The speed must not be higher than approximately 18 mph (30 km/h).
-- The "D" selector lever position is selected.

Displays, warnings, and braking
-- Display: the red arrow (@) can indicate the direction from which the cross traffic is approaching. The indicator in the upper display only appears when the parking aid is activated. For vehicles with peripheral cameras only in the Front and Front corner camera views. The display only appears in the instrument cluster => fig. 121 when the Driver assistance display is open in the on-board computer > page 14.
-- Warnings: the message Cross traffic! oO can warn about critical cross-traffic when driving forward. There may also be an audible signal.
-- Automatic brake activation: if you do not react to a warning, a brief braking by the system can warn you of a potential collision with an approaching object when driving forward at speeds up to approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).

Switching the intersection assistant on and off
-- You can switch the system on and off in the MMI > page 139.

Messages

or > is displayed when there is a mal-

function, the intersection assistant functions

may be unavailable or may be limited.

Driver assistance
A message that indicates the cause and possible solution may appear with some displays. The weather conditions may be too poor or a sensor may be covered. Clean the area in front of the sensors > page 138 and try to turn the system on again later.
If the malfunction remains, drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
ty immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
Z\ WARNING
-- Observe the safety precautions and note the
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 735. -- The intersection assistant will not provide
alerts about people and cannot warn you about every type of approaching objects, such as cyclists. Always monitor the traffic as well as the vehicle's surroundings with di-
rect eye contact.
-- The system may not react at all or it may not react on time when vehicles are approaching very quickly.
G) Tips
-- The coverage areas of the sensors > fig. 120 are diagrams and do not represent a trueto-scale image of the sensor ranges.
-- The system complies with United States FCC regulations and ISED regulations = page 300.
Emergency assist
Applies to: vehicles with emergency assist
General information
Within the limits of the system, emergency assist can detect inactivity from the driver. In these instances, the system will warn the driver, assume control of the vehicle if necessary, and bring the vehicle automatically to a stop in the lane.
Regardless of the speed, the emergency assist is automatically available when the adaptive cruise assist* is activated. When the adaptive cruise

4KE012721BH

171
OwnersManuals2.com

Driver assistance
assist* is deactivated, the system is only available at speeds above approximately 40 mph (65 km/h).
Emergency assist functions
Measures may be initiated in stages. The vehicle can be controlled with the limits of the system. The measures depend on the dangerous situation and the vehicle equipment: -- Visual and audio warnings -- Vehicle control -- Reduction of vehicle speed in stages -- Lowers the volume of the Infotainment system -- Tugs on the safety belt -- Activates the brakes -- The emergency flashers are activated -- Audi pre sense preemptive safety measures are
triggered > page 164 -- The brakes are applied until the vehicle is sta-
tionary
As soon as the vehicle comes to a full stop, the vehicle prepares for the vehicle passengers to be rescued. The parking brake is set, the "P" selector lever position is engaged, the doors are unlocked, and the interior lighting is activated. The emergency call") will be started if necessary once the vehicle has been stationary for several seconds.
Display
If /3\ is displayed for example, the emergency
assist is active.
Overriding the emergency assist
You can override emergency assist as follows >A: -- Move the steering wheel. Or -- Press the brake pedal. Or -- Press the accelerator pedal distinctly.
When stationary, you can end the emergency assist by shifting out of the "P" position or releasing the parking brake > page 107.

Switching the emergency assist on and off
The system can be switched on and off in the MMI > page 139.

Messages

if Bor

is displayed when there isa malfunc-

tion, the emergency assist functions may be un-

available or may be limited.

A message that indicates the cause and possible
solution may appear with some displays. The weather conditions may be too poor or a sensor may be covered. Clean the area in front of the
sensors > page 138 and try to turn the system on again later.

If the malfunction remains, drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
ty immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
ZX WARNING
-- Observe the safety precautions and note the limits of the assist systems, sensors, and cameras > page 135.
-- The emergency assist is an assist system that should only be used in cases of emergency to take over control of the vehicle and bring it to a stop.

G) Tips
-- Depending on the severity of the detected
situation, not all safety measures will be initiated. Certain functions can be adjusted or
skipped if necessary. -- If the emergency assist was triggered, it will
only be available again after a brief period.

) This function is not available in every market and on all vehicle equipment levels.
172

OwnersManuals2.com

Parking and
maneuvering
Introduction
Depending on the vehicle equipment, various parking aids will help you when parking and maneuvering.
Parking aid
The parking aid plus assists you while parking using audio and visual signals to warn you about
objects detected in front of, behind, and next to
the vehicle > page 173.
The rearview camera shows the area behind the vehicle in the MMI display. The lines in the rearview camera image help you to park and maneuver > page 175.
The peripheral cameras are an addition to the rearview camera and help you to see various areas around the vehicle while parking and maneuvering > page 775.
The rear cross-traffic assist can warn you of approaching cross traffic when driving in reverse or exiting a parking space > page 780.
Possible settings
You can adjust parking aid functions according to your preferences. The possible settings depend on the vehicle equipment. -- Automatic activation > page 173 -- Front and rear volume > page 174 -- Entertainment fader > page 174. -- Clean rearview camera > page 176 -- Trailer view > page 177 -- View > page 178 -- Rear cross-traffic assist > page 180
A WARNING
Observe the safety precautions and note the limits of the assist systems, sensors, and cameras > page 135.
@ Tips
Audi recommends practicing parking in a traffic-free location or parking lot to become fa-

Parking and maneuvering
miliar with the systems. Practice parking in good light and weather conditions.
Parking aid plus
Activating and deactivating
Applies to: vehicles with parking aid plus

Fig. 122 Center console: parking aid button

General information
The parking aid assists when parking and maneuvering by providing warnings about obstacles. If the ultrasonic sensors on the vehicle > page 136, fig. 93 detect an obstacle, the system will provide audio and visual warnings.

Activating and deactivating
Requirement: the vehicle speed must be under approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
> Press the Pvt or £4 button (@) in the center console.

Automatic activation

> The system activates automatically when re-

verse gear is engaged while the drive system is

active.

> If Automatic activation is switched on in the

MMI and if the vehicle approaches an obstacle

when driving forward at speeds below approxi-

mately 6 mph (10 km/h), the parking aid will

activate automatically. Audible signals will

sound once the obstacle is within the sensor

detection area.

> Applies to: MMI: To switch Automatic activa-

tion on or off, select on the home screen: VEHI-

CLE > Parking aid > Automatic activation.

4KE012721BH

173
OwnersManuals2.com

Parking and maneuvering
Automatic deactivation The distance indicator for the parking aid plus will deactivate automatically when driving forward faster than approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
ZA\ WARNING
Observe the safety precautions and note the limits of the assist systems, sensors, and cameras > page 135.
@) Note Keep enough distance from the curb to avoid damage to the rims.
G) Tips
-- If the parking aid is deactivated, it can only be reactivated automatically when one of the following conditions is met: -- The vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h) -- The ignition is switched off and back on again -- The parking brake is set and then released -- The "P" selector lever position is engaged and released again
ngs
Applies to: vehicles with parking aid plus
Fig. 123 Upper display: distance indicator
If the sensors detect an obstacle, audible and visual signals will warn you. Visual warnings The visual warnings in the upper display help you to detect the critical vehicle area and to estimate the distance to an obstacle.

Red segments (1) show detected obstacles that are in your vehicle's path. The red lines @) mark the expected direction of travel based on the steering angle. A white segment (8) indicates a detected obstacle that is outside of the vehicle's path. The closer your vehicle comes to the obstacle, the closer the segments will move to the vehicle. The collision area has been reached when
the next to last segment is displayed. Obstacles in the collision area, including those outside of the vehicle's path, are shown in red. Do not continue driving farther.
Audio signals
The closer your vehicle gets to a detected obsta-
cle, the shorter the time between the audible signals. A continuous tone sounds when an obstacle
is less than approximately 1 foot (0.30 m) away from the front or rear of the vehicle. A continuous tone sounds when an obstacle is less than approximately 0.7 feet (0.20 m) away from the sides of the vehicle. Do not continue driving forward or in reverse >@).
> To deactivate audio signals when parking or exiting a parking space, press Jin the upper display. The audio signals will be automatically activated again the next time the parking aid is activated.
Adjusting the volume
You can adjust the volume to your preferences. The settings depend on the vehicle equipment.
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Parking aid. Or
> Press L-] in the upper display when the parking system is active.
Possible settings:
Front volume - Volume for the front and side area.
Rear volume - Volume for the rear area.
Entertainment fader --- The volume of the audio/ video source is lowered when the parking aid is activated.

174

OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH B8V-0629

Error messages
If PA appears, the sensor in the respective area or the speaker is faulty. Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
If Avis displayed in the MMI, the ultrasonic sensor indicated is icy or dirty. Clean the area in front of the sensors > page 7138.
if or fx is displayed when there is a malfunction, the parking aid functions may be unavailable or may be limited.
A message that indicates the cause and possible solution may appear with some displays. The weather conditions may be too poor or a sensor may be covered. Clean the area in front of the sensors > page 138 and try to turn on the systems again later.
If the malfunction remains, drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
A WARNING
-- Observe the safety precautions and note the limits of the assist systems, sensors, and cameras > page 135.
-- Sensors and cameras have spots in which the surrounding area cannot be detected. Objects, animals, and people may only be detected with limitations may not be detected at all. Always monitor the traffic and the vehicle's surroundings directly and do not become distracted.
@) Note
Keep enough distance from the curb to avoid damage to the rims.
@) Tips
-- The segments in the side area > page 136, fig. 93 are detected and analyzed when passing. There may have been changes to the surrounding area after switching the ignition off and on again, after opening the
doors, or if the vehicle is left stationary for a
period of time. In this case, the area will ap-

Parking and maneuvering
pear black until the area has been detected and evaluated. -- If the distance to an obstacle remains con-
stant, the volume of the distance warning
gradually lowers after a few seconds until it is muted (this does not apply to the continuous tone). If the obstacle comes closer than it was before the sound was muted, the tone will sound again. If the obstacle becomes farther away than it was before the
sound was muted, no tone will sound. Pay
attention to the vehicle's surroundings when you start to drive. -- There is no distance warning for the rear and the sides when trailer towing mode is detected. The front sensors remain activated. There is no guarantee the functions will be deactivated when using a retrofitted trailer hitch.
Rearview camera and peripheral cameras
Introduction
Applies to: vehicles with rearview camera/peripheral cameras
Fig. 124 Orientation line display when parking
Depending on the vehicle equipment, a rearview camera or multiple peripheral cameras may be available. The rearview camera helps you to park or maneuver using the orientation lines. The peripheral cameras expand the vehicle overview to include various views around the vehicle that can be selected.
175
OwnersManuals2.com

Parking and maneuvering
Z\ WARNING
Observe the safety precautions and note the
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 735.
Activating and deactivating
Applies to: vehicles with rearview camera/peripheral cameras

[RAZ-1042

> Select |-] > Clean rearview camera in the upper display when the parking aid is active. Or
> Move the window wiper lever S7 into the position for cleaning the rear window© = page 56.
A WARNING
Observe the safety precautions and note the
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 735.
Warnings
Applies to: vehicles with rearview camera/peripheral cameras

Fig. 125 Center console: parking aid button
Activating and deactivating > Press the & button (@ in the center console. Or > Press bin the upper display if the visual dis-
tance indicator is shown > page 174, fig. 123.
The system can be activated at low speeds, such when maneuvering.
Automatic activation The system activates automatically when reverse gear is engaged while the drive system is active.
Automatic deactivation The system will deactivate automatically once the vehicle exceeds a certain speed while driving forward.
ZA\ WARNING
Observe the safety precautions and note the limits of the assist systems, sensors, and cameras > page 135.
(era)
Applies to: vehicles with rearview camera/peripheral cameras
You can manually start the cleaning of the rearview camera. The settings depend on the vehicle equipment.

Applies to: vehicles with trailer view Fig. 127 Upper display: trailer view
When parking with the rearview camera or peripheral camera, the parking system plus audio and visual warnings* will also assist you => page 174.
Visual orientation lines
@ The orange orientation lines show the vehicle's direction of travel >@. Turn the steering wheel until the orange orientation lines align with the parking space.
@ You can use the horizontal blue markings to help you estimate the distance to an obstacle. Each marking represents approximately 3 feet (1 meter). The blue surface is a static
display and represents an extension of the vehicle perimeter to the rear.

176

OwnersManuals2.com

@ You can recognize the rear bumper in the lower display.
@ You should stop driving in reverse when the red orientation line touches the edge of an
object, at the latest.
Trailer view
Applies to: vehicles with trailer view
Requirement: the rearview camera or peripheral cameras are activated.
-- Applies to: vehicles with peripheral cameras: Switch to the Rear view > page 778, fig. 128.
-- Select |-| > Trailer view in the upper display when the parking aid is active.
The trailer view > fig. 127 assists you in positioning the vehicle in front ofa trailer. The orange orientation line©) 9 fig. 127 indicates the expected path toward the trailer hitch. Use the blue markings ©) to help you estimate the distance to the trailer hitch. Each marking represents approximately 1 foot (0.30 meters). The width of the blue surface represents the maximum steering wheel angle.
Symbols
Applies to: vehicles with peripheral cameras
If 2/&5/< is displayed and the display area represented by that symbol is not available, then the camera on the that side is not available. The power exterior mirrors may have been folded in or a door or the luggage compartment lid may have been opened.
If # is displayed, there is a system malfunction and the display area represented by that symbol is not available. The camera is not working in this area.
If Avis displayed, the respective ultrasonic sensor is icy or dirty. Clean the area in front of the sensors > page 138.
If one of the symbols continues to be displayed, drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.

Parking and maneuvering
ZA WARNING
-- Observe the safety precautions and note the
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 735. -- Sensors and cameras have spots in which
the surrounding area cannot be detected. Objects, animals, and people may only be detected with limitations may not be detected at all. Always monitor the traffic and the vehicle's surroundings directly and do not become distracted.
@) Note
-- The orange orientation lines (@) show the direction the rear of the vehicle will be traveling, based on the steering wheel angle. The front of the vehicle swings out more than the rear of the vehicle. Maintain plenty of
distance so that an exterior mirror or a corner of the vehicle does not collide with any obstacles. -- Keep enough distance from the curb to avoid damage to the rims. -- Only use the images provided by the camera on the rear of the vehicle when the luggage compartment lid is completely closed. Make sure any objects you may have mounted on the luggage compartment lid do not block
the rearview camera.
G@) Tips
-- Applies to: vehicles with air suspension: The accuracy of the orientation lines and blue surfaces on the camera display decreases when the vehicle is raised or lowered with the air suspension.
-- There is no distance warning for the rear and the sides when trailer towing mode is detected. The front sensors remain activated. The visual display switches to trailer mode. There is no guarantee the functions will be deactivated when using a retrofitted trailer hitch.

4KE012721BH

177
OwnersManuals2.com

Parking and maneuvering

rating

peripheral cameras

Applies to: vehicles with peripheral cameras

RAZ-1408|

Fig. 128 Upper display: left: rear view. Right side: 3D surroundings.

On vehicles with peripheral cameras, you can select among different views.
The camera views can be controlled with the touch display. In certain views, you can zoom in or out on the displayed area, and move, tilt, or rotate the 3D surroundings.
Selecting the views
> To display the entire selection bar, tap the current view (2) or swipe at the edge of the selection bar from left to right.
> To select a view, press 2) - @) or tap in an area
to show the vehicle in the side view )). > To select a 3D surroundings view, press the »)
symbol (4). Then select the desired 3D sur-
roundings view @) - @).
Zooming in and out on the views
Applies to: 3D surroundings view
> To zoom in or out on an area, place two fingers on that area and push them apart or pull them together > fig. 128, left side.

Moving the view
Applies to: 3D surroundings view
> To move the view, press and pull it in any direction using one finger.
> To re-center the 3D surroundings, tap the camera image twice.
Tilting or rotating the views
Applies to: 3D surroundings view
> To tilt or rotate the 3D surroundings, use your finger to drag it in any direction > fig. 128, on the right side.
> To re-center the 3D surroundings behind the vehicle, tap the camera image twice.
Selecting a view in the side area
The vehicle surroundings are shown in the side area of the display. You can switch between a visual display (Graphic) and the vehicle surroundings (Camera).
> Select |-] > View in the upper display when the parking system is active.

1) Requirement: The vehicle surroundings (Camera) must be selected in the View in the side area.
178

OwnersManuals2.com

Parking and maneuvering

e8| ®e|o| \e/e /]| oe@/|e

Symbol/Description

Description

ED)

Switch between 3D surroundings and Surroundings

Front corner or Display selection
bar
Front
Surroundings
Rear
Rear corner
Front tires Rear tires
3D surroundings

This view makes it easier to drive out of tight parking spaces or areas and intersections with poor visibility. It shows an almost 180° panorama view in front of the vehicle.
This view assists you in using the full area for maneuvering in front of the vehicle.
This view helps you to maneuver and position the vehicle more precisely. The area around the vehicle is shown using the camera images. The vehicle image is shown by the system > A\.
This view assists you in using the full area for maneuvering behind the vehicle. This is the rearview camera image.
This view can assist you when driving out of tight parking spaces or areas with poor visibility. It shows an almost 180° panorama view behind the vehicle.
This view helps you to see the distance between the front tires and the curb and the steering wheel angle when parking.
This view helps you to detect the distance between the rear wheels and the curb when parking.
In these views, you can see the areas surrounding the vehicle in 3D when parking. The vehicle surrounding views are created from the camera images and sensor data. The vehicle image is shown by the system > A\.

ZX, WARNING
-- Observe the safety precautions and note the
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 135. -- The Surroundings and 3D surroundings are
created from the individual camera images. The vehicle image is shown by the system. Objects and obstacles above the camera are not displayed.

Rear views. If you switch the view manually, the automatic front/rear camera change will be temporarily deactivated.
-- When first activated while a forward gear is engaged, the Front corner is displayed.

@) Note
Only use the images provided by the camera on the rear of the vehicle when the luggage compartment lid is completely closed. Make sure any objects you may have mounted on the luggage compartment lid do not block the rearview camera.
@ Tips
-- Depending on the selected gear, it will automatically switch between the Front and

179
OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

Parking and maneuvering
Rear cross-traffic assist
Applies to: vehicles with rear cross-traffic assist
Fig. 130 Upper display: rear cross-traffic assist display
General information The rear cross-traffic assist monitors the area behind and next to the vehicle using radar sensors at the rear corners of the vehicle. The system can detect moving objects that are approaching, such
as vehicles > fig. 729. A display in the MMI @)
and various warnings provide assistance when exiting a parking space. Requirements for using the rear cross-traffic assist: -- The parking system is switched on > page 773. -- The speed while driving backwards is not higher
than approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
Displays, warnings, and braking -- Display: the display @) appears only when the
parking aid is active. In vehicles with peripheral cameras, the display only appears in the Rear and Rear corner camera views. Arrows show the direction from which the cross traffic is approaching.

-- Audible warnings: an audio signal may sound as an additional warning when driving in reverse.
-- Automatic brake activation: if you do not react to a warning, a brief braking by the system can warn you of a potential collision with an approaching object.
The audible warning signal and the automatic brake activation occur only when driving in reverse.

Switching the rear cross-traffic assist on and off
-- Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Parking aid > Rear cross-traffic assist. Or
-- Select |-| > Rear cross-traffic assist in the upper display when the parking aid is active.

Messages

or > is displayed when there is a mal-

function, the rear cross traffic assist functions

may be unavailable or may be limited.

A message that indicates the cause and possible solution may appear with some displays. The
weather conditions may be too poor or a sensor may be covered. Clean the sensor area in the ve-
hicle rear and try to turn the system on again later.

If the malfunction remains, drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
/\, WARNING
-- Observe the safety precautions and note the
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 735. -- The rear cross-traffic assist will not provide
alerts about people and cannot warn you about every type of approaching objects, such as cyclists. Always monitor the traffic as well as the vehicle's surroundings with di-
rect eye contact.
-- The system may not react at all or it may not react on time when objects are approaching very quickly.

180

OwnersManuals2.com

-- The rear cross-traffic assist will not provide alerts if your vehicle is parallel parked or if your vehicle is pulled too far into the parking space so that it is hidden by adjacent vehicles.
G@) Tips
-- Once an automatic brake activation occurs, the system cannot initiate another activation for several seconds.
-- System functions may not be available if the
ESC is limited or switched off, or if there is a
malfunction. -- If there is an audio warning signal from the
rear cross-traffic assist, then the parking aid may not be able to provide audio warnings about detected obstacles under certain cir-
cumstances.
-- The system is not available when the vehicle detects that you are towing a trailer. There is no guarantee the functions will switch off when using a retrofitted trailer hitch. Do not use these functions when towing a trailer.
-- The coverage areas of the sensors > fig. 129 are diagrams and do not represent a trueto-scale image of the sensor ranges.
-- The system complies with United States FCC regulations and ISED regulations => page 300.

Parking and maneuvering

4KE012721BH

181
OwnersManuals2.com

Telephone
Telephone
Introduction
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
You can operate various telephone functions easily through the MMI in your vehicle.
Depending on the country and the vehicle equipment, the following options may be available:
-- Connecting a cell phone with Bluetooth -- Using two telephones -- Using the Audi phone box
ZA\ WARNING
-- Medical experts warn that mobile devices can interfere with the function of pacemakers. Always maintain a minimum distance of about 7.9 inches (20 cm) between the mobile device antennas and the pacemaker.
-- Do not carry the mobile device in a pocket directly over the pacemaker when the phone is switched on.
-- Switch the mobile device off immediately if you suspect it may be interfering with the pacemaker.
-- Do not use the voice recognition system* => page 26 in emergencies because your voice may change in stressful situations. The system may take longer to dial the number or may not be able to dial it at all. Dial the emergency number manually.
-- Switch your mobile device off in areas where there is a risk of an explosion. These locations are not always clearly marked. This may include gas stations, fuel and chemical storage facilities or transport vehicles, or locations where fuel vapors (such as propane or gasoline vapor in vehicles or buildings), chemicals or large quantities of dust particles (such as flour, sawdust or metal) may be present in the air. This also applies to all other locations where you would normally switch your engine/motor off.
-- The demands of traffic require your full attention. Always read the chapter > page 78, Traffic safety information.

@) Note
Read the information about Audi connect, and be sure to note the connectivity costs section => page 193.
G) Tips
-- The Bluetooth connection range is limited to inside the vehicle.
--Aselection of supported Bluetooth devices can be found in the database for tested mobile devices at www.audi.com/bluetooth.
Setup
Connecting a mobile phone via Bluetooth
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and the ignition must be switched on. The Bluetooth settings must be open on your mobile device during the connection setup. The mobile device to be connected must not be actively connected to any other Bluetooth device. The MMI must only be connected to one mobile device.
> Enable the Bluetooth function and visibility on the MMI => page 234 and the mobile phone.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: PHONE.
> Follow the system instructions. The available Bluetooth devices will be displayed after several seconds.
> Press on the desired mobile device in the list of displayed Bluetooth devices.
> To update the list, press Q.
A PIN for a secure Bluetooth connection will be generated. > Confirm the PIN on your mobile device. > Follow the system instructions. > Pay attention to any other system prompts on
the MMI and on your cell phone.
After connecting successfully
The cell phone contacts are automatically loaded in the MMI. This process can take several minutes, depending on the number of contacts.
Depending on your cell phone and the connection type, you can use the following functions:

182

OwnersManuals2.com

Using the hands-free system
Requirement: your cell phone must be connected to the MMI via a Bluetooth Hands Free Profile (Bluetooth HFP).
You can use the hands-free system. You can make calls using the antenna on your mobile device.
Sending and receiving messages
See > page 1917.
@ Tips
-- Pay attention to any system prompts displayed on your mobile device or the MMI, for example if the system should connect automatically in the future. Depending on the mobile device, you may need to download contacts and confirm access to your messages separately.
-- You can also search for the MMI on your mobile device using the Bluetooth device search.
-- You only have to pair your device one time. Bluetooth devices that are already paired automatically connect to the MMI when the Bluetooth function is switched on, when they are within range, and when the ignition is switched on. The last connected mobile device is given first priority.
-- You can manage additional settings for connected mobile devices in the Connected devices menu > page 235.
-- When leaving the vehicle, the Bluetooth
connection to the mobile device will automatically disconnect. Depending on your mobile device, phone calls in progress may be automatically redirected from the MMI to your mobile device so that you can continue the call on your phone.
Using two telephones
Applies to: vehicles with telephone, and Audi phone box
You can connect two mobile phones to the MMI at the same time using the Bluetooth HFP, for example a business phone and a private phone. You can be reached in your vehicle through both mobile phones.

Telephone
Applies to: mobile devices with Bluetooth Message Access Profile (MAP): You can send and receive messages with both mobile devices => page 1917.
Connecting another mobile device
Requirement: a mobile device must be connected to the MMI. The vehicle must be stationary and the ignition must be switched on. The Bluetooth settings must be open on your mobile device during the connection setup. The mobile device to be connected must not be actively connected to any other Bluetooth device.
> Enable the Bluetooth function and visibility on the MMI = page 234 and the mobile phone.
>» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
PHONE > (°°, or
>» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: SETTINGS > Connected devices > Telephone 1 or Telephone 2 > New connection.
> Follow the system instructions. The available Bluetooth devices will be displayed after several seconds.
> Press on the desired mobile device in the list of displayed Bluetooth devices.
> To update the list, press Q.
A PIN for a secure Bluetooth connection will be generated. > Confirm the PIN on your mobile device. > Follow the system instructions.
> Pay attention to any other system prompts on
the MMI and on your cell phone.
After connecting successfully
See > page 782, After connecting successfully.
Switching between two mobile devices
Requirement: phone 1 and phone 2 must be connected to the MMI.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
PHONE > <1.
@) Note
Read the information about Audi connect, and be sure to note the connectivity costs section => page 193.

4KE012721BH

183
OwnersManuals2.com

Telephone
Disconnecting a mobile device
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
> To disconnect a Bluetooth device from the MMI, use the Connected devices menu > page 235.
Using the Audi phone box
General information
Applies to: vehicles with Audi phone box
Fig. 131 Storage compartment in the center console: Audi phone box with holder and connections
Depending on vehicle equipment, you may be able to use the following functions with the Audi phone box: -- Make phone calls using the vehicle's exterior
antenna
-- Charge a mobile device using the USB input -- Charge a mobile device wirelessly -- Reminder signal Limitations In some situations, the functions of the Audi phone box may be limited or temporarily unavailable. For example, this may happen if -- There is one more than mobile device in the
Audi phone box -- The mobile device is located in a bag or a pro-
tective case -- There are objects between the Audi phone box
and the mobile device -- The mobile device is not positioned in the cen-
ter of the Audi phone box
A WARNING
-- Loose objects can be thrown around the vehicle interior during sudden driving or brak-

ing maneuvers, which increases the risk of an accident. Store objects securely while driving. -- Do not allow the visual or audio signals from
a mobile device to distract you from traffic,
because this increases the risk of an accident. Operate the mobile device only via the MMI.
@) Note
Applicable to U.S.A.
Operation of the Audi phone box is subject to the following requirements of the Federal Communications Commission: -- This is a CONSUMER device. -- BEFORE USE, you MUST REGISTER THIS DE-
VICE with your wireless provider and have your provider's consent. Most wireless providers consent to the use of signal boosters.
Some providers may not consent to the use of this device on their network. If you are
unsure, contact your service provider. -- You MUST operate this device with approved
antennas and cables as specified by the manufacturer. Antennas MUST be installed at least 20 cm (8 inches) from any person. -- You MUST cease operating this device immediately if requested by the FCC or a Licensed wireless service provider. -- WARNING: E911 location information may not be provided or may be inaccurate for calls served by using this device.
() Note
Applicable to Canada
In Canada, operation of a Zone Enhancer,
such as an Audi phone box, is subject to the following requirements of the Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada
(ISED): --This is a CONSUMER device. -- BEFORE USE, you MUST meet all require-
ments set out in CPC-2-1-05. At the time of printing this user manual, the CPC-2-1-05 client procedures circular of ISED Canada was available at the following web page:

184

OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/smt-gst. nsf/eng/sf08942.html. -- You MUST operate this device with approved antennas and cables as specified by the manufacturer, Antennas MUST NOT be installed within 20 cm of any person. -- You MUST cease operating this device immediately if requested by ISED or a licensed wireless service provider. -- WARNING: £911 location information may not be provided or may be inaccurate for calls served by using this device.
@ Tips
The system complies with United States FCC regulations and ISED regulations > page 300.
Making phone calls using the exterior Ela alar)
Applies to: vehicles with Audi phone box
With the Audi phone box, you can make calls using the exterior antenna on the vehicle. Using the exterior antenna helps when there is a low signal and also provides better reception quality.
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
> Open the holder @) > page 184, fig. 137 in the Audi phone box.
> To make phone calls through the vehicle's exterior antenna using your mobile device, lay your device with the rear side against the phone symbol () in the center of the Audi phone box
and holder (4).
Charging the battery using the USB input
Applies to: vehicles with Audi phone box
You can charge your mobile device using a special USB adapter with the Audi phone box => page 222.
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
> To charge your mobile device via USB, connect it
to the USB input@) > page 784, fig. 137.

Telephone
@) Tips
-- You can purchase a USB adapter from an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility, or at specialty stores.
-- Audi recommends using Audi Genuine Accessories. Audi has verified their reliability, safety, and suitability.
Charging a mobile device wirelessly
Applies to: vehicles with Audi phone box
You can charge your mobile device wirelessly using the Audi phone box.
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on. Your mobile device must meet the Qi standard.
> Make sure that the wireless charging function is switched on:
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: SETTINGS > General > Reminder signal and mobile device charging.
> Switch the Mobile device wireless charging function on.
> Open the holder (@) > page 184, fig. 137 in the Audi phone box.
> To charge your mobile device wirelessly, lay your device with the rear side against the @ symbol @) between the Audi phone box and
holder @).
ZA WARNING
-- The mobile device may become hot during wireless charging. Pay attention to the temperature of your mobile device and be careful when removing it from the Audi phone box.
-- An alternating magnetic field is used for wireless charging. Maintain a minimum distance of approximately 2.4 inches (6 cm) to the Audi phone box charging plate. The thresholds for prolonged exposure at this distance comply with ICNIRP1998. Therefore, interactions such as irritation of sensory organs, malfunctions of active implants (such as pacemakers, infusion pumps, or neurostimulators) or effects on passive implants (such as prosthetic limbs) is highly unlikely. If you have an implant, consult a
185
OwnersManuals2.com

Telephone
medical specialist if you have any questions. You can also switch the function for wireless charging in the Audi phone box on and off. You can continue to charge your mobile device using a cable connection.
@ Tips
-- The maximum charging output is 5 W. -- The charging time and temperature will vary
depending on the mobile device being used.
ey meres mest e
Applies to: vehicles with Audi phone box
When the device reminder signal is switched on, you will be notified that your mobile device is still in the Audi phone box when you leave the vehicle.
Requirement: your mobile device must be located in the Audi phone box (if Qi-capable) or connected to the Audi music interface with a USB adapter, and the Audi smartphone interface must be active or your iPhone must be connected to the MMI via Bluetooth and charging using a USB adapter connected to the Audi music interface.
» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: SETTINGS > General > Reminder signal and mobile device charging.
The following settings may be available, depending on vehicle equipment:
-- Signal tone -- Off
Spoken cue
this setting is switched on at the factory.
Mobile device notes: reminder, charge level
When this function is switched on, the charge
status of your mobile device is displayed. You will also be reminded not to forget your mobile device when leaving the vehicle.

Using the telephone
Nee Tare at) deel mi ira delay
Applies to: vehicles with telephone

fee

Diral ephone

Fig. 132 Upper display: selection menu

Requirement: a mobile device must be connected to the MMI.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: PHONE.

Possible telephone functions:

@ Search

@ Calllist ........0...0.000.000.

186

@® Favorites .................000.

187

@> Contacts' s « «caus + sews se ees e

187

® Voicemail ..................2.

188

@ Switch telephones .............

190

anaging call lists
Applies to: vehicles with telephone

eng =) Rene
Se Tuteam ee Le L) r "--@ CNCrTeees)aL eoEy| PMobIileLE0017s12a34e5678 001718765432 (1)
Fig. 133 Upper display: call list
Opening call lists using the MMI > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
PHONE > Call list.
Opening call lists using the multifunction steering wheel
> Select in the instrument cluster: Telephone tab > ) button > Call list.

186

OwnersManuals2.com

QOOCOLO

Possible call list symbols:

Missed calls

Dialed numbers

Accepted calls

Editing a telephone number

Display business card ...........

188

Number of interactions with a con-

tact

If more than one interaction with a contact or number has taken place, the last one is displayed
in the form of an arrow (A), Q), or @).

Call list options
Press and hold a contact or a phone number in the list until the Options menu appears.

Depending on the vehicle equipment and your mobile phone, the following options may be available:
-- Save as a shortcut > page 22, Shortcuts. -- Store as favorite > page 187. -- Send text message > page 197. -- Send e-mail > page 7917.

Edit number Edit a phone number before dialing it.

Show history
Requirement: you must have had more than one interaction with a contact.
All interactions with a contact or a number are displayed.

Managing favorites
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
You can store contacts for all connected mobile devices as shortcuts in the favorites list.
Selecting favorites using the MMI > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
PHONE > Favorites.
Opening favorites using the multifunction steering wheel > Select in the instrument cluster: Telephone tab
> EE] button > Favorites.

Telephone
Storing favorites > Press YY > page 188 in the business card, or
> Press Store as favorite in the options => page 186.
Deleting favorites > Press W > page 188 in the business card, or > Select: Favorites > Z > one or multiple favor-
ites or Select all > Delete > (Done).
@) Tips The favorites can only be edited via the MMI.
Managing the directory
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
You can manage up to four directories in the MMI.
Requirement: a mobile device must be connected to the MMI.
Opening the directory > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
PHONE > Contacts.
The contacts will be displayed. You can change the sort order > page 790, Sort order.
Deleting imported contacts Requirement: you must have imported at least one contact > page 190.
> Select: Contacts > Z > one or more text messages > Delete > (Done). The imported contacts are deleted.
Directory options
> Press and hold a contact in the directory until the Options menu appears.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and your mobile phone, the following options may be available:
-- Store as favorite > page 187. -- Send contact: you can select Text message or
E-mail > page 197. -- Send text message > page 197. -- Send e-mail > page 197.

4KE012721BH

187
OwnersManuals2.com

Telephone
-- Save as a shortcut > page 22, Shortcuts.
@ Tips -- Pay attention to any synchronization
prompts on your mobile device when downloading contacts. -- The contacts from the mobile device may not be transferred in alphabetical order. If
there are too many entries, contacts with
different first letters may be missing in the MMI. -- Only the contacts from the active connected mobile device are displayed. -- The contacts in the local MMI memory are always visible and can be accessed by other users. -- After switching off the ignition and exiting
the vehicle, the mobile device directory will
be updated when the MMI is started again if the mobile device is within range and the Bluetooth function is switched on in the mobile device and the MMI. -- Only the contacts in the local MMI memory can be deleted.
Opening business cards
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
The business card shows you details about a con-
tact.
> To open a business card, press on a contact in the directory, or
> Press © in the call list©) > page 186, fig. 133.
Possible options in the business card: > Call: press on a phone number. > Storing a favorite: press YW. > Deleting a favorite: press Ww. > Sending a text message: press {]. > Starting navigation: press on an address. > Sending an e-mail: press on an e-mail address.
> Send contact: you can select Text message or
E-mail > page 197. > Save as a shortcut > page 22, Shortcuts.
188

Listening to voicemail
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
Calling voicemail > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
PHONE > Voicemail.
Entering the voicemail number
Requirement: there must be no voicemail number stored.
> Enter the desired number. > Press OK.
Dialing the voicemail number Requirement: a voicemail number must be stored.
> Press Voicemail. The call begins immediately.
G) Tips
This service must be set up and activated by the mobile phone service provider.

Dialing a telephone number
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you may have the following options for dialing a phone number:
-- Using text input in the MMI > page 23. -- Using voice operation > page 26.

Call options
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
> To accept or end a call, press the @ button on the multifunction steering wheel. Operating => page 12 and > page 29.

Depending on your mobile device, the following options may be available in the MMI when there is an incoming call:

-- Answer -- Decline -- Message

If you exit the vehicle during a phone call, the

Bluetooth connection will be disconnected. De-

pending on your mobile device, phone calls in

OwnersManuals2.com

progress may be automatically transferred from the MMI to your mobile device.
@) Tips
The radio or media playback is muted during a phone call.

PTETe RW

KL Us

Applies to: vehicles with telephone

Depending on your mobile device and the type of
connection, the following options may be available during a call:

-- End call -- Mute

Sending a tone sequence
Press Numbers. You can enter tone sequences (DTMF) and send them to the other party on the call.

Hold
Puts the current call on hold. To resume the call, press Resume.

Answering an incoming call
One of these options will be available, depending on the mobile phone service provider:
-- Answer: the current phone call will be put on hold. The incoming call will be answered.
-- Replace: the active call will be replaced with the incoming call.

Declining an incoming call
If you select Decline, the incoming call will be declined.

Conference
Requirement: two phone calls must be in progress.
Depending on your mobile phone service provider, you can add a call on hold and up to five active callers to a conference call.

Swap call
Requirement: two phone calls must be in progress.

Telephone

You can alternate between two phone calls.
Additional call options
Press More.
Depending on the mobile device being used and the type of connection, the following options may be available:
Transfer call to mobile device Transfer the current call to your mobile device or Bluetooth headset*.
Switch to hands-free Transfer the current call from your mobile device to the MMI.
Add call
You can start a new call. The current call will be put on hold.
Remove conference member
You can remove conference call members individually when a conference call is active.
Microph. input You can adjust the input level of the microphone using the slider.
@ Tips The call waiting function must be activated in your mobile device to be alerted about an incoming call during an active call.

Making an emergency call
Applies to: vehicles with telephone

Requirement: a mobile device must be connected to the MMI.
>» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: PHONE > Dial phone number > the local emergency call number (for example, 911) > Dial.

ZA\ WARNING

-- Because your phone works with radio sig-

nals, a connection cannot be guaranteed un-

der all circumstances. Do not rely on only

your phone when it comes to essential

4KE012721BH

189
OwnersManuals2.com

Telephone
communication (such as during a medical emergency). -- Always follow the instructions given by the emergency personnel during an emergency call and only end the call when they instruct you to do so.
Settings
Telephone settings
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
PHONE > &}.
The following options may be possible, depending on your mobile device: -- Decline with text message -- Edit voicemail number
Switching between two mobile devices Requirement: phone 1 and phone 2 must be connected to the MMI. Switch telephones: the device name of the available mobile device is displayed. You can switch the phone by pressing the button.
Ringtone and volume settings -- Ringtone and message volume: you can adjust
the volume using the slider. -- Ringtone: select a ringtone from the list. -- Microphone input level: you can adjust the in-
put level of the microphone using the slider.
Data module serial number (IMEI)
Applies to: vehicles with data module
The serial number (IMEI) will be displayed.
Contact settings
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
PHONE > Contacts > ©.
Switching between two mobile devices Requirement: phone 1 and phone 2 must be connected to the MMI.
190

Switch telephones: the device name of the available mobile device is displayed. You can switch the phone by pressing the button.
The directory for the selected phone will be displayed.
Hide grayed-out contacts
When this function is switched on, contacts that have no phone numbers stored for them will be hidden.
Sort order
You can sort the contacts by Last name or First name.
Download contacts
Requirement: a mobile device must be connected to the MMI.
To update the contacts in the MMI, you can manually download your mobile device contacts. Depending on the mobile device, you may need to disconnect and reconnect the Bluetooth connection to update the contacts.
Importing and exporting contacts
Requirement: a USB storage device must be connected to the Audi music interface > page 222.
Contacts in vCard format (.vcf) can be imported or exported from the MMI. -- Importing contacts from a storage device: Re-
quirement: the USB storage device must contain contacts in the vCard format. They must not be located in sub-folders. Select: > Search for import data > USB device 1/USB device 2 > desired contacts or Select all > Start import. -- Exporting contacts to a storage medium: Re-
quirement: you must have a contact imported.
Select: > Find exporting source > USB device 1/USB device 2 > desired contacts or Select all > Start export.
Gi) Tips -- The imported contacts are stored in the local MMI memory. -- There should be no other files or folders on the storage medium containing the contacts to be imported.
OwnersManuals2.com

-- Contacts that were downloaded from a mobile device cannot be exported.
-- Apple devices and MTP devices (such as smartphones) are not recognized as USB storage devices.
Messages
Text messages
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
Requirement: your mobile device must be connected to the MMI via Bluetooth Message Access Profile (Bluetooth MAP).
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
MESSAGES > (¢*) > e-mail (phone 1)/e-mail (phone 2)*.
The following functions are available:
-- New text message* -- Inbox -- Sent -- Outbox* -- Drafts* -- Deleted
User defined*
If necessary, user-defined folders will be copied to your mobile device.
Message options
Press on a text message.
Depending on the country, the following options may be available: -- Read out -- Reply -- Forward -- More
To switch between messages, press < or >.
Press More. Depending on your mobile device and the selected mailbox, additional options may be available: -- Call -- Forward -- Navigate -- Extract numbers

Telephone
-- Send again
Settings
Press ©}.
New text message notification When the function is switched on, an envelope in the MMI status bar will indicate when there is a
new text message.
@) Tips
Only new received messages may be displayed depending on your mobile device.
Applies to: vehicles with telephone and e-mail
Requirement: your mobile device must be connected to the MMI via Bluetooth Message Access Profile (Bluetooth MAP).
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: MESSAGES > (:=) > e-mail (phone 1)/e-mail (phone 2)*.
The following functions are available:
-- New e-mail -- Inbox -- Sent -- Outbox -- Drafts* -- Deleted*
User defined*
If necessary, user-defined folders will be copied to your mobile device.
Message options
Press on an e-mail.
Depending on the country, the following options may be available: -- Read out -- Reply -- Reply all -- Forward -- More
To switch between messages, press < or >.

4KE012721BH

191
OwnersManuals2.com

Telephone

Press More. Depending on your mobile device and the selected mailbox, additional options may be available: -- Call -- Forward -- Extract e-mail -- Navigate -- Extract numbers -- Show all recipients -- Send again
Settings
Press ©.

New e-mail notification
When the function is switched on, an envelope M in the MMI status bar will indicate when there is a new e-mail.
@) Note
Read the information about Audi connect, and be sure to note the connectivity costs section => page 193.

Troubleshooting
Applies to: vehicles with telephone

The information that follows lists some troubleshooting options. They depend on the equip-
ment.

Problem Pairing the mobile device to the
MMI failed.
After pairing, not all contacts or no contacts have been loaded into the MMI.
Certain telephone functions are grayed out or not available. Some telephone functions may be switched off or not available, even though the mobile device is supported. The MESSAGES menu is not available. Wireless cell phone charging is not working or is interrupted.

Solution
Make sure the requirements for connecting a mobile phone have been met > page 182, or make sure you did not accidentally decline the PIN for establishing a connection on your mobile phone. If necessary, repeat the pairing process > page 182.
Avoid using special characters in names. Avoid using contact groups on your mobile device. Check for prompts on your mobile device when connecting via Bluetooth.
The telephone functions depend on the mobile device service provider and the mobile device you are using.
Check if the Bluetooth settings on your cell phone are limited or individual Bluetooth settings are deactivated. This may be the case with business cell phones.
Make sure your mobile device has an option to show messages option and that it is enabled.
Check if wireless charging with the Audi phone box is switched on. Check if your mobile device is Qi-capable. Make sure your mobile device is positioned correctly in the Audi phone box > page 184 and that there are no objects located between the phone box and the phone.

192

OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

Audi connect
General information
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect
Depending on the country and the vehicle equipment, the following functions may be available:
-- Audi connect Infotainment -- Audi connect vehicle control
Z\ WARNING
--To reduce the risk of an accident, only use Audi connect services and the Wi-Fi hotspot
only if the traffic situation permits it. Read and follow the guidelines provided in = page 18, Traffic safety information. -- It is only safe to use tablets, laptops, mobile devices and other similar devices when the
vehicle is stationary because, like all loose
objects, they could be thrown around the inside of the vehicle in a crash and cause serious injuries. Store these types of devices securely while driving. Also read the warnings in the chapter > page 70.
@) Note
-- The connection costs of Audi connect Infotainment services are included in the price of Audi connect Infotainment during the subscription period with some exceptions. Please note that there may be additional charges when using some services. For example, this applies to online radio/ podcasts, additional online data, or for Internet connections and services that use the Wi-Fi hotspot. Depending on the country, data plans may need to be purchased for these Internet connections and services = page 197. For additional information, see my.audi.com.
-- In certain situations, the Wi-Fi hotspot data connection may be established as a replacement for the SIM card on your Wi-Fi device. This feature depends on the configuration of your Wi-Fi device and operating system. This could result in fees depending on your cell phone service provider, especially if you are using this feature while abroad. A flat

Audi connect
rate data plan is strongly recommended. For more information, contact your cell phone service provider or refer to the owner's manual for your Wi-Fi device. -- You are responsible for all precautions tak-
en for data protection, anti-virus protection,
and protection against loss of data on mobile devices that are used, for example, to access the Internet through the Wi-Fi hot-
spot.
-- In areas with poor GPS reception or outside the coverage range of the respective cell phone service provider, some functions and/or services may not be available, it may not be possible to send or receive data, or functionality may be limited.
@) Tips -- The availability of services depends on the subscription. -- Audi merely provides access to third party services through the MMI and does not assume any responsibility for the content and availability of these services. -- Use of the most up-to-date mobile network standard is not available in every country. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility or your cell phone service provider for additional information. -- Availability, scope, providers, screen display, and costs of services may vary depending on the country, model, model year, end device and rates. -- All services/apps can be modified, activated/deactivated, renamed, and enhanced without further notification. -- Depending on the country and model there may be an app other than the "myAudi app" available for your vehicle. For additional information, see my.audi.com.
193
OwnersManuals2.com

Audi connect
Audi connect Infotainment
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment
With Audi connect Infotainment services, online information is transmitted directly to the vehicle.
An Internet connection is required to use Audi connect Infotainment. The Internet connection is established using the embedded SIM card (eSIM).
Z\ WARNING
Always follow the information found in > A\ in General information on page 193.
@) Note Always follow the information found in >@ in General information on page 193.
Embedded SIM card
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment and an embedded SIM card
The data connection for Audi connect Infotainment services is made through an embedded SIM card (eSIM card) that is installed in the vehicle. You can use the Audi connect Infotainment services immediately.
@) Note Always follow the information found in >@ in General information on page 193.
Using a Wi-Fi hotspot
Applies to: vehicles with Wi-Fi hotspot
You can connect up to eight Wi-Fi devices (such as smartphones) with the MMI Wi-Fi hotspot. If the MMI is connected to the Internet > page 194, the connected Wi-Fi devices can also use the
MMI's Internet connection.
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on. A data plan must be available > page 197.
» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: SETTINGS > Connection settings > Wi-Fi Switch on the Wi-Fi hotspot.

> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: SETTINGS > Connection settings > Wi-Fi > WiFi hotspot settings. The access data for the WiFi hotspot is displayed.
> Switch the Wi-Fi function on in your mobile device and connect it to the MMI Wi-Fi hotspot using the authentication data that is shown.
> Follow any additional system prompts on your Wi-Fi device if necessary.
Your device is successfully connected with the MMI's Wi-Fi hotspot.
ZA\ WARNING
Always follow the information found in > AV in General information on page 193.
@) Note Always follow the information found in >@ in General information on page 193.
G) Tips The system complies with United States FCC regulations and ISED regulations > page 300.
Audi connect Infotainment services
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment
Some Audi connect Infotainment services must be configured through your personal myAudi account at my.audi.com before using them for the first time.
@ Tips
--A myAudi user must be logged in for some Audi connect Infotainment services.
-- Some Audi connect Infotainment services must be activated at my.audi.com.
-- Depending on the country, you may be able to use an Audi app or my.audi.com.
-- For detailed information on configuration,
visit my.audi.com.

194

OwnersManuals2.com

Audi connect

Services
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment
Depending on the country and the vehicle equipment, the following services may be available:
Weather information
Applies to: MMI
> Press WEATHER on the home screen.
Editing settings: Select: WEATHER > 4a. > To display the weather for a location, press ona
location in the list. > To display the weather for your current loca-
tion, press on the location that is marked with the crosshairs.
Requirement: route guidance must be active. > To display the weather at your destination,
press on the location that is marked with the
flag B.
Adding a location: select: WEATHER > G4 > Ina new city > a location.
Removing a location: select: WEATHER > 45> .Z
> one or more locations or Select all > Delete.
Online news
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: NEWS.
Access to the calendar
Requirement: the myAudi app must be installed and open on your mobile device. Access to your calendar must be enabled on your mobile device. You must be logged into the myAudi app with your myAudi login data and you must have selected your vehicle. The Wi-Fi function on your mobile device and the MMI must be enabled and your mobile device must be paired to the MMI Wi-Fi hotspot > page 196, Wi-Fi.
You can display the your mobile device calendar on the MMI.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: CALENDAR.
Z\ WARNING
Always follow the information found in > AV in General information on page 193.

C) Note
Always follow the information found in @ in General information on page 193.
Functions on demand
Displaying purchased functions
Applies to: vehicles with functions on demand
Depending on the country and vehicle equipment, you can purchase functions on demand through a myAudi account in the myAudi app at any time.
The following options are available for displaying purchased functions in the vehicle.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: PURCHASES.
G) Tips
-- Equipment installed at the factory may be displayed as purchased functions.
-- The availability of functions in the myAudi app varies depending on the country.
-- Depending on the country and model there may be an app other than the "myAudi app" available for your vehicle. For additional information, see my.audi.com.
-- At the time this manual was printed, functions on demand was a planned function. Functions on demand may not be available in your vehicle.
Messages
Applies to: vehicles with functions on demand
If a message about a function that requires a license is displayed, the function may no longer be available. Check the MMI Purchases menu to see if you have a license for this function or if the license has expired. Purchase the function if necessary using functions on demand.

4KE012721BH

195
OwnersManuals2.com

Audi connect
Audi connect vehicle control services
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect vehicle control
Using Audi connect vehicle control services, you can perform tasks such as viewing data about your vehicle or control vehicle functions remotely.
You can view and use services available for your vehicle at my.audi.com or through the myAudi
app.
Information about the services and the corresponding app was accurate at the time this manual was printed. The scope of services depends on the country and equipment. There may be changes over the service life of the vehicle.
Z\ WARNING
-- Always follow the information found in > AA in General information on page 193.
-- Driver messages, text messages, and illuminated warning and indicator lights in the vehicle always take priority over information from the Audi connect services. The information displayed by the Audi connect services should not cause you to take safety risks. This can result in the vehicle breaking down in traffic and to serious injuries or accidents.
-- Applies to: vehicles with electric drive: Only perform the Audi connect climate control functions if your vehicle was shut off correctly and the ignition is switched off.
-- Applies to: vehicles with electric drive: Only perform charging functions on the highvoltage battery if the vehicle is shut off cor-
rectly, is connected to a suitable socket ,and
if the ignition is switched off.
@) Tips
-- Accessing specific data or controlling functions remotely depends on the charge level of the vehicle battery. Therefore, these functions only have limited availability after switching off the ignition.

-- An eSIM card establishes the Internet connection for Audi connect vehicle control services. The costs for this are included in the price of Audi connect vehicle control services. The mobile phone network, for example, must be available to use these services.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect vehicle control
Create a myAudi account by registering in the myAudi app or at my.audi.com, depending on
your country.
> Set the key user > page 30. > Install the myAudi app on your mobile device
and log in with your access information.
(i) Tips
Some services require you to enter a 4-digit PIN that you set up during registration.
Settings
Applies to: vehicles with Wi-Fi hotspot
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: SETTINGS > Connection settings > Wi-Fi
Depending on the country and the vehicle equipment, the following functions may be available:
Wi-Fi
When the function is switched on, the MMI's WiFi hotspot is active and Wi-Fi devices can be connected to the hotspot.
Wi-Fi hotspot settings
The Wi-Fi connection between the MMI and your Wi-Fi device is encrypted. You can change the following information if needed.
-- Access point (SSID): name of the Wi-Fi hot-
spot.
-- Password: an initial password was set at the factory in the MMI. Audi recommends changing the initial password. Only use secure passwords >

196

OwnersManuals2.com

that conform to the general guidelines for secure passwords. For more information, refer to reputable and current sources on password security.
Allow data connection through Wi-Fi
When the function is switched on, mobile devices
can use the Internet connection through the WiFi hotspot. A data plan is needed to do this.

Audi connect
You can purchase data plans at my.audi.com.
Always follow the information found in > A\ in General information on page 193.
Always follow the information found in >@ in General information on page 193.

Always follow the information found in > AV in General information on page 193.
Always follow the information found in >@ in General information on page 193.
The name of the Wi-Fi hotspot and the Bluetooth name are automatically compared when there are changes.
Data plans!)
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect
Data plans must be purchased in order to use certain services >(@) in General information on page 193.
Troubleshooting
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment
The information that follows lists some troubleshooting options. They depend on the equipment.

-- Depending on the country, you may be able to use the myAudi app or my.audi.com.
-- Depending on the country, there may be restrictions on the use of data plans (such as mobile phone service providers) when driv-
ing in other countries.
-- If selling your vehicle, you should delete the vehicle from the customer portal for the cell
phone service provider to avoid being charged for additional purchases.

Audi connect Infotainment serv- Some Audi connect Infotainment services must be activated or

ices: individual Audi connect Info- configured through your personal myAudi account before using

tainment services are grayed out or | them for the first time. You can find detailed information online

not available.

at my.audi.com.

Wi-Fi hotspot: it is not possible to connect through Wi-Fi.

Check if Wi-Fi is activated in the MMI > page 796. Delete all existing Wi-Fi connections on your mobile device and
restart it.

4KE012721BH

1) Not available in every market.

197
OwnersManuals2.com

Emergency call

Overview
Applies to: vehicles with emergency call function

An emergency call is a combination of data trans-
mission and a phone call. The data transmission from your vehicle forwards important informa-
tion, such as the vehicle and position data, to the emergency call center.

Depending on the country and the vehicle equipment, the following functions may be available:

With the emergency call, you can call for help in dangerous situations as quickly as possible. Use this function when emergency help is needed => page 198.
-- Audi connect emergency call (TPS emergency call). This eCall system uses emergency call centers operated by third party providers.

With online roadside assistance, you can request
assistance if there is a breakdown or a minor accident > page 199.

ZA\ WARNING

In areas with poor GPS reception or outside the coverage range of the respective cell
phone service provider, some functions and/or services may not be available, it may not be
possible to send or receive data, or functionality may be limited.

@ Tips
To see which data can be transmitted, visit your Audi country or sales region website at www.audi.com.

Emergency call

Applies to: vehicles with emergency call function
The services are provided through a SIM card installed in the vehicle. Services are provided assuming that the mobile phone network required for the installed SIM card is functioning and available for use. The services made availably by Audi are only available within the mobile phone net-

work coverage area for the mobile phone service provider selected by Audi.
@) Tips -- The emergency call function cannot be de-
activated in the Infotainment system settings. -- The availability of the TPS emergency call is limited to certain times. --The costs for call and data connections for TPS emergency calls is included in the price of the services.
Applies to: vehicles with emergency call function
A TPS emergency call can be made manually or automatically > page 198.
Making an emergency call
Applies to: vehicles with emergency call function
Fig. 134 Front headliner: cover for the emergency call but-
ton
Manual emergency call Requirement: the ignition must be switched on. > Tap the cover (1) to open it. > Press and hold the emergency call button until
the LED @ blinks. The emergency call will be
made. > If the emergency call button is pressed by mis-
take, then press it again immediately and hold it until the LED stays on. The emergency call will be canceled. Automatic emergency call The vehicle electrical system initiates an automatic emergency call under certain

198

OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH RAZ-0443

circumstances, for example if an airbag deploys. The LED in the emergency call button @) will blink. The emergency call will be made. The emergency call cannot be canceled.
LED status
-- Green - The emergency call function is available.
-- Red - There is a malfunction in the emergency call function. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. Note the messages about the availability of the emergency function > page 199.
-- Off - The emergency call function is not available, perhaps because no network is available.
Warnings
If there is a critical system failure in the emergency call systems, the vehicle occupants will receive the following warning: see > page 199, LED status and > page 199, Messages.
@) Tips
If the emergency call is canceled due to a poor connection, then the system automatically tries to connect again.
Applies to: vehicles with emergency call function
BS Emergency call function: malfunction! Limited availability. Please contact Service
If this indicator light turns on and this message appears, the emergency call function is restricted. For example, you cannot call the emergency
call center, but data may still be transmitted under certain circumstances. Drive to an authorized
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
03) Emergency call function: malfunction! Function unavailable. Please contact Service
If this indicator light turns on and this message appears, you cannot make an emergency call. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized

Emergency call
Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
Online roadside assistance

Applies to: vehicles with online roadside assistance
An online roadside assistance call ! is a combination of data transmission and a phone call. The data transmission from your vehicle forwards important information to the Audi service center, such as the vehicle and position data.

Cee Tre Re Ue

cary

Applies to: vehicles with online roadside assistance

Fig. 135 Front headliner: online roadside assistance button

Calling online roadside assistance
> Press the button @). The LED in the button turns red. The online roadside assistance call will be made.
> If you press the button @) by mistake, then press it again.

Audi incident assistance

A minor accident may be detected by the vehicle

electrical system. You are able to select between

online roadside assistance and an emergency call

in the MMI.

1) The availability of the services offered depends on the country and may change in the future.

199
OwnersManuals2.com

Emergency call
If the roadside assistance call is canceled due to a poor connection, then the call must be made again.

200

OwnersManuals2.com

Navigation Opening navigation
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
Fig. 136 Route guidance not started
The navigation system directs you to your destination, around traffic incidents, and on alternative routes, if desired.
Opening navigation » Applies to: MMI: Press NAVIGATION on the
home screen. After accessing the navigation for the first time, the map is displayed.
Opening navigation using the multifunction steering wheel > Select the Navigation tab in the instrument
cluster. > To display navigation when route guidance has
started, select in the instrument cluster: the
button > Map.
The following functions are available in the MMI: @ Select destination > page 203, fig. 137.
@® Intelligent search > page 202. @ Switch between the map and the menu:
press A repeatedly until the desired function is displayed. You can find additional information about the map update at > page 207, Map operation.
ZA\ WARNING
-- The demands of traffic require your full attention. Always read the chapter > page 78, Traffic safety information.
-- The route calculated by the navigation system is a driving recommendation. Follow the traffic regulations that are applicable in

Navigation

the country where you are operating the vehicle. In the event that the driving directions contradict traffic regulations, always follow the traffic regulations applicable in the
country where you are operating the vehicle to reduce the risk of an accident.

@) Note
Read the information about Audi connect, and be sure to note the connectivity costs section
=@ in General information on page 193.

@) Tips
-- Snow and objects on the GPS antenna or trees and large buildings can impair satellite reception and affect the system's ability to determine the vehicle position. Several deactivated or malfunctioning satellites can interrupt GPS reception.
-- Because street names sometimes change, the names stored in the MMI may in rare cases differ from the actual street name.
-- Applies to: multifunction steering wheel: Depending on the selected function, operation through the MMI may be required.
-- Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment: Depending on the country and vehicle equipment, additional services may be available.
-- An additional indicator will appear in the head-up display.

myAudi navigation
Applies to: vehicles with myAudi navigation

MMI navigation works seamlessly with the myAudi app.

Your destinations (favorites, last destinations) are synchronized through your myAudi account.
All important destinations can be displayed in the vehicle and in the myAudi app.

To load destinations in the vehicle automatically,

Audi recommends logging into the vehicle with a

myAudi user > page 30.

4KE012721BH

201
OwnersManuals2.com

Navigation
myAudi navigation functions:
-- You can send destinations and routes from the myAudi app to the vehicle > page 204.
-- Active route guidance in the myAudi app can be continued in the MMI.
-- Depending on the situation, it may be possible to continue active route guidance from the MMI in the myAudi app to continue navigating to the destination after leaving the vehicle.
Entering a destination
Intelligent search for navigation destinations
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
Using the intelligent search, you can enter the data for a navigation destination in any order all at once (for example, 5th Avenue New York). Likewise, you can search for points of interest, contacts, previous destinations, or favorites in order to navigate to the desired destination.
Opening a menu
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
NAVIGATION > &.
Intelligent search
> Enter one or more search terms into the input field > page 23, Text input.
> Press on the desired destination in the results list. The Details menu will be displayed.
> Press Start. Route guidance will be activated and the map will be displayed > page 206, fig. 139.
Online Points of Interest
> Searching for points of interest: enter the name of a POI.
> Select: a symbol for a POI category (such as
ib >a POI, or
> To display all categories and search for a POI, select: |---| > a category (such as restaurants) > a POI.

Change search area
Requirement: route guidance must be active.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
NAVIGATION > £.
> To change the search area, press (a) / 9 / repeatedly until the desired search area is selected.
Online search")
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and online search
You can use the results from a search engine provider to find a navigation destination.
Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the Internet > page 193, Audi connect.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
NAVIGATION > © >G.
> Enter one or more search terms into the input
field. > The search engine provider shows suggestions
© to narrow down the search. > Press on suggestions, if available, until the de-
sired destination appears in the results list. If necessary, use one finger to swipe upward or downward until the suggestions {© or destina-
tions 9 appear.
> Press on the desired destination 9. The Details menu will be displayed.
> Press Start.
@ Tips
-- The MMI input suggestions depend on the last navigated destinations.
-- The navigation system always searches for the fastest route. You can have alternative routes displayed if necessary > page 208.
-- If the destination cannot be found, it may
not be stored in the navigation database. Check the spelling of the term that was searched or check the search area => page 202. -- Distances to points of interest are displayed as a straight-line distance from your current location. The actual distance from your

Audi provides access to services from third party providers. Permanent availability cannot be guaranteed, because that depends on the third party provider.
202

OwnersManuals2.com

current location to the point of interest is updated automatically. The list of points of
interest that were found is not resorted when this happens.

Select destination
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system

ccs cos cul

Sars ry

ClLaset e

uaa

| Favorites

a)
CePaacts

Fig. 137 Menu: select destination

Opening a menu
> Applies to: MMI: Press NAVIGATION on the home screen.
> If the map is displayed, press 88 (A) > page 201,
fig. 136.

The following functions are available:

@ Last destinations ..............

203

@ Favorites .................0005

203

AB) Contacts: «isc sa seis so saree sa ime

203

@ Received destinations and routes .

204

Loading previous destinations
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
Your last destinations and routes can be loaded as a navigation destination.
As soon as you start route guidance, the destination is automatically saved in the last destinations. Your previous destinations are marked with
the © symbol.
If you use myAudi navigation, your previous destinations will be synchronized with your myAudi account > page 207.
Accessing previous destinations
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: NAVIGATION > (Ga) > Last destinations > select a destination > Start.

fo} RAX-0146

Navigation
> Select in the instrument cluster: Navigation tab > EE) button > Last destinations > a destination.
Deleting previous destinations
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: NAVIGATION > (5) > Last destinations > Z > select one or more entries or Select all > Delete > (Done).
@) Tips The last route will be automatically deleted from the list if you start a new route guidance after canceling the route.
Setting a favorite as the destination
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
In the favorites, you can call up frequently-used destinations as well as your home/business address.
Requirement: a favorite must be stored => page 208.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: NAVIGATION > (G8) > Favorites > select a desti-
nation.
> Select in the instrument cluster: Navigation tab > EE] button > Favorites > a destination.
Selecting contacts as destinations
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
You can navigate to contacts.
Requirement: a contact must have an address stored.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: NAVIGATION > (Ga) > Contacts > a contact.
> Press on the address for a contact. > Press on a suggested address. The Details
menu will be displayed.
@) Tips -- If a contact is grayed out, there is no ad-
dress stored for that contact. -- Navigation to geographical coordinates for
a contact is not possible.

4KE012721BH

203
OwnersManuals2.com

Navigation

Loading received destinations and routes
Applies to: vehicles with myAudi navigation
You can search for destinations or routes in the myAudi app and send to the vehicle.
Requirement: the MMI and the mobile device must be connected to the Internet > page 193, Audi connect. You must have the myAudi app installed on your mobile device.
> Send a destination or route in the myAudi app to the vehicle.
» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
NAVIGATION > (a) > Received destinations
and routes. > Make sure you are logged into the vehicle and
the myAudi app with the same myAudi account. The received destination and routes will be loaded automatically. > Navigating to a destination: press on a destination. > Deleting destinations: select: Z > one or more entries or Select all > Delete > (Done).

py eames

Applies to: vehicles with navigation system

eae

) baal es

Roe Cry Fig. 138 Details

Sri

4 ©

After you have selected a destination, the details
will be displayed. Route guidance is will not be active yet.
The functions depend on the vehicle equipment and the selected destination.
@ Map preview: to zoom in on the map preview, press on the map. Route criteria: see > page 273. More: additional functions. Weather: Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the Internet > page 193, Audi connect. Also see > page 195.

© Call: Requirement: a mobile device must be connected to the MMI > page 782. You will make a call to the phone number that is stored for the destination.
© Start: starts navigation to the displayed destination. The map will be displayed => page 207.
@ Parking: press Parking to search for a parking space at the destination. You can use the parking space as a destination or stopover. Details: Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the Internet > page 193, Audi con-
nect.
©) Display of distance/driving time to the destination
@® Weather at the destination: Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the Internet = page 193, Audi connect.
Selecting a destination from the map
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
A point on the map can be used as the destination.
Opening the map
>» Applies to: MMI: Press NAVIGATION on the home screen.
> If necessary, press A to display the map.
Adjusting the scale
> Select: 9/ > select a scale.
Marking the destination
> Press and hold a point on the map until a marking appears or the address for the selected destination is shown.
Selecting map content (such as POIs) as the destination
Requirement: map content must be displayed => page 212.
> Press on map content on the map (for example,
ib.
Selecting the destination
> Select: P& > Start.

©®O®

204

OwnersManuals2.com

Navigation

Stopovers and route plan
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
You can enter additional destinations during active route guidance.
Entering a stopover
Requirement: route guidance must be active.
> Enter a destination > page 202.
Displaying stopovers or the route plan
All destinations are listed in the route plan.
> Press on Pin the side menu on the map => page 206, fig. 139.
Editing stopovers
> Press on Pin the side menu on the map => page 206, fig. 139.
> Adding a stopover: Select: Add destination > select a destination > Add to route.
> Moving a stopover: press Z. Touch the > sym-
bol and move the entry to the desired position. Press Done. > Deleting a stopover: Select: Z > one or more entries or Select all > Delete > (Done).
Seti w elle
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and e-tron route planner
The MMI includes the charging stations along the
route, if the destination cannot be reached with
the current battery charge level.
Requirement: the e-tron route planner must be switched on > page 212.
Entering a destination with the e-tron route planner
> Enter a destination.
If the destination is out of range, the fastest
route with stopovers for charging will be suggested automatically. > To start the suggested route guidance, press
Accept. > To display the route, press Fa > page 206,
fig. 139 in the map side menu.

The destination is located outside of the range
The & symbol will be displayed if the destination in the current route plan cannot be reached.
> Press on" on the map. The route plan will be
displayed. > Press e-tron route planner to calculate an al-
ternative route with suitable charging stations.
In the e-tron route planner, the following items will be shown for each destination: the calculated arrival time, the estimated battery charge level at arrival (| and after charging >, the suggested charging duration s©, and the distance from the current location.
G) Tips
--The calculated arrival time at the destination incorporates the suggested time for charging at the stopovers.
-- The e-tron route planner continuously calculates the fastest route while taking into account the charging times at various charg-
ing stations. Therefore, a route with multi-
ple charging stops could be faster than a route with fewer charging stops.
Stopping route guidance
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
Requirement: route guidance must be active and the map must be displayed.
> Applies to: MMI: Press BX & page 206, fig. 139. > Select in the instrument cluster: Navigation tab
> EE] button > Cancel route guidance.

4KE012721BH

205
OwnersManuals2.com

Navigation
Map
Map functions
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
Opening the map > Applies to: MMI: Press NAVIGATION on the
home screen. > If necessary, press A to display the map. The following list gives an overview of the information displayed on the map. Press on any function (for example, alternative routes) to show additional options.
Select destination > page 203 Entering a destination > page 202 Cancel route guidance > page 205 Current route
Request spoken prompt
Alternative routes > page 208 Display active destinations, stopovers, or route plan > page 205. The distance to the destination including the calculated arrival time is displayed Online traffic information > page 277 Altitude

® ®

©O@® O88 @

®O@OOO

Displays the maximum permitted speed"): within city limits, on expressways, and on highways
Current vehicle position
Route information > page 213
Name of the street on which you are driving
Start route guidance for a marked destination > page 204, Selecting a destination from the map
Display details for the destination => page 204
Intelligent search nearby > page 202
Adjust the map orientation. See also =>page 212
Settings > page 212
Adjust the scale. Press the magnifying glass to switch automatic zoom > page 272 on the map on or off. The © symbol appears when this function is switched on
Marked destination > page 204, Selecting a destination from the map
Map contents (points of interest, favorites). When there are multiple map contents in the immediate vicinity, the symbols are shown stacked on the map. To display a list of individual symbols, press a2: > fig. 140. Press on a POI in the list
@) Center the map to the current vehicle position
@ Traffic incidents and display of estimated losses of time on the route
-- Green: traffic is flowing freely. -- Orange: stop-and-go traffic -- Red: traffic jam or traffic obstructions.

Additional possible symbols on the map

Symbol @

Description
Home address > page 208, Favorites
Business address > page 208, Favorites

COOOOOHO

1) Applies to vehicles without camera-based traffic sign recognition.
206

OwnersManuals2.com

Symbol
*
f

Description
Favorites > page 208
Previous destinations display

Traffic information
-- Colored warning symbols: traffic incidents ahead that are on your route.
-- Grayed out warning symbols: traffic incidents
that are not on your route.
-- All traffic incidents will display in color when route guidance is inactive.
-- Warning symbols with arrow: traffic incident that you have been routed around, for example
D.

Map operation
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
You can operate the map > page 206, fig. 139 with the movements described in the following information.
Moving the map
> Drag your finger across the map in the desired direction.
Moving the map quickly
> Swipe your finger across the map in the desired direction and lift your finger off the map.
Zooming in on the map > Place two fingers on the map and pull your fin-
gers apart, or
> Double-tap on the map with one finger.
Zooming out on the map > Place two fingers on the map and pull your fin-
gers together, or > Double-tap on the map with two fingers.
Rotating the map
> Rotate the map using two fingers.
Tilting the map > Drag upward or downward with two fingers.

Navigation
@) Tips Certain gestures may not be available on all touch displays or in every menu.
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and Audi virtual cockpit
Fig. 141 Instrument cluster: default view: turning maneuver when route guidance has started
Requirement: route guidance must be on => page 202. The following information will be displayed in the driver information system, if available: @ Current vehicle position @ A bar graph appears when there is an upcom-
ing turn. The fewer the bars that are shown, the shorter the distance is until the turn. If there is no upcoming turn immediately ahead, the distance to the destination or
stopover, the calculated arrival time, and a
direction arrow for the upcoming maneuver will be displayed in the right speedometer. If there is no upcoming maneuver, the distance to the next maneuver will be displayed.
@® Lane recommendation
Predictive route guidance
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and predictive route guidance
Your MMI can learn the routes that you drive frequently (such as your daily commute to work and back) and suggest route guidance based on the current vehicle position.

4KE012721BH

207
OwnersManuals2.com

Navigation
When the function is switched on, the MMI re-
cords the routes driven regardless of whether or not you are using navigation.
Without starting route guidance, your MMI can check the traffic conditions and shows possible traffic incidents for the possible routes to be driven.
Opening personal routes
Requirement: predictive route guidance is switched on > page 213. Route guidance must not be
active. A notification is displayed.
> The MMI displays up to three suggestions. Press on a suggestion. Route guidance will
start.
Better routes
If there are major traffic incidents, the MMI will
display a notification regardless of the selected
menu. If the MMI has calculated a better route,
you can select it as the route.
> Press on the notification.
As soon as you switch off predictive route guidance, your personal routes will no longer be recorded. Routes that were already stored will remain stored.
Deleting personal routes
» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
NAVIGATION > <3 > Predictive route guidance
> Delete recordings from the last 24 hours or Delete all personal routes and destinations.
@ Tips If the predictive route guidance is switched off and you press F&, the predictive route guidance settings will be displayed > page 273.

Alternative routes
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
Fig. 142 Alternative routes in the overview map
Opening alternative routes Requirement: route guidance must be started
= page 202 and the map must be displayed => page 207. > Press on 7 in the side menu on the map
=> page 206, fig. 139.
@ Current route
The distance to the destination and the calculated arrival time will be displayed for the current
route.
@ Alternative route
The difference in travel time compared to the selected route will be displayed. Displaying alternative routes in the foreground > Press @ in the corresponding information win-
dow, or > Press and hold the information window for the
corresponding alternative route (for example,
@ ° fig. 142).
Select route >» Press on the information window for the corre-
sponding route (for example @)).
Additional functions

Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
In the favorites, you can call up frequently-used destinations as well as your home/business address.

208

OwnersManuals2.com

Accessing favorites
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: NAVIGATION > (Ga) > Favorites.
If you use myAudi navigation, your favorites will be synchronized with your myAudi account => page 207.
Storing favorites
> Press y¥ in the Details menu > page 204, fig. 138.
Storing a home address or business address
> Press Home address or Business address. When accessed for the first time, you will be prompted to set the address.
> Select: Create now > enter a destination > OK.
Editing a home address or business address
Requirement: the favorites list must be displayed. Your home address or business address must be stored.
> Press Home address or Business address until the Options menu is displayed.
> Select: Change address > enter a destination > (Set as destination) or (Add to address) > OK.
Editing a favorite
Requirement: the favorites list must be displayed.
> Setting a favorite as a destination: press ona favorite.
> Deleting favorites: in the Details menu, press
¥& © page 204, fig. 138, or select: Z > one or
more entries or Select all > Delete > (Done). > Moving a favorite: press Z. Touch the > sym-
bol and move the entry to the desired position. Press Done.
G) Tips
-- After deleting the home address or business
address, only the address is deleted and the
entry will still be displayed in the favorites.

Navigation

-- Please note when moving favorites that items 1 and 2 are reserved for the home address and business address.

On-street parking
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and on-street parking

In supported areas, you can display parking along the route.
Requirement: the Parking notification must be switched on > page 27, Notification center. The MMI must be connected to the Internet = page 193, Audi connect. Route guidance must
be active, you must be close to your destination,
and a notification must be displayed or an item on the map must be marked.
> Press on the notification, or
> Press &| on the map.
> To navigate to a parking: space, press on a col-
ored marking on the map.
> Select: 2 > Start.

Depending on availability, colored markings on the map indicate the probability of open parking spaces.

Color Green Orange Red

Description | High probability
|Medium probability Low probability

Satellite map
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and satellite map
You can display the navigation map with satellite images.
Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the Internet > page 193, Audi connect.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
NAVIGATION > © > Map settings > Satellite map).

4KE012721BH

") Audi provides access to services from third party providers. Permanent availability cannot be guaranteed, because that depends on the third party provider.

209
OwnersManuals2.com

Navigation
The map view is based on data packets received from the Internet in the form of satellite images, which are then combined with the roadways from the > page 206, fig. 139 standard map view.
@) Tips --The satellite map" is updated regularly
whenever the function is opened. The process may take several seconds. -- Depending on the Internet connection, the standard map may also be displayed when
the satellite map is switched on !).
Electric range
Applies to: vehicles with electric range display
3eI N`|Sy|
Fig. 143 Electric range display
The electric range shows the distance that can be driven using electric power. Information such as the type of road, speeds, and altitude will be taken into account. » Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
NAVIGATION > {3 > Map settings > Range
map.
@ Depending on environmental conditions, the start of the colored section shows the probable minimum electric range for your vehicle.
@ The border indicates the maximum electric range for your vehicle under optimal condi-
tions.

Map update

Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
You can update the map data in the MMI with a map update. The functions depend on the country and vehicle equipment.
-- Map update through online map update => page 210.
-- Import a map update from the USB connection to your MMI > page 2717.

Online map update
Applies to: vehicles with online map update
Using the online map update, you can update the map content for your navigation system in your vehicle.
The MMI determines regions based on the vehicle position. Based on this, update data for these regions are available for your MMI.
Starting the update
Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the Internet > page 193, Audi connect.
> Applies to: MMI: To allow automatic map updates, select on the home screen: SETTINGS > System maintenance > Automatic online map update. The MMI starts the map update automatically in the background when new map material is available.
You can check the status of the download process and the installation in the notification center =>page 21.

@) Note

Read the information about Audi connect, and

be sure to note the connectivity costs section

=>@ in General information on page 193.

Audi provides access to services from third party providers. Permanent availability cannot be guaranteed, because that depends on the third party provider.
210

OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

@ Tips
Because of the high volume of data, Audi recommends performing the map update using
the USB connection > page 217.

Map update using the USB connection
Applies to: vehicle with map updates using the USB connection
With the map update, you can update the map material in your navigation system.
Requirement: you must have created a myAudi account at my.audi.com. Your vehicle must be registered in your myAudi account.
Downloading updates
> Download the map update at my.audi.com and store it on a USB flash drive. For additional information, visit my.audi.com.
Installing updates
> Connect the USB flash drive to the Audi music interface > page 223.
> Open the notification in the notification center on > page 27 and press on the notification.
> Press Next. The status of the installation is shown in the display.

Traffic incidents
Introduction
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and online traffic information

ea ee ours

feAbeitateer crrosuhte is

havoaimelable.CoiTinmne cssavhede: r15

seni
min

2 North

North

[On

Fig. 144 traffic information overview

Open traffic information
Requirement: the map must be displayed => page 207.
> Press on the traffic jam symbol in the side menu on the map & page 206, fig. 139.

Navigation
Display traffic report details
> Press on the traffic report @).
> To display the previous or next traffic report,
press < or.
The following information can be displayed:
@ Amessage will appear if the MMI calculates a better route for the current route guidance. The predicted delay takes into account future changes to the traffic situation on the route. Press on an item ina list@) and select the better route. More information can be found under > page 208.
@ Atraffic message is displayed. The distance to the hazardous area is calculated from the current vehicle position.
@® The traffic messages are only shown when route guidance is active. Press ona line to display details about it.
@) Tips
-- Particularly critical traffic information, such
as warnings about wrong-way drivers, is automatically displayed as a notification. -- Traffic information is not available in some countries.

airline)

ting

Applies to: vehicles with navigation system

By receiving traffic information, your MMI calcu-
lates a better route if available and the possible time saved compared to the current route.

Traffic rerouting > Start route guidance.

The MMI uses a notification or a note in the traffic information @ > page 211, fig. 144 to indi-
cate a better route. You can decide which route you would like to use.

To select a better route, you have the following
options: > Notification: press F4. The better route will be
used for route guidance, or press on the notification. Press on the information window for the better route (for example @) > page 208, fig. 142).

211
OwnersManuals2.com

Navigation
> Note in the traffic information: press on the list entry @ & page 271, fig. 144. Press on the information window for the better route (for example (2) > page 208, fig. 142).
Online traffic information
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and online traffic information
The MMI can receive real-time online traffic information about congestion, accidents, road construction, and other incidents.
Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the Internet > page 193, Audi connect. Traffic information must be switched on in the MMI => page 212.
Traffic information will be displayed on the standard map > page 206, fig. 139.
Online traffic information is also displayed on the standard map > page 209.
G) Tips
-- Having the online traffic information function switched on provides the most accurate reports of traffic situations and traffic forecasting. Your vehicle transmits and processes its anonymous, encrypted position information at regular intervals to the traffic data provider. You can switch off data transfer at any time > page 292.
-- The online traffic information network is not available in all countries, and the coverage is not nationwide.
Settings
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
You can adjust the navigation system settings in the instrument cluster and in the MMI display separately. The settings depend on the country and vehicle equipment.
Accessing settings
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
NAVIGATION > ©}.

Accessing settings using the multifunction steering wheel
> Select in the instrument cluster: Navigation tab > ] button.
A setting made using the multifunction steering wheel only applies to the instrument cluster map.
Map settings
Satellite map: see > page 209.
Traffic: you can display current traffic information on the map. -- Free flowing traffic -- Traffic obstructions -- Traffic incidents
Map colors
-- Automatic: the map display adapts to the lighting conditions (for example, by changing from day to night when driving through a tunnel).
-- Day or Night
Map orientation
-- 2D heading-up map/2D north-up map: the current vehicle position is displayed. The map is oriented in the direction of travel or to the north.
-- 3D map: the current vehicle position is shown on a three-dimensional map and is aligned to the direction of travel.
-- Overview: the entire route from the vehicle position to the destination or the next stopover is displayed on the map. The map is oriented to the north.
Automatic zoom
-- On: the map scale is adapted automatically depending on the type of road being traveled (expressway, highway, other roads) so that you always have an optimal overview of the road
ahead. When route guidance is active, the scale
is adjusted automatically for a better detailed view when there are upcoming maneuvers. -- Intersection: when route guidance is active, the scale is adjusted automatically for a better detailed view when there are upcoming maneuvers. -- Off

212

OwnersManuals2.com

Navigation

MMI map contents/Map content: you can switch the display of additional information (such as POls) on the map in the upper display on or off.
Voice guidance
Voice guidance: with the Traffic setting, the MMI will only give prompts if there are traffic inci-
dents on your route.
Voice guidance during phone call
Entertainment fader during navigation: the audio playback volume is temporarily lowered when navigation prompts are active.
Route criteria
You can adjust which route criteria should be allowed or avoided for the route calculation.
HOV/carpool lanes
Highways
Toll roads
Ferries
e-tron route planner
This function can be switched on and off.
Prefer Electrify America charger station
When this function is switched on, the e-tron route planner will give preference to Electrify America charging stations.
Route information
When this function is switched on and route guidance is active, route information => page 206, fig. 139 is displayed. The next maneuver will be displayed at the bottom. POls and traffic information will also be displayed. Press route information to display a preview of the next maneuver on the map. You can switch the following information on or off in route information. -- Points of interest along the route -- Traffic information along the route
Predictive route guidance
The predictive route guidance is switched off when the vehicle is delivered from the factory.

Your trips are recorded and destinations are suggested by the MMI when this function is switched on > page 207.
Presentation mode
In presentation mode, the system simulates driving on the display along the planned route without the vehicle actually moving. You can use Specify starting point when you would like to calculate a route starting from a location other than the current vehicle position, for example. Simulating route guidance: start route guidance and press presentation mode.
G) Tips
You can change the volume of navigation announcements while one is playing > page 29.

4KE012721BH

213
OwnersManuals2.com

Radio

Radio General information
Selecting the radio

\S TM ney)

2 )

ere Pa EDL)

(ed3) ye

aera 4)

106.7

ang a

mA ee
RADIO --@

Saray

\ &

Lim)

= 6 ame

Fig. 146 Upper display: SiriusXM channel list
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the radio may support the FM and SiriusXM (satellite radio) frequency bands. Using the HD Radio receiver* also allows you to receive radio stations on the FM bands in digital format.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and the selected station list, the following information will be displayed:
@ Station list
Shows the stations that are currently available. The station list updates automatically.
@ Stations For example, the station name may be displayed depending on availability.
HD Radio technology
FM stations that can be received by digital radio are marked with the HD Radio technology
symbol H).
If reception quality declines, the radio will automatically switch to the analog FM station depending on availability. @® Additional audio programs Digital HD Radio stations may contain multiple additional audio programs. If you lose reception, the additional audio programs will

214

eC®

be muted since they can no longer be received. Radio ID Your radio ID and contact data for your satellite radio provider are displayed. Channel number
No reception
The station cannot be received.
In addition to the symbols for the usual frequency bands, the following information may also be available depending on vehicle equipment:
Symbol | Description The station provides information in the background for an online station alternative. Online station tracking
must be switched on for this => page 220.
The station is received through the In-
ternet.
The system attempts to receive the station/podcast through the Internet.
G) Tips
-- Contact the SiriusXM* provider if you would like to receive satellite programming.
-- Buildings, tunnels, bridges, open areas, other vehicles or objects on the vehicle roof can affect reception.
-- Satellite radio* is not available in all regions.

Adjusting the radio using the MMI
> Applies to: MMI: To set a frequency band, select on the home screen: RADIO > Source a category.
> Applies to: MMI: To set a station, select on the home screen: RADIO > Source > a category > a station/podcast*.
> To select a frequency, follow the instructions under > page 216, Free search.

Adjusting the radio using the multifunction steering wheel

Requirement: radio mode must be on.

OwnersManuals2.com

> Select the radio/media tab in the instrument cluster. > Press the EI button to toggle between the radio and media or to select a different source.
> To select a station or a source, turn and press the left thumbwheel.
Radio functions
Cea TN]

Radio

G) Tips

;

Applies to: multifunction steering wheel: De-

pending on the selected function, operation

through the MMI may be required.

4KE012721BH
Q|O|O| © [RAX-0249)

Fig. 147 Upper display: left side: playback view of radio functions, right side: sources

Operating
> Applies to: MMI: To open the playback view (1),
select on the home screen: RADIO > Source > a category > a station/podcast*. > Applies to: MMI: To open the sources (2), select on the home screen: RADIO > Source.

The following functions may be available depending on the selected radio station/podcast* and the vehicle equipment:

Symbol/Description | Description

Displaying categories in a frequency band.

Source

Displays sources in the Radio menu.

Frequency band

Shows the current station frequency band.

Indicates that on demand content is playing. The MMI must be con-

nected to the Internet for this.

Wes

Presets > page 217

Settings > page 219.

Station logo

Depending on availability, you can switch between the image views: press on the station logo. Use one finger to swipe to the right or left
to switch between the Station logo and Cover art (album cover). Also see > page 220, Online additional data.

Go back one level.

See > page 216.

Last stations

See > page 216.

215
OwnersManuals2.com

Radio

Symbol/Description | Description

Presets

See > page 217.

Displays stations from the FM frequency band.

(6)

Online

See > page 278.

Displays stations from the SiriusXM frequency band.

SiriusXM

Combines SiriusXM Live channels and on demand content, depend-

ing on vehicle equipment.

Start Over

Go to the beginning of the broadcast.

Channels, artists, and shows related to the content that is currently
playing.

Switch to WEB

Switch manually to Internet reception.

Switch to SAT

Switch manually to satellite reception.

(©)

Access options for the current station > page 219.

Selecting the previous or next track: press I4 or DDI.
Hm Going tothe lve program: press and hold, The symbol wl

be displayed.

Select the previous/next station.

DAI

Start or stop playback

Unmutes or mutes playback.

List

The station list is displayed > page 214.

Depending on availability, the station name as well as program in-

Info section

formation, for example, may be displayed. Also see > page 220,

Online additional data.

Entering search terms

Read the information about Audi connect, and
be sure to note the connectivity costs section =@ in General information on page 193.

You can enter multiple search terms at once in any order.
The following information may be available:

@) Tips Not all functions are available in every source and on every touch display.
act-eett-1 eat)
Using intelligent search, you can search for station names, frequencies, program types (such as
News), podcasts*, or online radio stations*.
Opening free text search » Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
RADIO > Source > Search.

Symbol | Description

Results from the list: Last stations

|Results from the list: Presets

"| Results from a Station list

For ex-
ample, | Station frequency band [em]

Last stations
You can listen to the last stations that were played in all frequency bands.

216

OwnersManuals2.com

Accessing last stations
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: RADIO > Source > Last stations.
Listening to last stations
> Press on a station.
Deleting last stations
> Select: Z > select one or more stations or Select all > Delete > (Done).
You can store your favorite stations from every frequency band in the presets list.
Applies to: vehicles with SiriusXM: Channels, shows, and sports teams will be stored in the presets as Smart Favorites. After switching the ignition and the MMI on, the Smart Favorites store radio programs at a specific time.
Selecting presets using the MMI > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
RADIO > Source > Presets > a preset.
Storing presets
> Press on ¥¥ @ in the playback view
=> page 215, fig. 147.
Requirement: a list with radio stations must be displayed > page 214, fig. 145. >» Press and hold an entry in the list until the Op-
tions menu appears.
> Press Store as preset.
Editing a preset > Deleting presets: press W in the playback view,
or
> In the presets list, select: Z > one or more stations or Select all > Delete > (Done).
Requirement: the presets list must be displayed.
> Moving a preset: press A.
> Touch the $ symbol and move the entry to the desired position.
> Press Done.

Radio

Live Sports
Applies to: vehicles with SiriusXM
Using the Live Sports category, you can find live commentary about your favorite teams during a live sports broadcast. Depending on vehicle equipment, you may be able to switch commentary that favors a certain side on or off.
Accessing live games
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: RADIO > Source > SiriusXM > 5a > Sports > Live Sports > a game.
The score, the status of the game, and, if availa-
ble, the current possession of the ball are displayed.
Saving/deleting a favorite team
> Press WY/W.
Switching commentary on or off
Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the Internet.
> Press ())/tc).

Radio text

Program information (for example, general text
messages, artist, composer, song) is displayed in the radio text.

Requirement: the selected radio station must support the radio text function.

Opening radio text
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: RADIO > select a frequency band (such as FM) > select a station > More > Radio text.

Depending on vehicle equipment, the following functions may be available:

Displaying previous radio text entries
> Swipe downward with one finger. The last radio text entries are displayed if they are available.

Scrolling through radio text entries

> Swipe upward or downward with one finger.

4KE012721BH

217
OwnersManuals2.com

Radio
Showing Radio Text Plus information If a radio text entry is displayed with a color, a phone number or a navigation destination for the station is available as radio text plus information. You have the following options:
Selecting the destination > Select: a navigation destination marked in col-
or > Set as destination.
Call > Select: d phone number marked in color > Call.
G) Tips
A call to a phone number stored in the radio text will start immediately.
Online radio
General information
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment and online radio
You can listen to various radio stations or podcasts on the Internet using online radio. Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the Internet. A data plan must be available => page 197.
Accessing online radio through the MMI
» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: RADIO > Source > Online.
The following functions are available:
Previous selection The station/podcast list for the last station or podcast that was playing will be displayed.
Top stations The favorite online radio stations are displayed.
Filter list > Select: > (a category) > a station/podcast.

@) Note
Read the information about Audi connect, and be sure to note the connectivity costs section
=@) in General information on page 193.
@ Tips -- Depending on the Internet connection and
network traffic, the connection may be lost when online radio is playing. -- Online radio reception may not be possible if Internet service is throttled. -- Online media usage depends on the service availability of the third party provider. --The range and screen display of online media services from third party providers in the vehicle can vary. -- Please note that it may not be possible to play some online radio stations in certain countries. -- Audi only provides access to online radio and does not assume any responsibility for the content of these services.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment and online radio
Opening podcasts using the MMI
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: RADIO > Source > Online > Podcasts.
The following functions are available:
Listening to a podcast
> Select: a podcast > a podcast episode.
Search
> Press 2.
The following functions are available in the podcast playback view:
Displaying podcast episodes
> Press List.
Starting/stopping podcast playback
> PressD /II.

218

OwnersManuals2.com

Previous/next podcast
> Press KI / DI.
Changing the playback position
> Move the slider into the desired position.
Displaying the online radio menu
> Press an.
Switching to radio
> Press Source. The sources in the Radio menu are displayed.
Podcast favorites You can store podcasts in the podcast favorites.
Requirement: the playback view for a podcast must be displayed.
> Press ¥¥ @ © page 215, fig. 147.
Requirement: a list with podcasts must be displayed. > Press and hold an entry in the list until the Op-
tions menu appears. > Press Save podcast.
Listening to podcast favorites Requirement: the podcast favorites list must be
displayed. At least one podcast favorite must be stored.
» Select: a podcast > a podcast episode.
Browsing through podcast favorites Requirement: the podcast favorites list must be displayed. At least one podcast favorite must be stored.
> Press Cor >.
Displaying all podcast favorites
Requirement: the podcast favorites list must be displayed. At least one podcast favorite must be stored.
> Press All.
Editing podcast favorites
> Deleting podcast favorites: press W in the playback view, or

Radio
> In the podcast favorites list, select: Al > Z >
one or more podcasts, or Select All > Delete > (Done).
Requirement: the podcast favorites list must be displayed.
> Moving podcast favorites: Select: All > Z.
> Touch the > symbol and move the entry to the desired position.
> Press Done.
Options and settings
Requirement: the playback view(@) > page 275, fig. 147 must be displayed.
> Press More (9, or
Requirement: a list with radio stations or podcasts* must be displayed > page 274, fig. 145. > Press and hold an entry in the list until the Op-
tions menu appears.
Depending on the selected source and vehicle equipment, the following functions may be available.
-- Store as favorite > page 217. -- Radio text > page 277. -- Save podcast > page 219, Podcast favorites. -- Save as a shortcut > page 22, Shortcuts.
Related content
Channels, artists, and shows related to the con-
tent that is currently playing.

> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
RADIO > ©}.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following settings may be available:

FM HD Radio

You can switch HD Radio reception on or off.

4KE012721BH

219
OwnersManuals2.com

Radio

SiriusXM Tune Start
If you play a Smart Favorite when this function is switched on, the song currently playing on the channel will play from the beginning.
SiriusXM subscription status
The status of your license is displayed.
Call SiriusXM: the telephone number and radio ID of your satellite radio provider are displayed. To call your satellite radio provider using the MMI, press Call SiriusXM.
Online additional data
Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the Internet. A data plan must be available => page 197.
When the function is switched on, additional information (such as album cover, artist, track) will be loaded depending on the availability.
Online station tracking
Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the Internet. A data plan must be available => page 197. A station provides information in the background for its online station alternative and is identified with the TM} symbol.
During reception loss in the FM frequency band, the radio tuner can establish a data connection

and switch to an online station alternative, if it is
available. If available, you can receive your local radio stations in every region of your country online. This may result in additional costs >@®. The
symbol indicates a station that is currently being received online. -- Automatic/Off: activates or deactivates auto-
matic switching to online station alternatives. -- With request: switching to online station alter-
natives must be confirmed manually.
Preferred online radio data rate
Depending on the selected radio station, you may be able to adjust the data rate for Internet radio => page 218 and for the Online station tracking.
For optimal sound playback, press High. To reduce data usage, press Low.
C) Note
Read the information about Audi connect, and be sure to note the connectivity costs section =>@ in General information on page 193.
® Ties Delays may occur when switching automatically between normal frequency bands and online radio.

Troubleshooting

The information that follows lists some troubleshooting options. They depend on the equip-
ment.

Problem

Solution

A station is no longer displayed in the sta- | Store the station as a preset in advance. Access the pre-

tion list.

sets using the presets list > page 2177.

Online radio: no playback from online ra- Check ifa data plan has been purchased for the applicable

dio.

country and it is available > page 197.

220

OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

Media
General information
There may be different media sources and connections available depending on the vehicle equipment. For example, you can play media files using a connected USB drive or connect your mobile devices to the Audi music interface and operate them through the MMI.
Media and format restrictions: the MMI (including the USB storage device connection) was tested with a variety of products and media on the market. However, there may be cases where individual devices/media and media files may not be recognized, may play only with restrictions, or may not play at all.
Restricted functionality: reset the MMI to the factory default settings if functionality is restricted > page 234.
Digital Rights Management: please note that the media files are subject to copyright protection.
Files that are protected by DRM and are identified with the symbol f@ will not play.
Data security: never store important information on mobile devices. Audi is not responsible for damaged or lost files and media.
Loading times: the more files/folders/playlists there are on a storage medium, the longer it will take to load. To reduce the amount of time it takes the media files to load, use a storage medium that only contains media files, and create subfolders (for example, for each artist or album).
Additional information: when playing, audio files are automatically displayed with any additional information that is stored (such as the ar-
tist, track and album cover). If this information is not available on the medium, the MMI will revert to the local Gracenote metadata database or
search online if necessary. See > page 227, On-
line additional data. However, in some cases, the
additional information may not be displayed.

Media

C) Note
Read the information about Audi connect, and be sure to note the connectivity costs section
=@ in General information on page 193.

Bluetooth audio player
Applies to: vehicles with Bluetooth audio player

With the Bluetooth audio player, you can play music wirelessly through the MMI from your
Bluetooth-capable mobile device (such as a cell phone).

Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and the ignition must be switched on. The Bluetooth
settings will open on your mobile device during
the connection setup. The Bluetooth function and visibility of the MMI > page 234 and mobile device must be switched on.

Connecting a mobile device
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: MEDIA > Source > Connect external device > New connection. The available Bluetooth devices will be displayed after several seconds.
> Press on the desired mobile device in the list of displayed Bluetooth devices.
> To update the list, press Q.

A PIN for a secure Bluetooth connection will be generated. > Confirm the PIN on your mobile device.

After connecting successfully, the mobile device
will be displayed in the Connected devices menu as a Bluetooth audio player.

Playing media > page 224.

(i) Tips

-- Check for any connection requests on your

Bluetooth device.

-- Multiple Bluetooth audio players can be

paired with the MMI, but only one at a time

can be active as a Bluetooth audio player

=> page 235.

-- The supported media functions (such as

shuffle, list view, categories, search, op-

tions) depend on the Bluetooth device being

used.

221
OwnersManuals2.com

Media
-- Note the volume setting on your Bluetooth device. Audi recommends setting your mobile device to the maximum volume when using it as a Bluetooth audio player.
--Aselection of supported Bluetooth devices can be found in the database for tested mobile devices at www.audi.com/bluetooth.
Online media
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment and online media
You can play and operate various online media services, such as music streaming services, using the MMI.
Requirement: a supported online media service must be available in the country where the vehicle is being operated. you must be logged in to your myAudi account in the vehicle.
Connect online media
> Connect the MMI to the Internet > page 793. > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
MEDIA > Source > Streaming services. All supported online services in your country will be displayed for the user that is logged in. >» Press on the desired online media service and follow the system instructions.
After successfully logging in, the online media service will be available as a media source.
Starting online media
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: MEDIA > Source > an online media source.
Z\ WARNING
Always follow the information found in > A\ in General information on page 193.
@) Note
-- Read the information about Audi connect,
and be sure to note the connectivity costs section >@ in General information on page 193. -- There generally are additional costs when using an online media service account, especially when it is used internationally.

@) Tips
Depending on the Internet connection and network traffic, the connection may disconnected when online media sources are playing.
Amazon Alexa
Applies to: vehicles with Amazon Alexa Integration
You can play various Amazon Alexa content using the MMI. The voice recognition system is used to operate it.
Requirement: Amazon Alexa must be activated => page 27.
> Start Amazon Alexa using the voice recognition
system.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: MEDIA > Source > Alexa.
ZA WARNING
Always follow the information found in > A\ in General information on page 193.
C) Note
Read the information about Audi connect, and be sure to note the connectivity costs section => page 193.
Multimedia connections
USB adapter
oY é
fo
Fig. 148 Audi Genuine Accessories: USB adapter
You can connect your mobile devices through the Audi music interface to the MMI using the USB adapter and charge the battery at the same time. >

[RAZ-1390]

222

OwnersManuals2.com

Media

You can purchase the USB adapter cable from an authorized Audi dealer or at specialty stores: @ USB adapter for devices with a mi-
cro USB connection @ USB adapter for Apple devices with
a Lightning connection
@ USB adapter for devices with USB
type C connection
@) Note
Handle the USB adapter carefully. Do not allow it to be pinched.
@ Tips
Apple devices with a dock connector can only be charged using a USB adapter designed for devices with a dock connector. Data cannot be transmitted.
Audi music interface
Connect your mobile devices to the Audi music interface in order to operate them through the MMI and charge the batteries.
The Audi music interface USB ports are located in the storage compartment under the front center armrest and are labeled with the + symbol. If multiple USB devices are connected to the USB ports (for example, a smartphone and a USB flash drive), all of these devices can be used as the playback source.
Connecting or charging mobile devices using a USB adapter
> Connect the matching USB adapter to the Audi music interface USB port and connect it to the
mobile device, such as a smartphone.
The battery will charge automatically.
Mobile devices connected to the Audi music interface can be started and operated using the MMI => page 224.
Disconnecting a mobile device from the Audi music interface
> Remove the USB adapter cable from the Audi music interface.

ZA WARNING
Driving requires your complete and undivided attention. As the driver, you have complete responsibility for safety in traffic. Never operate
mobile devices while driving, because this in-
creases the risk of an accident.
@) Note
-- Pull the cable out of the Audi music interface carefully so that the USB ports are not damaged.
-- Use a USB extension cable to connect devices that have an integrated USB connector (such as a USB stick) to reduce the risk of damage to your USB device and the Audi music interface.
-- Extremely high or low temperatures that can occur inside vehicles can damage mobile devices and/or impair their performance. Never leave mobile devices in the vehicle in extremely high or low temperatures.
G) Tips
-- Always follow the information found in => page 80.
--When you switch the ignition off, the USB ports are still supplied with power until the energy management intervenes.
-- Do not use an additional adapter cable or USB extension cable to connect mobile devices to the Audi music interface that already have a cable or that must be connected with a USB adapter cable (9 page 222, fig. 148). Using an additional adapter or US extension cable may impair functionality.
-- Functionality is not guaranteed for mobile devices that do not conform to the USB 2.0 specification.
-- USB hubs are not supported. -- Video playback through the Audi music in-
terface is not supported on Apple devices and MTP devices (such as smartphones). -- iPod touch or iPhone malfunctions also affect the operation of the MMI. Reset your mobile device in these situations. -- Audi recommends updating the iPod touch or iPhone software to the latest version.

4KE012721BH

223
OwnersManuals2.com

Media
Refer to your mobile device owner's manual for more information. -- The USB adapter on the Audi music interface will support iPod touch or iPhone devices from the 5th generation or newer with the lightning connector. --Aselection of supported devices can be found in the database for tested mobile devices at www.audi.com/mp3.
Playing media
The following sources can be selected depending on the vehicle equipment: -- Alexa > page 222. -- USB device > page 223. -- Connect external device: you can connect ex-
ternal devices via Bluetooth and use the Bluetooth audio player > page 221, or you can connect an external device directly to the Audi music interface > page 223. -- Streaming services > page 222.
Playing media files using the MMI > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
MEDIA > Source > a source. Depending on the
connected device or online media service', the
symbol for a source may change. The device name may be displayed (for example: myPhone). > Select a track from the categories in the media center > page 224.
Playing media files using the multifunction steering wheel
Requirement: a media source must contain me-
dia files > page 224.
> Select the radio/media tab in the instrument cluster.
> Press the [=] button to toggle between the radio and media or to select a different source.
> To select a media file/source, turn and press the left thumbwheel.
224

@) Tips -- For safety reasons, the video image is only displayed when the vehicle is stationary. Only the sound from the video plays while driving. -- Applies to: multifunction steering wheel: Depending on the selected function, operation through the MMI may be required.
ees Census
Fig. 149 Upper display: media center
There are various categories available in the media center. You can also search for media files across sources. The current music track continues playing while you search the MMI. Opening the media center > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
MEDIA > Source > a source > a category.
@ Source symbol
The symbol for the source that is currently in use is displayed. Depending on the connected device or online media service*, the source symbol may change. As an example, a USB stick is shown connected to the Audi music interface.
@ Source device name
The device name of the source that is currently in use is displayed.
@) Categories
The media center will display categories depending on vehicle equipment, the connected device, the content of the selected source, and the connection type: -- Last played tracks -- Artists -- Compilations
OwnersManuals2.com

-- Composers -- iTunes Radio -- Audio books -- Podcasts -- Genres -- Videos -- Tracks -- Albums
Other categories may be available depending on the service.
Playlists
All playlists and smart playlists in the source are displayed.
Smart playlists
-- Last played tracks -- Most played tracks
Folders
The folder structure or track/chapter list is displayed.
@) Note
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment
-- Cloud services and the iTunes radio category always require an Internet connection.
elemiata atola ey

Media
-- Read the information about Audi connect,
and be sure to note the connectivity costs section >@ in General information on page 193.
G@) Tips
-- Only the categories supported by the medium/service are available.
-- For safety reasons, the video image is only displayed when the vehicle is stationary. Only the sound from the video plays while driving.
--When synchronizing a mobile device with Cloud services, playlists may display incorrectly in the MMI. Use the media center in the device.
-- Applies to: iPod touch/iPhone: Note the information about the Audi music interface and the supported devices > page 222.

4KE012721BH
[RAX-0206]

Bina a eC)
Batas)de) Perna iac) niera ac

@
Fig. 150 Upper display: left side: playback view, right side: playlist

Operating
> Applies to: MMI: To open the playback view @, select on the home screen: MEDIA > Source > a

source > a category (for example, Artists > Al-

bum) > a track.

225
OwnersManuals2.com

Media

> To open the playlist @), select List in the playback view @@.

The following functions may be available depending on the selected media source and the vehicle
equipment:

@|®

® |©

Symbol/Description |Description

The media center categories are displayed based on the active

source > page 224.

Source

Displays sources in the Media menu.

Source/device name device name of the source that is currently playing.

Requirement: a media source with album covers must be selected

Album cover in the play-

or the covers must be available online > page 227, Online additional data.

back view

Displays the current album cover.

Display the playlist: press on the cover.

Settings > page 227.

Current track informa- | Display of Track and Artist. Highlights the track that is currently

tion

playing.

List

Browsing in the list: drag your finger upward or downward.

Requirement: a media source with album covers must be selected

Album cover in the play- or the covers must be available online > page 227, Online addition-

list

al data.

Displays the current album cover.

Opens options > page 227.

Q Off

Switching between off/playlist/track: press (2.

O Playlist

The tracks in the current playlist will repeat continuously in a loop.

The current track will repeat continuously in a loop.

Selecting the previous/next track (or station/chapter): press Ki or

Di.

lafpl

Fast forward/rewind: to fast forward or rewind within a track, press

and hold Dl or XK.

Jumping to the beginning of a track: press on K after the first

three seconds of play time.

PAI

Start or stop playback

When this function is switched on, all files in the playlist will play in

random order.

List

The playlist @) is displayed.

Playback position

The bar shows the current playback position in the track.
Fast-forward or rewind: to fast forward or rewind within a track,
move the bar to the right or left. Changing the playback position: press the desired playback position.

Info section

Display of Track, Artist, and Album.

226

OwnersManuals2.com

@ Tips
Not all functions are available in every source and on every touch display.

Free text search
Applies to: vehicles with free text search

You can search across all active sources, for example for tracks and artists.
Opening the search
Requirement: the selected source must support the search function.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: MEDIA > Search.

Entries that contain the entered search term are listed in the results list. Each result is marked with the symbol for a category in the media center > page 224.

You can search -- Artists -- Albums -- Tracks -- Genres -- Videos

for the following

categories:

Options and settings

Context-dependent functions and settings may be available depending on vehicle equipment, the selected source, the connected mobile device, and the connection type.
Requirement: the playback view must be displayed @) > page 225, fig. 150.
> Press More (11).
Play more like this
The track currently playing is quickly analyzed for
features such as artist, genre, mood, and beat,
and a smart playlist with similar tracks will be shown.

Media

Aspect ratio
Audi recommends the Auto setting for the pic-
ture format. If you press on an aspect ratio, you
will see a preview of the setting on the screen. Press OK to apply the selected aspect ratio.
The following table gives an overview of the aspect ratios. The possible aspect ratios depend on the source or video file being played.

Aspect ratio Auto
4:3, 16:9
Zz Som
Original

Descriopetion
The MMI detects the picture format of the source and displays the image in the optimal ratio.
The image is fixed in the corresponding ratio. Select one of these options if the image is distorted or a section of the image is cut off or blurry when Auto is selected.
The image is enlarged to fill the entire display.
The image is displayed in the ratio of the source format. Select this option if the image is distorted or a section of the image is cut off or blurry when Auto is selected.

Accessing settings
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
MEDIA > ©.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following settings may be available:
Online additional data
Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the Internet. A data plan must be available => page 197.
When the function is switched on, additional information (such as album cover, artist, track) will be loaded depending on the availability.

4KE012721BH

227
OwnersManuals2.com

Media
Supported media and file formats

Depending on the vehicle equipment, media files
with the following properties may be supported by the connection for USB storage devices:

Audio/video files Supported media
File system
Metadata
Playlists Number of files

Audi music interface: mobile devices > page 222 such as iPhones, MTP players, and USB storage devices in "USB Device Subclass 1 and 6" that conform to USB 2.0: USB sticks, USB MP3 players (Plug-andPlay capable), external USB flash drives, and hard drives
USB storage devices: exFAT, FAT, FAT32, NTFS. USB storage device partitions (primary/logical*): 2 per USB connection.
Album cover: GIF, JPG, PNG with max. 800x800 px. The album cover
from the medium or from Gracenote* is displayed, depending on availability.
-M3U; .PLS; .WPL; .M3U8; .ASX
USB mass storage device: max. 50,000 files per medium; max. 1,000
files per playlist/folder

Audio files
Format MPEG 1/2 Layer 3 Windows Media Audio 9/10
MPEG 2/4 Opus FLAC ALAC Monkey's Audio

File extension -mp3
wma .m4a; .m4b; .aac .Opus; .0gg; .oga flac .m4a ape

Up to maximum 320 kbit/s 48 kHz sampling frequencies
48 kHz sampling frequency

Video files Format MPEG 1/2 MPEG4 AVC (H.264) Windows Media Video 9 MPEG-H (H.265/HEVC) VP8/VP9 Flash video

File extension -Mpg; .mpeg
wmmpv4:; .ams4tv; .mov; .avi _*
mp4; .mov webm flv; .f4v

up to maximum 15 Mbit/s and 1920x1080 px at maximum 30 fps

G) Tips
-- The media sources do not support the Windows Media Audio 9 Voice format.

-- For compressing MP3 files, Audi recom-

mends a bit rate of at least 160 kbit/s. The

display showing the remaining play time

228

OwnersManuals2.com

Media

may differ for audio files with variable bit
rate.
-- Special characters (such as those in ID3 tag information) may display differently or may not always display, depending on the system language.

-- The manufacturer of the storage device can provide information about its "USB Device Subclass".
-- Some MTP player functions are not supported, such as rating music tracks and video playback.

Troubleshooting

The information that follows lists some troubleshooting options. They depend on the equip-
ment.

Problem Audi music interface/Bluetooth® audio player: the mobile device is not supported. Audi music interface: the mobile device is not recognized as a source.
Audi music interface: malfunctions during audio playback through an iPod touch/iPhone. Audi music interface: audio playback through the connected mobile device is not possible. Bluetooth® audio player: interference with track display and audio playback.
Online media: no playback of online media.

Solution Read the instructions in the chapter > page 222, Multimedia connections/> page 221, Bluetooth audio player.
For many mobile phones or mobile devices, playback is not possible when the battery level is too low (less than 5% charge level). The mobile device will only be recognized as a media source in the MMI after connecting if the battery charge level is sufficient. The Bluetooth® audio player function is switched on. Switch this function off > page 234 when you are not using the Bluetooth® audio player. Make sure the USB mode MTP is selected in the settings on your mobile device.
Playback interference can occur when using the Bluetooth® audio player ifa music player app from a third party provider is open. Audi recommends using the integrated media player on your Bluetooth device (such as a smartphone). Check ifa data plan has been purchased for the applicable country and it is available > page 197.

4KE012721BH

229
OwnersManuals2.com

Audi smartphone interface
Audi smartphone interface
Setup
Applies to: vehicles with Audi smartphone interface
You can connect your smartphone to the MMI with a cable or wirelessly* using the Audi smart-
phone interface. Certain content on your smart-
phone is adapted in the MMI while driving and can be operated through the MMI.
Connecting smartphones with a cable
Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and the ignition must be switched on. An iPhone from the 6th generation or newer with lightning connection must have the latest operating system installed or a smartphone with Android Auto app must have Android 5.0 Lollipop or newer installed.
> Connect your smartphone to the Audi music interface > page 223 using a USB adapter => page 222, fig. 148.
Connecting smartphones wirelessly
Applies to: vehicles with wireless Apple CarPlay/wireless Android Auto
Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and the ignition must be switched on. An iPhone from the 6th generation or newer with lightning connection must have the latest operating system installed or a smartphone with Android Auto app must have Android 11 or newer installed.
> To connect your smartphone wirelessly, switch on the Bluetooth function and Wi-Fi on your smartphone.
> Applies to: wireless Apple CarPlay: Open the Apple CarPlay settings in your iPhone.
> Applies to: wireless Android Auto: Make sure that wireless Android Auto is allowed in the app settings in your smartphone.
> Enable the Bluetooth function and visibility on the MMI > page 234.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: SETTINGS > Connected devices > Audi smartphone interface > New connection.
>In the MMI, press on your smartphone in the list of displayed devices.

> To update the list, press Q.
Establishing a wired/wireless* connection
> Follow the system instructions if necessary. > Pay attention to any additional system prompts
on your smartphone, if applicable. > Applies to: MMI: If you declined use of Apple
CarPlay or Android Auto the first time you connected your smartphone, then select on the home screen: SETTINGS > Connected devices > Audi smartphone interface > ag smartphone. > Follow the system instructions.
ZA WARNING
Driving requires your complete and undivided attention. As the driver, you have complete responsibility for safety in traffic. Never operate
mobile devices while driving, because this increases the risk of an accident.
@) Note
Read the information about Audi connect, and
be sure to note the connectivity costs section => page 193.
G) Tips
-- The functions that can be used depend on the following factors, among others: -- The brand of your smartphone -- The version of the operating system in your smartphone -- The software version of the app used -- The USB adapter cable and correct connection -- Your cell phone service provider -- The customized settings on your smartphone
-- One of the factors above or a combination of any of them could cause your smartphone to be incompatible with the Audi smartphone interface. Compatibility cannot be guaranteed for all types of smartphones. For more information and assistance, refer to the user guide and the manufacturer of your smartphone.
-- Please note that you can only connect your smartphone via the front Audi music

230

OwnersManuals2.com

Audi smartphone interface

interface in order to use the Audi smartphone interface.
-- Wireless Apple CarPlay*/wireless Android Auto" is not available in all countries.
-- Wireless Apple CarPlay*/wireless Android
Auto* was a function in development at the time this manual was printed. Wireless Apple CarPlay*/wireless Android Auto* may not be available in your vehicle. -- Wireless Apple CarPlay*/wireless Android
Auto* is only possible in vehicles without a navigation system or without a detected vehicle position (GPS data) if the following re-
quirement is met: the embedded SIM card
for the vehicle must be logged into the mobile phone network > page 194. -- If the connected smartphone has voice con-
trol, you can operate your smartphone using

the external voice recognition system => page 27.
-- The MMI uses the menu language selected in your smartphone settings.
-- Some MMI functions are not available when
there is an active Audi smartphone interface connection. -- You cannot connect any mobile devices via Bluetooth when an Audi smartphone interface connection is active.
-- Usage of the Audi smartphone interface depends on the availability of services through third party providers.
-- Audi merely provides access to third party
services through the MMI and does not assume any responsibility for the content of these services.

Troubleshooting
Applies to: vehicles with Audi smartphone interface

The information that follows lists some troubleshooting options. They depend on the equip-
ment.

Problem Audi smartphone interface cannot be opened.
Connecting the smartphone to the MMI failed.

Solution
Check the battery charge level on your smartphone. Check the USB adapter and use a different one if necessary. Check if Android Auto or Apple CarPlay is available in the country where the vehicle is being operated.
Android Auto: check if the Android Auto app is installed on your smartphone.
Make sure that you are using the correct USB adapter and check if the USB adapter is connected correctly to your smartphone and the Audi music interface => page 222.
Apple CarPlay: check if Apple CarPlay is activated on your iPhone.
Android Auto: check in the Android Auto app if Android Auto permits new vehicles.

4KE012721BH

231
OwnersManuals2.com

Audi smartphone interface

Problem Wireless connection between the smartphone and the MMI failed.
The smartphone is not automatically detected.

Solution
Wireless Apple CarPlay: open the settings for Bluetooth and Apple CarPlay on your iPhone. Remove your vehicle.
Wireless Android Auto: open the settings for Bluetooth on your smartphone. Remove your vehicle. Also remove your vehicle in the Android Auto app.
Open the Connected devices menu > page 235. Delete your smartphone in the Telephone 1 and Audi smartphone interface menu items. Repeat the connection process. Restart the MMI > page 78. Restart your smartphone. Open the Wi-Fi settings in your smartphone. Check if your smartphone has connected to the 5 GHz vehicle Wi-Fi. Try connecting to the 5 GHz Wi-Fi manually.
Make sure that you are using the correct USB adapter and check if the USB adapter is connected correctly to your smartphone and the Audi music interface => page 222. Check if the requirements needed to connect a smartphone have been met.

232

OwnersManuals2.com

Additional settings
System settings
Introduction
General settings are described in this chapter. You can find specific settings in the chapters about those settings. The available settings depend on the vehicle equipment.
Date and time
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: SETTINGS > General > Date & time.
Possible settings:
-- Automatically set date and time

-- Date format -- Time format -- Automatic time zone -- Time zone

eet ae ahay

> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: SETTINGS > General > Measurement units.

Possible settings:

-- Speed -- Distance -- Temperature -- Volume -- Pressure -- Consumption

(electric motor)

Language and keyboard
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: SETTINGS > Language & keyboard.
Language
You can change the languages for the display, navigation announcements, and the voice recognition system.

Keyboard See > page 23.

Additional settings

Requirement: an audio source must be active.
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: SETTINGS > Sound.
Possible settings:
-- Treble -- Bass -- Balance/fader -- Speed dependent volume control -- Subwoofer -- Surround Level
Focus You can optimize the sound distribution for various locations in the vehicle.
3D effect You can adjust the intensity of the 3D effect. With the Medium setting, you will hear an optimal 3D effect for all sources.
Peet neem ely
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: SETTINGS > Announcements & tones.
Possible settings:
-- Announcement volume -- Welcome sound
ZA\ WARNING
Adjust the volume of the audio system so that signals from outside the vehicle, such as po-
lice and fire sirens, can be heard easily at all times.
@ Tips The volume is automatically adjusted to a preset level when the MMI is switched on.

4KE012721BH

233
OwnersManuals2.com

Additional settings
131 Celohaa)
» Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: SETTINGS > Connection settings > Bluetooth®
Bluetooth® You can select a setting for visibility of the MMI to other Bluetooth devices. To connect a new
Bluetooth device, the Visible setting must be se-
lected. If Invisible is selected, a Bluetooth connection will only be possible with paired devices.
If Off is selected, no Bluetooth device can be connected.
Bluetooth® audio player
When this function is switched on, the profile will load automatically when your Bluetooth audio player is within range.
Bluetooth® name The MMI's Bluetooth name is displayed and can be changed.
G) Tips
The name of the Wi-Fi hotspot and the Bluetooth name are automatically compared when there are changes.
Factory default settings
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
» Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: SETTINGS > System maintenance > Restore factory settings.
> Follow the system instructions.
The settings will be reset. The system will restart. This may take some time.
@) Tips Make sure that not only the settings were deleted but also the stored data, if applicable.
Software update
Introduction
Applies to: vehicles with software update
You can update your vehicle's software.

The functions depend on the country and vehicle equipment: -- Update through the online system update
=> page 234. -- Map material update for the navigation system
=> page 210. -- Have the software update performed by an au-
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. This can result in additional costs.
ZA WARNING
-- Perform the installation only when the vehi-
cle is stationary. Otherwise, this increases
the risk of an accident -- If the installation fails, contact an author-
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
Online system update
Applies to: vehicles with online system update
With the online system update, you can update the software directly in the vehicle.
Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the Internet > page 193, Audi connect.
Downloading updates
Requirement: notification for an online system update will appear in the upper display.
> Press on the notification, or > Open the notification in the notification center
on > page 27 and press on the notification. > Follow the system instructions.
You can also check manually if an update is available. > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
SETTINGS > System maintenance > Software update > Search for updates > desired update > Continue. > Follow the system instructions.
The MMI will start the download. You can check the status of the download process in the notification center > page 27.

234

OwnersManuals2.com

Installing updates
Requirement: an online system update must be downloaded and a notification must be shown in the upper display.
> Stop the vehicle safely.
> Press on the notification, or > Open the notification in the notification center
on > page 27 and press on the notification. > Follow the system instructions.
Depending on the scope of the update, the online system update may only be started if you follow these instructions: > Switch the emergency flashers off, if necessary > Make sure that the starter battery is charged. > To start the update, exit and lock the vehicle.
The MMI will start the installation. When the update has ended, a notification will be displayed.
A WARNING
Depending on the scope of the installation, the ignition must not be switched on during the installation to ensure the installation completes successfully.
@) Note
Read the information about Audi connect, and be sure to note the connectivity costs section =@ in General information on page 193.
G) Tips
The software update may take some time.
Messages
Applies to: vehicles with online system update
The following messages may appear depending on the vehicle equipment:
B Online system update: incomplete. Warning! Vehicle functions limited
If an error occurs when installing an online system update, certain functions such as the emergency call function may not be available. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.

Additional settings
Connected devices
Displayed connected devices
Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and the ignition must be switched on.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: SETTINGS > Connected devices.
Possible menu items:
-- Telephone 1 -- Telephone 2 -- Audio player
-- Wi-Fi hotspot -- Headset
Audi smartphone interface
You can connect your smartphone to the MMI => page 230.
myAudi app This function is available if the myAudi app is installed on your mobile device and started, and if the mobile device is connected with the vehicle's Wi-Fi hotspot.
Q) Note
Read the information about Audi connect, and be sure to note the connectivity costs section => page 193.
Managing connected devices
Requirement: the connected devices menu must be displayed > page 235.
Connecting a device Requirement: Bluetooth visibility must be activated in the MMI > page 234 and mobile device.
> Press on a menu item, such as Telephone 1. > To search for and connect your mobile device,
press New connection > page 782.
Selecting a connected device > Press on a menu item, such as Telephone 1. > Press on the desired mobile device in the list of
displayed devices. The connection will be made. >

4KE012721BH

235
OwnersManuals2.com

Additional settings
Disconnecting a connected device
> Press on a menu item, such as Telephone 1. > Press on the connected mobile device. The se-
lected mobile device will be disconnected from
the MMI.
Deleting a device
> Press on a menu item, such as Telephone 1. > Press and hold an element until the Options
menu is displayed. > Press Delete.
If a device is listed multiple times, it will be deleted from all menu items.
me Lelia Cela] Mey lately
Depending on the selected function, additional options may be available.
Requirement: the connected devices menu must be displayed > page 235.
» Press on a menu item, such as Telephone 1. > Press and hold an element until the Options
menu is displayed.
Bluetooth® profiles You can switch desired profiles on or off separately in the MMI.
Favorite
To set a paired mobile device as the default phone, activate this function in the MMI.
When the mobile device is in range and the Bluetooth function on the mobile device and in the MMI is switched on, the default phone will be given priority over the other Bluetooth devices and will be connected directly to the MMI.
Legal information
General information
Information on the software licenses can be found online at www.audi.com/softwareinfo.

Multi Media Interface
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: SETTINGS > General.
Subscriptions
Version information
Legal notes
Possible options: -- Software information -- About Audi connect -- About the data memory
Audi smartphone interface
Applies to: vehicles with Audi smartphone interface
Requirement: a smartphone must be connected to the MMI > page 230.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
SETTINGS > Connected devices > Audi smartphone interface. >» Press and hold an element until the Options menu is displayed. > Press Legal notes.
Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and the ignition must be switched on.
> Select in the instrument cluster: vehicle functions tab 9 page 72.
> Press and hold the [=] button on the multifunction steering wheel until the display appears.
Possible options:
-- Motor code -- Software information -- Version information
Head-up display
Applies to: vehicles with head-up display
Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and the ignition must be switched on. The head-up display is switched on.

236

OwnersManuals2.com

> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
SETTINGS > Display & brightness > Head-up display > Display contents > Show the license text in the head-up display.

Additional settings

4KE012721BH

237
OwnersManuals2.com

B Pb e OF > OF

Checking and Filling
Checking and Filling
Front compartment
eT r eeleurllela)
Special care is required if you are working in the front compartment
For work in the front compartment, such as
checking and filling fluids, there is a risk of in-
jury, scalding, accidents, and burns. For this
reason, follow all the warnings and general safety precautions provided in the following information. The front compartment of the vehicle is a potentially dangerous area. > A\.
Explanation of warning symbols (sticker in the
front compartment):
Observe all warnings - there is a risk for injury!
Hot components! Rotating parts! Hot surfaces. The surfaces of individual components may become hot due to the heat generated during operation. Do not touch components - there is a risk of burns! The radiator fan can switch on at any time! High voltage! The voltage in the highvoltage system is high enough to cause fatal injuries. Touching a damaged highvoltage component can result in a fatal electric shock. Hot coolant - there is a risk of scalding!
Always follow the instructions in the operating manual.
ZA WARNING
-- Switch the ignition off. -- Set the parking brake. -- Select the "P" (Park) selector lever position. -- Keep children away from the front compart-
ment.
-- Never spill operating fluids in the front com-
partment.

-- Avoid short circuits in the electrical system. -- Never open the hood when there is steam or
coolant escaping from the front compartment, because there is a risk that you could be burned. Wait until no steam or coolant is
escaping.
-- The cap on the coolant expansion tank may only be opened by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
-- The cap of the coolant expansion tank for the high-voltage system is equipped with a seal that must never be removed under any circumstances > page 247. If the coolant ex-
pansion tank is not sealed, contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
-- The cap on the coolant expansion tank must never be opened when the coolant is hot. The cooling system is under pressure.
--To protect your face, hands, and arms from
hot steam or coolant, cover the cap with a
thick cloth when opening. -- All work on the battery or electrical system
in your vehicle can result in injuries, chemical burns, accidents, or burns. Because of this, all work must be performed only by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. -- Limit your exposure to chemicals to as short atime as possible.
ZA\ WARNING
The voltage in the high-voltage system is high enough to cause fatal injuries. Touching a damaged high-voltage component can result in a fatal electric shock. The components in the high-voltage system are marked with a warning label which warns of the high-voltage. -- The voltage level in the high-voltage system
is still dangerous and potentially life-threatening when the ignition is switched off.
-- Never perform work on orange high-voltage cables or on high-voltage components. Only authorized repair facilities that are certified may perform work on the high-voltage sys-
tem.

238

OwnersManuals2.com

Z\ WARNING

California Proposition 65 Warning:
-- Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. -- Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harms. Wash hands after handling.

@) Note
When filling fluids, be sure not to add any fluids to the wrong reservoirs. Otherwise, severe malfunctions and damage will occur.

@ For the sake of the environment
You should regularly check the ground under your vehicle in order to detect leaks quickly. If
there are visible spots from oil or other fluids,
bring your vehicle to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to be checked.

Opening and closing the hood The hood is released from inside the vehicle.

Checking and Filling
Fig. 152 Unlocked hood: lever
Observe the safety precautions > page 238, General information. Make sure the wiper arms are not raised up from the windshield. Otherwise the paint could be damaged. Opening the hood > With the door open, pull the lever 2") below
the instrument panel in the direction of the arrow > fig. 7517.
> Lift the hood slightly > A\.
>» Press the lever > fig. 752 in the direction of the arrow. This releases the hooks.
> Open the hood.
Closing the hood > Push the hood down until you override the
force of the strut. > Let hood fall lightly into the latch. Do not press
it in. > J\.
Messages The following messages may appear depending on the vehicle equipment: B Warning! Hood is not locked. Stop vehicle and check the lock The hood latch is not locked correctly. Stop immediately and close the hood.
A WARNING
-- Never open the hood when there is steam or coolant escaping from the front compart-
ment, because there is arisk that you could [>

RAZ-0606

4KE012721BH

1) The &> symbol is not available in all countries.

239
OwnersManuals2.com

Checking and Filling
be burned. Wait until no steam or coolant is escaping. -- For safety reasons, the hood must always be latched securely while driving. Because of this, always check the hood after closing it to make sure it is latched correctly. If the
celal rTadtl ae) aN The most important check points.

front corners of the hood cannot be lifted, then the lid is latched correctly. -- If you notice that the hood is not latched while you are driving, stop immediately and
close it, because driving when the hood is
not latched increases the risk of an accident.

Fig. 153 Overview: diagram
Observe the safety precautions > page 238, General information.
@ Washer fluid reservoir (>) > page 245 @ Coolant expansion tank (A&) under a cover
=> page 241
@® Brake fluid reservoir (O) under a cover
=> page 242
Cooling system
Observe the safety precautions > page 238, General information.
240

The cooling system is filled with a mixture of purified water and coolant additive at the factory. This coolant must not be not changed. The coolant level is monitored using the gg indicator light. However, you should occasionally check the coolant level.
Messages The following messages may appear depending on the vehicle equipment: BAturn off engine and check coolant level. See owner's manual The coolant level is too low.
OwnersManuals2.com

Do not continue driving and switch the ignition off. Add coolant. The vehicle must not be towed. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance. B Electric drive: malfunction! Cooling system. Please contact Service There is a malfunction in the cooling system. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately.
® Note
Before winter weather begins, have an au-
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility check if the coolant additive in your vehicle matches the percentage appropriate for the climate. This is especially important when driving in colder climates.
Coolant level
Fig. 154 Front compartment: coolant expansion tank
Observe the safety precautions > page 238, General information. Checking the coolant level > Park the vehicle on a level surface. > Switch the ignition off. > Open the hood => page 239. The coolant expansion tank is located in the plenum chamber under a cover. Slide the cover that is located below the windshield wipers on the front passenger's side toward the windshield and remove the cover > page 240, fig. 153. > Read the coolant level on the floating gauge for
the expansion tank without opening the cap. The coolant level must be between the Min and

Checking and Filling
Max markings when the coolant is cold > fig. 154 > if Bj turns on, do not continue driving => page 240. > If the coolant level is just over the Min marking, drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately.
Coolant loss usually indicates that there is a leak. Immediately drive your vehicle to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility and have the cooling system inspected.
ZA\ WARNING
-- The front compartment in any vehicle is a potentially dangerous area. Before performing work in the front compartment, switch the ignition off and allow the cooling system to cool down. Always follow the information found in > page 238, General information.
-- Never open the hood if you can see or hear steam or coolant escaping from the front compartment, because there is a risk that you could be burned. The cooling system is under pressure. When you no longer see or hear steam or coolant escaping, you may open the motor compartment with caution.
-- The coolant expansion tank may only be opened and filled by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
--The cap of the coolant expansion tank for the high-voltage system is equipped with a seal that must never be removed under any circumstances > page 247. If the coolant expansion tank is not sealed, contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
--When adding coolant, it may leak into the inside of high-voltage components and
cause a short circuit, increasing the risk of
fire. -- Coolant additive and coolant can be danger-
ous to your health. For this reason, store the coolant in the original container and away from children. There is a risk of poisoning.

4KE012721BH

241
OwnersManuals2.com

Checking and Filling
Brake fluid
Fig. 155 Front compartment: brake fluid reservoir cover
Observe the safety precautions > page 238, General information. Checking the brake fluid level > Park the vehicle on a level surface. >» Slide the cover that is located below the wind-
shield wipers on the driver's side toward the windshield and remove the cover. » Read the brake fluid level on the brake fluid reservoir > page 240, fig. 153. The brake fluid level must be between the MIN and MAX mark-
ings > A\.
The brake fluid level is monitored automatically. Messages The following messages may appear depending on the vehicle equipment: EG i@) Brakes: stop vehicle and check brake fluid level Stop the vehicle and check the brake fluid level. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance. Changing the brake fluid Brake fluid should be changed at regular intervals. Have the brake fluid changed by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. The authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility will inform you of the replacement intervals.
ZA\ WARNING
-- If the brake fluid level is below the MIN marking, it can impair the braking effect and
242

BFV-0229]

driving safety, which increase the risk of an accident. Do not continue driving. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
-- If the brake fluid is old, bubbles may form in
the brake system during heavy braking. This could impair braking performance and driving safety, which increases the risk of an accident. -- The brake fluid in your vehicle must meet the standard VW 501 14 and is available at an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. If this brake fluid is not available, another high-grade brake fluid of equivalent quality may be used, and it must meet the U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Standard (FMVSS) 116 DOT 4, Class 6.
() Note
-- If the brake fluid level is above the MAX marking, brake fluid may leak out over the edge of the reservoir and result in damage to the vehicle.
-- Do not allow any brake fluid to come into contact with the vehicle paint, because it will corrode the paint.
Electrical system
The following messages may appear depending on the vehicle equipment:
If the =} / B or fl indicator light turns on, there is a malfunction in the power supply, the battery, or the vehicle electrical system.
/ BB Electrical system: malfunction! Safely stop vehicle
Do not continue driving and switch the ignition off > A\. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
= Electrical system: malfunction! Restart not possible. Please contact Service
If you switch the ignition off, you will not be able to restart the vehicle. Vehicle functions or driving
stability may be limited. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately.
OwnersManuals2.com

= Electrical system: malfunction! Please contact Service
Switch off all electrical equipment that is not needed. If necessary, some equipment will be switched off automatically. Vehicle functions or driving stability may be limited. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately.
= Electrical system: low battery charge. Battery will be charged while driving
-- If this message turns off after a little while, the
vehicle battery has been charged enough by the high-voltage battery while driving.
-- If the message does not turn off, drive immedi-
ately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
Z\ WARNING
When there is an electrical system malfunction, vehicle functions may not work and driving stability may be limited, which increases the risk of an accident. Do not continue driving and switch the ignition off. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
Battery
Fea te eee Lcd
Because of the complex power supply, all work on batteries such as disconnecting, replacing, etc., should only be performed by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility SA.
Batteries with different technologies are installed in your vehicle:
-- 12 volt vehicle battery (for example, for basic power supply) > page 244, Safety precautions
-- High-voltage battery (for example, for electric drive system, climate control) > page 172, Introduction

Checking and Filling
Not running the vehicle for long periods of time
If the vehicle is left parked for long periods of time, the 12 volt vehicle battery will drain gradually. To ensure that the vehicle can still be started, the electrical equipment will be limited or
switched off. Some convenience functions, such as interior lighting or power seat adjustment,
may not be available under certain circumstances. The convenience functions will be available again when you establish drive ready mode.
Even when electrical equipment is switched off, the equipment can still drain the 12 Volt vehicle battery if the vehicle is not driven for long periods of time. Deep draining results in a chemical reaction that destroys the inside of the battery. To reduce the risk of this, the battery must be charged monthly by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility > page 245. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for more information.
Winter operation
Cold weather places an especially high load on the 12 volt vehicle battery. Have the battery checked by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility before cold weather begins.
Replacing the battery
Applies to: 12 volt vehicle battery
All work on the battery must only be performed by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
The 12 volt vehicle battery was developed based on the installation location and is equipped with safety features. If a 12 volt vehicle battery must be replaced, ask your authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility about the electromagnetic compatibility, size, and the necessary maintenance, power, and safety standards for the new 12 volt vehicle battery. The battery vent of the 12 volt vehicle battery must always be on the negative terminal side. The battery vent on the positive terminal side must always be closed. >

4KE012721BH

243
OwnersManuals2.com

Checking and Filling
ZA WARNING
-- All work on the battery or electrical system in your vehicle can result in injuries, chemical burns, accidents, or burns. Because of this, all work must be performed only by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
-- Always have an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility replace the 12 volt vehicle battery, because and adaptation must be performed on the vehicle electrical system when the battery is replaced. Only an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility has the necessary technology to perform the adaption correct-
ly. Otherwise, there could be a loss of safe-
ty-related functions among other things, which increases the risk of an accident.
ZA WARNING
California Proposition 65 Warning: -- Battery posts, terminals and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harms. Wash hands after handling.
@) Note
-- If the vehicle will be parked for long periods of time, protect the 12 Volt vehicle battery against the cold so that it will not "freeze" and become damaged. Have the battery charged by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility > page 245, Charging the 12 volt vehicle battery.
-- Always have an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility replace the 12 volt vehicle battery, because and adaptation must be performed on the vehicle electrical system when the battery is replaced. Only an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility has the necessary technology to perform the adaption correctly.
-- Using unsuitable batteries may void the vehicle's operating license.

@) For the sake of the environment
"© Batteries must be disposed of using methods that will not harm the environment. Do not dispose of them in household trash. They contain harmful substances and recyclable raw materials. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for more information.
Safety precautions
Explanation of warning symbols:
LN juryObserve all warnings - there is a risk for in-
@/ | Always follow the instructions in the operQ | ating manual.
High voltage! The voltage in the high-voltAN age system is high enough to cause fatal
injuries. Touching a damaged high-voltage Jn component can result in a fatal electric
shock.
Electrolyte fluid is highly corrosive. Always wear protective gloves and eye protection. First aid: if electrolyte fluid enters the eyes, immediately flush with clean water for several minutes. Seek medical attention immediately. Immediately neutralize electrolyte fluid on the skin or clothing using a soap solution and rinse with plenty of water. If electrolyte fluid is accidentally
ingested, seek medical attention immediately.
Always wear eye protection.
If electrolyte fluid enters the eyes, immediately flush with clean water for several minutes. Seek medical attention immediately.
Fire, sparks, open flame, and smoking are
& prohibited. Avoid creation of sparks and short circuits when handling cables and electrical devices.

244

OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH
[RAZ-1235

The high-voltage battery is flammable. The high-voltage battery must never be exposed to fire, sparks, or open flame. Always handle the high-voltage battery with care to reduce the risk of damage and leaking fluids.
Always keep children away from battery
6) electrolyte fluid and the battery.
"= | Applies to: high-voltage battery: Handling the high-voltage battery incorrectly can lead to serious injuries or death. Never remove the cover from the high-voltage battery and never disassemble the high-voltage battery.
.c, |Applies to: high-voltage battery: Handling > the high-voltage battery incorrectly can
@ | lead to serious injuries or death. The highfh voltage battery must only be serviced by
qualified and trained technicians. Never make modifications to the high-voltage battery. If the high-voltage battery is open, it must not come into contact with water or other liquids. Liquids may cause short circuits, electric shocks, and burns.
Have the high-voltage battery replaced only by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. Audi recommends an authorized Audi dealer or au-
thorized Audi Service Facility, because
these locations have trained personnel and the required parts and tools.
A highly explosive mixture of gases can
A» form when charging batteries.
Z\ WARNING
All work on the batteries must only be performed by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. -- Gases that escape from these batteries can
be poisonous or flammable. -- The contents of these batteries can be corro-
sive. If any battery contents come into contact with the skin, flush the affected area for at least 15 minutes with clean water. Then wash the affected area with soap. Have the

Checking and Filling
affected area examined by a medical professional.
Cercle mantel em alameda
The vehicle cannot be operated when the 12 volt vehicle battery is drained. The vehicle battery must not be charged under any circumstances. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or authori zed Audi Service Facility.
C@) Note
The charging of the vehicle battery requires specialized knowledge and technology. -- The vehicle battery may only be charged by
an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. Otherwise, the electronic systems in the vehicle may be seve ince ly damaged. -- The jump start pins in the front compartment are designed only for use by qualified technicians.
Windshield washer system

Fig. 156 Front compartment: washer fluid reservoir cover

Observe the safety precautions > page 238, General information.

The windshield washer reservoir <> contains the cleaning solution for the windshield/rear window and the headlight washer system* > fig. 756, => page 240. The reservoir capacity can be found in > page 299.

To reduce the risk of lime scale deposits on t he

spray nozzles, use clean water with low amounts

of calcium. Always add window cleaner to the

245
OwnersManuals2.com

Checking and Filling
water. When the outside temperatures are cold,
an anti-freezing agent should be added to the water so that it does not freeze.
Messages
The following messages may appear depending on the vehicle equipment:
ES Please add washer fluid
Fill the washer fluid for the windshield washer system and the headlight washer system* when the ignition is switched off.
©) Note
-- The concentration of anti-freezing agent must be adjusted to the vehicle operating conditions and the climate. A concentration that is too high can lead to vehicle damage.
-- Never add radiator anti-freeze or other additives to the washer fluid.
-- Do not use a glass cleaner that contains paint solvents, because this could damage the paint.
Service interval display
The service interval display detects when your vehicle is due for service.
The service interval display works in two stages:
-- Inspection reminder: after driving a certain dis-
tance, a message appears in the instrument
cluster display each time the ignition is switched on or off. -- Inspection due: if your vehicle has reached an inspection interval, the message Inspection due! appears briefly after the ignition is switched on and off.
Checking service intervals
Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Service intervals
Resetting the indicator
An authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility will reset the service interval display after performing service.

ZA\ WARNING
Inadequate service, a lack of service, or failing to adhere to the service intervals can result in the vehicle breaking down in traffic, acci-
dents, and serious injuries.
() Note
-- Regular service work on the vehicle is not only beneficial for the sustainable use and retention of the vehicle value, but also for the operational and traffic safety. For this reason, always have service work performed according to the Audi guidelines.
-- Even if the mileage on the vehicle is low, do
not exceed the time for the next service. -- Audi is not responsible for damage to the
vehicle that occurred due to inadequate service or insufficient part availability.

246

OwnersManuals2.com

Wheels

Wheels
Wheels and Tires
General information
> Check your tires regularly for
damage, such as punctures, cuts, cracks, and bulges. Remove
foreign objects from the tire tread. >If driving over curbs or similar obstacles, drive slowly and approach the curb at an angle. > Have faulty tires or rims replaced immediately.
>Protect your tires from oil, grease, and fuel.
>Mark tires before removing them so that the same running direction can be maintained if they are reinstalled. >Lay tires flat when storing and
store them in a cool, dry location
with as little exposure to light as possible.
A WARNING
--Never drive faster than the maximum permitted speed for your tires. This could cause the tires to heat up too much. This increases the risk of an accident because it can cause the tire to burst.

--Always adapt your driving to the road and traffic conditions. Drive carefully and reduce your speed on icy or slip-
pery roads. Even winter tires
can lose traction on black ice.
() Note
--Please note that summer and winter tires are designed for the conditions that are typical in those seasons. Audi recommends winter tires during the winter months. Low temperatures significantly decrease
the elasticity of summer tires,
which affects traction and braking ability. If summer tires are used in very cold
temperatures, cracks can form
on the tread bars, resulting in
permanent tire damage that can cause loud driving noise and unbalanced tires. --Burnished, polished or chromed rims must not be used in winter driving conditions. The surface of the rims does not have sufficient corrosion protection for this and could be permanently damaged by road salt or similar substances.

4KE012721BH

247
OwnersManuals2.com

Wheels
Tire designations
Fig. 157 Tire designations on the sidewall
@ Tires for passenger vehicles (if applicable)
"P" indicates a tire for a passenger vehicle. "T" indicates a tire designated for temporary use.
@ Nominal width
Nominal width of the tire between the sidewalls in millime-
ters. In general: the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
@) Aspect ratio
Height/width ratio expressed as a percentage.

B8K-2316

@) Tire construction
"R" indicates a radial tire.
©) Rim diameter

Size of the rim diameter in inches.

© Load index and speed rating
The load index indicates the tire's
load-carrying capacity.
The speed rating indicates the maximum permitted speed. Also see > A in General information
on page 247.

"EXTRA LOAD", "xl" or "RF" indicates that the tire is reinforced or is an Extra Load tire.

Speed rating P
Q
R
s
T
U
H
Vv
Zz w Y

/Maximum permitted speed
up to 93 mph (150 km/h) up to 99 mph (160 km/h) up to 106 mph (170 km/h) up to 110 mph (180 km/h) up to 118 mph (190 km/h) up to 124 mph (200 km/h)
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)?)
above 149 mph (240 km/h)? up to 168 mph (270 km/h)? up to 186 mph (300 km/h)?

@) For tires above 149 mph (240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the code "ZR".

248

OwnersManuals2.com

@) US DOT number (TIN) and
manufacture date
The manufacture date is listed on the tire sidewall (it may only appear on the inner side of the tire):
DOT... 2221...
means, for example, that the tire
was produced in the 22nd week of the year 2021.
Audi Original Tires
Audi Original equipment tires with the designation "AO" have
been specially matched to your
Audi. When used correctly, these
tires meet the highest standards for safety and handling. An authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility will be able to provide you with more information.
@) Mud and snow capability
"M/S" or "M+S" indicates the tire
is suitable for driving on mud and
snow. /4\ indicates a winter tire.
Composition of the tire cord and materials
The number of plies indicates the number of rubberized fabric layers in the tire. In general: the
more layers, the more weight a
tire can carry. Tire manufacturers

Wheels
must also specify the materials used in the tire. These include
steel, nylon, polyester and other materials.
@) Maximum permitted load
This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that the tire can carry.
@ Uniform tire quality grade
standards for treadwear,
traction and temperature resistance
Treadwear, traction, and temper-
ature ranges > page 264.
@ Running direction
The arrows indicate the running direction of unidirectional tires. You must always follow the specified running direction => page 287.
Maximum permitted
inflation pressure
This number indicates the maximum pressure to which a tire can be inflated under normal operating conditions.

4KE012721BH

249
OwnersManuals2.com

Wheels
Glossary of tire and loading terminology
Accessory weight
means the combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of auto-
matic transmission, power steer-
ing, power brakes, power win-
dows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these
items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not).
Aspect ratio
means the ratio of the height to the width of the tire in percent. Numbers of 55 or lower indicate a low sidewall for improved steering response and better overall handling on dry pavement.
Bead
means the part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim.
Bead separation
means a breakdown of the bond between components in the bead.

Cord
means the strands forming the plies in the tire.
Cold tire inflation pressure
means the tire pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for a tire of a designated size that has not been driven for more than a couple of miles (kilometers) at low speeds in the three hour period before the tire pressure is measured or adjusted.
Curb weight
means the weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of
fuel, oil, and coolant, air condi-
tioning and additional weight of optional equipment.
Extra load tire
means a tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire. Extra load tires may be identified as "XL", "xl", "EXTRA LOAD", or "RF" on the sidewall.

250

OwnersManuals2.com

Gross Axle Weight Rating
("GAWR'")
means the load-carrying capacity
of a single axle system, measured
at the tire-ground interfaces.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
("GVWR")
means the maximum total loaded
weight of the vehicle.
Groove
means the space between two adjacent tread ribs.
Load rating (code)
means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure. You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by law.
Maximum load rating
means the load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum loaded vehicle
weight means the sum of:
(a) Curb weight (b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight, and (d) Production options weight

Wheels
Maximum (permissible)
inflation pressure
means the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated. Also called "maximum inflation pressure."
Normal occupant weight means 150 lbs. (68 kilograms)
times the number of occupants seated in the vehicle up to the total seating capacity of your vehicle.
Occupant distribution
means distribution of occupants in a vehicle.
Outer diameter
means the overall diameter of an inflated new tire.
Overall width
means the linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs.
Ply
means a layer of rubber-coated parallel cords.

4KE012721BH

251
OwnersManuals2.com

Wheels
Production options weight
means the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over 5 lbs. (2.3 kg) in excess of those standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride
levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim.
Radial ply tire means a pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Recommended inflation pressure
see > page 250, Cold tire infla-
tion pressure.
Reinforced tire means a tire designed to operate
at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire. Reinforced tires may be identified as "XL", "xl", "EXTRA LOAD", or "RF" on the sidewall.
252

Rim
means a metal support for a tire
or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated.
Rim diameter
means nominal diameter of the
bead seat. If you change your wheel size, you will have to pur-
chase new tires to match the new rim diameter.
Rim size designation
means rim diameter and width.
Rim width
means nominal distance between
rim flanges.
Sidewall
means that portion of a tire between the tread and bead.
Speed rating (letter code)
means the speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time. The ratings
range from 93 mph (150 km/h) to 186 mph (298 km/h) > table
on page 248. You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by law.
The speed rating letter code, where applicable, is molded on the tire sidewall and indicates the >
OwnersManuals2.com

maximum permissible road speeds. See also > A in General
information on page 247.
Tire pressure monitoring system
means a system that detects when one or more of a vehicle's tires are underinflated and illuminates a low tire pressure warning telltale.
Tread
means that portion of a tire that
comes into contact with the road.
Tread separation
means pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass.
Treadwear indicators (TWI)
means the projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread. See => page 256, Treadwear indicator for more information on measuring tire wear.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
is a tire information system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) that is designed to help buyers make relative com-

Wheels
parisons among tires. The UTQG is not a safety rating and not a guarantee that a tire will last fora prescribed number of miles (kilometers) or perform in a certain way. It simply gives tire buyers additional information to combine
with other considerations, such as
price, brand loyalty and dealer
recommendations. Under UTQG,
tires are graded by the tire manufacturers in three areas: treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance. The UTQG information
on the tires, molded into the sidewalls.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number (TIN)
This is the tire's "serial number".
It begins with the letters "DOT"
and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The next two numbers or letters indicate the plant where it was manufactured, and the last four numbers represent the week and year of manufacture. For example,
DOT... 2221...
means that the tire was produced in the 22nd week of 2021. The other numbers are marketing codes that may or may not be used >

4KE012721BH

253
OwnersManuals2.com

Wheels
by the tire manufacturer. This information is used to contact consumers if a tire defect requires a recall.
Vehicle capacity weight
means the rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lbs. (68 kilograms) times the vehicle's desig-
nated seating capacity.
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
means that load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two.
Vehicle normal load on the tire
means that load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with > ta-
ble on page 259) and dividing by
two.
Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating
capacities
Refer to the tire inflation pressure label > page 257, fig. 160

for the number of seating positions. Refer to the table > table on page 259 for the number of people that correspond to the vehicle normal load.
New tires or wheels
Audi recommends having all work on tires or wheels performed by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. These facilities have the proper knowledge and are equipped with the required tools and replacement parts.
>New tires do not yet have the optimal gripping properties. Drive carefully and at moderate speeds for the first 350 miles
(500 km) with new tires. > Only use tires with the same de-
sign, size (rolling circumfer-
ence), and as close to the same
tread pattern as possible on all four wheels. >Do not replace tires individually. At least replace both tires on the same axle at the same time. > Audi recommends using Audi Genuine Tires. If you would like
to use different tires, please
note that the tires may perform >

254

OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

differently even if they are the
same size > A.
>If you would like to equip your vehicle with a tire and rim combination that is different from what was installed at the factory, consult with an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility before making a purchase > A.
Because the spare tire is different from the regular tires installed on the vehicle (such as winter
tires or wide tires), only use the
spare tire* temporarily in case of emergency and drive carefully while it is in use. It should be replaced with a regular tire as soon as possible.
All four wheels must be equipped with tires that are the same brand and have the same construction and tread pattern so that the drive system is not damaged by different tire speeds. For this reason, in case of emergency, only use a Spare tire* that is the same circumference as the regular tires.
Z\ WARNING
--Do not use steel rims that are 17 inches or larger. Otherwise,

Wheels
damage to the vehicle and an accident could result. --Only use tire/rim combinations and suitable wheel bolts that have been approved by
Audi. Otherwise, damage to
the vehicle and an accident could result.
--For technical reasons, it is not
possible to use tires from other vehicles. In some cases, you cannot even use tires from the same vehicle model. --Make sure that the tires you select have enough clearance to the vehicle. Replacement tires should not be chosen simply based on the nominal
size, because tires with a dif-
ferent construction can differ greatly even if they are the same size. If there is not
enough clearance, the tires or
the vehicle can be damaged and this can reduce driving safety and increase the risk of an accident. --Only use tires that are more than six years old when absolutely necessary and drive carefully when doing so. --Do not use run-flat tires on your vehicle. Using them when
255
OwnersManuals2.com

Wheels
not permitted can lead to vehicle damage or accidents. --If you install wheel covers on
the vehicle, make sure they al-
low enough air circulation to cool the brake system. If they
do not, this could increase the
risk of an accident. --Mounting a tire on the rim in-
correctly can result in tire damage or failure. To reduce
the risk of an accident, only
trained personnel may mount
a tire on the rim.
Tire wear and damage
»
Fig. 158 Tire profile: treadwear indica-
tor
Tire wear
Check the tires regularly for wear.

--Inflation pressure that is too low or high can increase tire wear considerably.
--Driving quickly through curves,
rapid acceleration, and heavy
braking increase tire wear. --Have an authorized Audi dealer
or authorized Audi Service Facility check the wheel alignment if there is unusual wear. --Have the wheels rebalanced if an imbalance is causing noticeable vibration in the steering wheel.
If you do not, the tires and other
vehicle components could wear more quickly.
Treadwear indicator
Original equipment tires contain treadwear indicators in the tread pattern, which are bars that are 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) high and are spaced evenly around the tire per-
pendicular to the running direction > fig. 158. The letters "TWI" or triangles on the tire sidewall indicate the location of the treadwear indicators.
The tires have reached the mini-
mum tread depth !) when they >

1) Obey any applicable regulations in the
country where the vehicle is being operated.
256

OwnersManuals2.com

have worn down to the treadwear indicators. Replace the tires with new ones > A.
Tire rotation
Rotating the tires regularly is recommended to ensure the tires wear evenly. To rotate the tires, install the tires from the rear axle on the front axle and vice versa. This will allow the tires to have approximately the same length of service life.
For unidirectional tires, make sure the tires are installed accord-
ing to the running direction indi-
cated on the tire sidewall > page 281.
Hidden damage
Damage to tires and rims can often occur in locations that are hidden. Unusual vibrations in the vehicle or pulling to one side may indicate that there is tire damage. Reduce your speed immediately. Check the tires for damage. If no damage is visible from the outside, drive slowly and carefully to the nearest authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the vehicle inspected.

Wheels
A WARNING
Tread that has worn too low or uneven tread depths on the tires can reduce driving safety. This can increase the risk of an accident because it has a negative effect on handling, driving
through curves, and braking,
and because it increases the risk of hydroplaning when driving through deep puddles.
Micmac)

B4H-0664

B8K-1151

DE AAR`SRSVREEPIACAAENRORRTEUERS

DIMENSIONS |

PRESSION DES PNEUS A FROID
a KPA, Ml PSI a KPA, Ml PSI as KPA, HM PSI

Fig. 160 Tire pressure label

The correct tire pressure for tires installed at the factory is listed on>

4KE012721BH

257
OwnersManuals2.com

Wheels

a label. The label is located on the B-pillar > fig. 159, > fig. 160.
Use the tire pressure specified for a normal vehicle load when the vehicle is partially loaded > table on page 259. lf driving the vehicle when fully loaded, you must increase the tire pressure to the maximum specified pressure > A.
Checking and correcting tire pressure
>Check the tire pressure at least once per month and also check it before every long drive.
> Always check the tire pressure when the tires are cold. Do not reduce the pressure if it increases when the tires are warm. >Refer to the sticker > fig. 160 for the correct tire pressure. >Correct the tire pressure if necessary.
> Store the new tire pressure in
the MMI > page 266 or
> page 268. > Check the pressure in the spare
tire*. Always maintain the maxi-
mum temperature that is specified for the tire.

Z\ WARNING
Always adapt the tire pressure to your driving style and the vehicle load. --Overloading can lead to loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of an accident. Read and follow the important safety precautions in > page 259. --The tire must flex more if the tire pressure is too low or if the vehicle speed or load are too high. This heats the tire up too much. This increases the risk of an accident because it can cause the tire to burst and result in loss of vehicle control. --Incorrect tire pressure increases tire wear and has a negative effect on driving and braking
behavior, which increases the
risk of an accident.
() Note
Replace lost valve caps to reduce the risk of damage to the tire valves.
(*) For the sake of the envi-
ronment
Tire pressure that is too low increases energy use.

258

OwnersManuals2.com

Wheels

Uc ec em e-] 1c

Please note that the information contained in the following table was correct at the time of print-
ing, and the information is sub-
ject to change. If there are any differences, you should always follow the tire pressure sticker => page 257, fig. 159.

Make sure that the tire designation on your tire matches the designation on the tire pressure label
and the tire pressure table.
The following table lists recommended tire pressures in cold tires according to the load and the size of the tires installed.

Model
e-tron and iSpaolrtback e-tronS and eScptorrotnbSack

Tire designation
255/50R20109H| 265/45R21108H| 255/55R19111H| 265/40R22106H| 285/45R20112H | 285/40R21109H| 255/50R20109H |
285/35 R22 106H

Tire pressure

Normal load
(up to 3 people)?

Maximum load

Front
PS|_ | kPA | 41 | 280 | 35 | 240 | 39 | 270 | 35 | 240 | 32 | 220 | 35 | 240 | 41 280 |

Rear
PSI | kPA | 44 | 300 | 38 | 260 | 42 | 290 | 38 | 260 | 35 | 240 | 38 | 260 | 44 | 300 |

Front
PSI | kPA | 41 | 280 | 39 | 270 41 | 280 41 | 280 38 | 260 | 38 | 260) 41 | 280 |

Rear
PSI | kPA 44 | 300 42 | 290 44 | 300 44 | 300 41 | 280 41 | 280 44 | 300

250

270

280

300

a) Two people in the front, one person in the rear

Z\ WARNING
Please note the important safety precautions regarding tire pressure > page 257 and load limits > page 259.
Ti.res and vehic5 le load l--imits

that is overloaded will not handle well and is more difficult to stop. Overloading can not only lead to
oss of vehicle control, but can al-
so damage important parts of the vehicle and can lead to sudden
tainrde fsauildudree,ndeifncllautdiionng athbatlowcaonut

There are limits to the amount of | cause the vehicle to crash.

load or weight that any vehicle and any tire can carry. A vehicle

Your safety and that of your passengers also depends on making >

4KE012721BH

259
OwnersManuals2.com

Wheels
sure that load limits are not exceeded. Vehicle load includes everybody and everything in and on the vehicle. These load limits are technically referred to as the vehicle's Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ("GVWR").
The "GVWR" includes the weight
of the basic vehicle, all factory installed accessories, a full tank of
fuel, oil, coolant and other fluids
plus maximum load. The maximum load includes the number of passengers that the vehicle is in-
tended to carry ("seating capacity") with an assumed weight of
150 lbs. (68 kg) for each passenger at a designated seating position and the total weight of any luggage in the vehicle. If you tow
a trailer, the weight of the trailer
hitch and the tongue weight of the loaded trailer must be included as part of the vehicle load.
The Gross Axle Weight Rating ("GAWR") is the maximum load that can be applied at each of the vehicle's two axles.
The fact that there is an upper limit to your vehicle's Gross Vehicle Weight Rating means that the total weight of whatever is being

carried in the vehicle (including the weight of a trailer hitch and the tongue weight of the loaded trailer) is limited. The more passengers in the vehicle or passengers who are heavier than the standard weights assumed mean that less weight can be carried as luggage.
The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and the Gross Axle Weight Rating are listed on the safety compli-
ance sticker label located on the
driver's side B-pillar.
Z\, WARNING
Overloading a vehicle can cause
loss of vehicle control, a crash
or other accident, serious per-
sonal injury, and even death. --Carrying more weight than
your vehicle was designed to carry will prevent the vehicle from handling properly and increase the risk of the loss of vehicle control. --The brakes on a vehicle that has been overloaded may not be able to stop the vehicle within a safe distance. --Tires on a vehicle that has been overloaded can fail suddenly, including a blowout and

260

OwnersManuals2.com

sudden deflation, causing loss
of control and a crash. --Always make sure that the to-
tal load being transported -- including the weight of a trailer hitch and the tongue weight of a loaded trailer does not make the vehicle heavier than the vehicle's Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
Determining correct load limit
Use the example below to calculate the total weight of the passengers and luggage or other things that you plan to transport so that you can make sure that your vehicle will not be overloaded.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement "THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCU-
PANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX KG OR XXX
LBS" on your vehicle's placard (tire inflation pressure label) => page 257, fig. 160. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and pas-

Wheels
sengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from "XXX" kilograms or "XXX" pounds shown on the sticker => page 257, fig. 160. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For ex-
ample, if the "XXX" amount
equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage oad capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 bs.)
. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and uggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 6. f your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

4KE012721BH

261
OwnersManuals2.com

Wheels

> Check the tire sidewall (=> page 248, fig. 157) to determine the designated load rating for a specific tire.
Wheel bolts and rims
Wheel bolts
Wheel bolts must be clean and loosen/tighten easily.
Rims
Rims with a bolted rim ring* or with bolted wheel covers* consist of multiple pieces. These components were bolted together using special bolts and a special procedure. You must not repair or disassemble them > A\.
ZA WARNING
Wheel bolts that are tightened or repaired incorrectly can become loose and result in loss
of vehicle control, which increases the risk of
an accident. For the correct tightening specification, see > page 281, Finishing. -- Always keep the wheel bolts and the threads
in the wheel hub clean and free of grease. -- Only use wheel bolts that fit the rim. -- Always have damaged rims repaired by an
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. Never repair or disassemble rims yourself, because this increases the risk of an accident.
Loose wheel warning
Applies to: vehicles with loose wheel warning
Within the limits of the system, the loose wheel warning in the instrument cluster warns you if one or more wheels are loose.
Using the ABS sensors, the loose wheel warning system compares the vibration characteristics of the individual tires. If one or more wheels are
loose, it will be indicated in the instrument clus-
ter display with the fi indicator light and a message. If only one wheel is affected, the location of that wheel will be indicated.

Messages
fi Wheel bolts loose. Please safely stop the vehicle and check all wheel bolts!
Loose wheel warning for at least one wheel > A\. Check the wheel bolts on all wheels with the wheel wrench (vehicle tool kit). Have the tightening specification checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench. Drive carefully until then. For the correct tightening specification, see => page 281, Finishing.
fl Wheel assessment active. Please continue driving carefully
After this message appears and you have checked the wheel bolts, the assessment phase begins when the vehicle is in motion. This may take several minutes.
fl Loose wheel warning: malfunction! See owner's manual
There is a system malfunction. Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
ZA WARNING
Wheel bolts that are tightened incorrectly can become loose and result in loss of vehicle control, which increases the risk of an accident. -- If a message appears, reduce your speed im-
mediately and avoid any hard steering or braking maneuvers. Stop as soon as possible and check the wheel bolts. -- Check your wheels for damage. Have the damaged wheels checked and/or replaced immediately by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. -- Under certain conditions (such as a sporty driving style, winter conditions, or unpaved roads), the message may be delayed. -- The driver is responsible for ensuring that the wheels are attached correctly.
@ Tips
-- The loose wheel warning system can also stop working when there is an ESC malfunction.

262

OwnersManuals2.com

-- Using snow chains may result in a system malfunction.
Winter tires significantly improve the vehicle's handling when driving in winter conditions. Be-
cause of their construction (width, compound,
tread pattern), summer tires provide less traction on ice and snow.
> Use winter tires on all four wheels. > Only use winter tires that are approved for your
vehicle. > Please note that the maximum permitted
speed may be lower with winter tires > A\ in General information on page 247. An authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility can inform you about the maximum permitted speed for your tires. > Check the tire pressure after installing wheels => page 257.
The effectiveness of winter tires is reduced greatly when the tread is worn down to a depth of 0.16 in (4 mm). The characteristics of winter tires also decrease greatly as the tire ages, regardless of the remaining tread.
(4) For the sake of the environment
Reinstall summer tires at the appropriate time, because they provide better handling when roads are free of snow and ice. Summer tires cause less road noise, tire wear, and energy use.
@ Tips You can also use all season tires instead of winter tires. Please note that in some countries where winter tires are required, only winter tires with the - symbol may be permitted.
Snow chains improve both driving and braking in winter road conditions.
> Only install snow chains on the rear wheels.

Wheels
> Check and correct the seating of the snow chains after driving a few feet, if necessary. Follow the instructions from the manufacturer.
> Note the maximum speed of 30 mph (50 km/h). Observe the local regulations.
Use of snow chains is only permitted with certain rim/tire combinations due to technical reasons. Check with an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to see if you may use snow chains.
Use fine-mesh snow chains. They must not add more than 0.40 inch (10.5 mm) in height, including the chain lock.
You must remove the snow chains on roads without snow. Otherwise, you could impair driving ability and damage the tires.
Z\ WARNING
Using incorrect snow chains or installing snow chains incorrectly can result in loss of vehicle control, which increases the risk of an accident.
() Note
-- Snow chains can damage the rims and wheel covers* if the chains come into direct contact with them. Remove the wheel covers* first. Use coated snow chains.
-- Do not install and use snow chainsif there is a malfunction in the air suspension*, because the vehicle height will be very low. If you drive with snow chains anyway, the wheel housings and other vehicle components can be severely damaged.
@) Tips
When using snow chains, it may be advisable to limit the ESC > page 770.
Low-profile tires
Applies to: vehicles with low-profile tires
Compared to other tire/rim combinations, low-
profile tires offer a wider tread surface anda larger rim diameter with shorter tire sidewalls. This results in an agile driving style. However, it >

4KE012721BH

263
OwnersManuals2.com

Wheels
may reduce the level of comfort and increase road noise when driving on roads in poor condition.
Low-profile tires can become damaged more quickly than standard tires when driving over large bumps, potholes, manhole covers, and curbs. Therefore, it is particularly important to maintain the correct tire pressure > page 257.
To reduce the risk of damage to the tires and rims, drive very carefully on poor roads.
Check your wheels regularly every 2,000 mi (3,000 km) for damage. For example, check for bulges/cracks on the tires or deformations/ cracks on the rims.
After a heavy impact or damage, have the tires and rims inspected or replaced immediately by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
Low-profile tires can wear out faster than standard tires.
Uniform tire quality grading
-- Tread wear -- Traction AAA BC -- Temperature ABC
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire side wall between tread shoulder and maximum section width > page 248, fig. 157.
For example: Tread wear 200, Traction AA, Temperature A.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon
the actual conditions of their use, however, and
264

may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured un-
der controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance DA.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the mate-
rial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure > A.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
ZA\ WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
Z\ WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.
OwnersManuals2.com

Wheels

ZA\ WARNING
Temperature grades apply to tires that are properly inflated and not over or underinflated.
Tire pressure monitoring system
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon

subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

If the tire pressure monitoring indicator appears
Applies to: vehicles with Tire Pressure Monitoring System indicator
The tire pressure indicator in the instrument cluster informs you if the tire pressure is too low or if there is a system malfunction.

Using the ABS sensors, the tire pressure monitoring system compares the tire tread circumfer-
ence and vibration characteristics of the individual tires. If the pressure changes in one or more
tires, this is indicated in the instrument cluster display with an indicator light @ and a message.
If only one tire is affected, the location of that tire will be indicated.

The tire pressures must be stored again each time you change the pressures (switching be-
tween partial and full load pressure) or after changing or replacing a tire on your vehicle
= page 266. The tire pressure monitoring system only monitors the tire pressure you have stored. Refer to the tire pressure label for the recommended tire pressure for your vehicle => page 257, fig. 160.

Tire tread circumference and vibration character-
istics can change and cause a tire pressure warning if:

-- The tire pressure in one or more tires is too low

-- The tires have structural damage

-- The tire was replaced or the tire pressure was

changed and it was not stored > page 266

4KE012721BH

265
OwnersManuals2.com

Wheels
-- Tires that are only partially used are replaced with new tires
Indicator lights
If the @ indicator light turns on, there is a loss of pressure in at least one tire .> A\ Check the tires and replace if necessary. Check and correct the pressures of all four tires and store the pressure again > page 266.
a Tire pressure: malfunction! See owner's manual
if iS appears after switching the ignition on or while driving and the @ indicator light in the instrument cluster blinks for approximately one minute and then stays on, there is system malfunction. Try to store the correct tire pressures => page 266. In some cases, you must drive for several minutes after storing the pressures until the indicator light turns off. If the indicator light does turn off or turns on again after a short peri-
od of time, drive to an authorized Audi dealer or
authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
ZA\ WARNING
-- If the tire pressure indicator appears in the display, reduce your speed immediately and avoid any hard steering or braking maneuvers. Stop as soon as possible and check the tires and their pressure.
-- The driver is responsible for maintaining the correct tire pressure. You must check the tire pressure regularly.
-- Under certain conditions (such as a sporty driving style, winter conditions, or unpaved roads), the tire pressure monitoring system indicator may be delayed.
@ Tips
-- The tire pressure monitoring system can also stop working when there is an ESC malfunction.
-- Using snow chains may result in a system malfunction.
-- The tire pressure monitoring system in your Audi was calibrated with "Audi Original

Tires" > page 254. Audi recommends using these tires.

Storing tire pressures
Applies to: vehicles with Tire Pressure Monitoring System indicator
If the tire pressure changes or a tire is replaced, it must be confirmed in the MMI.
> Before storing the tire pressures, make sure the tire pressures in all four tires meet the specified values and are adapted to the load => page 257.
» Switch the ignition on. > Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
HICLE > Settings & Service > Tire pressure monitoring > Store tire pressure > Yes, store now.

G) Tips
Do not store the tire pressures if snow chains are installed.

Tire pressure monitoring system

(1) General notes

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires).

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been

equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure tell-

tale when one or more of your tires is significant-

ly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire

pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and

check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate

them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-

cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-

heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation

also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,

266

OwnersManuals2.com

and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
General information
Applies to: vehicles with tire pressure monitoring system
The tire pressure monitoring system monitors the pressure in the four tires when driving.
The system uses sensors that measure the temperature and pressure in the tires. The data is sent from these sensors to the control module by radio frequency.
The tire pressure monitoring system shows the
current pressures and temperatures of the tires
in the MMI while driving > page 268. It also compares the current tire pressures with the stored tire pressures and gives a warning in the driver

Wheels
information system if the tire pressure is different from what is stored > page 268.
The system does not detect if the stored tire pressures match the recommended tire pressures. You must store the tire pressures again in each of the following situations > page 268:
-- Each time the tire pressures change, for example when the load in the vehicle changes
-- After replacing a tire -- If wheels with new wheel sensors are used
Z\ WARNING
--The tire pressure monitoring system assists the driver in monitoring tire pressures. The driver is responsible for having the tires inflated to the correct pressure.
-- Do not change the tire pressure when the temperature of the tire is extremely high. This could result in serious damage to the tire and even cause the tire to burst, increasing the risk of an accident.
-- A tire with low pressure flexes more. This heats the tire up too much. This could cause the tread to separate and even cause the tire to burst, increasing the risk of an accident.
--The tire pressure monitoring system does not warn about damage or defects in the tire construction that could cause the tire to burst, for example. Inspect your tires regularly.
(i) Tips
-- If tires are replaced, the sensors and valves do not need to be removed or replaced. Only replace the valve stem and, if necessary, the valve and the wheel electronics. If you have questions, see an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
-- An incorrect display or a malfunction in the tire pressure monitoring system can occur after using the tire mobility kit*. Have the sensors replaced by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
-- The system complies with United States FCC regulations and ISED regulations => page 300.

4KE012721BH

267
OwnersManuals2.com

Wheels
Displaying tire pressures and temperatures
Applies to: vehicles with tire pressure monitoring system
Requirement: you must be driving the vehicle.
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Tire pressure monitoring > Display tire pressure.
The current tire pressures are shown in green,
yellow, or red numbers:
-- Green: the current tire pressure and the specified tire pressure are approximately the same.
-- Yellow: the current tire pressure is lower than the specified tire pressure.
-- Red: the current tire pressure is much lower than the specified tire pressure.
The specified tire pressure is the last tire pressure that was stored > page 268.
Note that the tire pressure also depends on the temperature of the tire. The tire pressure increases as the tires become warmer while driving.
ZA WARNING
Read and follow the important information and notes > page 267.
@) Tips The tire pressure or temperature is not displayed while the vehicle is stationary and in adaptation mode. Dashes --.-- are shown in place of the pressure and temperature.
COR ire cect ce Coe
Applies to: vehicles with tire pressure monitoring system
If the @ indicator light turns on, the tire pressure is too low compared to the specified pressure. Check and store the tire pressure(s) the next time it is possible > page 268.
@ Flat tire! Safely stop vehicle. Please check all tires and store pressures in MMI
If the indicator light turns on and the message appears, the tire pressure has reached a critical level compared to the specified pressure. Avoid unnecessary steering and braking maneuvers.

Adapt your driving style to the situation. Stop as soon as possible and check the tire(s). If it is pos-
sible to continue driving, see an authorized Audi
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately and have your tire(s) repaired or replaced if necessary.
Z\ WARNING
Read and follow the important information and notes > page 267.
Storing new tire pressures
Applies to: vehicles with tire pressure monitoring system
The tire pressure specifications must be stored correctly for the tire pressure monitoring system to function reliably.
It is always necessary to store the tire pressures when the tire pressures are modified, for example due to a change in load or when new sensors are installed.
> Before storing the tire pressures, make sure the tire pressures of all four tires meet the specified values and are adapted to the load => page 257, fig. 160. Only correct and store the pressure in tires whose temperature is approximately the same as the ambient temperature. If the temperature of the tire is higher than the ambient air temperature, the tire pressure must be increased approximately 3 PSI (0,2 bar) above the value on the sticker.
> Switch the ignition on. > Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
HICLE > Settings & Service > Tire pressure monitoring > Store tire pressure > Yes, store now. > If the changed tire pressures are not displayed on the MMI, drive the vehicle for approximately 10 minutes so that the sensor signal from the wheels is received again.
During this adaptation phase, --.-- is displayed for the pressure and temperature and the tire pressure monitoring system is only partially available. It only provides a warning if one or more tire pressures is below the minimum permitted specified pressure.

268

OwnersManuals2.com

Wtire pressure: wheel change detected. Please check all tires and store pressures in MMI
If the indicator light turns on and the message appears, the system has detected that the location of the sensors has changed due to a wheel replacement, or new sensors have been installed. Store the new tire pressures.
Z\ WARNING
Read and follow the important information and notes > page 267.

Wheels
ized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.

Malfunctions
Applies to: vehicles with tire pressure monitoring system
is Tire pressure: malfunction! See owner's manual
If the iis indicator light appears after switching the ignition on or while driving and the @ indicator light also blinks for approximately one minute and then stays on, then there is system malfunction. The following are examples of situations that could cause a malfunction:
-- If the message appears at the end of the adaptation phase, the system may not detect one or several of the wheel sensors necessary for pressure monitoring. This may result from one or more wheels without wheel sensors or with incompatible wheel sensors being installed.
--Awheel sensor or another component has failed.
-- Using snow chains can affect the function of the system because of the shielding effect of the chains.
-- The tire pressure monitoring system is not available due to a malfunction.
-- Transmitters with the same frequency, such as headphones or remote controlled devices, may cause a temporary system malfunction due to the strong electromagnetic field.
The i indicator light and the message turn off once the tire pressure monitoring system is available again. If you cannot correct the malfunction and the [iN indicator light stays on, drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or author-

4KE012721BH

269
OwnersManuals2.com

Care and cleaning
Care and cleaning
General information
Regular, proper care helps to maintain your vehicle's value. It can also be a requirement when submitting warranty claims for corrosion damage and paint defects on the body.
The required cleaning and care products can be obtained from an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Service Facility. Read and follow the instructions for use on the packaging.
ZA\ WARNING
-- Using cleaning and care products incorrectly can be dangerous to your health.
-- Always store cleaning and care products out of reach of children to reduce the risk of poisoning.
@ For the sake of the environment
-- Purchase environmentally-friendly cleaning products if possible.
-- Do not dispose of cleaning and care products with household trash.
Car washes
The longer that deposits such as insects, bird droppings, tree sap or road salt remain on the vehicle, the more the surface can be damaged. High temperatures such as those caused by sunlight increase the damaging effect.
Before washing, rinse off heavy deposits with plenty of water.
Stubborn deposits such as bird droppings or tree sap are best removed with plenty of water and a microfiber cloth.
Also, wash the underside of your vehicle once
road salt stops being used for the season.
Pressure washers
When washing your vehicle with a pressure washer, always follow the operating instructions provided with the pressure washer. This is especially important in regard to the pressure and spraying distance. Do not aim the spray directly at the
270

seals on the side windows, doors, hood, luggage
compartment lid, or sunroof*, or at tires, rubber
hoses, insulating material, sensors*, camera lenses*, or the laser scanner*. Maintain a dis-
tance of at least 16 inches (40 cm).
Do not direct the washer stream toward the wall mount clip*.
Do not remove snow and ice with a pressure washer.
Never use cone nozzles or high pressure nozzles.
The water temperature must not be above 140 °F (60 °C).
Automatic car wash
Spray off the vehicle before washing.
Make sure that the windows and roof* are closed and the windshield wipers are off. Make sure that the vehicle is still able to roll during the washing process in the car wash. Follow instructions from the car wash operator, especially if there are accessories attached to your vehicle.
If possible, use car washes that do not have brushes.
Washing by hand
Clean the vehicle starting from the top and working downward using a soft sponge or cleaning brush. Use solvent-free cleaning products.
Washing vehicles with matte finish paint by hand
To reduce the risk of damaging the paint when washing, first remove dust and large particles from your vehicle. Insects, grease spots, and fingerprints are best removed with a special cleaner for matte finish paint.
Apply the product using a microfiber cloth. To reduce the risk of damaging the paint surface, do
not use too much pressure.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with water. Then clean using a neutral shampoo and a soft microfiber cloth.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly again and let it air dry. Remove any water residue using a chamois. >
OwnersManuals2.com

Care and cleaning

ZA\ WARNING
--To reduce the risk of accidents, only wash the vehicle when the ignition is off and follow the instructions from the car wash oper-
ator.
--To reduce the risk of cuts, protect yourself from sharp metal components when washing the underbody or the inside of the wheel housings.
-- After washing the vehicle, the braking effect may be delayed due to moisture on the brake rotors or ice in the winter. This increases the risk of an accident. The brakes must be dried with a few careful brake applications.
@) Note
-- If you wash the vehicle in an automatic car
wash, you must fold the exterior mirrors in
to reduce the risk of damage to the mirrors. Power folding exterior mirrors* must only be folded in and out using the power folding function. -- To reduce the risk of damage to the rims
and tires, compare the width between the
wheels on your vehicle with the distance between the guide rails in the car wash. --To reduce the risk of damage, compare the height and width of your vehicle with the

height and width of the inside of the car wash. --To reduce the risk of paint damage, do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
--To reduce the risk of damage, do not wash decorative decals* with a pressure washer.
--To reduce the risk of damage to the surface, do not use insect removing sponges, kitchen sponges, or similar items.
-- When washing matte finish painted vehicle
components:
-- To reduce the risk of damage to the surface, do not use polishing agents or hard wax.
-- Never use protective wax. It can destroy the matte finish effect.
-- Do not place any stickers or magnetic signs on vehicle components painted with matte finish paint. The paint could be damaged when the stickers or magnets are removed.
(@) For the sake of the environment
Only wash the vehicle in facilities specially designed for that purpose. This will reduce the risk of dirty water contaminated with oil from
entering the sewer system.

Cleaning and care information

When cleaning and caring for individual vehicle components, refer to the following tables. The information contained there is simply recom-
mendations. For questions or for components

that are not listed, consult an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. Also follow the information found in > A\.

Exterior cleaning

Component

Situation

Windshield wiper | Deposits blades

Headlights/ tail lights

Deposits

Sensors/ camera lenses

Deposits

Snow/ice

Solution Soft cloth with glass cleaner, > page 58

Soft sponge with a mild soap solution®

Sensors: soft cloth with a solvent-free cleaning product Camera lenses: soft cloth with an alcohol-free cleaning solution

Hand brush/solvent-free de-icing spray

4KE012721BH

271
OwnersManuals2.com

Care and cleaning

Component

Situation

Laser scanner

Deposits

Wheels

Road salt

Brake dust

Decorative parts | Deposits and

trim

Paint

Paint damage

Surface rust

Corrosion

Water no longer beads on the surface of clean paint

No shine even though
paint has been protected/paint looks poor

Deposits such as insects, bird droppings, tree sap, and road salt

Grease-based contaminants such as cosmetics or sunblock

Carbon compo- | Deposits
nents

Decorative decals | Deposits

Audi e-tron

Deposits

charging system

Wall mount clip | Deposits

Solution Soft sponge with a mild soap solution®
Water Acid-free special cleaning solution Mild soap solution ®), cleaning solution suitable for stain-
less steel, if necessary
Repair with touch-up paint
Rust remover, then treat with hard wax; for questions, consult an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
Facility. Have it removed by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. Treat with hard wax (at least twice per year)
Treat with suitable polish; then apply paint protectant if the polish that was used does not contain any protectant
Dampen with water immediately and remove with a microfiber cloth
Remove immediately with a mild soap solution ® anda soft cloth
Clean the same way as painted parts > page 270
Soft sponge with a mild soap solution® Soft, dry towel
Soft towel with alcohol-free cleaning solution

a) Mild soap solution: maximum two tablespoons of neutral soap in 1 quart (1 liter) of water

Interior cleaning

Component
Window glass
Decorative parts and trim
Plastic parts

Situation Deposits | Deposits
Deposits Heavier deposits

Solution Glass cleaner, then wipe dry Mild soap solution®
Damp cloth Mild soap solution @), detergent-free plastic cleaning solution, if necessary

272

OwnersManuals2.com

Care and cleaning

Component

Situation

Solution

Displays/instru- | Deposits ment cluster

Soft cloth with LCD cleaner; dust in the lower area of the instrument cluster can be removed using a soft brush.

Controls

Deposits

Soft brush, then a soft cloth with a mild soap solution®

Safety belts

Deposits

Mild soap solution ), allow to dry before letting them re-

tract

Textiles,
artificial leather,
microfiber

Deposits adhering to | Vacuum cleaner
|the surface

Water-based deposits such as coffee, tea,
blood, etc.

Absorbent cloth and mild soap solution®

Oil-based deposits such as oil, make-up, etc.

Apply a mild soap solution ®), blot away the dissolved oil or
dye, treat afterward with water, if necessary

Certain types of de-
posits such as ink,
nail polish, latex
paint, shoe polish, etc.

Special stain remover, blot with absorbent material, treat afterward with mild soap solution, if necessary)

Natural leather

Fresh stains

Cotton cloth with a mild soap solution®

Water-based deposits
such as coffee, tea, blood, etc.

Fresh stains: absorbent cloth dried stains: stain remover suitable for leather

Oil-based deposits
such as oil, make-up, etc.

Fresh stains: absorbent cloth and stain remover suitable for leather dried stains: oil cleaning spray

Certain types of deposits such as ink, nail polish, latex
paint, shoe polish,
etc.

Spot remover suitable for leather

Care

Regularly apply conditioning cream that protects from

light and penetrates into the material. Use special colored

conditioning cream, if necessary.

Carbon compo- Deposits

Clean the same way as plastic components

nents

@) Mild soap solution: maximum two tablespoons of neutral soap in 1 quart (1 liter) of water

ZX WARNING
The windshield must not be treated with water-repelling windshield coating agents. Under unfavorable conditions, such as wetness, darkness, and when the sun is low, these coatings can cause increased glare, which increas-

es the risk of an accident. They can also cause wiper blade chatter.
ZX WARNING
-- Never immerse the Audi e-tron charging sys-
tem and connectors in water.

4KE012721BH

273
OwnersManuals2.com

Care and cleaning
-- The Audi e-tron charging system must only be cleaned when the control unit is completely disconnected from the power supply and from the vehicle.
@) Note
-- Headlights and tail lights -- Never clean the headlights or tail lights with a dry cloth or sponge because the lights could be damaged. -- Do not use any cleaning products that contain alcohol, because they could cause cracks to form.
-- Wheels
-- Never use any paint polish or other abrasive materials.
-- Damage to the protective layer on the rims, such as stone chips or scratches, must be repaired immediately.
-- Camera lenses
-- Never use warm or hot water to remove
snow or ice from the camera lens. This could cause the lens to crack. -- Never use abrasive cleaning materials or alcohol to clean the camera lens. This could cause scratches and cracks.
-- Laser scanner
-- Never use abrasive cleaning materials to clean the laser scanner. This could cause scratches and cracks.
-- Door windows -- Remove snow and ice on windows and exterior mirrors with a plastic scraper. To reduce the risk of scratches, move the scraper only in one direction and not back and forth. -- Never remove snow or ice from door windows and mirrors using warm or hot water because this could cause cracks to form. --To reduce the risk of damage to the rear window defogger, do not apply any stickers on the heating wires on the inside of the window.
-- Decorative parts and trim
-- Never use chrome care or cleaning prod-
ucts. -- Paint
274

-- To reduce the risk of scratches, the vehicle
must be free of dirt and dust before polishing or waxing. -- To prevent paint damage, do not polish or wax the vehicle in direct sunlight. --To reduce the risk of paint damage, do not polish away rust spots. -- Remove cosmetics and sunscreen immediately because they could damage the paint. -- Decorative decals
-- To reduce the risk of damage, do not use
any rough powder or abrasive cleaning products. --To reduce the risk of damage, do not polish decorative decals that have a matte or printed finish.
-- Due to the risk of damage, do not use an ice scraper to remove snow and ice on windows with decorative decals on them.
-- Displays and instrument cluster -- Make sure that the display and instrument cluster are switched off and have cooled down before cleaning. To switch off the upper and lower display, select on the MMI home screen: SETTINGS > Display & brightness > MMI > Screen cleaning. -- Displays, the instrument cluster, and the trim surrounding it must not be cleaned with dry cleaning methods because they could become scratched. -- Make sure no fluids enter the spaces between the instrument cluster and the trim, because that could cause damage.
-- Controls
-- Make sure that no fluids enter the controls, because this could cause damage.
-- Safety belts -- Do not remove the safety belts to clean them. -- Never clean safety belts or their components with chemicals or with corrosive fluids or solvents and never allow sharp objects to come into contact with the safety belts. This could cause damage to the belt webbing.
OwnersManuals2.com

--If there is damage to the webbing, the connections, the retractors, or the buckles, have them replaced by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
--Textiles/artificial leather/microfiber
-- Never treat artificial leather or microfiber
with leather care products, solvents, floor
polish, shoe polish, spot remover, or similar products. -- Have a cleaning specialist remove stubborn stains to reduce the risk of damage.
-- Never use steam cleaners, brushes, hard sponges, etc. when cleaning.
-- Do not turn on the seat heating* to dry the seat.
-- Objects with sharp edges, such as zippers or rivets on clothing or belts, can cause damage to the surface.
-- Open hook and loop fasteners, for example on clothing, can damage seat covers. Make sure hook and loop fasteners are closed.
-- Natural leather
-- Never treat leather with solvents, floor polish, shoe polish, spot remover or simi-
lar products. -- Objects with sharp edges, such as zippers
or rivets on clothing or belts, can cause damage to the surface. -- Never use steam cleaners, brushes, hard sponges, etc. when cleaning. -- Do not turn on the seat heating* to dry the seat. --To help prevent the leather from fading, do not leave the vehicle in direct sunlight for long periods of time. If leaving the vehicle parked for long periods of time, you should cover the leather to protect it from direct sunlight. -- Wall mount clip
-- Do not us any abrasive cleaning products
or any that contain alcohol, because these
increase the risk of discoloration.

Care and cleaning
@) Tips
-- Insects are easier to remove from paint that has been freshly waxed.
-- Regular waxing can prevent rust spots from
forming. -- Decorative decals can age due to environ-
mental conditions, which can result in dam-
age such as brittleness. The color may fade if exposed to excessive sunlight.
Taking your vehicle out
of service
If you would like to take your vehicle out of service for a long period of time, contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. You can obtain information about the steps to complete depending on the conditions for taking the vehicle out of service (duration, location, etc.).

4KE012721BH

275
OwnersManuals2.com

Emergency assistance
Emergency assistance
General information
> Park the vehicle as far as possible from moving traffic in the event of a breakdown. In the event
of a flat tire, park the vehicle on a level surface. If you are ona steep hill, be especially careful.
> Set the parking brake. > Switch the emergency flashers on. > Have the passengers exit the vehicle. They
should move to a safe place, for example behind a guard rail.
ZX WARNING
Follow the steps given above. This is for your protection and the for the safety of others on the road.
Equipment

@ Tips The vehicle jack* does not require any maintenance.
Tire mobility kit
Applies to: vehicles with tire mobility kit
> Read and follow the important safety precautions > page 276.
>» Set the parking brake. > Select the "P" selector lever position. > Check if a repair with the tire mobility kit is pos-
sible > page 276.
UE Mane M ie)iS aL
Applies to: vehicles with tire mobility kit

Applies to: vehicles with the vehicle tool kit, tire mobility kit, and vehicle jack

B8U-0100

Fig. 161 Front compartment: storage compartment
Observe the safety precautions > page 238, General information.
The vehicle tool kit, the vehicle jack*, the tire mobility kit*, and the compressor* are located under the cargo floor in the storage compartment in the front compartment.
> Open the storage compartment > page 87. > Remove any objects from the storage compart-
ment.
> Remove the cargo floor.

Fig. 162 Tire: tire damage that cannot be repaired
The tire repair is only meant for temporary use. Change the damaged tire as soon as possible SA.
If the tire is pierced by an object such as a nail, do not remove the object from the tire.
The tire mobility kit can be used at temperatures as low as -4 °F (-20 °C).
The tire mobility kit must not be used:
-- If the tire has cuts or punctures that are larger
than 0.16 inch (4 mm) @) =fig. 162 -- If the rim is damaged (2)
-- If you have driven with very low tire pressure or
without air in the tire @)
See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance in these situations. >

276

OwnersManuals2.com

ZA\ WARNING
-- Please note that the tire mobility kit cannot
be used in all situations, and that it may on-
ly be used temporarily. -- The tire sealant must not come in contact
with skin, eyes, or clothing. -- If tire sealant comes into contact with your
eyes or your skin, thoroughly rinse the affected area immediately with clean water. -- Do not inhale the fumes. -- If you swallow any of the tire sealant, thoroughly rinse your mouth immediately and drink a lot of water. Do not induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately. -- Change your clothing immediately if it comes into contact with tire sealant.
-- If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
attention immediately. -- Keep the tire sealant away from children. -- In vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring
system*, using tire sealant can result in an incorrect display or a system malfunction. Drive carefully to the nearest authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
ty.
@ For the sake of the environment
XE Batteries and electrical/electronic devices must be disposed of in an environmentally safe manner.
@ Tips
-- If sealant leaks, allow it to dry in place. You can then peel it off like a sticker.
-- Note the expiration date on the sealant bottle. Replace the tire sealant at an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
-- Radio reception can be interrupted when
operating the compressor.
-- Follow the legal regulations that are applicable in the country where you are operating the vehicle.

Emergency assistance
Repairing tires
Applies to: vehicles with tire mobility kit

RAZ-0213,

Fig. 164 Tire mobility kit connection

Requirement: the tire mobility kit must be laid out and ready for use > page 276.

Setting up the tire mobility kit
>» Remove the connector (3) and pressure hose (4) from the bottom of the housing.
> Connect the compressor pressure hose @ ) to
the flange © on the tire sealant bottle @.
> Insert the sealant bottle with the flange at the bottom into the opening @) on the compressor.
> Remove the valve cap from the faulty tire.
> Connect the filler hose (8) to the valve ©
> fig. 164. > Connect the plug @) > fig. 763 to an outlet in
the vehicle. > Switch the ignition on.

Inflating a tire

sor into position I.

4KE012721BH

1) The compressor may look different. However, the way it is operated is generally the same.

277
OwnersManuals2.com

Emergency assistance
> Inflate the tire to between 29 psi (200 kPA) and 36 psi (250 kPA) and read the pressure on the gauge.
> If this tire pressure is not reached, remove the
filler hose. Drive slowly approximately 33 feet (10 m) forward or in reverse so that the sealant can be distributed in the tire. Inflate the tire
-- Read and follow the manufacturer's safety precautions on the compressor and in the instructions on the bottle of sealant.
-- Ifa tire pressure of 29 psi (200 kPA) cannot
reached after inflating for 6 minutes, then
the tire is too severely damaged. Do not continue driving. -- If the tire cannot be repaired with the tire sealant, see an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
@ Tips
Do not operate the compressor for more than six minutes continuously, or it can overheat. Once the compressor has cooled, you can continue to use it.
Cet ail)
Applies to: vehicles with tire mobility kit
> Affix the sticker that says "max. 50 mph (max. 80 km/h)" that is provided with the tire mobility kit within the driver's field of vision.
> Stop the vehicle after driving for about 10 minutes and check the tire pressure.
> If the tire pressure is lower than 19 psi (130 kPA), then the tire is too severely damaged. Do not continue driving.
ZA\ WARNING
Pay attention to the following after repairing the tire: -- Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). -- Avoid hard acceleration or braking and driv-
ing fast around curves. -- The vehicle may become more difficult to
control.

- If the tire is too severely damaged, see an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
(@) For the sake of the environment
You can give the used tire sealant bottle to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for disposal.
G) Tips
Remember to obtain a new bottle of sealant from an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility after repairing a tire.
Replacing wheels
You must complete the preparation before changing a tire.
> Read and follow the important safety precautions > page 276.
> Set the parking brake. > Select the "P" selector lever position. > When towing a trailer: disconnect the trailer
from your vehicle. > Lay out the vehicle tool kit S page 276 and the
spare tire > page 282. » Applies to: vehicles with air suspension: Select
on the home screen: VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Air suspension: wheel change. > Switch the ignition off.
ZA\ WARNING
The vehicle must also be secured to prevent it from rolling when using the vehicle jack". Use suitable objects to block the front and back of the wheel that is diagonal from the wheel with the flat tire.

278

OwnersManuals2.com

neal]

B4L-1337

Emergency assistance
authorized Audi Service Facility and give them the code number.
Loosening the wheel bolts

B4S-0221

A i

Fig. 165 Wheel: wheel bolts with caps

> Slide the plastic clip from the vehicle tool kit onto the cap until it engages > fig. 765.
> Remove the cap with the plastic clip.

Anti-theft wheel bolts
Applies to: vehicles with anti-theft wheel bolts

?
wl)--

Fig. 166 Anti-theft wheel bolt with cap and adapter
You need a special adapter in the vehicle tool kit to remove the anti-theft wheel bolts.
> Remove the cap (2).
> Slide the adapter () all the way onto the anti-
theft wheel bolt @).
> Slide the wheel wrench* from the vehicle tool
kit all the way onto the adapter @).
> Loosen the wheel bolt > page 279.
G) Tips
Note the code number for the wheel bolt adapter and store it in a safe place separate from the vehicle. If you need a replacement adapter, contact an authorized Audi dealer or

B4H-0470

Fig. 167 Wheel: loosening the wheel bolts
> Slide the wheel wrench* from the vehicle tool kit all the way onto the wheel bolt").
> Turn the wheel bolt approximately one turn to the left. To achieve the required torque, hold the end of the wheel wrench*. If the wheel bolt will not loosen, press carefully on the wheel wrench* with your foot. Hold onto the vehicle securely while doing this and make sure your footing is stable.
ZA\ WARNING
To reduce the risk of an accident, only loosen
the wheel bolts gently one turn before raising the vehicle with the vehicle jack*.

1) You need the matching adapter in order to loosen and tighten anti-theft wheel bolts* > page 279.

279
OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

Emergency assistance Raising the vehicle
Applies to: vehicles with vehicle jack
Fig. 169 Sill: positioning the vehicle jack
> Place the vehicle jack from the vehicle tool kit ona firm surface. Use a flat, stable support if necessary. Ona slippery surface such as tile, you should use a non-slip pad such as a rubber
mat > /\.
> Find the marking on the sill that is closest to the tire that will be changed > fig. 168. Behind the marking, there is a lifting point on the side sill for the vehicle jack.
> Using the hex socket wrench @) from the vehi-
cle tool kit, turn the vehicle jack under the lifting point on the side sill until it is high enough that the arm @) > fig. 769 is under the designated plastic mount. > Align the vehicle jack so the arm (@) engages in the designated lifting point in the door sill and
the base (2) lies flat on the ground. The base (2)
must be directly under the mounting point @). > To lift the vehicle, position the ratchet @) from
the vehicle tool kit with the correct side on the
hex socket wrench (3).
> Move the ratchet () clockwise back and forth until the wheel lifts up slightly from the ground.

RAZ-0258.

AN WARNING
--To reduce the risk of injury, make sure no one is in the vehicle before raising it.
-- Make sure the vehicle jack is stable. The risk of injury is increased when the ground is slippery or soft, because the vehicle jack could slide or sink.
-- Only raise your vehicle with the vehicle jack provided by the factory. If you use a vehicle jack designed for another vehicle, your vehicle could slip and cause injury.
-- Position the vehicle jack only at the designated mounting points on the side sill and align the jack. Otherwise, the vehicle jack could slip and cause an injury if it does not have sufficient hold on the vehicle.
--To reduce the risk of injury, do not raise any other vehicles or other loads using the vehi-
cle jack provided by the factory. -- Applies to: vehicles with air suspension:
Changes in temperature or load can affect the height of the stopped vehicle. --To reduce the risk of an accident, never switch the drive system on while the vehicle is raised. --To reduce the risk of injury, no work should be performed under the vehicle while it is raised.
@) Note
Do not lift the vehicle by the sill. Position the vehicle jack only at the designated mounting points on the side sill. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.

280

OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

Removing and installing a wheel
@TRtg "ooOO
Fig. 170 Wheel: internal hex socket to turn the wheel bolts
Fig. 171 Wheel: alignment pin in the top hole
Removing a wheel > Remove the top wheel bolt completely using
the hex socket in the screwdriver handle from the vehicle tool kit > fig. 770 and place it ona clean surface. > Then install the alignment pin from the vehicle tool kit in the empty wheel bolt hole by hand
> fig. 171.
> Remove the rest of the wheel bolts. >» Remove the wheel >). The alignment pin re-
mains in the hole while doing this. Installing a wheel Read the directions on > page 287 when installing unidirectional tires. > Slide the wheel on over the alignment pin >@. > Install the wheel bolts and tighten them gently
using the hex socket. > Remove the alignment pin and tighten the re-
maining wheel bolt. > Carefully lower the vehicle using the vehicle
jack*. > Tighten the wheel bolts in a diagonal pattern
using the wheel wrench*.

) B8K-1477

Emergency assistance
The wheel bolts must be clean and loosen and tighten easily. Check the contact surfaces for the wheel and hub. Contaminants on these surfaces must be removed before installing the wheel.
ZA\ WARNING
-- Read and follow the important information and notes under > page 254.
-- Never use the hex socket in the screwdriver handle to tighten the wheel bolts. Using the hex socket will not achieve the required tightening torque, which increases the risk of an accident.
() Note
When removing or installing the wheel, the rim could hit the brake rotor and damage the rotor. Work carefully and have a second person help you.
Unidirectional tires
A unidirectional tire profile is identified by arrows on the tire sidewall that point in the running direction. You must always maintain the specified running direction. This is necessary to ensure the tire's optimal performance in regard to adhesion, running noise, and friction, and to reduce the risk of hydroplaning.
To benefit fully from the advantages of the unidirectional tire design, you should replace faulty tires as soon as possible and restore the correct running direction on all of the tires.

> Reinstall any covers on the wheel bolts that

were removed.

> Store the vehicle tool kit in its designated

place.

> If the removed wheel does not fit in the spare

wheel well, store it securely in the luggage

compartment > page 87.

> Check the tire pressure on the installed wheel

as soon as possible.

> Correct the tire pressure and store it in the MMI

=> page 266 or > page 268.

281
OwnersManuals2.com

Emergency assistance
> The wheel bolts must be tightened to 120 ft lbs (160 Nm). Have it checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench. Drive carefully until then.
> Have the faulty wheel replaced as quickly as possible.
Collapsible spare tire
Applies to: vehicles with collapsible spare tire
The collapsible spare tire is intended for shortterm use only. Have the damaged tire checked and replaced if necessary by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility as soon as possible.
There are some restrictions on the use of the collapsible spare tire. The collapsible spare tire has been designed specifically for your type of vehicle. Do not replace it with the collapsible spare tire from another type of vehicle.
The collapsible spare tire is located in the luggage compartment under the cargo floor.
Requirement: the vehicle tool kit > page 276 and the compressor must be laid out.
Removing
> Lift the cargo floor using the handle. > Turn the handwheel counter-clockwise and re-
move it. > Remove the cover. > Remove the collapsible spare tire.
You must inflate the collapsible spare tire beforehand in order to use it.
Inflating
> Remove the valve cap from the collapsible spare tire.
> Tighten the compressor hose on the collapsible spare tire valve.
> Connect the compressor hose to a vehicle socket and switch it on.
> Let the compressor run until the specified value on the tire pressure sticker is reached
> page 257, fig. 160>@.
> Screw the valve cap back onto the valve.

Returning to storage
> To release air, turn the valve insert. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
Facility. > Turn the valve insert back once the air has been
released. >» Wait several hours before placing the collapsi-
ble spare tire in the spare wheel well. Only then will it fold down completely so that you can store it securely. > Then screw the valve cap back onto the valve. > Secure the collapsible spare tire with the cover and the handwheel. > Fold the cargo floor cover back into place.
Snow chains
Using snow chains on the collapsible spare tire is not permitted for technical reasons.
If you have to drive with snow chains and a rear tire fails, mount the collapsible spare tire in place of a front tire. Install the snow chains on
the front tire that you removed, and install that
in place of the rear tire that failed.
ZX WARNING
-- Only use the collapsible spare tire in emergencies and drive very carefully, especially if it is more than six years old.
-- The compressor and the hose can become very hot during operation which increases the risk of burn injuries.
-- After installing a collapsible spare tire, the tire pressure must be checked as quickly as possible to reduce the risk of an accident.
-- Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h) with the collapsible spare tire. Driving faster than that increases the risk of an accident.
-- To reduce the risk of an accident, avoid hard
acceleration or braking and driving fast around curves with the collapsible spare tire. -- Never drive using more than one collapsible
spare tire, because this increases the risk of an accident. -- Normal tires or winter tires must not be
mounted on the collapsible spare tire rim.

282

OwnersManuals2.com

@) Note
The compressor must be switched off after six minutes at the most to reduce the risk of overheating. Let the compressor cool down for several minutes before using it again.
G) Tips
The ESC must not be limited or switched off when driving with the collapsible spare tire = page 110.
Jump starting
The vehicle cannot be operated when the 12 volt vehicle battery is drained. Your vehicle must not be jump started in this case. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
ty.
@) Note
The vehicle battery must not be bridged using conventional jump start methods. -- You may neither give nor receive a jump
start. Otherwise, the electronic systems in
the vehicle may be severely damaged. -- The jump start pins in the front compart-
ment are designed only for use by qualified technicians.
Towing
General information
You should only perform the steps that follow if you have the necessary tools and technical expertise.
Towing requires a certain amount of practice. Audi recommends contacting a towing company to have the vehicle transported.
You should only have your vehicle towed by another vehicle when disabled in exceptional circumstances. Inexperienced drivers should not
tow.
Notes on towing
-- The maximum permitted towing speed is 30 mph (50 km/h).

Emergency assistance

-- The maximum permitted towing distance is 30
miles (50 km).
Additional information on towing with a tow truck
The vehicle may only be towed with the front axle raised. Do not wrap any chains or cables around the brake lines.
Tow bar and towing cable
The vehicle can be towed with a tow bar or towing cable. Both drivers should be familiar with the special considerations when towing, especially when using a towing cable.
Always make sure the traction force does not exceed the permitted level and there are no shock loading conditions. There is always the risk of the coupling becoming overloaded when driving offroad.
For the most safety and security, drive with a tow bar. You should use a towing cable only ifa tow bar is not available. Use a towing cable made of synthetic elastic cable similar elastic material.
Z\ WARNING
- Towing highly increases the risk of an accident, for example from colliding with the towing vehicle.
--To reduce the risk of an accident, do not allow anyone to remain inside the vehicle when it is being transported by a tow truck
or a special transporter.

CG) Note

--If the | indicator light turns on, there is a

fault in the cooling circuit. The vehicle must

not be towed. The drive system can be se-

verely damaged.

-- If normal towing is not possible, for exam-

ple if the transmission is faulty or if the

towing distance is greater than 30 miles

(50 km), then transport the vehicle ona

special carrier.

-- If the vehicle is towed by a tow truck at the

axle that is not permitted, this can cause se-

vere damage to the transmission.

4KE012721BH

283
OwnersManuals2.com

Emergency assistance
-- When the parking lock is engaged, neither the front nor rear axle may be Lowered or raised more than 10. If the vehicle is secured on a special transporter, the supports under the wheels must not be moved anymore. The drive system or the tires could be seriously damaged.
-- Towing must not be used to charge the high-voltage battery (recuperation), because this could result in major damages to the tow vehicle or the vehicle being towed.
-- The vehicle must not be tow started for technical reasons.
G@) Tips
-- Switch Audi pre sense* off > page 7167 when
loading the vehicle onto a vehicle carrier, train, ship, or other type of transportation,
or when towing the vehicle. This can prevent an undesired intervention from the pre sense* system. -- Follow the local legal regulations for towing.

Vehicle being towed (rear)
> Make sure the ignition is switched on so that the steering wheel is not locked and so that you
can use the turn signals, the horn, and the windshield wipers if needed > /A\.
> Switching it off before the vehicle has stopped may impair the function of the brake booster and power steering. You would then need to use more force to steer and brake the vehicle.
> Release the parking brake > page 107. > Select the "N" selector lever position. > Switch the ESC off to avoid error messages
=> page 710. > Make sure the towing cable is always taut.
ZA WARNING
-- Never tow a vehicle using a tow bar or towing cable if the vehicle does not have electrical power.
-- If the vehicle runs out of power while it is being towed, stop towing the vehicle immediately and consult an authorized Audi dealer or qualified repair facility.

Read and follow the important information under > page 283.
Preparations
> Only secure the towing cable or tow bar at the designated towing loops > page 284, => page 285.
> Make sure the towing cable is not twisted. Otherwise it could disconnect from the towing loop while towing.
> Switch the emergency flashers on in both vehicles > page 52. However, do not do this if it prohibited by law.
Towing vehicle (front)
> Only start to drive when the towing cable is
taut.
> Press the brake pedal very carefully. > Avoid sudden braking or driving maneuvers.

towing loop
Fig. 172 Front bumper: installing the towing loop
The threaded opening for the towing loop is located on the right side of the front bumper. » Remove the towing loop from the vehicle tool
kit > page 276. > Press the cap inward with brief, strong pressure
=> fig. 172. The cap will loosen from the bumper. > Tighten the towing eye as far as it will go into the mount. Use a suitable object to tighten the >

RAZ-1079)

284

OwnersManuals2.com

towing eye completely and securely in the mount. > After using, place the towing loop back in the vehicle tool kit.
If the towing loop is not tightened until it stops when installing, the threads may be pulled out when towing the vehicle and result in an accident.
Depending on the model, the shape of the cap can vary.
Rear towing lo

Emergency assistance
Vehicles with a factory-installed trailer hitch* are not equipped with towing loop threads at the rear.
If the towing loop is not tightened until it stops when installing, the threads may be pulled out when towing the vehicle and result in an accident.
To reduce the risk of damaging the trailer hitch", only use suitable tow bars that are compatible with it. If a tow bar is not available, you can use a towing cable.
Depending on the model, the shape of the cap can vary.

Fig. 173 Rear bumper: installing the towing loop
Vehicles with a towing loop
On vehicles without a factory-installed trailer hitch*, the towing loop threads are located on the right rear side of the bumper.
> Remove the towing loop from the vehicle tool kit > page 276.
> Press the cap inward with brief, strong pressure => fig. 173. The cap will loosen from the bumper.
> Tighten the towing eye as far as it will go into the mount. Use a suitable object to tighten the towing eye completely and securely in the
mount.
> After using, place the towing loop back in the vehicle tool kit.
Vehicles with a trailer hitch*
>» Attach the tow bar or the towing cable to the trailer hitch.

285
OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

Fuses and bulbs
Fuses and bulbs Fuses
Seer mee
Fig. 174 Right side of the front compartment: fuse panel
cover @)
Fig. 175 Front passenger footwell: cover and clip @), left side of the luggage compartment: cover @)
Fuses are installed in various locations in your vehicle. The following information only lists fuses that you can change yourself. To have other fuses
changed, contact an authorized Audi dealer or
authorized Audi Service Facility. The following table does not list fuse locations that are not used. A fuse that has blown will have metal strips that have burned through. The fuses are located on the right side of the front compartment (a), in the front passenger 286

footwell @, and under the left side of the lug-
gage compartment @).

> Switch the ignition and all electrical equipment off.
> Check the table that follows to see which fuse
belongs to the affected equipment. > Remove the screwdriver from the vehicle tool
kit > page 276.
> Remove the appropriate cover. > Remove the colored plastic bracket from the
fuse panel, if present. > Remove the clip from the fuse panel in the
front passenger's footwell @). > Remove the fuse using the clip.
> Replace the blown fuse only with a fuse that has the same amp rating.
> Reinstall the plastic bracket, if present.
> Install the cover.

Fuse color identification

Color
Black Gray Purple
Pink
Light brown Brown Red (narrow) Light blue Yellow White or transparent Light green Teal Orange Red (wide)

Current rating in amps 1 2 3.
4
5 1D 10 15 20 [25 30 35 40 50

ZX WARNING
Do not repair fuses and never replace a blown fuse with one that has a higher amp rating. This can cause damage to the electrical system and increases the risk of fire.

OwnersManuals2.com

© Note If a new fuse burns out again shortly after you have installed it, have the electrical system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
@ Tips Some of the equipment listed in the following tables applies only to certain model versions or certain optional equipment.
nt - front

Fuses and bulbs
Fig. 177 Front passenger footwell: fuse panel with plastic clip

Fig. 176 Right side of the front compartment: fuse panel with plastic clip
No. | Equipment 1 Electrical charging port door 2 Climate control system compressor 4 High-voltage battery 5 | High-voltage charger 6 Thermal management 7 Electric drive system, power electronics 11 | HigZ h-voltagge chargger 13 | Thermal management 14 | Windshield washer system control module 15 |High-voltage battery coolant pump 16 | Windshield wipers 17 | Thermal management 18 | Thermal management 19 | Thermal management 21 | Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC)

Fig. 178 Front passenger footwell: fuse panel with plastic
clip

The fuse assignment on right-hand drive vehicles is a mirror image of this.

Buse Ipenes

black)

No. | Equipment

Climate control system, fragrance system, ionizer

Head-up display

aA/wWys

Audi music interface, USB connection

DVD drive

Steering column lock

O N

Upper/lower display

287
OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

Fuses and bulbs

3 | Left headlight electronics
4 |Panoramic glass roof
5 |Left front door control module

6 | Sockets 8 | Instrument panel
9 | Right headlight electronics

Windshield washer system/headlight ao washer system

12 | Parking lock

`use E panel ® itreed)

No. 8. | Eqauniipmen t

Anti-theft alarm system

2 |Drive system control module

3 ara) call and communication cont roumoaue
4 | Selector lever

5 |Horn

6 |Parking brake

7 High-voltage battery, battery monitoring control module

8 | Roof electronics control module

10 | Airbag control module

11 | Left front lumbar support

12 | Diagnostic connection, light/rain sensor

14 | Right front door control module

15 | Climate control system compressor

16 | Climate control system blower

Fuse pa(n 4) e (brlown)
No. | Equipment 2 | Right front safety belt tensioner 4 |Left front safety belt tensioner 5 | Air suspension/suspension control 6 |Right headlight 7 |Left headlight 8 | Li Left rear door control l modulel 9 |Right r- ear door control module 10 infotainment system 11 privet arSIBtaNiEe systems control module
Re | Diagnostic intentawe
Fuse panel(5) (black)
No. | Equipment
1 Seat electronics, front seat ventilation, rearview mirror, diagnostic connection
2 Vehicle electrical system control module,
diagnostic interface 3 | Exterior sound generator 5 | Electric drive system 6 | Traffic information antenna (TMC) 7 |Active accelerator pedal 8 | Night vision assist 9 | Adaptiv- e crui-se assis7 t
Dri,ver assi- stance systems, -intersecti,on asa distantcontrol module
15 |USB connection

Fuse assignm

gage compartment
s é

Fig. 179 Left side of the luggage compartment: fuse panel
with plastic clip

288

OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH
o O

Bulbs

Fuses and bulbs

Your vehicle is equipped with maintenance-free headlights and tail lights. However, if a light bulb needs to be replaced, please contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
ty.

289
OwnersManuals2.com

Data privacy

Data privacy
Privacy notice
You can find information about responsibility for data protection in the MMI.
Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: SETTINGS > General > Legal notes > About Audi
connect.

Image recording
Surrounding area monitoring
Applies to: vehicles with surrounding area monitoring
Some vehicle functions require the vehicle's path to be detected and evaluated. This is done by cameras installed permanently on the vehicle that detect objects in the vehicle's surroundings (such as obstacles or guard rails). The live images from the cameras are transmitted to the applicable control module.
The camera images are transferred to the responsible control module for processing and may be stored, depending on vehicle equipment. The control module analyzes the current camera image using image evaluation software. This image evaluation software detects anonymized techni-
cal measurements, such as distances to objects. The control module evaluates these technical
measurements and makes it possible for the assist systems to control the vehicle as needed.

Data memories

Vehicle c

modules

-- og=+a~rOoy

Fig. 180 Driver's side footwell: connection port for the On Board Diagnostic System (OBD)
290

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic control modules for various vehicle systems such as the airbags. These vehicle control modules store data while driving normally that is required by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for diagnosis and repair purposes. Only certain types of data are recorded for a very short period of time ifa control module has detected a system event. No noises, conversations, or images will be recorded in the vehicle.
The data may include information such as the ve-
hicle speed, the direction of travel, and informa-
tion about the brake system, or also the behavior of the restraint system in the event of an accident. The stored data can be exported and down-
loaded with special devices, which must be con-
nected directly to the vehicle.
On Board Diagnostic System (OBD)
There is a diagnostic connector socket in the driver's side footwell to read out the various control modules and the event data recorder. Data regarding the function and condition of the electronic control modules is stored in the event memory. Only have an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility read out and delete the event memory.
ZX WARNING
-- Incorrect use of the connection port for the On Board Diagnostic System can cause malfunctions, which can then result in accidents and serious injuries.
-- Only allow an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to read out the motor data.
ata recorder
Event Data Recorder
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's system performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of >
OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
-- How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
-- Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened;
-- How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
-- How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only ifa non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-
ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the in-
formation if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Assist system monitor
This vehicle is equipped with an Assist System Monitor (ASM). The ASM collects data that is not stored by the EDR in the event of an accident. The main task of the ASM is to make it possible to understand the role and the behavior of the assist systems in these accident situations. In addition
to the data that the EDR stores, the ASM records
data related to the assist systems starting several seconds before the accident or near-accident. The data collected by ASM depends on the equipment and may include the following information: status information of the assist systems (for example, if they are switched on or off, system
events, etc.), control interventions (for example,
by ESC, ABS, Audi pre sense', etc.), and assist systems settings (such as speed settings).
Special devices and access to the vehicle or to the ASM are necessary in order to read the data from

Data privacy
the ASM memory. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, third parties such as law enforcement authorities can also read and analyze the stored data if they have access to the vehicle or to the
ASM.
Data usage
Audi can read out the information stored in the data memories or similar data, or give this information to third parties, especially in the following situations:
-- If the vehicle owner or lessee agrees -- If there is an official request from the police -- Ifa court or authorities request it
If legally permitted, Audi can also use the data for analysis of vehicle operation and safety performance or provide this data to third parties for research purposes.
Transmitted information
Data collection
Applies to: vehicles with data collection
Depending on the country, Audi may collect data for the following purposes, for example: offer and product optimization, public safety, provi-
sion of Audi connect remote vehicle services, and adaptation to customer expectations. For example, various technical function data, environmen-
tal data, driving data, and usage data will be collected for a specific purpose and forwarded to Audi. The data will be sent from the vehicle at the time the data was collected.
Applies to: MMI: You can find additional information about data collection in the MMI. Select on the home screen: SETTINGS > General > Legal notes > About Audi connect.
If you would like to deny data transmission to
Audi, contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for more informa-
tion. You also have the option to deactivate data transmission within the privacy settings.
291
OwnersManuals2.com

Data privacy
Privacy settings
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect
» Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: SETTINGS > Privacy settings.
> To display additional information about the privacy settings and the associated symbols in the
status bar, press © in the MMI.
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
Setting the maximum privacy settings
When the Activate privacy mode function is switched on, the data connection is deactivated or sending of data is restricted, but all safety-related, legal, or contractually required Audi connect services remain activated. The majority of the Audi connect services are deactivated.
When the function is switched off, the data connection will be available in order to use Audi connect services. After switching off the Activate privacy mode function, check the individual data categories under Adjusting individual privacy settings.
Adjusting individual privacy settings
In the MMI, you can adjust individually which data should be transmitted from the vehicle. If you switch on a data category, the data will be transmitted.
You can also deactivate individual services for your vehicle at my.audi.com if you are logged into the vehicle as the key user > page 30. These deactivated services will not be available in the vehicle. For additional information, visit my.audi.
com.!)
@) Note
You are responsible for all precautions taken
for data protection, anti-virus protection, and
protection against loss of data on mobile devices that are used to access the Internet through the Wi-Fi hotspot.

@) Tips
-- The following interfaces are not affected by changes to the privacy settings: Bluetooth, Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE), Wi-Fi, Audi smartphone interface (ASI), Near Field Communication (NFC), charging communication (high-voltage system), Electronic Toll Collect (ETC), On-Board Diagnostic System (OBD) if equipped.
-- If the maximum privacy settings are switched on, your vehicle may not receive certificates and security updates for establishing a secure connection, depending on vehicle equipment. In order to receive security up-
dates and certificates, switch the maximum privacy settings off for at least ten minutes every three months. Make sure that your vehicle is connected to the Internet. A symbol in the MMI status bar indicates if the required data connection is available > page 21.
-- If the transmission of data is limited, it will have the following effects on the exchange of data for Audi connect services and emergency calls, if equipped:
-- The emergency call function will remain available without restrictions and will con-
tinue to transmit data.
-- If an online roadside assistance call is initi-
ated, no data will be transmitted, but a
call will be made.
-- The Audi connect Stolen Vehicle Locator will remain available without restrictions
and can continue to transmit data. Please note that the Audi connect Stolen Vehicle Locator is not displayed in the MMI under additional information about privacy settings.
-- Online Car Care will remain available without restrictions and continue to transmit data, as long as the vehicle's embedded SIM card is connected to the mobile phone network.

) Incertain countries.
292

OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

--If the Geofencing Alert, Speed Alert,
and/or Valet Alert services have been activated by the key user, then they will remain available without restrictions and
continue to transmit data.
-- Stored destinations (favorites, last desti-
nations) are only stored in the vehicle. If you allow transmission of data again, these destinations will be synchronized via the myAudi account. To prevent synchroni-
zation of destinations, delete the destina-
tions before you allow data to be transmitted again.

(fey alat rag

Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment

Audi collects, uses, stores and shares your per-
sonal information, such as contact data, vehicle
data, usage data, driving data and precise geolocation, in order to provide you with the products
and services you have purchased or requested, and for a number of other purposes, for example, to track quality issues, to performance and safety, to meet our internal compliance or legal requirements and to market to customers and po-
tential customers. For a more complete list of
the data we collect, how we use it and with
whom we share it, please visit your Audi national/sales region website at www.audi.com.

The collection, use and sharing may vary depending on your model and model year, your subscrip-
tion status, or the service offering. For example, collection, use and sharing may vary between Audi connect services, if you have designated a key user, or if you are driving a model equipped with persistent data logging. Please review the complete Privacy Statement to understand our data handling practices with respect to a particular service.

You can find additional information about our data privacy practices in your MMI.

> Applies to: MMI: On the home screen, select:
SETTINGS > General > Legal notes > About Audi connect.

Information about our privacy practices in conjunction with the mobile Audi connect applica-

Data privacy tion can be found in the Application's Privacy Statement. For additional information about the privacy practices relating to Audi connect, myAudi, or other websites, applications or online services as well as your obligations with respect to using these services, and for additional information regarding Audi connect terms and conditions, please visit your Audi national/sales region website at www.audi.com.
293
OwnersManuals2.com

Accessories and technical changes
Accessories and technical changes
Warranty
Your vehicle is covered by various warranties:
-- New Vehicle Limited Warranty -- Limited Warranty Against Corrosion Perforation -- Applies to: USA models: Kansas Safety Belt
Limited Warranty
You can find detailed information in your Warranty & Maintenance Booklet.
Audi Literature Shop
Service information is made available as soon as possible after a model is introduced and can be ordered in the Audi Literature Shop: http:// literature.audiusa.com
Driving in other countries
Government regulations in the United States and Canada require motor vehicles to comply with emissions regulations and safety standards.
Therefore, vehicles that were produced for the
U.S. and Canadian markets are different from vehicles produced for other countries.
If you plan to use your vehicle outside of the Unit-
ed States or Canada, it is possible that:
-- Proper maintenance and repair work may not be possible because special service equipment, tools, or measuring devices needed for your vehicle may not be available.
-- Replacement parts may not always be available.
-- Navigation systems for vehicles built for the U.S.A. and Canada will not necessarily work in Europe, and may not work in other countries.
@) Note Audi is not liable for damage to the vehicle resulting from these country-specific differences.

Maintenance, and technical cations

repairs, modifi-

Observe the safety precautions > page 238, General information and = page 280, Raising the ve-
hicle.

General information
Due to the increasing complexity of technology in these vehicles, as well as the safety and environmental standards that apply, you can only perform a very limited amount of repairs and modifications to the vehicle yourself.
Proof of maintenance work may be required to submit a claim within the warranty period.
We recommend that you have your vehicle serviced by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility and that Audi Genuine Parts and Audi Genuine Accessories are used. This helps to ensure that your vehicle's functionality, performance, and safety are not impaired.

Maintenance and repairs
Your vehicle was designed to help keep maintenance requirements to a minimum. Some regular maintenance is required to help ensure that your
vehicle runs in a safe, economical, and reliable manner. Please refer to your Warranty & Mainte-
nance Booklet for more detailed information about vehicle maintenance.
When operating the vehicle under more extreme operating conditions, for example when outside temperatures are very low or in very dusty environments, certain maintenance should be performed between the specified intervals.
Usually maintenance and repair work requires special tools, measuring devices, and other equipment that is available to trained vehicle technicians in order to help ensure that your vehicle and all of its systems operate correctly, reliably, and safely. Performing work on the vehicle incorrectly can impair the operation and reliability of your vehicle and may void one or more of your vehicle's warranties.

294

OwnersManuals2.com

Technical Modifications
Interference with electronic components, their
software, the wiring, and data transfer may cause malfunctions. Because of the way electronic components are interconnected, such malfunctions can also impair systems that are not directly involved. This means that you risk both a substantial reduction in the operational safety of your vehicle and increased wear of vehicle components.
Some convenience functions, such as the conven-
ience turn signal function, individual door opening function, and displays, can be reprogrammed using special workshop equipment. If functions are reprogrammed, the information and descriptions about these functions in this Owner's Manual may no longer apply to the changed functions. Audi recommends that an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility perform and verify any reprogramming procedures.
ZA\ WARNING
Maintenance work, repairs, or technical modifications to the vehicle (such as installing additional equipment) that is not performed correctly can cause serious injuries and increase the risk of an accident.
Z\ WARNING
The front compartment in any vehicle is a potentially dangerous area and can cause serious personal injury. -- Always use extreme caution when perform-
ing any work in the front compartment. Always follow commonly accepted safety practices and use common sense. Never risk personal injury. -- Never perform any work in the front compartment unless you know exactly how to carry out the job and have the correct technical information and the correct tools and equipment. -- If you are uncertain about what to do, have the work performed by an authorized Audi
dealer, an authorized Audi Service Facility,
or another qualified workshop. Serious personal injury may result from improperly performed work.

Accessories and technical changes

C) Note
-- Maintenance work, repairs, or technical
modifications to the vehicle (such as installing additional equipment) that is not performed correctly can cause vehicle damage. -- The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not cover damage or malfunctions if the recommended intended use of the vehicle and maintenance measures listed in the Audi Owner's Manual and the Warranty & Maintenance Booklet were not followed. -- If emergency repairs must be performed, take your vehicle to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility as soon as possible. -- Audi is not liable for damage to the vehicle resulting from failure to comply with these guidelines.
@) For the sake of the environment
-- Regular maintenance can help protect the environment.
-- Technical modifications to the vehicle may
have a negative affect on energy use.
@) For the sake of the environment
Certain components in your vehicle such as undeployed airbag modules, pretensioners and remote control batteries may contain Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ perchlorate. When the vehicle or parts of the restraint system including airbag modules and safety belts with pretensioners are scrapped, all applicable laws and regulations must be observed. Your authorized Audi dealer is familiar with these requirements and we recommend that you have your dealer perform this service for you.

@) Tips

Because of your vehicle's aluminum body de-

sign, all service and repair procedures affect-

ing the body should be performed by an au-

thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Serv-

ice Facility, who will perform the work accord-

ing to Audi factory specifications. Only Audi

4KE012721BH

295
OwnersManuals2.com

Accessories and technical changes
Genuine Parts are used when Audi experts perform repair or service procedures. Failure to use Audi Genuine Parts or Audi Genuine Accessories or performing repairs incorrectly may result in severe vehicle damage, such as corrosion.
Accessories and parts
Consult with an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility before purchasing accessories or replacement parts. Audi recommends having your vehicle serviced by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility and using Audi Genuine Parts and Audi Genuine Accessories.
Audi does not endorse the use of products and accessories that it has not evaluated, even if the product is approved by a certified testing agency or government agency.
Z\ WARNING
-- Installing unapproved accessories or incorrect replacement parts can cause vehicle damage and can increase the risk of an accident.
-- Never attach accessories, such as telephone
holders or cup holders, to the airbag covers or within the airbag deployment zone, because this increases the risk of injury if the airbag deploys. -- On vehicles that have factory-installed license plate brackets on the front of the vehicle, the brackets may only be replaced with ones that are the same size and made of the same material. Do not install any license plate brackets on the front of vehicles that do not have factory-installed brackets.
Otherwise, the function of the system could be impaired.
@) Note
A correctly-installed exterior antenna is required for operating radio equipment in the vehicle. Otherwise, the increased electromagnetic waves can cause malfunctions in the vehicle. Observe the regulations in the country where the vehicle is being operated and the
296

instructions from the radio equipment manufacturer.

Reporting Safety Defects

Applicable to U.S.A.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying

Audi of America, Inc. 2200 Ferdinand Porsche Herndon, VA 20171

Drive

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investiga-
tion, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you,
your dealer, or Audi of America,
Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline tollfree at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov;

OwnersManuals2.com

or write to:
Administrator NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Ave.,
S.E. West Building
Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safe-
ty from http://www.safercar.gov.
Applicable to Canada
If you live in Canada and you believe that your vehicle has a de-
fect that could cause a crash, in-
jury or death, you should immedi-
ately inform Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls. You should also notify Audi Canada.
Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to
Transport Canada, Defect Investi-
gations and Recalls, may either call Transport Canada toll-free at:
Tel.: 1-800-333-0510 or Tel.: 1-819-994-3328 (Ottawa region and from other countries) TTY for hearing impaired: 1-888-675-6863
or contact Transport Canada by mail at:

Accessories and technical changes
Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Investigations Laboratory 80 Noel Street
Gatineau, QC
J8Z OA1
For additional road safety infor-
mation, please visit the Road
Safety website at:
English:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/ motorvehiclesafety/menu.htm
French:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/fra/ securiteautomobile/menu.htm

4KE012721BH

297
OwnersManuals2.com

Technical data

Technical data Identification data
Vehicle data label

(HaF~rmeXXXoXnNKcccKnXXoeXXKXXX XxKXKXKK KK-NKK

HX XXX XX. XX XK

(3)---WwoENeG. eCODE

/ /

TGREARNS

CODE

XXX KW
XXXX

XXX
XXX XXX

@--aePAINT NO. / /ININNETNEARIUOSRST. M.-AUSST./ OPTIONS

XXXX /XXXX XXX / XX

2T17313EFLL1FESxOO646CHAAAw

J7ODZ5
3KA CV7

41ULBB
9G3
48778KEQGKHC3BO

6XM 4093QSUXYG0IMA3078AU

4O7X82511KX29YSA3214BHGS

SRW 1BA
OQDJZ2F7D
5D2 4GQ

Fig. 181 Vehicle identification label
The vehicle identification label > fig. 787 is located in the luggage compartment under the cargo floor cover.
The vehicle identification label information can also be found in the Warranty & Maintenance booklet.

RAZ-0668

The sticker contains the following vehicle data:
@ Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
@ Vehicle type, motor output, transmission ® Motor and transmission codes
@ Paint and interior codes
© Optional equipment numbers
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The VIN is located in the following areas:
-- Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Vehicle information.
-- On the vehicle identification label -- At the front behind the windshield -- Stamped into the front compartment on the
right side
Notes about technical data
The values may vary based on special equipment as well as market-specific equipment and measuring methods.
Please note that the specifications listed in the vehicle documentation always take precedence.
G) Tips
Any technical data that is missing was not available at the time of printing.

Vehicle data

e-tron e-tronS e-tron Sportback
e-tron Sportback S

Length (in (mm)) | Width (in (mm)) | Width across the | Height at curb mirrors (in (mm)) | weight (in (mm))

193.0 (4,901)

76.2 (1,935)

80.4 (2,043) 86.2 (2,189)

65.1 (1,653)

193.0 (4,902)

77.8 (1976)

80.4 (2,043) 86.2 (2,189)

65.5 (1,664)

193.0 (4,901)

76.2 (1,935)

80.4 (2,043) 86.2 (2,189)

65.0 (1,651) 65.1 (1,653)

193.0 (4,902)

77.8 (1,976)

80.4 (2,043) -
86.2 (2,189)

65.0 (1,650)

298

OwnersManuals2.com

Technical data

Windshield and headlight washer system* A/C system refrigerant oil The exact type and amount of refrigerant oil in the A/C system is specified on the sticker on the refrigerant compressor.
Refrigerant oil

6.3 qt (6 liters)

220g

+/-10g

= ADNAN INN NO
Fig. 182 Safety certificate
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The maximum permitted total weight (@ of the vehicle is listed on the safety certificate on the side area of the door or on the driver's door pillar.
Trailer load

B8U-0380

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The maximum permitted load on the front axle @ or the rear axle @) is listed on the safety certificate on the side area of the door or on the driver's door pillar.
Load
The maximum permitted load is listed on the tire pressure label on the driver's door pillar.
Roof load
The maximum permitted roof load is 165 lbs (75 kg).

e-tron, e-tron
Sportback
eS-ptorrotnbaSc, k e-Stron

4,000 lbs (1,800 kg)
3,307 lbs (1,500 kg)

400 lbs (180 kg)
331 lbs (150 kg)

4KE012721BH

299
OwnersManuals2.com

Other information
Other information
Online Car Care
Applies to: vehicles with Online Car Care
If new messages from Online Car Care are available, they will be displayed in the MMI when you switch on the ignition.
» Applies to: MMI: To access Online Car Care messages ata later time, select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Online Car Care.
Special service events, service measures, and recalls regarding your vehicle will be displayed via Online Car Care.
Z\ WARNING
-- Always follow the information found in > AA in General information on page 193.
-- Recalls by the manufacturer must be performed. Failing to adhere to this requirement can void the vehicle's operating License. Failing to perform measures can result in impaired functionality, which increases the risk of an accident.
® Note
-- Always follow the information found in >® in General information on page 193.
-- Recalls by the manufacturer must be performed. If they are not, there is a risk of vehicle damage.
Brands and licenses
This manual does not contain any symbols, such as ® or TM, to identify trademarks or registered trademarks. However, the absence of these symbols does not constitute a waiver of any rights associated with these names.
Apple, iPhone, iPod touch, Apple CarPlay, Lightning, and iTunes Radio are trademarks of Apple
Inc.
Other product and manufacturer names may be trademarks of their respective owners.

Declaration of
compliance for telecommunications equipment and electronic systems
Your vehicle may be equipped with various radio systems, depending on vehicle equipment. The manufacturer is not liable for radio malfunctions that are caused by unauthorized changes to the
equipment.
FCC Part 15.19
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Part 15.21
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
RSS-Gen
This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada's licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference; and
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
RSS 102
Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information: This equipment complies with FCC and ISED radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm (8 inches) between the radiator and your body. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

300

OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

Class B devices
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
-- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. -- Increase the separation between the equipment
and receiver. -- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a cir-
cuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. -- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Integrated Toll Module* - FCC (USA) and ISED (Canada)
This device complies with FCC rules part 90 and
Innovation, Science, and Economic Development
Canada RSS-137. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation. WARNING: The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and ISED rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.
This equipment complies with FCC and ISED radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. End Users must follow the spe-

Other information cific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This transmitter must be at least 20 cm (8 inches) from the user and must not be coocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
@) Tips
Additional information or supplements about the radio systems based on the vehicle equipment and country can be found on the following website: www.audi.com/generalinfo
301
OwnersManuals2.com

Index

A/C cooling mode.........-..0.e.ee0eeee 87

A/C system refrigerant oil............... 299

Accelerator pedal...............-0000005 96

also refer to Accelerator pedal........... 96

ACCESSOFICS . 6 eee

296

Active combination filter.............. 86, 89
Adaptive cruise assist................00. 151 Cleaning the sensors............eeeee 271
Adaptive cruise control Predictive cOntrOlews: « v ewes 2 x wees ss nex 156
Adaptive dampers..............0eeeee 107 Adaptive speed assist
refer to Adaptive cruise assist.......... 151 Adjusting the air distribution............. 87 Adjusting the brightness................. 54 Adjusting the sound................0005 233 Adjusting the temperature............... 87 Adjusting the vents................0e0ee 89 Adjusting the volume..............000005 29 Adjusting the volume (announcements) .... 233 Adjusting the welcome sound............ 233 Airbag'system ss ges: » + sees se eee xe eee ee 70 Air quality index: ¢ 20s: «2 sees se mesg s ees 89 Air quality indicator.................000- 89

Air suspension..............20.00-000e 107
Alarm system refer to Anti-theft alarm system.......... 37
Alignment pin (changing the wheel)....... 276 All-weather lights...............-.00000- 50 Allseason tires..............-.-.2...0005 263 All wheel drive
refer to quattro.............02.00000- 109
Amazon Alexa integration Media playback........c.e.ce..ee.e 222
AMI
refer to Audi music interface....... 222,223
Android Auto refer to Audi smartphone interface...... 230
Anti-lock braking system............00-. 109 Anti-Slip Regulation.................... 110 Anti-theft alarm system...........-..00-- 37 Anti-theft wheel bolts................5. 279 Apple CarPlay
refer to Audi smartphone interface...... 230

AQI refer to Air quality indicator............. 89
Aspect ratio NIDGO sciex 2 < newie ¢ 8 HOEK SS we & Aaves.e 2 @ 227
ASR refer to Anti-Slip Regulation............ 109
Audi adaptive light..............--..00-. 50
Audi connect refer toconnect............-.04. 193, 194
Audivdrive SeleCtius « 2 wows sy cows 5 2 pea ee 106 Audi e-tron compact charging system..... 123
Adjusting the charging power level...... 124 Changing or attaching the power cable... 128 SECUING ss s sucem a 3 BaeNE GE Meme gE Ee a Ee 129 Status and malfunction indicators....... 124 Audi music interface ..04 6 occu es eae ee ee 222 AUGIOTIIES ene ¢ & aeau sx meas s x meme eK eR 224 Audi phone box': g sss ¢ s eves se eees se eee 184
Audi presense.0..0.2..c e.ee.ee.e .eee 164 MeSSAQES « secu = s meey 5 4 ewe so eee § Ree 167
Audi pre sense front..........6ee.eeee 165 Audi smartphone interface.............. 230
Legalinformation..................0. 236 Audi virtual cockpit
refer to Instrument cluster.............. 12 AUTO
Automatic headlights...............05- 50 Climate control system.............000. 87 Auto Lock (central locking) ..............- 33 Automatic climate control system refer to Climate control system.......... 86 Automatic luggage compartment lid.... 41,42 Automatic wipe/wash system............. 56 Auxiliary climate control................. 90
Average consumption................... 14
Average speed... 2.0.2 cec. e .. eee 14
B
Band refer to Frequency band............... 214
Battery Charge level display.................0.. 12 Charging (12 volt vehicle battery)....... 245 High-voltage battery...............0.. 112 REDlACING « < seas 7 ¢ seas ts Hees Fo eee ea: 243

302

OwnersManuals2.com

Vehicle battery (12 volt)............... 243 Winter operation (12 volt vehicle battery) . 243
Battery (mobile device) Charging viaUSB................. 185, 223 Wireless charging..............--000- 185
Battery (vehicle) refer to High-voltage battery........... 112
Blinds refer to Panoramic glass roof............ 46
BLOWER. scexsies : snmass « ananine sw stinnee © avenge 4 w « 87
Bluetooth Audio player........0......e.ee.e.ee 221 Connecting adevice sews << news se cee see 235 Connecting a mobile phone............ 182 Deleting adevice................0000- 236 Device OVERVIEW secs + = use cs seen ss ewe 235 Disconnecting adevice................ 235 Displaying profiles.................00- 236 Selecting adevice.............2.-000. 235 Specifying a favorite .......cc.. .ee .eee 236
Boost TUNCHON cia s pena as pens s x cous ae os 96
Brake fluid

Break-in security feature.............000. 37
Breaking in New brake pads............0-.000000s 100 Newtires........0..0..0..0..0..000. 254
Bulb replacement..............00.-000- 289
Business address...............0000005 208

California Proposition 65 Warning........ 239 Battery specific...............0.-.00. 244

Calllist... 0.0... ee eee eee eee eee 186

Cameras... eeeeee 136

LOGAUONSias = » wemx 5 eeees F HER tHE

138

Capacities

Washer fluid reservoir..............--. 299

GarGO MOOP ws s x eames x x eevee x 2 meus oe ee ee 85

Gargomnets s scam s x naw 5 gee sb eee Fe 84

Can KeYivce 2 x csvece av armas os exeens ve eon ¥ ¥ eoner 37
Carwash «sas + moe « swan se mien & 2 BNE 270
Cell phone refer to Telephone............-....0-. 182
Cell phone compartment refer to Audi phone box............... 184
Central locking...0.0..0 .ee.e.e.ee.ee 33 AUTOLGCK « sasoe 7 s seme 4 5 Haws @ BS 2 a eS 33 GOnvenienice Key wiirre o 2 anon x owen se euos 38 Convenience opening and closing......... 45 Luggage compartment lid............... 41 Mechanically unlocking and locking....... 36 IMOSSAGES scenes o & cirtiane w + emanate © + cies © oem 35 Remote control key.................4-5 38 Setting 's « vceon « = wees 5 eres go ee + ee 34 Vehicle keys avscsss + + eveneis © a enetsm © svenevene © ser 38
Central lockingswiteh « soos « « semis «+ cmon o ¢ 35
Gertificationtce: « o iscnn 0 wae v oman a 2 awe a 300
Changing light bulbs................... 289
Charge points (battery) ..............0.. 240
Charging refer to Power sourceS......0c.e.ee.e-ee 80
Charging clip refer to Wall mount clip............... 129
Charging display sien «6 sven eo eva ee eee « 118 Charging ties « sess = y ceows « 2 aawsy x 2 eawes @ 114
Charging wirelessly': «ass s = sea a x mem seg 185
Child safety lock Climate control system controls inthe rear. 44 Power windows.........0.0 .ee0e 0ee0e 44 Rear doorsis « « ais a ¥ sais 2 ¥ mavee @ aa 2 44
Child safety seats........0c...ee.e.e.ee 74 Securing to the top tether anchor........ 78 Securing with a safety belt.............. 77 Securing with LATCH. .............--00- 76
Cleaning... 0.0... . cece eee eee eee 270
Cleaning artificial leather............... 273
Cleaning carbon components........ 272,273 Cleaning controls « wson << maven « @ aavens 6 2 weve 273
Cleaning decorative parts andtrim........ 272
Cleaning microfiber.................005 273
Cleaning plastic parts................0. 272
Cleaning textiles.................0000. 273
Climate control system...........-..00-- 86
Climate control system controls in the rear Childisafety LOCK wes: 5 x wus o 2 wean 2 x meee x 44

4KE012721BH

303
OwnersManuals2.com

Index

Closing

Automatic luggage compartment lid...... 41

Convenience closing...........00.++00% 45 HOO «a asacces <u anos wn amas 6S mane & a omaKeNRE 239

Luggage compartment lid............... 41 Luggage compartment lid with foot motion . 42

Panoramic glass'roOf icine + eaves ev wrwenie oo a 46 Sunshade (roof) ..............e.ee0e0ee 46

W£6RdOWS:s « sees ¢ 2 aes 1 2 ee Ee ee ce

Closing aid (power closing doors).......... 33

Cockpit dimming ....................005 54

Cockpit (overview) ...........-2.2.000 0 6

Collapsible spare tire................0.. 282

Collapsible tire

refer to Collapsible spare tire........... 282

Color cOd@... eee eee eee eee 298

Comfort auxiliary climate control.......... 91

Coming home/Leaving home

refer to Entry/exit lighting.............. 52

Coming toastop.......0..e.ee.e.e.e 94

Compass inthe mirror............-..00-. 59

Compliance': « o saws so aww ee eens ee meee os 300

Conference'calll wc + suas « ¢ caw ¢ 2 ewe 189

Configuration wizard.................... 18

CONMECE css ¢ & sae.s « Bese & Haye a a REE Gt Be 193 Dataiplatisi: = sims 2 2 anwooe eo mses 2 2 nem oo 197

Data Privacy. .... 0... cece eee eee eee 293

Emergency call.............-..0000005 198

InfotainMent's + snas < 2 saws & 2 oaewa 3 8 eee 194

Infotainment services................. 194 Online roadside assistance............. 199

Vehicle control services.............005 196

Connected deviceSi.: « » swe 3 x ewes se ewe ¢ 235

Connections

refer'to Mediaiess «se ses omens ae ees 221,224

Consumer information.................. 294

Consumption (energy) ......-.....00eeeee 14

Contacts

Importing and exporting............... 190 Updating inthe MMI.................. 190

also refer to Directory.............0005 187

Convenience: key ai. se cern oe eevee ov ceva eo aoe 33 Convenience closing.............000008 45 also refer to Vehicle key............54.. 37
Convenience opening and closing Windows or panoramic glass roof........ 45
Cooling Mode. s ¢ ees + e sees gb ees Fe eee 87 Cooling system
GOON « ssscess se sana 9 w eevee + 2 mene ¥ waren 240 Coolant level........ 2.0.02 eee eee 241 Cornering light......... 0.0... cee eee eae 50 Cross traffic assist (intersection assistant)... 171 Cruise:controlisystems « «is +e eses« 6 wor 148 Gup holders sci ss nsw + wen 6 s wees ss oes s 80 Current consumption..................4. 14 Customer information.................. 300 Customer measureS........02--.e.e0ee 300
D
Data module Serial number (IME) « + sway « x sawn s 2 saw 190
Data Plans s cee: < » meme = eeee es SeeR os oes 197 Data Privacy..................--0000050- 293
Date... cece eee eee 14
SOttinG's « ¢ ewes « = ees ¢ ¢ ees +o ee 2 oe 233 Daytime running lights.................. 50 Declaration of compliance............... 300 Demo mode
refer to Presentation mode............ 212 Determining correct load limit........... 261
Device overview...............00.0000. 235 Digital compass................--00000- 59 Dimensions............0..0.00e-e0e0 298
Dimming the exterior mirrors............. 55
Dimming the rearview mirror............. 55 Dive ctonyscivc x wave «6 ese 6 sree ee ome 4 187
Business card. .... 0.0c2ee.ee . eee.eee 188 Display
Cleaning ......0..c. ece.e.ee.ee. e eee 273 Disposal... . 2... 0... cece eee eee ee 294
Distance... 22... eee eee 14
Distance Warning « cvsen «5 ae 2 een © veces 161
Doors Child safety lock...c.cc.ce.ce.ee.e . eee 44 Door contact switch............-...2.0. 53

304

OwnersManuals2.com

Mechanically unlocking and locking....... 36 Power closing/closing aid............... 33
Driver assist system messages........... 136
Driver information system................ 12
Drives refer to Media............ee0e0ee 221,224
Drive select refer to Audi drive select............... 106
Drive systeM.. 2... cee eee eee 93,97 Audi drive SelSEE sews 2 2 wow sy eee & 2 eee 106 Breaking iim o secs x a sasss x « siessm © o cuavan #6 ae 97 Emergency off.............e.e0e0e0ee 93 Switching onmanid Off; sss sx seus ¢ x ees ¥ ¥ 93
DEWING GOWN NIUSizns ¢ ¢ suses 2 5 meee ¢ 2 caaR 103
Driving program......e.ee-e.e.e . 96, 160 Driving through water................0- 104
Driving time.............. 0.0.0... 0 008. 14
Driving tips Driving through water...............-. 104 Efficient driving soc = s seen = s wees = v ewes = 99 OP OAEATIVING sence = © encnace x 5 onerene « s wiewane 104 Uphilland downhill................00. 103
Driving uphills.............0...000. 103 Dust filter
refer to Active combination filter...... 86, 89
E
E-mail... 2.0.0 00..e ce0 ce . eee.ee. e eee 191 EDL
refer to Electronic Differential Lock...... 109 EDR
refer to Event Data Recorder (EDR)...... 290 Efficiency ASSists: = = sews = : sage 5s ewe & oe 149
Predictive comtroles. si svi ev ivesie 6 8 snes 156 Electricalisystem « i oii. ¢ ¥ wwe a 6 wien oon 242 Electricdrive system sis « 2 saw x s sais 9 & ware 98 Electric motor
Coola Misses x a sasnins & i satwnes 6 a ceawore a x annwent a 240 Electric ranges. « sai ws swan ao ssaeven oo ware 210 Electromechanical parking brake......... 101 Electronic Differential Lock.............. 110
Electronic immobilizer................50. 38 Electronic Stabilization Control........... 109 Embedded SIM card..............20000. 194
Emergency assist................0.000. 171

Emergency assistance ........0.....000- 276

Emergency braking function............. 103

Emergency Callies « ¢ esws + rene eres 189, 198

Emergency flashers. « x ows sc ews ee eas ee 52

EMerQEnicyiNiOde seus s 2 meme 5 x rams 4s ee 4 97

Emergency operation

DOOFS « seyes ¢ ¢ eee ¢ ¢ awe 3 6 ews Yo eee ee 36

Luggage compartment lid............... 43

Panoramic glass roof.............00.005 46

Energy

Current consumption................4. 14

Reducing consumption................. 99

Energy T@COvery sos ss cers oo weee ss pees ees 98

Engine braking effect

refer to Recuperation........0...008005 98

Engine start system ..... 000 ece0 ee . ee nee 94

Entering adestination.................. 202

Destination from the map.............. 204

Entry:assistan@e@i. ¢ aceon mas 3 + emwim 2 ecw

also refer to Exit assistance............. 63

ESC

refer to Electronic Stabilization Control... 109

ESC Offroad... 0... ee eee e eee eee 110

eSIM

refer to Embedded SIM card............ 194

Event Data Recorder (EDR).............. 290

Exit assistance .... 2.6c6 ece. eee.ee. eee 63

EXEGWAEMIAGI. » « anecone sv anetnn 9 w sentome 6 6 eantece 169

Exterior Mirtorsicccs + ¢ mes 2 o awe 2 o owen ews 54

Folding settings............0..e.e0ee 34

External voice operation................. 27

Factory default settings Multi Media Interface................. 234

Fastest route... .. 0... eee eee

202

EaWOMECStass x «scams o 6 ence + 6 eoesaun @ a aman @ Ho

Bluetooth

Telephone Federal Communications Commission (FCC) . 300

4KE012721BH

305
OwnersManuals2.com

Index

File formats (media drives)............-. 228

Fog AWindOwS) csi 2s ier 2s wan swan 6s wees 88

Folding the center armrest..............- 84

Folding the rearseats..........ee0e..ee 84

Footwell temperature.................-. 89

For the sake of the environment

FragranC@ sss so aeay ¢ e ey & x eee + Rae 88, 89

Free search

216

Free text search Medias & + arenes = 5 cman = 1 aman + amen + eens 227

Freeze protection

Coolant...

2... .. cece

eee eee ee 240

Windshield washer system............. 245

Frequency band...............--000-0- 214

also refer to Frequency band........... 214

Front center armrest.............-0.-00- 64

Front collision warning

refer to Audi pre sense front............ 164

Front compartment

OVORMIOW, ccs «0 cms ¥ oem © serene a 8 Enero 240 Safety precautions.................00, 238 Storage compartment............0...085 81

Front compartment storage compartment.. 81

Front passenger's seat adjustment FROMGis « s mone: 3 was oo ces v wae ov eS 8 64 ROAM. sissies 0 « suansne © 6 ogsionze 0 9 axiane 0 ot enoraue wo 4 63

Front wiper blades Changing...ee.e .ee.e .ee.e .e.ee 58 CLEANING): 5 2 qaws « 2 awe x # Meme < F aamR z DAE 58

Functions ondemand................-- 195

Functions that requirea license.......... 195 also refer to Functions ondemand...... 195

G
Garagedoor Opener sss = pasves s ses s reese 46 GarMenthOOks sean s 2 wee sv ee ss gees ese 81
GAWR
refer to Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . 299
GOAf wis ¢ = eee & eee E RoE ae eee be eee 95
Glossary of tire and loading terminology... 250 Glove compartment.......e.e.e.e0ee0e 81 Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)........ 299 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)...... 299

GVWR refer to Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): » ese s 2 mame 3 2 goa 4 2 a 299

HandS-fO@ies ¢ « eens ¢ o aeew ¢ Hames epee a 183

Hands Free Profile...............00000e 183

Head-up display AGJUStING sem +e ecme 2 een os pew Ze eee 25 Adjusting the brightness................ 54 Operating... 0... cece cece eee eee 25

Headlight range control...............005 50

Headlights

Cleaning... ..... cece eee eee eee 271 Headlight range control................ 50
Washer system... 0... 0. ce cece eee eee 56 Washer system (filling washer fluid).... . 245

Head restraints ACJOStING ease ¢ 3 een ¢ xaute ¥ 3 Re a 3 Ree G 65

Removing and installing................ 65

Heated rear window............00000e0es 88

Heated steering wheel.................5. 90

HOating aces ¢ < nea so HERR FB ROSS cE ge 86
HFP

refer to Hands Free Profile............. 182

High-voltage battery.................0. 112

Advanced charging settings............ 120

Audi e-tron compact charging system.... 123

Changi sens : seen s = eens = now = 113; 116

Charging display on the vehicle......... 118

Charging equipment.................. 122

Charging methods............e eens 113

Charging ports on the vehicle........... 113

CHARGING CTE cass o siaxers 6 scant wn wien

114

Connecting the charging cable.......... 116

Messages while driving................ 121

Not running for long periods of time..... VAS Opening the charging port door......... 116
Quick:charging's:es + 2 swap y ¢ ews yo ews ¥ 113 Setting the charging target............ 119

Setting thetimer..............2..005- 119 Transporting charging equipment....... 123

High-voltage system............--..00-- 112

High beams High'beamvassistant). « sis « «sav « ¢ nace 51

Highway lights'. - ssa = + gees = s wees ey wees 50

Hill descent assist.............0.000005 104

306

OwnersManuals2.com

Hill Hold ASSISE wie vc sce ve eee a meee ¥ we 95

Holeeassist's « sesies «= soe 2 2 ves ¥ 0 orem 2 02 102 also refer to Hold assist............... 102

Hold Assist

refer to Hold assist. ...0.. .. .e e. ee

102

Home

refer to Home address...............- 208

HOM@address: « xsax < s acca ¢ o Sams FS eS 208

HomeLink refer to Garage door opener............. 46

HOMe SEPEENs + seus « = seems v 5 remus ¢ 5 cee Ge 17

Hood... 0... eee

eee eee 239

Opening and closing the lid............ 239

also refer to Hood....0.. .sce.e.ee.eee 239

Hotspot
refer to Wi-Fi........ 0.0... cee eee eae 196

I
Ignition Switching on and off................-.. 93
Imbalance (wheels)............--..00-- 256
Immobilizer refer to Electronic immobilizer........... 37
Indicator lightS0.... .ce. ce . eee..ee. e eee 7
Inspection interval................-000. 246
Instrument cluster...............0000004 12 Adjusting the layout.............00000. 13 Gleaning « « svwa se even eo eee oo ae oe oe 273 Malfunction... 0.0. 0c 2 e ce. ce. ee e. ee eee 12 Motor code.....0..e.ee.e.ee.ee.e ee 236 On-board computer..............+-008- 14 QPerabiAg » « cessaee a o means a 0 poner « gxwnexein 6 cnie 12 Service interval display................ 246 Software information...............-. 236 Switching tabs.................000000. 12 Switching the view. ... 0..sce.e e. ee eee 13 Vehicle functions . ees. =< eee ee eee se ees 14 Version information...............00 236
Instrument illumination................. 54
Integrated assistance......ee.e.e.e.e .ee 18
Integrated Toll Module................. 146
Intelligent search Navigation' 5 + csi 6s sacs oo eanars vo errs @ 202
Interference-Causing Equipment Standard MICEScans «seamen + ceameas = azennes a = snewome 1 3 ene 301

Interior lighting sic. © « cave v waver ¥ wen 53,54
Interior MONITOFING wes os caren os ive 6 6 eas 37 Intermittent mode (windshield wipers) ..... 56 International travel, co i iei as sc. eeee ees 197 Internet
refer to connect................. 193, 194
Internet radio refer to Online radio...............005 218
Intersection assistant.................. 170
JONIZ@P's esses < v cere © 2 aoa os eI 2 8 HE oS 88 iPhone
refer to Audi music interface....... 222,223

J
JUMAPEStArtiNG secs vx soso wo sess o w seem w cee 283
Jump start points refer to Charge points (battery)......... 240

Key replacement............---.2-000- 37 Mechanicallkey acess « « emicse « x commas « sueteus i « 37

Not recognized..2.....c.ec.e.e.ee.ee 94 PANIG BUttORis « = seas ¢ = cae » o eemie 5 2 ee 38

Replacing the battery...............065 39 Unlocking and locking................-. 38

Key user...

2. eee

eee ee eee 31

KICK OWI: « series 3 asawens <= wise eo cows a 5 one 96

L
Lane departure warning.............0005 162 Cleaning the camera area.............. 271
Lane guidance................--0000ee 155
FRAP BUTIOK. «. wrens» a snore 0 x semanas 0 x emcee a 4 o8e 143 also refertoLaptimer................ 143
Laserscanner...0.. .ee.e .e.ee.e.e .eee 136 Cl@ANiNG': « « saws 2 » eewe ze aeew oe eee ee 272
LATCH (securing child safety seats)......... 76
Launch Control.................0000000. 97
Leather care and cleaning............... 273 Legal information
License subscriptions...............-- 236 Software information................. 236

4KE012721BH

307
OwnersManuals2.com

Index

Software licemsesia: « « csivine «a scascue ww suases © 236 Version information..............-00 236
License plate bracket..................- 296 Lifting points (vehicle jack).............. 280 Light/rain sensor
Headlights .......0.0c..... 50 Intermittent mode (windshield wipers) .... 56 Lighting EXt@rOPs + soma 2 cms « v cen a 2 oe ee eee 50 WBC ROP cs ao senses ow exeiere oi meio oF neat * orate 53
LIQHES « srcvive 6 v sconce a @ esvene wo aeeene 2 @ seem # we 50 Lights on the charging port
refer to Charging display.............. 118
Listening to music refer to Media...........-0eeeee 221,224
Load... 2.2... eee eee 299 Localusers... 2.0.ce0 ce e. ee e. ee . eee eee 30 Locking and unlocking
By remote control............-..000005 38 Using the lock cylinder................. 36 With the convenience key............00. 38 Low beam headlights .................... 50 LTE
refer to Exterior antenna.............. 185
Luggage Luggage compartment lid............... 40
Luggage compartment................0. 81 Caro TOO': sce « x wows xs zeus ¢ 2 wee x eae 85 COVE iss ee downs 6 6 anauass wo imisane wo amiRee @ w De 83 Increasing the size..............02..00. 84 POWEP SOURCES sins s aan @ 3 males G 8 Raves ad 80 also refer to Luggage compartment...... 81
Luggage compartment lid................ 40 Closing bUEEOM «a csr + evermes wo arene we + ene 41 Generalinformation................... 40 Mechanically unlocking.............0005 43 Opening and closing ..............0000. 41 Opening and closing with foot motion..... 42 Power opening and closing.............. 41
CUMBar support': saws s x aes 5 ¢ sors « eRe 5 62
M
Maintenance ....... 0.0.ee.e .eee-e.ee 294
Maintenance intervals..............2.-. 246
Manually releasing the charging connector. 121 Manually releasing the charging port door.. 121

Manual operation Charging connector................005 121 Charging port doors sees ss ses se evs es 121
Luggage compartment................. 42

Map
Changing the map scale.............-. 204 Display. .... 0... ee ee eee ee eee 207 OPEratiNGs: « s saves a & way so seuoe 2 e eee 6 2 206 Selecting a destination................ 204

MAP refer to Message Access Profile......... 191

Map preview....................00000. 204

Map update.........0....e e.ee.0eee 210 Online... ... 2. eee eee eeeeee 210

USB connection sci s ¢ sae x sews ss ewe 211

Massage function...............-00000e 62 Fronts «ance «women ee canon oo mien ae oe 2 63

Mechanicakley wesc «2 eas oo veces 2 2 seme vee 37

Media wus: 2 s sear 2 s cams 9 2 gene ea 221, 224 Supported formats.....e.e.e.e.e .eee 228

Media Genter ins ss ws v2 meen 2 wae mown 224

Memory fUNCEON see » 2 wea 2 pews ¥ een & g 69

Menu language refer to Setting the language........... 233

MenuipathSwiss «6 aces oe mies + wom o wou a 6 LY:

Message Access Profile................. 191

MeSSaGSin: « v ceume & ¢ aauey ox saws Fs eR Ge 191

Mirror coinpass: : = wees s « seen ss pees se sees 59

Mirrors

Adjusting exterior mirrors............... 54

Vanity Mirror... 1...

eee eee 56

MMI refer to Multi Media Interface............ 18

Mobile device refer to Telephone..................-. 182

Mobile device reminder signal............ 186

Motor refer to Drive systeM............0000008 93

Motor compartment refer to Front compartment............ 238

Mountain passes: . scsi. eee eo wien eo ae 103

Mountainiroadsian. + + savers o saan ev ori we 103

Multifunction steering wheel

Buttons ..... 0.0c. ee0 e. ee..eee 12,29
Operating.........0.. .ce.ce.e.e.e e.ee 12

308

OwnersManuals2.com

Programming buttons.................. 29 Voice recognition system............... 26
Multi Media Interface.................... 18 Menus and symbols..............2.0005 19 Operating « « sees oo secs oo ems o wae ss 16,19 Switching the displays on or off.......... 18
MUI Gis « seaasive © cazens wo & neaanan 16 w amewens % 5 seen 29
MYAUGI » sexo 6 2 suns ae sarees oe suena @ HR 30, 194
myAudi navigation................. 201, 204
MYyAUdi USFS sews ss sewn 2 y Seen sy See Ge os 30

Narrow areaSiws «2 ean ¢ ¢ meres & ¢ HewG & 2 oon 160

Natural leather care and cleaning......... 273

Navigation...

2... cece cee eee eee 201

Better route. ¢ «ccs 9 ¢ caw oo eres so yer 211

Destination details................... 204

PAVOFItES cams « x aims « xopem § s Ree gs RS 208
also:referto.Map «sisser a sussass 2 « exneie ea oe 206

Navigation database Version information.................. 236

Navigation (instrument cluster).......... 207

NERSAe ceca: 0 saci: oe wesiwe a a cone ww excomue 2 296

Night vision assist. ................0004 144
Cleaning the camera............--000- 271

Odometer...

.. 0.0... cece eee ee eee 14

Resetting .... 0.0. cec. e e. ee . eee. eee ee 14

Office address

refer to Business address.............. 208

Offroad

refer to Offroad driving................ 104

Offroad driving: = : sees zs eees ae ees ee ews 104

OFF (climate control system).............. 87

On-board computer.............02-.005- 14

On Board Diagnostic System (OBD)........ 290

Online

Car care...

eee

eee eee 300

MedsUteSios s vases s wane a s mame oo ene 5 it 300

SOMVIUCC cca « «saan a 0 sesrene ao vane a 2 ese 8 300

Online map

refer to Satellite map................. 209

Online media: cies es esccue ee esenese vw anaes wv oe 222
Online:radio « sic. 6 swe a 6 ee ae eis ews 218 also refer to Online radio.............. 218
Online roadside assistance.............. 199
Online services refer toconnect............-.00% 193, 194
Online system update.................. 234
Online traffic information...............
OPeMiAG ie ss cores e mca so meee oo eee oe ae Automatic luggage compartment lid Convenience opening.................85 HOO « = cer wo wens oe sere oe ses ee Luggage compartment lid Luggage compartment lid with foot motion . 42 Panoramic glass roof................005 46 Sunshade (roof)... 0.0 00..c ce. ce e. ee eee 46 WindOWS:. « savax ¢ 2 seeoe & § Seaae BS HGH a oe 44
Opening and closing refer to Unlocking and locking........ 33, 38
Opening the charging port door.......... 116
Operating Head:up displayios «se + woesw 6 s s ween 2 2 we 25 Instrumenticlustericn os ses ae caren a aetna 12 Multifunction steering wheel............ 12 Multi Media Interface............... 16,19 TeX PUben 2 « corm 2 0 commen & 9 semen # a emREN © 2 23: Touch display.cc.c e.ee.ee.e ... 16 Voice recognition system............... 26
Optional equipment number............. 298
Options Média: = 2 saw 2 o evens 9 o ene oo owas 2 o wee 227 RaGiDisacens « x wisnnns ou sansa 4 © examens © 0 agnsoue ¥ 0 6 219
Outside moises. « sass. sc cri 0 a seanine 6 v amma 6 ¥ 99 Overview: (COCKPID) is & vs so ce o mawens «oar 6
P
Painticodetin: 2 cwameme » sms a 2 omen a vanes 8 8 298 Paint damagelsy. « swum 2 2 se 2s eee 9 2 eee 272 PANIC BUttON s «oem ¢ x meee sy oes 2 2 were 37, 38 PANICTURECION:: ¢ « macox 3 5 maven & ¥ sauen 4 aa 37 Panoramic glass roof..............000005 46
Convenience opening and closing......... 45 Emergency closing as « sce es were as owas 46 Quick opening.........ce.e .ee.e.e.ee 46 Parking ....... 2. cece cece eee eee ee 94

4KE012721BH

309
OwnersManuals2.com

Index

Parking aiden: + + esecans + 2 corns «2 eens ow meee < 173 Adjusting the volume...........-.0005 174

Automatic activation................5. 173 Cleaning the sensors and camera........ 271
Parking aid plus...............0000005 173 Peripheral cameras...........---000-5 175

Rear cross-traffic assist................ 180 Rearview camera.............-.0-0005 175

Trailer vieWiss 5 vse i poms 2 3 Sees = Kea

ITT

Parking and maneuvering.............-- 173

Parking brake refer to Electromechanical parking brake. 101

Parking heater refer to Auxiliary climate control......... 90

Parking lights: : : ese 2 sesame oy sews = eee 50

Particulate matter sensor................ 89

PédalSiccs + weee 3 5 ROE So ASR Eo BER GF EH 96

Pedestrian detection................00. 144

Perchlorate...

0... cece eee

eee 294

Peripheral cameras...............0000. 175

Phone
Connecting a second mobile device...... 183 Disconnecting a mobile device.......... 184

Phonebook fefer'to.DineCtOrys. +s esse 6s wave « seme oy 187

PIN 4-digit myAudi PIN................000- 30

Protection...0..00...ce.ce.e.ee.e.ee 31

Playback

Media's « sews ¢ e ee 2 y eee 2 eee 2 See 224 RadiOseccc oe cease ao ewes oH onesies vw ere Ho 215

Podcast refer to Online radio............ 00000 218

Pollen filter refer to Active combination filter...... 86, 89

Power-closing (doors):. 2. ses. cases earns 33

PowerMeter'. seis x «cme se earns se omnes 12,14

PoWer'SOUFCeS:: « & seve se nae ve ween

80, 223

Power WiINdOWS « were ss cows ee eeu oy eee ae 44

Malfunction ......0.00.0 .e .ne.a 44,45

Power windows malfunction.............. 44

Predictive control. . cc0 siewu«ve< cow«oes 156

Predictive messages': « « asus 4s gowa se neue a 150

Predictive route guidance............... 207

pre sense

refer to Audi presense.............005 164

Presentation mode..............--.00-+ 213

Presets

1S | or

217

Presets list

referto Presets ac: =v sess sy ees ss ewes 217

Pressure

Tire pressure monitoring system.... 265, 266

TiS eee eee eee 257

Profile picture...

eee eee 30

Pyrotechnic elements.................. 294

Q
QUACEIO: = sce ¢ 2 pees & x wee sp pee sp eee 109 Selective wheel torque control.......... 110
Quldlecharging's « coax 2 2 wen oe ewe 4s eee 113

RadiOs: « = nies oo acme se meme se sete wee

Radio text.....

0.0... 0.0.e0ee.e e2ee

Station list. .

Radio communications equipment........ 296

Radio equipment..............02-.00ee 296

Radio Standards Specification (RSS)....... 300

Rain/light sensor

Headlights ... 0....ce. ce e. ee e. ee eee 50

Intermittent mode (windshield wipers).... 56

Random

referto Shuffle: = « seas « s ceex s ewww 3 y 225

RaNGEs « = saves ¢ = seuss 7S sue & F Ow FE GER = 14

RENGEINOGE azas = same xt naueE ¢ 3 NOR s 1 eR 99

Range monitor...0.0 .e e.ee.e.ee.e.ee 98

Range potential................-.00000. 98

Range (electric).....0...e.ee..ee.e.ee 210

Reading lights..............2.0..00e0ee 53

Rear cross-traffic assist. ................ 180

Rear lid

refer to Luggage compartment lid........ 41

Rearview camera...............200000. 175

Rear window defogger.................-. 88

310

OwnersManuals2.com

Rear wiper blades Changing2. ... . .. . cec.e e.e e.ee.ee. e eee 59
CLEANING « ¢ eer: ¢ « ews ¢ e eee Fe Se ee Oe 59

REAR (climate control system)............ 87

Recall... 6... cece cece cece eee eens 300

Recirculation mode................00005 88

Recuperation...............00.0000. 15,98

Remote access authorization (key user)..... 31

Remote control Garage door opener..........-..000e00- 46

Remotercontrol-key cescoon « meres w + aseanos 6 + eave 37 Convenience opening and closing......... 45 Key replacement..............-0020005 37 LED cesium cceswna x comsaee ee mento AE Ra a Ret 39 PANIC function. ........... 0000s 37 Replacing the battery.................. 39 Unlocking and locking............-...0- 38 also refer to Vehicle key.............005 37
Removing the caps (wheel bolts) ......... 279

REPAINS sxssnise & swviceite te ecvtene wo whee wo etimeae & s 294

Replacement key..............0020000 37

Replacement parts................-.00. 296

Replacing fuses... s.si:sieee eevee ees 286

Reporting Safety Defects................ 296

Road Garriet swe sx seme 2 5 meee 2 9 eee + eee 107

Rolling ability Electromechanical parking brake........ 102
HOld assiStescecs a 0 uscrnon x wiesmee x euanene ao evamee 103 "N" selector lever position.............. 96

Roof refer to Panoramic glass roof............ 46

ROOF Lad): saa x & sees x ¢ aimee & a eee go ee 299

Roof rack...

eee eee 85

also refer to Roof rack..............-4-. 85

Route guidance

SCOPPING:scoses

« sxsaene z's seven wy ets ww Beene 205

also refer to Navigation............... 201

Route planner (e-tron)...........-..-00- 205

Running direction (tires)................ 281

Index

Safety belts. ...... 0.02. eee eee eee 66

Cleaning': « « ews 2 » euws ze weew co eee ee 273

Securing child safety seats.............. TT

Satellite Map......

2... eee eee eae 209

Screen

refer to Touch display................0. 16

Screwdriver... 2.0... c cece cece ee eee ee 276

Search function

refer to Free text search........... 216,227

refer to Intelligent search.............. 202

Seat WOANG ccws a o news xe qa « x Gawe « « eae 88

Seats

Adjusting the front seats............... 62

Cleaning0.....ce.ce.e.ee.ee.e.eee 273

FOLAING ss « ¢ swons « 2 ces ¢ ee oP eR Fee 84

Front passenger's seat adjustment....... 64

Head restraints................0..000. 65

Massage function..............--.00-5 62

Memory TUNCEION ; » weary s eau s s ween ss wens 69

Resetting the position.................. 63

Storing a seat profile...............000. 69

Seat ventilation....................000. 88

Selecting a source

MeGidts « 3 agen ¢ ¢ eeren § x Sem a oe £2 ORR 224

Selector lever': « 2 cae 2 2 nemye + ¢ sures 2 2 aes 8 95

Self-learning navigation

refer to Predictive route guidance....... 207

Sensors Coverage areaS. 1... ee eee eee 136 Locations ....0... . c. ee . ee . eee.eee 138
Service interval display................. 246
Service MeaSUres ... 2... cee eee ee eee 300
Setting measurement units.............. 233
SettINGS:. 6 owas vo euavene @ @ sone & @ suennme © @ ae 233 Announcements and tones............. 233 BlUStOOth!s « ¢ aiws < avsms s nese gs HeURG = 8a 234 Dateramd timers « « scvie ox csnsoe oo coumaee a os 233. Directory... 0... eee eee eee eee 190 E=iail sew: 2 = seme 2 2 vem © 2 ame og ome & 191 LANQUAQE scsieie 3 v sconce ¥ ¥ mma 9 ¥ we + ore 233 Measurement units..............0000- 233 Media': » s wee 5 2 wen 5 x wee 2s eeE Ee mE 227 Navigationivs + & esses 6 6 ames oo maces os mveecs 212

4KE012721BH

311
OwnersManuals2.com

RAO basco: oo cavxeas wa some vo antes Woo menue YO 219

SOUNd.....

eee eee eee eee 233

SYStCTiis wea x x eae ee WEEE FE Some 4 A RT 233 Telephone « seis os cmnay v sane xo eran oe oe 190

Text MessageS...cee.c.ec.e .ee.ee.e 191

Time Z0n@ << : sacn¢ : some ¢ ¢ om ee ome 233

WIELD OtSPOE seve. «= cease oH coma oo oeaoate a 196

Setting the charging target.............. 119

Setting thie lanquage@. ss ews sx gwen se cas 233

Setting the titi@s: < > semx : s meee s mem 5 xe 233

Shift paddles

Adjusting recuperation................. 98

Ship Carrier « sss ss gems so seg + PaeG Ge eR 107

SHOP): ¢ sees se eies fo eee eo eee Hees ee 195

Shortcut

referto Shortcuts; « cs scenx weeras6 « 0 22

SHOPECUES': a s maven x 2 wemm 4 2 come 4 8 ree 5 Eee 22

Shiifflcss < vases ¢ ¢ wause & Bete & & Hatt § Boe 225

Side assist... 6.0... eee ee eee 168

Cleaning the sensors...........-..+--- 271

Sliding/tilting sunroof

refer to Panoramic glass roof............ 46

Smart Favorites refer to PresetS.....c.e.ce..ee.e 0eee 217

Smartphone

refer to Telephone..............000005 182

Socket

refer to Power sourceS..........-.000005 80

Software information Légal information « i cee: «i vews sa wewa ss 236

Software version (MMI)

Version information..........0000e008 236

Sound

refer to Adjusting the sound............ 233

Speed limit information

refer to Traffic sign recognition......... 140

Speed limits

refer to Traffic sign recognition......... 140

Speedometer..0.0..c.ec.e .ee.e .ee.e 12

Speed warning systeM......0.c e.e.e.ee 140

Starting climate control after unlocking..... 91

Starting todtivess .o coes 2 2 onan oe ewes oe wen 94

StCONING scene so sects vo sweses vo seo v chew a

108

Audi drive select.............0.000008 106

also refer to Steering...........00.00. 108

Steering lock: = s eaes ss sees eens s 3 93, 108

Steering wheel

AGjUSTING sows : eee s seee ee eeen a 2 ween 64 Steering wheel heating................. 90

also refer to Multifunction steering wheel. 12

Steps for determining correct load limit... 261

StOPPiNAG piss co & cress a + snes we eesewee aw arenas @ # or0 94

Stored stations refer to Presets...... 2.0.00 e eee eee 217

Streaming

refer to Online media................. 222

Sunshade

RarUG60Sisx « x caw 5 & cece & 2 eS YS RS 56

ROOF s = 3 wien 2s wsene so me 2 aM ns Am no 46

also refer to Panoramic glass roof........ 46

SUMAVISONS.. asco + waxes w + mewene «6 eomcins w + emcee 56

Audi drive select............-...00005 106

Swapping callS.. 0. . eee.ee.e . eee.e.ae 189

SWERVGRASSISE: cance » v sussens 6 o cxsens 4 of axenans & 166

Symbols

Charging equipment...............00. 122

MeGidiax = 2 zemy : = ems : eee 6 F Ke et

225

Navigationswccs + « memes 2 2 meni so oan + een 206

Radio..................0000000 215,216

also refer to Indicator lights.............. 7

SYNC (climate control system) ............ 87

System settings ..........00e-e.e .ee.e 233

Tail lights GlEAniGies ¢ 3 eae ¢ 2 meee « eR a ER ES 271

Technical data................. 000000. 298

Technical modifications................. 294

Technical product information........... 300

Telephone.......

2... cee eee eee eee ee 182

Accepting/ending acall............... 188

Audi phone box. : secs4 ceva se ceee es 184 Charging the battery (USB)............. 185

Charging the battery (wireless)......... 185

Connecting a mobile phone............ 182

312

OwnersManuals2.com

4KE012721BH

Exterior antenna

Mobile device reminder signal.......... 186 Options during a phone call............ 189

Playing music. ..... 0 c.ec. e e. ee.eee 221

Temperature display Outside temperature................-.. 14

Textinput....0........... 23

Text MeSSAGeS.. 1... eee

191

also refer to Text messages............ 191

Tie-downs ....... 0... cee eee 84

Tightening specification Wheel bolts:s 5 = saws ¢ 2 caus so eee s ¢ ces 281

Tightening specification (wheel bolts)..... 281

TIM. eee

eee 14

Timer (high-voltage battery) ............. 119

Tire Mobility System (tire repair set) ...... 276

Low-profile tires..............---000- 263

Replacing ....0... . e. ee e. e ee. e e. ee eee 278 Service life. « s soem x x seme ye sews ae Ree & 256

Tire pressure monitoring system.... 265, 266

Tire pressure table...............000- 259 Tire pressure (trailer mode)............ 131

Treadwear indicators...............04. 256

Unidiréctional << 2 eecn 2s eas ce eens 249, 281
Uniform tire quality grading............ 264

Tires and wheels

Glossary of tire and loading terminology... 250 Tires and vehicle load limits............ 259

Toll Module refer to Integrated Toll Module......... 146

TOOlSias x s name ¢ 2 pais ye owe RE HateS Gx ReeeR 276

Tooltips... 6... eeeeee 18

Top tether anchor (securing the child safety

S@at) « = cesy 9 ¢ eueme & ¢ Ga Gb caw Fe REE a ee 78

Touch display Adjusting feedback.................0.. 18 OPERALING » sneceae « v esesene a 0 semen © exettemeie © stats 16

Touch displays refer to Multi Media Interface............ 18

TOWING... eeeeee eee 283

Towing loop......ce.e .ee.e .ee.e ee 284, 285

Towing protection monitoring............. 37

Index

TPMS Indicator light..............0000. s+. 269

Tire pressure monitoring system.... 265, 266

Traffic information..............0-.

Online traffic information..........

Traffic jam assist............-..00--

Traffic light information.............

Traffic sign recognition.............

Traffic Signs...

6... eee eee

Trailer load...

.. ceceee e eee

Trailer mode

Trailer hitch...............0.000.

Trailer towing.....0..0.e.ee..eee

TONGUE WeIGHE: = s som s 2 seme xp sees

Trailer lOadhs «6 seas a a suaaens x o axruie & 0 a

Trailer towing mode

Airsuspension.................05

Transporting charging equipment.....

TUPITASSISE & iow = amen wo mem ao aI A

Turnssignals « sesu 2s e005 e een yews

U
Uniform tire quality grading.........
Unlocking and locking.............. By remote control. ............66% Using the lock cylinder............. With Audi connect vehicle control... With the central locking switch..... With the convenience key..........
Update (software) ...........-.0000-
USB.adapterian: ss swan ox sauus vx mana 2
USB drive

USB stick refer to Audi music interface.......
Users Localusers............02.0000005 myAudi USPS 2... ee eeee e eee

V
Vanity itl

wes ss ees

s gagen ss pees gs

313
OwnersManuals2.com

Index

Vehicle Care/cleaning....e.ee.c.ec.e.e.e.e 270

DIM@MSIONS saws ¢ « aeay ae ewe a x eee e Ha 298 Identification data « sas «0 cece a x wena a a 2 298

Out of service... 1.6ee. e ee. e ee. e eee 275 ParkifGiss = = secs 2 ¢ sees x e eee Ge res ge 94

RaiSiNG « « seis +o wee 6 v oma oo etiam @ oo 280

Se@CUriNg. 1... eee eee 94

SUSTUNG iss 5 y naswy & 4 Gee FE eS EE ee

TRANSPOTE & sviso + wows ws acre oo aE « & BRED 107

Unlocking and locking..............0.8% 38

VEHIGLEICAE seornse a 3 sues a 6 amore «a omer @ ate 270

Vehicle control services.............000. 196

Vehicletdata labeliss oo wcusw oo sseme ae camos 6 a 298

Vehicle identification number............ 298

Vehicle jack; < ¢ cee ss ewes te pees se een ee 276 LiftING, POTHESI: 5 + sews 6 + coors @ a ami 6 wraHeR 280

Tire change mode............-..0e0ee 278

Vehicle key... .... cece eee cece eee 33,37

Vehiclesoumdiscsis si sxwrive x @ swore o aneware 6 a anaes 99

Vehiclettoolkit. 2s sues 2 x eames 2 2 ween 2 3 ew 276

Ventilationtes s + eis » 2 same a o awe ¢ o eee es 86

VIEW DUTEOM « xsecex 2 wesen 2 see e ¥ deme = eae 12

Voicetiiaile » = mam: 2 ¢ zwee x 2 meme oe cee ao 188

Voice recognition system.............2... 26

EXt@Ialnsow

s waa 2 ¢ geese a ¢ wens s ¢ weaee 5 27

WwW

Wallimounteelip scavecs x « cescose » exaasene » eens

129

Warning lights

refer to Indicator lights................-. 7

Washing matte finish paint.............. 270

Wave band

refer to Frequency band............... 214

Weights..0.... . e.cee..ee.e.e.ee 299

anti-theft... 0... 0... eee eee eee eee 279,

Tightening specification............... 281

Gleaning's + « ssw a» soma os ease ao ees wae 272

Glossary of tire and loading terminology.. 250

Loose wheel warning.............-.44. 262

Replacing o sssuss « & savsass a 2 sven & mamas ois 278

Tire pressure monitoring system.... 265, 266

Tires and vehicle load limits............ 259

Wheelwremeltics © «swiss 2 wceranese © sesvene @ = anes 276
Wi-Fi Hotspot settings..................00. 196 USING:a HOESPOU!s saccs s & eames + ¥ Mews GE Sere 194
Wild animal recognition..............4. 144
Window and mirror heating............... 91
Windows Child safety lOCk : s.24 2 scene te vena se neon 44 Cleaning and removing ice............. 272 Convenience opening and closing......... 45 Defrosting....0..c.e.ce.e.e.e .eee.ee 88 Opening and closing.................4. 44 Power wind OwsSscrns « « sass 6 steneu 6 0 ae « « 44
Windshield Cleaning ......0.. .. .e c. ece.e.ee.eee 56 also refer to Windshield................ 56
Windshield washer system..........- 56, 245 Reservoiricapacityiin «6 css «6 sas 4 6 sewn 299
Windshield wipers.............--.000005 56
Winter operation Auxiliary climate control................ 90 Car washes ............0.e.ee0e0e0e 270 COOLING SYSECIN s ¢ « eas se ewe ss eawa a we 240 Defrosting the windows................ 88 Rear window defogger................. 88 Removing ice from windows............ 272 Seat heating « + scm <2 sown se ea oe een e 88 SMOWAGMAIMS sonsess ie « sxexiee aw suexnne a 0 oxanane a 9 263 Steering wheel heating................. 90 Tih@Stas ¢ s eases 2 & ies 2 & ees o ¥ ees & 2 cove 263 Vehicle battery (12 volt)............... 243 Windshield washer system............. 245
Winter tires... 0... eee eeeeee 263
Wireless Android Auto refer to Audi smartphone interface...... 230
Wireless Apple CarPlay refer to Audi smartphone interface...... 230
Work refer to Business address.............. 208

314

OwnersManuals2.com

@ Forthe sake of the environment oPurtintcehdloroinne,ecor-efcryicelnadbllye)p.aper (bleached with-

OwnersManuals2.com

Owner's Manual English North America 4KE012721BH

06.2021

4KE012721BH

www.audi.com

OwnersManuals2.com